Wir1997 en
Wir1997 en
Wir1997 en
United Nations
New York and Geneva, 1997
Note
UNCTAD serves as the focal point within the United Nations Secretariat for all matters related to
foreign direct investment and transnational corporations. In the past, the Programme on Transnational
Corporations was carried out by the United Nations Centre on Transnational Corporations (1975-1992)
and the Transnational Corporations and Management Division of the United Nations Department of
Economic and Social Development (1992-1993). In 1993, the Programme was transferred to the United
Nations Conference on Trade and Development. UNCTAD seeks to further the understanding of the
nature of transnational corporations and their contribution to development and to create an enabling
environment for international investment and enterprise development. UNCTAD's work is carried out
through intergovernmental deliberations, technical assistance activities, seminars, workshops and
conferences.
The term “country” as used in this study also refers, as appropriate, to territories or areas; the
designations employed and the presentation of the material do not imply the expression of any opinion
whatsoever on the part of the Secretariat of the United Nations concerning the legal status of any country,
territory, city or area or of its authorities, or concerning the delimitation of its frontiers or boundaries. In
addition, the designations of country groups are intended solely for statistical or analytical convenience
and do not necessarily express a judgement about the stage of development reached by a particular
country or area in the development process.
Two dots (..) indicate that data are not available or are not separately reported. Rows in tables have
been omitted in those cases where no data are available for any of the elements in the row;
A dash (-) indicates that the item is equal to zero or its value is negligible;
A slash (/) between dates representing years, e.g., 1994/95, indicates a financial year;
Use of a hyphen (-) between dates representing years, e.g., 1994-1995, signifies the full period
involved, including the beginning and end years.
Reference to “dollars” ($) means United States dollars, unless otherwise indicated.
Annual rates of growth or change, unless otherwise stated, refer to annual compound rates.
Details and percentages in tables do not necessarily add to totals because of rounding.
The material contained in this study may be freely quoted with appropriate acknowledgement.
The World Investment Report, the seventh in this annual series, provides a comprehensive
analysis and policy discussion of international investment issues. This year, the Report
examines the interrelationship between transnational corporations, market structure and
competition policy. This issue is particularly relevant because the liberalization of foreign-
direct-investment regimes allows a greater presence of transnational corporations in host
countries, with important implications for market structures and competition.
• Global and regional trends as regards foreign direct investment, including its interlinkages
with foreign portfolio equity investment.
• The impact of foreign direct investment on market structure and competition in host
economies, as well as globally.
• The implications of the interaction between foreign direct investment, market structure
and competition for investment and competition policies at the national, regional and
global levels.
In discussing these issues, WIR 97 seeks to contribute to a better understanding of the role
of foreign direct investment in the world economy and, in particular, its implications for
developing countries.
Kofi A. Annan
New York, July 1997 Secretary-General of the United Nations
Acknowledgements
The World Investment Report 1997 was prepared by a team led by Karl P. Sauvant and comprising
Victoria Aranda, Philippe Brusick, Sew Sam Chan Tung, Persephone Economou, Wilfried Engelke,
Masataka Fujita, Massimiliano Gangi, Michael Gestrin, Kálmán Kalotay, Michael Lim, Padma Mallampally,
Ludger Odenthal, Assad Omer, Jennifer Powell, Luisa Sabater, Anh Nga Tran-Nguyen, Jörg Weber and
James Xiaoning Zhan. Specific inputs were received from Menelea Masin and Joseph Mathews. The
work was carried out under the overall direction of Lynn K. Mytelka.
Principal research assistance was provided by Mohamed Chiraz Baly, Makameh Bahrami,
Antonella Convertino, Siri Dalawelle, Lizanne Martinez and Mohamed Berrada. A number of interns
assisted at various stages during the preparation of WIR 97: Btisame Boudhan, Christian Caruso, Rikke
Mortensen and Stefanie Ten Napel. Production of the Report was carried out by Jenifer Tacardon,
Amanda Waxman, Florence Hudry, Christiane Defrancisco and Corazón Alvarez. Graphics were done
by Diego Oyarzun-Reyes. It was desktop-published by Teresita Sabico. The Report was edited by Guy
de Jonquières and copy-edited by Frederick Glover.
Experts from within and outside the United Nations system provided inputs for WIR 97. Major
inputs were received from Joel Davidow and Colm MacKernan, Stephen W. Davies and Bruce Lyons,
Edward M. Graham, Donald L. Lecraw, Bijit Bora, Miguel Rodriguez Mendoza, Dieter Ernst, Fabrice
Hatem and Peter Nunnenkamp. Inputs were also received from Anna Joubin-Bret, Alvaro Calderón,
Basanta Chaudhuri, Terry M. Chuppe, Carlo Gamberale, Tim Kelly, Roger Lawrence, Marcus Noland,
Mary Stanier, Lee Tuthill and Terry Winslow.
A number of experts were consulted on various chapters. Comments were received during various
stages of preparation (including during expert group meetings) from Jamuna P. Agarwal, Thomas
Andersson, Pierre Arhel, Milos Barutciski, Michael Blank, Thomas Brewer, John Cantwell, Jenny Cargill,
S. Y. Cochrane, Brian Craig, Claudia Curiel , Rajan Dhanjee, Michel Delapierre, Arghyrios A. Fatouros,
Geza Feketekuty, Maxwell Fry, Cathy Goddard, Calvin S. Goldman, Karin Gollan, H. Peter Gray, Chris
Hall, Khalil Hamdani, Gary Hewitt, Silke Hossenfelder, Michael J. Howell, Himmat Kalsi, Jorge Katz,
Faizullah Khilji, Fred Kilby, Friedrich von Kirchbach, Mark Koulen, Nagesh Kumar, B. P. Kunene,
Sanjaya Lall, Richard Lipsey, P.J. Lloyd, Gavin Maasdorp, Jorge Maia, Raymond Mataloni, Rose Mystila,
Adrian Otten, Alan Oxley, Terutomo Ozawa, D.J. Pathirana, E.U. Petersmann, Hassan Qaqaya, Claude
Rakovsky, Eric D. Ramstetter, Pedro Roffe, Pierre Sauvé, Marjan Svetlicic, Shigeki Tejima, Stephen
Thomsen, Hans Ullrich, Meg Vorhees, Sarah W. Wainaina, Mark Warner, Larry Westphal, Obie
Whichard, Crystal Witterick, Americo Beviglia Zampetti and Zbigniew Zimny.
This year, World Investment Report benefited from comments and discussions on its theme
received through an INTERNET conference on the AIBnet organized by Tagi Sagafi-nejad. Pontus
Braunerhjelm, Gunnar Fors, Virginia Brown Keyder, Sylvia Ostry, Howard V. Perlmutter, Lee Preston,
Val Samonis and Raymond Vernon shared their views through this process.
The Australian APEC Study Centre, the Asian Business Centre at Melbourne University and the
Victoria University of Technology organized a roundtable on foreign direct investment and competition
policy in connection with WIR 97.
Especially through the provision of data and other information, numerous officials in Central
Banks, statistical offices, competition authorities, investment promotion agencies and other government
offices, as well as executives of a number of companies, also contributed to WIR 97.
The Report benefited from overall advice from John H. Dunning, Senior Economic Adviser.
The financial support of the Governments of the Netherlands and Norway, and of Hong Kong,
are gratefully acknowledged.
Contents
Contents
Page
Preface ........................................................................................................................................ ii
PART ONE
TRENDS
Notes ........................................................................................................................................... 3 9
v
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Page
Notes ........................................................................................................................................ 1 0 2
B. Trends .............................................................................................................................. 11 2
1. General trends ...................................................................................................... 11 2
2. Trends in outflows to emerging markets from the
principal source countries .................................................................................. 11 4
Notes ......................................................................................................................................... 11 9
vi
Contents
Page
PART TWO
FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT, MARKET
STRUCTURE AND COMPETITION POLICY
Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 1 2 3
IV
IV.. FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT
INVESTMENT,, MARKET
STRUCTURE AND COMPETITION ......................................................................... 133
Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 1 3 3
vii
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Page
Notes ........................................................................................................................................ 1 7 9
Notes ........................................................................................................................................ 2 3 3
viii
Contents
Page
Boxes
ix
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Page
Figures
I.1. Top ten largest host and home countries for FDI, among developed countries,
developing countries and Central and Eastern Europe, 1996 ............................................. 5
I.2. Components of FDI inflows, 1980-1995 ............................................................................... 8
I.3. Relationship between cross-border mergers and acquisitions and FDI, 1985-1996 ........ 9
I.4. Greenfield investment and mergers and acquisitions in the United States inward
FDI, 1985-1995 ....................................................................................................................... 1 0
I.5. FDI inflows and outflows, 1970-1996 ................................................................................. 1 0
I.6. Growth of domestic and foreign direct investment, 1980-1996 ....................................... 11
I.7. Share of developing countries in FDI inflows, exports and imports, 1970-1996 ........... 11
I.8. Number of cross-border inter-firm agreements and number of
all inter-firm agreements, 1990-1995 ................................................................................... 1 2
I.9. Cross-border inter-firm agreements (excluding strategic R&D partnerships),
1990-1995 ............................................................................................................................... 1 3
x
Contents
Page
xi
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Page
Tables
xii
Contents
Page
xiii
Overview
OVERVIEW
VERVIEW
Foreign direct investment (FDI) continues to be a driving force of the globalization process
that characterizes the modern world economy. The current boom in FDI flows, which has been
accompanied by increasing flows of foreign portfolio equity investments, underscores the increasingly
important role played by transnational corporations (TNCs) in both developed and developing
countries. This role has been facilitated by the liberalization of FDI policies that has taken place in
many countries in recent years, as part of an overall movement towards more open and market-
friendly policies. However, reaping the benefits of FDI liberalization requires not only that barriers
to FDI are reduced and standards of treatment established -- the focus of most FDI liberalization to
date -- but also that competition in markets is maintained. This third component of FDI liberalization
-- maintaining the proper functioning of markets in which TNCs invest -- is the special topic of this
year’s World Investment Report, which examines the interaction between FDI, market structure and
competition, and looks at policy implications.
The gross product of foreign affiliates, a measure of their output, almost tripled between
1982 and 1994, and its share of world output rose slightly, from 5 per cent in 1982 to 6 per cent in 1994.
In developing countries, the output of foreign affiliates has contributed (in 1994) more to gross domestic
product than it has in developed countries: 9 per cent compared to 5 per cent.
The global FDI stock, a measure of the investment underlying international production,
increased fourfold between 1982 and 1994; over the same period, it doubled as a percentage of world
gross domestic product to 9 per cent. In 1996, the global FDI stock was valued at $3.2 trillion. Its rate
xv
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
of growth over the past decade (1986-1995) was more than twice that of gross fixed capital formation,
indicating an increasing internationalization of national production systems. The worldwide assets
of foreign affiliates, valued at $8.4 trillion in 1994, also increased more rapidly than world gross fixed
capital formation.
The upward trend manifested in all of the indicators of international production, in absolute
terms as well as in relation to various macroeconomic indicators, suggests that international production
is becoming a more significant element in the world economy. Its importance is apparent in the
activities in which TNCs are involved. On the technology side, for example, an estimated 70 per cent
of the global payments of royalties and fees constitute transactions between parent firms and their
foreign affiliates.
... was manifested in 1996 in the $1.4 trillion worth of investment in foreign
affiliates.
Transnational corporations raise capital from a variety of sources at home and abroad:
commercial banks, local and international equity markets, public organizations and their own
corporate systems in the form of internally generated profits for reinvestment. Taking all these
sources of finance into account, investment in foreign affiliates -- the investment component of
international production -- was an estimated $1.4 trillion in 1996. Of this, only $350 billion, i.e., a
quarter, were financed by FDI flows. This means therefore that the weight of international production
is also considerably larger: expressed as a ratio of world gross fixed capital formation, about one-
fifth was undertaken by foreign affiliates. (This measure does not capture additional investment
controlled by TNCs via various non-equity measures, including corporate alliances.)
Foreign-direct-investment flows set a new record level of $350 billion, in the midst
of a new FDI boom, ...
Returning to FDI flows themselves, the boom that began in 1995 continues, with inflows
setting a new record of around $350 billion in 1996, a 10 per cent increase. Fifty four countries on the
inflow side and twenty countries on the outflow side set new records in 1996. Unlike the two previous
investment booms in 1979-1981 and 1987-1990 (the first one being led by petroleum investments in
oil producing countries, and the second one being concentrated in the developed world), the current
boom is characterized by considerable developing-country participation on the inflow side, although
it is driven primarily by investments originating in just two countries -- the United States and the
United Kingdom. There are signs that an even greater number of countries will take part in the
present boom as it unfolds on the inward side (e.g., developing countries in Latin America), as well
as on the outward side (e.g., France, Germany and Asian developing countries).
During 1995-1996, the share of developing countries in global inflows was 34 per cent.
Although this is not much higher than the developing-country share during the investment boom at
the beginning of the 1980s, qualitatively it reflects a wide variety of location-specific advantages
enjoyed by developing countries over and above natural resources. The composition of the top
developing-country recipients has also changed dramatically between these two investment booms,
with oil producing countries now featuring far less prominently among the top recipients.
Interestingly, the developing-country share of global inflows has been on the rise during the current
boom, while during the 1987-1990 boom it declined. That decline went hand in hand with a boom in
intra-developed country mergers and acquisitions (M&As), at that time in response to heightened
protectionist pressures in key developed countries. As in earlier FDI booms, the bulk of FDI flows
goes to a limited number of developing countries.
xvi
Overview
... with cross-border mergers and acquisitions and inter-firm agreements as the
driving force behind TNC activity ...
Even in the current boom, cross-border M&As, especially in the United States and Western
Europe, are playing an important role in boosting FDI, although this time there is no ensuing decline
in the developing-country share of inflows. The value of such M&As increased by 16 per cent in
1996, to $275 billion. If majority-held transactions only are taken into account, the value of cross-
border M&As in 1996 would be $163 billion, or 47 per cent of global FDI inflows (though the measured
values are not strictly comparable).
Complementing the increases in M&As and FDI flows, the number of cross-border inter-
firm agreements (equity and non-equity, other than strategic research-and-development (R&D)
partnerships) has also increased. In 1995, nearly 4,600 such agreements were concluded, compared
with about 1,760 in 1990. These agreements take place primarily between firms based in developed
countries: United States firms participated in 80 per cent of them, European Union firms in 40 per
cent and Japanese firms in 38 per cent. Recently, firms based in developing countries have also
begun to conclude such agreements actively. The number of cross-border inter-firm agreements
(other than strategic R&D partnerships) with developing-country firm participation has increased
in absolute numbers, as well as a share of the world total (from 27 per cent during 1990-1992 to 35 per
cent during 1993-1995). Although there was a decline in 1995, the number of strategic R&D
partnerships (in core technologies, such as information technologies and biotechnology), has also
been rising steadily since 1990. Again, developing-country firms assumed a bigger role in strategic
partnerships (3 per cent in 1989 to 13 per cent in 1995), suggesting that these firms may have attained
sufficient technological sophistication and capacity to make them worth having as partners.
... and with an increasing transnationalization of the largest TNCs based in both
developed and developing countries.
Despite the growing number of small and medium-sized enterprises with investments abroad,
a good part of FDI continues to be concentrated in the hands of a small number of companies. The
largest 100 TNCs, ranked on the basis of the size of foreign assets, own $1.7 trillion assets in their
foreign affiliates, controlling an estimated one-fifth of global foreign assets. In the United States, 25
TNCs are responsible for half of that country’s outward stock, a share that has remained almost
unchanged during the past four decades. For six out of nine developed countries for which such
data are available, 25 TNCs account for more than a half of their respective countries’ outward
stocks.
For the first time, two developing-country TNCs, Daewoo Corporation (Republic of Korea)
and Petroleos de Venezuela S.A. (Venezuela), have entered the list of the top 100 TNCs. Daewoo
Corporation also tops the list of the 50 largest TNCs based in developing countries for the second
year running, while Royal Dutch Shell (United Kingdom/Netherlands) continues to top the list of
the largest 100 TNCs for the fifth consecutive year. With foreign sales amounting to $2 trillion and
foreign employment close to 6 million persons in 1995, the largest 100 TNCs are prominent actors in
international production. The top 50 TNCs based in developing countries, however, are catching
up. While their foreign assets totalled only $79 billion in 1995, the increase in these assets between
1993 and 1995 was 280 per cent -- compared with 30 per cent for the top 100 firms.
Both the top 100 TNCs worldwide and the top 50 developing-country TNCs are becoming
more transnationalized, at a faster rate in the latter case. The food firms in the list of the top 50
developing-country TNCs exhibited the biggest increase in transnationality (measured on the basis
xvii
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
of a combined index of the ratios of foreign assets, foreign sales and foreign employment in their
respective totals) -- from 16 per cent in 1993 to 37 per cent in 1995. On the whole, smaller firms tend
to be more transnationalized than larger ones; for example, Solvay SA (Belgium) ranked seventy-
fourth on the basis of the size of foreign assets, but ranked fifth on the basis of the transnationality
index in the list of the top 100 TNCs. And Panamerican Beverages Inc. (Mexico) took the first place
in the list of the top 50 developing-country firms on the basis of the transnationality index, as opposed
to twenty-first on the basis of the value of foreign assets.
The Triad (European Union, United States and Japan) is home to 87 per cent of the top 100
TNCs and accounts for 88 per cent of their foreign assets. Likewise, China, the Republic of Korea,
the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region of the People’s Republic of China (hereinafter: Hong
Kong, China) and Mexico are home to 56 per cent of the top 50 firms based in developing economies,
and account for two-thirds of their foreign assets. Electronics is the most important industry as far as
the largest TNCs are concerned, accounting for some 16 per cent of all firms’ foreign assets in each of
the two lists of top TNCs. Automotive and chemical firms also feature prominently in both lists, but
more so in the list of the top 100 firms. Petroleum and mining firms, although few in number, tend
to rank high in both lists.
The growth of international production has been facilitated by ongoing liberalization ...
The expansion of international production would not have been possible if it were not for
the ongoing liberalization of FDI regimes. The trend towards greater liberalization was sustained
again in 1996, with 98 changes in the direction of investment liberalization and promotion of a total
number of 114 changes in investment regimes introduced during that year in 65 countries. Over the
period 1991-1996, indeed, some 95 per cent of a total of 599 changes in the regulatory FDI regimes of
countries were in the direction of liberalization. They mostly involved the opening of industries
previously closed to FDI, the streamlining or abolition of approval procedures and the provision of
incentives.
The desire of governments to facilitate FDI is also reflected in the dramatic increase in the
number of bilateral investment treaties (BITs) for the protection and promotion of investment
throughout the 1990s. As of 1 January 1997, there were 1,330 such treaties in the world, involving
162 countries, a threefold increase in half a decade. Around 180 such treaties were concluded in 1996
alone -- one every second day.
The pattern of these treaties has changed considerably in recent years. While virtually all
BITs used to have one developed country as a partner, and such countries took part in 83 per cent of
all such treaties as of the end of the 1980s, by 1996 only 62 per cent of the world total involved
developed countries. Indeed, countries in Central and Eastern Europe and developing countries
have begun to conclude BITs among themselves. At the beginning of 1997, 16 per cent of all BITs
were among developing countries, rising from 11 per cent at the end of the 1980s. In 1996 alone,
nearly a third of all BITs were concluded between developing countries, led by China, Chile, Algeria
and the Republic of Korea.
New ground is being broken at the regional and multilateral levels. Negotiations on an
investment framework are taking place in the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and
Development, with the conclusion of a free-standing Multilateral Agreement on Investment
rescheduled for May 1998. In the framework of the discussions on a possible Free Trade Area of the
Americas, a Working Group on Investment has been established, as well as a Working Group on
Competition Policy. In the meantime, the Ministerial Meeting of the World Trade Organization in
xviii
Overview
Singapore in December 1996 established two working groups to examine the relationship between
trade and investment and between trade and competition policy. Independently of these
developments, the ASEAN members are preparing to launch the ASEAN Investment Area.
Cooperation among ASEAN members in the area of investment has already progressed with the
signing of a protocol (in September 1996) updating the 1987 ASEAN Agreement for the Promotion
and Protection of Investment.
... and holds good prospects for being sustained into the next century.
The ongoing globalization of production begs the question of whether the upward trend in
FDI flows witnessed to date will continue into the next century. A survey of foreign investors suggests
that this may, indeed, be the case. More specifically, foreign sales are expected to increase as a
proportion of total sales, especially for Japanese and United States’ firms. Production by foreign
affiliates is also expected to increase as a proportion of total production by TNCs, while home-
country exports are expected to remain constant. Mergers and acquisitions, joint ventures and other
equity and non-equity types of inter-firm agreements are expected to go hand in hand with the
growth in FDI. Although smaller firms will be stepping up investments abroad, large firms will
continue to account for the lion’s share of outward investments. Corporate restructuring in developed
countries, aimed at improving efficiency and modernization, is expected to continue, giving rise to
efficiency-seeking investment. However, accessing markets will remain the principal motive for
investing abroad: survey respondents placed twice as much weight on production for local markets
than on labour-cost factors. Countries in developing Asia and, to a lesser extent, in Latin America
and Central and Eastern Europe, are likely to be the main beneficiaries of the corporate restructuring.
Investment at home generally will be given a lower priority than it has received until now. In
contrast, investment in the same region will continue to be significant, while investment in more
distant countries is likely to increase, thus broadening the geographical scope of international
production. Foreign investors foresee dramatic increases in investments in infrastructure, distribution,
non-financial services and automobiles, but slower growth in financial services and real estate. All
in all, the growth of FDI is expected to remain brisk over the next five years, both in terms of absolute
levels and as a proportion of corporate investment.
The United States is by far the largest FDI recipient and investor abroad,...
Developed countries’ investments abroad reached an all-time high of $295 billion in 1996.
The investment picture for developed countries is dominated by the United States, which, with $85
billion is by far the largest home country (by a margin of $31 billion over the United Kingdom, the
second largest home country), as well as, with $85 billion, the largest recipient country (by a margin
of $42 billion over China, the second largest recipient) in 1996. Around two-fifths of United States
outflows go to the European Union and around 30 per cent to developing countries. Growing
consumer markets have encouraged United States investments in the latter, while sluggish growth
in the former has led to a decrease in its share of United States outflows. Investment flows into the
United States -- mostly in the form of M&As -- were stimulated by its strong and sustained growth
performance and potential for high profits.
Western Europe received $105 billion in inflows and invested $176 billion abroad in 1996.
More European Union investment is now directed to non-European Union countries than in 1992,
when the internal market was completed. These countries are investing increasingly outside Western
Europe, mostly in North America, developing Asia and, to a lesser extent, Central and Eastern Europe.
Nearly a half of the European Union’s investment outflows take the form of M&As. The share of
xix
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
European Union inflows accounted for by M&As, however, is considerably smaller because of
regulatory and other barriers in existence in some countries (such as Italy and Germany) on this
mode of investment. Japanese investment in the European Union is declining -- to almost $2 billion
in 1994, compared with nearly $7 billion at its peak in 1990.
Overall, however, the recovery of Japan’s outward investment continues, with outflows
reaching $23 billion in 1996, slightly over half their peak level of $41 billion during 1989-1991. (It
should be noted that reinvested earnings, estimated at $14 billion in the manufacturing sector alone
in 1994, are not included in these figures.) Japanese outflows are geared overwhelmingly towards
developing Asia and the United States. But in Asia, China is no longer the favourite location and, in
fact, its share of Japanese outflows declined in 1996. Brazil is beginning to receive Japanese investment,
with Japanese outflows there (on the basis of notifications) tripling in 1996 over 1995. On the inward
side, Japan remains a small FDI recipient, with inflows declining to $220 million in 1996.
... but developed countries are becoming, on the whole, less important hosts.
Although developed countries received a record $208 billion in FDI flows in 1996, there has
been a steady decline in their share of global inflows since 1989. That decline can be attributed
partly to the increasing attractiveness of developing countries, especially those that are growing
rapidly and have large domestic markets. Furthermore, some developed countries that are large
outward investors are small investment recipients, especially in relation to the size of their economies;
notable examples are Germany, Italy and Japan. And as the rationalization of production through
FDI in response to regional integration arrangements among developed countries (notably, the
European Union) has reached a high level, firms are turning increasingly towards untapped markets
found mostly in the developing world.
Developing countries -- even some of the least developed ones -- enjoy rapidly
growing investments, ...
In light of the above, it is not surprising that developing countries received $129 billion of
FDI inflows in 1996 and invested $51 billion abroad -- both amounts are all-time highs. Their share
of world inflows rose to 37 per cent in 1996 (from 30 per cent in 1995), while their share of outflows
was 15 per cent in that year. With $42 billion, China was the largest developing-country recipient;
the country’s success can be attributed mostly to its large and growing domestic market, “soft landing”
and macroeconomic reforms, as well as to measures to promote investment in provinces other than
those in the coastal areas.
Every developing region saw an increase in inflows. Even the 48 least developed countries
experienced an increase in inflows of 56 per cent in 1996, to $1.6 billion. Cambodia was the largest
recipient in this group of countries. In addition, and despite the small size of inflows (both in absolute
values and as a share of all developing-country inflows), FDI is very important for many of these
economies; inflows in as many as eight countries reached 10 per cent as a share of gross fixed capital
formation in 1995.
Within the group of the least developed countries, there are significant disparities in
performance as regards FDI. The Asian least developed countries are benefiting from the Asian
industrializing economies’ process of industrial restructuring in the framework of the “flying-geese”
model, not only because they offer complementary locational advantages in the form of low-cost
labour, but also because of their geographical proximity to them. More than four-fifths and nearly
xx
Overview
two-fifths, respectively, of cumulative investments received by Bangladesh and Myanmar over the
period 1990-1994, for example, came from developing Asia. Since a similar “in-tandem” restructuring
process is not taking place in Africa, the least developed countries in that continent do not have the
same opportunity to benefit from the type of intra-regional FDI inflows that is the outcome of this
process in Asia.
... with new record levels in South, East and South-East Asia, ...
With $81 billion in inflows in 1996, South, East and South-East Asia received about two-
thirds of the developing-country total in that year. The 25 per cent increase in these inflows over
1995 was also in sharp contrast with the large decline in the rate of growth of exports and, to a lesser
extent, of the gross domestic product, in that year. China accounted for over two-fifths of the $16
billion increase in investment inflows in the region.
Next to China, Singapore was the second largest investment recipient, with inflows worth $9
billion, exceeding the combined inflows of the other newly industrializing economies (Hong Kong,
China, Republic of Korea and Taiwan Province of China). Flows into Hong Kong, China, were $2.5
billion in 1996. Foreign-investor confidence in Hong Kong, China, after its reversion to China on 1
July 1997 is strong, as indicated by a number of surveys of foreign (and local) companies. Indonesia,
Malaysia, Philippines and Thailand together received some $17 billion in 1996, an increase of 43 per
cent over 1995. Together, ASEAN members have, however, seen their share of the region’s investment
inflows decline, from 61 per cent during 1990-1991 to below 30 per cent during 1994-1996, attributed
to domestic capacity constraints, infrastructure bottlenecks and, in particular, stiff competition from
other economies. A 34 per cent increase in investment flows to India (to $2.5 billion) pushed total
inflows to South Asia to $3.5 billion. Investment from other Asian economies in India, especially
from the Republic of Korea, are outstripping those of some developed countries, such as the United
States and the United Kingdom.
South, East and South-East Asia are emerging as important outward sources of FDI. Indeed,
the region is the largest source of FDI in the developing world, with outflows increasing by 10 per
cent in 1996, to $46 billion. Hong Kong, China is the single largest outward investor ($27 billion in
1996). Recently, the geographical scope of developing Asia’s outward FDI has expanded to include
non-traditional destinations, such as the European Union, Central and Eastern Europe and Africa.
The extent to which Asian developing economies are transnationalized is reflected in the increasing
ratios of investment outflows to gross fixed capital formation for the region as a whole, as well as for
individual economies. That ratio, for example, is higher for Singapore (14 per cent) and Malaysia (11
per cent) than for Western Europe (10 per cent) and the United States (9 per cent).
xxi
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
has been that of Brazil. With nearly $10 billion, Brazil has surpassed Mexico (with around $8 billion)
as the star performer in Latin America in 1996. (In the first four months of 1997, inflows were over $4
billion -- two and a half times higher than inflows in the same period in 1996.) This represents a
dramatic reversal: in 1992, with $2 billion, Brazil ranked third in the region (after both Mexico and
Argentina). The upswing in Brazil’s inflows is the outcome of large investments in automobiles (in
the context of intra-regional production rationalization triggered by MERCOSUR) and the reactivation
of its privatization programme. Foreign-investor confidence in Brazil (and in the region as a whole)
is high: in a recent survey, company executives expressed more confidence in Latin America’s prospects
now than five years ago, placing Brazil, Mexico and Chile in top places.
The United States remains the foremost foreign investor in the region, with firms investing
now more heavily in Brazil than in any other country there. Canada’s investment in Latin America
and the Caribbean is also sizeable, but concentrated mostly in mining and exploration. Western
Europe’s investment in Latin America and the Caribbean (largely from Germany and Spain) is on
the rise, and is mostly directed towards Brazil, Argentina and Mexico (in natural resources and
services). Almost a half of Western Europe’s investment into that region has come through
privatization schemes, but in 1995 and 1996 greenfield investment has also been prevalent in
automobile manufacturing. Japanese investment in Latin America remains small and highly
concentrated in tax havens in the Caribbean. Intra-regional investment has increased substantially,
with Chile, Brazil and Argentina being the principal source countries, and Argentina, Peru and
Venezuela the principal destinations. Developing Asian countries continue to invest in export-related
industries, although market-seeking investments spurred by the region’s recent integration efforts
are also on the rise.
However, Africa’s investment performance looks less gloomy when put into perspective. In
relation to the size of a number of economies, those investments can be fairly significant. For the
region as a whole, the ratio of investment inflows to gross fixed capital formation was 5.4 per cent,
compared with 5.5 per cent for Asia and 5.9 per cent for Western Europe during the first half of the
1990s. Putting the size of Africa’s FDI stock in relation to the size of Africa’s domestic market (GDP)
yields a share of 10 per cent -- compared with 14 per cent for Asia, 18 per cent for Latin America and
the Caribbean and 13 per cent for Western Europe in 1995. While these figures suggest that the
significance of the investment that Africa receives (without the benefit of large intra-regional
investment) is certainly not negligible, they do not say anything about Africa’s need for investment
nor, for that matter, the continent’s potential.
Prospects for increased flows to some parts of Africa are encouraging. Favourable growth
performances, further investment and trade liberalization and privatization, regional cooperation
agreements and the establishment of links with other regions are all likely to increase the region’s
attractiveness. In addition, South Africa could begin to play a significant role as a “growth pole”,
contributing to the region’s economic development through FDI and trade. As regards the former,
South Africa’s contribution could be through the provision of investment capital, adding to capital
xxii
Overview
formation in the recipient economies; the transfer of technology; the development of local human
resources; and the opening up of its own market to the exports of foreign affiliates that have invested
in neighbouring economies. Indeed, the question has arisen whether South African firms can induce
the development of new industries, especially in manufacturing, in its neighbours by establishing
an intra-regional division of labour in the framework of which production at home is upgraded to
capital- and technology-intensive activities. In this “flying geese” process of industrial restructuring
and upgrading, South Africa would play the lead role, similar to the role played by Japan in the
context of Asia’s development. At this point in time, however, it appears that the necessary conditions
for this type of intra-regional restructuring to occur are still far from being met, including -- to stay
within the metaphor -- because many of South Africa’s neighbours are still in the “nest-building”
stage.
... and of growing non-oil investments in West Asia, ...
After large disinvestments in West Asia in 1995 that resulted in negative inflows, particularly
in Saudi Arabia and Yemen, inflows attained a level of nearly $2 billion in 1996. Excluding these two
countries, investment flows into West Asia show a much more stable trend. In fact, the volatility of
inflows to these two countries -- albeit important ones -- masks considerable improvements in the
investment performance of other countries in the region in response to successful efforts to create
business-friendly environments.
Over time, the share of West Asia in total developing country investment inflows has been
declining -- from 30 per cent during the first half of the 1980s to only 2 per cent during the first half
of the 1990s. That shift reflects largely decreasing investment flows to oil producing economies
(Saudi Arabia, Oman, Qatar and United Arab Emirates). While petroleum naturally remains the
most popular industry in these economies, in the non-oil producing countries (Jordan, Lebanon and
Turkey) investments go mainly to manufacturing and services.
Investment flows to Central and Eastern Europe remain concentrated in the Czech Republic,
Hungary and Poland, together accounting for some two-thirds of the region’s inflows. Transnational
corporations from Western Europe dominate the investment picture, followed by corporations from
the United States and, more recently, the Asian newly industrializing economies. A small but growing
share of inflows is attributed to corporations based in Central and Eastern Europe itself. This is also
reflected in the fact that 16 per cent of the BITs concluded by Central and Eastern European countries
has been with other countries in the same region.
xxiii
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
Accompanying the FDI boom, foreign portfolio equity investment in developing countries
has also accelerated, ...
Substantial flows of foreign portfolio equity investment to emerging markets is a recent
phenomenon dating only from the early 1990s. The year 1993 was the watershed for such flows
when their level trebled, to $45 billion, from the previous year. However, the level of these flows fell
in the two subsequent years in response to the Mexican peso crisis -- by 27 per cent and 2 per cent in
1994 and 1995, respectively -- but recovered in 1996. The volume of new equity raised on international
capital markets by emerging markets in that year increased by 34 per cent, reaching some $15 billion.
In principle, foreign portfolio equity investment and direct investment are quite distinct. By
definition, foreign portfolio equity investment is distinguished from FDI by the degree of management
control that foreign investors exercise in a company. Portfolio equity investors usually provide only
financial capital without any involvement in a company’s management, and typically have a shorter-
term investment horizon than direct investors. The latter have a significant and long-lasting
management interest in the company in which an investment is made. In general, the dividing line
between the two types of investment is the threshold of a 10 per cent equity stake. In practice,
however, the distinction between the two categories of investment is often less clear-cut and is subject
to a number of qualifications.
The overriding motivation for investment by portfolio equity investors is their participation
in earnings of local enterprises through capital gains and dividends. Transnational corporations
tend to be more interested in accessing markets and resources and, more generally, in the contribution
that an investment can make to the competitiveness of the transnational corporate system as a whole.
The contrast in motives between TNCs and portfolio equity investors is not, however, always so
stark. In the notable case of venture capital investment, the investment horizon tends to be somewhat
longer than for foreign portfolio equity investment, and the existence of significant (and perhaps
also long-term) management control is not unusual, although the foremost motivation is to share in
the capital gains of the equity of a local enterprise when it is listed eventually on the stock exchange.
... encouraged by the liberalization and globalization of financial markets and the
growth of funds in the hands of institutional investors.
Two major factors lie behind the rise in foreign portfolio equity investment flows into emerging
markets: the liberalization and globalization of financial markets and the concentration of substantial
financial resources in the hands of institutional investors. Investments into emerging markets have
been facilitated by the rapid provision of market information made possible by improvements in
communications technology and the willingness of portfolio equity investors to bear greater risks in
the expectation of reaping higher returns in these new and fast-growing markets. The higher returns
have been made possible by the sustained superior growth performance of emerging markets in
comparison to that of developed economies during the 1990s. Stock market capitalization in emerging
markets has also grown much faster than that in developed countries. However, as in the case of
FDI flows, portfolio equity investment flows have remained skewed towards a small group of mostly
upper middle-income emerging markets, along with two large low-income countries with impressive
growth performances and prospects. (Asia alone accounted for 53 per cent of net foreign portfolio
equity investment flows to emerging markets in 1995.) This is not surprising. For many large
institutional investors, it is more attractive to invest in more mature emerging markets that tend to
have a relatively large market capitalization and provide high liquidity levels, relatively fast and
reliable settlement systems and a generally more developed market infrastructure.
xxiv
Overview
There is also a certain level of concentration when it comes to the origin of foreign portfolio
equity investment flows. Over the period 1992-1994, it is estimated that more than 35 per cent of
flows to emerging markets originated in the United States, 15 per cent in Japan and 11 per cent in the
United Kingdom. In recent years, investors from Hong Kong and Singapore have also invested in
emerging markets. For the United States, the most important source country, investment flows to
emerging markets have followed the global trend, increasing substantially in 1993, decreasing in
1994 and 1995, and rising again in 1996, despite a clear upturn in stock-market returns in the United
States.
In light of the vastly increased volume of foreign portfolio equity investment flows to emerging
markets, the impact of these flows on host-country economies is likely to be significant. Although
such investments can make an important contribution to the financing of equity capital of local
companies, concerns have been expressed by host countries particularly as regards the volatility of
these flows and their effect on exchange rates. In order to address this issue, it is necessary to investigate
the causes of that volatility and the availability of measures or mechanisms to reduce or withstand it.
The ultimate objective of FDI liberalization is to enhance economic growth and welfare in
countries. Success in this respect depends not only on increasing FDI flows -- and the capital,
technology, managerial know-how and market access associated with them -- but also on ensuring
that the industries and markets in which TNCs participate operate efficiently. In market-based
economies, the efficient functioning of markets depends on the contestability of markets -- or the
ease with which firms can enter and exit them -- and the extent and nature of competition in markets.
Foreign-direct-investment liberalization, by removing formal barriers to the entry of FDI, can increase
the contestability of national markets and inject greater competition into them. However, because of
the ownership-specific assets of TNCs, their transnational organizational structures and the relatively
greater competitive strengths that they often have vis-à-vis domestic firms, FDI could also increase
concentration, and TNCs could indulge, like dominant firms generally, in restrictive or anticompetitive
practices. Government policy and practices aimed at attracting investments that grant exclusivity or
allow firms, domestic or foreign, to erect informal impediments to the entry of other firms could
contribute to the potential for such practices.
xxv
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
... opening up to inward FDI can contribute towards the contestability of host
country markets...
The opening up of economies to inward FDI can contribute directly towards increasing the
contestability of -- or potential competition in -- host country markets. Sellers participating in these
markets can now include not only domestic producers and (in the case of goods and tradable services)
exporters from other countries, but also TNCs from other countries that establish affiliates (as well as
contractual arrangements with other firms) to produce in and for local markets. Furthermore, TNCs,
with their ownership-specific or competitive advantages, are often better able than domestic firms to
overcome some of the cost-related barriers to entry that limit the number of firms in an industry and
the market for its products. This potential for increasing competition by allowing FDI entry is
particularly important for many service markets, in which competition through arm’s length
international trade is not possible or is limited.
... even though TNC activity may decrease or increase market concentration in host
country markets, ...
Transnational corporations typically participate to a greater extent in industries that are
more concentrated, at the national as well as the international level. This is largely due to the fact
that industry concentration and the competitive advantages that enable firms to become transnational
share common causes. However, inward FDI, when it takes place, can itself affect the concentration
xxvi
Overview
of producers in a host-country industry and, hence, of sellers in the market for its products. The
nature of this effect depends, initially, upon whether or not the mode of entry is such as to add to the
number of suppliers (and the quantity supplied) in a market and, subsequently, upon several factors
related to the relative size, competitive strength and mode of competition of foreign affiliates and
domestic and other firms competing in a market. In developed host countries, on balance, these
factors are likely to be conducive towards reducing market concentration -- or, at least, not to increase
concentration.
In developing economies, the picture is more complex. Although the mode of entry of FDI
into developing economies -- generally, greenfield investment -- is conducive to reducing
concentration, market concentration has often been found to increase. Several factors may be involved:
the disparity in size between foreign affiliates and domestic firms; the greater production efficiency
or sales capability of foreign affiliates (which can lead to the exit of domestic enterprises that have
yet to build up the necessary capabilities to withstand international competition, or to their merger
with foreign firms); the use of modes of competition that are new to host country markets; the
introduction of new products for which no other local producers or substitutes are available; and,
most importantly in the case of tradable goods and services, restrictions on international trade that
give local producers protected markets. If there is a sizeable number of domestic firms that have
accumulated some competitive strengths and/or the capabilities to learn from foreign firms, increased
concentration is less likely. Similarly, the presence of imports can curb the possible dominance of
foreign affiliates in a market. The increasing role of small and medium-sized TNCs and TNCs from
developing countries, with sometimes smaller competitive advantages compared with those of large
TNCs from developed countries, is also likely to contribute towards lessening the tendency towards
greater concentration of host country markets in industries with substantial inward FDI.
... and influence the performance of firms and industries -- and, ultimately,
consumer welfare -- accordingly.
The production efficiency of foreign affiliates is often higher than that of domestic firms in
host developing countries. The implications of this for welfare in the host economy depend upon
whether competition is maintained when FDI takes place, and markets work efficiently. If competition
-- between foreign affiliates themselves, between foreign affiliates and importers, and between foreign
affiliates and domestic firms -- is lacking, and foreign affiliates operate in highly concentrated markets
with low contestability, the benefits to consumers from the entry of more efficient TNCs, in the form
of lower prices, improved quality, increased variety, as well as innovation and the introduction of
new products, may be limited. In addition, there may be scope for TNCs to engage in anticompetitive
business practices that serve to keep new entrants out or result in inefficiencies and reduced consumer
welfare.
In particular, if a host country market remains, or becomes, concentrated after the entry of
TNCs, there may be a potential for TNCs to engage in business practices, including restrictive business
practices, that could have anticompetitive consequences, especially in markets that are characterized
by low contestability. The main types of anticompetitive behaviour include, as in the case of purely
domestic firms, collusion among producers/sellers of the same product; monopolizing mergers and
acquisitions; exclusionary vertical practices; and predatory behaviour. In the case of TNCs, these
practices may sometimes be specifically related to, or facilitated by, the cross-border relationships
and contacts that are specific to operating in more than one country.
xxvii
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
Consumer welfare in host country markets may also be affected adversely if market-power
inducements are granted by host country governments to TNCs in order to attract investments by
the latter. These inducements include guaranteed exclusive rights of production and/or exclusive
rights of sale of a product in the host country market, often supported by protection in the form of
prohibitive tariff or non-tariff restrictions on trade. The granting of these inducements has direct
anticompetitive effects, with adverse implications for efficiency and the benefits from FDI. Such
inducements, like other incentives, are based on the objective of maximizing the long-term benefits
(in the form of capital, technology, management know-how, and market access) that FDI is expected
to bring; but, given the potential for adverse effects on the efficient functioning of markets, a careful
assessment of costs and benefits is necessary if the granting of these inducements is to be justified.
In regional and global markets, competition and efficiency can go hand in hand
with greater concentration ...
In a liberalizing and globalizing world economy, TNCs operate increasingly in markets that
are no longer national but regional or global in scope, with transactions between sellers and buyers
of a given product from several different countries taking place across national boundaries. In various
industries, TNCs take advantage of the widening scope of markets to restructure their operations
and/or integrate their value-added activities internationally, either within their corporate systems
or through inter-firm alliances and agreements, achieving efficiencies in production through functional
specialization and economies of scale and scope.
The efficiency gains that some TNCs are able to reap through integrated international
production enables them to lower prices, to introduce better quality products, or to introduce new
products to capture a greater market share. This leads some industries (and markets) to become
more concentrated at the regional or global level, a trend that affects all countries.
However, concentrated markets at the regional or global levels need not necessarily affect
competition, industry performance or consumer welfare adversely. For one thing, such markets are,
by definition, more contestable or open as regards entry (and exit) than segmented national markets,
simply because sellers (and buyers) from a number of locations can participate in them. Furthermore,
when integrated international production (including at the R&D stage of the value chain) for regional
or global markets enables firms to overcome the high costs of, and reap the economies of scale and
scope associated with innovation in industries with rapidly changing technology, it could actually
enhance competition (through innovation), although the number of independent firms that perform
a particular function may diminish. Consumers located in different national economies benefit
when buying in those regional or global markets.
Particularly high degrees of concentration in regional and global markets would, of course,
raise competition concerns. Business practices by regionally or globally dominant firms, including
TNCs, could affect the continued contestability of the relevant markets and the sustainability of the
benefits that the greater openness to FDI and trade is expected to bring.
... and can be further enhanced by a quick supply response through FDI.
In today’s world economy, a number of factors facilitate the ease and speed with which
TNCs can provide a supply response to a change in market conditions -- signalled, for example, by
a non-transitory price increase -- through the establishment of new production facilities to enter a
market. These factors are based on the reality that nearly all countries seek to attract FDI, many firms
already have foreign affiliates in place, technological developments make the establishment of new
affiliates relatively easy and competitive pressures often make the exploitation of new opportunities
irresistible. More specifically, the supply response of many TNCs could be rapid, rivalling that of
xxviii
Overview
domestic producers and importers in a country because of the scanning capabilities of TNCs; their
experience in trade and FDI; their access to resources within and outside their corporate systems,
and access to markets; their ability to spread risks and enter into alliances to overcome entry barriers
such as those of R&D; and their ability to draw upon existing affiliates for assistance. If supply
response through FDI and non-equity arrangements by TNCs is relatively fast -- with, say, not more
than one to two years elapsing between the identification of an opportunity and the servicing of a
market -- it would be deserving of attention when considering the degree of competition in a given
market. This is particularly important with respect to competition in markets for services, many of
which cannot be traded across borders. All this suggests that the speed of the supply response
through FDI must therefore be considered routinely -- by competition authorities in developed and
developing countries alike -- when defining the relevant market for a product, or assessing the
implications for competition of certain changes occurring in a market.
The possibility that new FDI will provide a viable supply response underlines the growing
importance of FDI as a factor influencing contestability. Markets may not, however, always continue
to remain contestable and competitive. This has several policy implications.
Furthermore, care must be taken that, in their eagerness to attract FDI, governments do not
agree to market-power inducements which, by their very nature, restrict competition and reduce
contestability. To avoid such situations, the trade-offs between the benefits associated with new FDI
on the one hand, and the immediate costs of such inducements in terms of reducing economic
welfare due to their anticompetitive effects, on the other hand, need to be identified as clearly as
possible. Once a decision has been made that market-power inducements are required, another
difficult task is to determine how much market power needs to be given away, for how long and for
what range of activities, in order to attract a particular investment. A number of options exist that
can be utilized to minimize negative effects:
• creating pre-entry competition (auctioning);
• circumscribing exclusivity in terms of time;
• circumscribing exclusivity through alternative sources of competition;
• ensuring fair and non-discriminatory access to essential facilities;
• breaking-up national monopolists into regional firms;
• periodically reviewing inducements by competition authorities; and
• regulating prices under certain circumstances.
In sum, the inherently anticompetitive nature of market-power inducements calls for their cautious
scrutiny.
xxix
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
Competition laws normally apply to all firms operating in given national territories, whether
through domestic sales, imports, foreign affiliates or non-equity forms of FDI. (They may also,
sometimes controversially, be applied when extra-territorial operations have an effect on those given
territories.) They do not, in principle, discriminate between national and foreign firms or between
firms from different national origins. In this manner, competition law monitors the competitive
behaviour of TNCs having effects in host countries, with a view to ensuring that these firms (like
other firms) do not abuse market power. On a wider geographical scale, competition law is intended
to prevent inefficiencies stemming from market-allocation agreements designed to lessen trade or
investment.
Some of these agreements take the form of international market-allocation investment cartels
that include promises not to invest in certain markets or not to compete when investing. By their
very
nature, such cartels directly restrict competition through FDI, typically to the detriment of host
countries, and therefore require the attention of competition authorities.
... with the main interface between competition law and FDI taking place at
entry through merger review ...
Usually, however, the main interface between competition law and FDI occurs when foreign
entry is accomplished by means of a significant merger, acquisition or joint venture. Indeed, countries
are increasingly adopting merger-control regulations. Because M&As are dependent on current
stock values and are difficult to unscramble once consummated, merger control of such transactions
requires a carefully calibrated system of prior notification, rapid analysis, temporary injunctions and
prompt decisions. Most countries use turnover or other thresholds to exempt transactions unlikely
to have anticompetitive effects in order to minimize unnecessary interference and limit the number
of cases screened by the competition authorities.
Most interventions by competition authorities occur in the case of horizontal M&As between
competitors. Typical scenarios likely to raise competition issues are:
• The acquiring firm was exporting to a market before it acquired a competing firm in the
xxx
Overview
market, or a foreign firm that already controls one firm in the market acquires another.
• A foreign firm uses FDI to set up a major plant in a market, another firm does the same,
and then the two agree to merge (or one takes over the other), thereby eliminating local
competition between their two affiliates.
• When a foreign firm enters a market by means of a joint venture with a local firm, the issue arises
as to whether the foreign firm would have been likely to have entered the market separately and
competed with the local firm in the absence of the joint venture.
• The possibility that the acquiring firm will have an incentive to suppress rather than
develop the competitive potential of the firm to be acquired.
• The merger of two foreign parent firms can sometimes create competition issues in
countries other than the home or host countries of the merging firms, i.e., third countries.
• A parent firm acquires an enterprise abroad which, as an independent entity, is (or could
be) a source of competition for the domestic market.
• Investments likely to lead to, or augment, worldwide dominant positions. Such cases
typically arise in situations in which a transaction affects product markets in which
firms compete at the regional or global level.
For example, competition problems may arise because of restraints that are ancillary to the
basic transaction, e.g., when tied purchasing is involved. Joint ventures are particularly susceptible
to the combination of a pro-competitive basic transaction and ancillary restraints. Another example,
which relates to secondary effects, concerns potential competition problems that can arise if a foreign
investor assumes control of an essential facility; competition authorities may have to intervene to
require dealing on reasonable terms. Moreover, as transfer pricing can be used for predatory purposes,
competition authorities may have to monitor events in this area as well; given the nature of this
practice, international cooperation is often required.
Finally, corporate non-equity alliances pose new challenges. Certain types of research-and-
development alliances, in particular, are attracting increasing attention. Such alliances can have
elements of cartelization and, as such, might be subject to competition-law scrutiny. Competition
authorities may intervene as regards the structure of a research-and-development arrangement,
particularly if parties envisage the joint exploitation of the results. At the same time, such arrangements
can have important positive implications for an economy. Many countries therefore exempt certain
technological alliances from competition regulations. Where this is not the case, a rule-of-reason
standard on a case-by-case basis seems to be increasingly the prevailing approach in judicial reviews,
to balance long-term efficiency gains against possible short-term anticompetitive effects.
xxxi
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
There is a direct, necessary and enlarging relationship between FDI liberalization and the
importance of competition policy ...
While FDI liberalization can help to enhance the contestability of markets, it is not a sufficient
condition: in so far as FDI liberalization creates more space for firms to pursue their interests in
markets, competition laws become necessary to ensure that former statutory obstacles to contestability
are not replaced by anticompetitive practices of firms, thus negating the benefits that could arise
from liberalization. This need increases as liberalization becomes more widespread and extends to
new areas.
If anything, this underlines that the principal dimensions of the FDI liberalization process
(identified in the World Investment Report 1994) are, indeed, inextricably linked: the reduction of
barriers to FDI and the establishment of positive standards of treatment for TNCs need to go hand in
hand with the adoption of measures aimed at ensuring the proper functioning of markets, including,
in particular, measures to control anticompetitive practices by firms.
This also underlines something else, namely, that the culture of FDI liberalization that has
grown worldwide and has become pervasive, needs to be complemented by an equally worldwide
and pervasive culture of competition (which, of course, needs to recognize competing objectives as
well). Clearly formulated competition policies and their effective enforcement can contribute
significantly to the growth of such a competition culture. In this respect, the trend towards adopting
or strengthening competition laws suggests that a competition culture is, indeed, emerging in many
parts of the world. However, for countries that are new to this practice, the transition to a more
open, competition-oriented system cannot be achieved overnight and involves difficult political
choices, the balancing of interests among many stakeholders and the resolving of a host of practical
problems.
Moving from the plane of competition culture to the plane of policy, this means that
competition policy should receive increased attention when it comes to the ideal mix of relevant
policy instruments.
This should also be the case because, as countries liberalize their investment regimes, they may
become concerned that they are moving, for example, from a system of screening all take-overs by
foreign firms of national firms to screening none; they may also see risks of foreign firms acquiring
dominant positions. Therefore, there is a need to assess the competitive effects of foreign firms at the
time of entry and after entry, and that function is increasingly assumed, where appropriate, by
competition authorities. Competition policy thus has a major role to play in the process of
liberalization, notably by ensuring that markets are kept as open as possible to new entrants, and
that firms do not frustrate this by engaging in anticompetitive practices. In this manner, the vigorous
enforcement of competition law can provide reassurance that FDI liberalization will not leave
governments powerless against anticompetitive transactions or subsequent problems.
When formulating their competition policies, countries need, of course, to keep in mind that
competition policy is not a substitute for FDI policy and trade policy, but rather that all three are
mutually supportive in the pursuit of efforts to ensure that markets function properly. Nevertheless,
to the extent that contestability and competition considerations gain in importance in guiding policies,
and the more liberal trade and FDI policies become -- but, by themselves, do not always lead to
contestable markets — competition policy emerges as primus inter pares among policy instruments
used to maintain contestability and competition.
xxxii
Overview
Still, it must be recognized that few countries have strong, well-functioning and well-funded
competition authorities. And it may well take other countries many years to develop appropriate
policies and the institutional set-up to implement them fairly and effectively. This means that, where
contestability and competition are the objectives, many countries will need to continue to rely, for the
foreseeable future, primarily on FDI and trade liberalization to meet these objectives in the context of
closer integration into global markets.
xxxiii
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
However, a number of obstacles make international responses difficult. With respect to the
exchange of information, the largest single obstacle is that of the confidentiality obligations of many
competition authorities -- which they need to have -- regarding information submitted to them by
various parties. Closer competition-enforcement cooperation is often impeded by basic substantive and
procedural differences between the competition-law regimes of different countries; in fact, activities
being investigated in one jurisdiction may have been encouraged by a government in another
jurisdiction. Moreover, many governments simply may not see it in their country’s interest to facilitate
a foreign state’s investigation of one or more of their companies.
Precisely because of such obstacles, issues relating to competition are increasingly being
addressed at the international level, either in the form of separate arrangements relating to some
aspects of competition policy or in the context of broader investment and trade arrangements:
Cooperation efforts at the regional level often take place in the context of regional integration
schemes, which allow approaches and trade-offs that are more difficult to pursue in other settings.
The most integrated in this respect is the European Union, in which the member countries have
agreed to common competition rules and have a common competition authority. In the OECD,
efforts to cooperate on restrictive business practices are not new, with recent recommendations
strengthening previous provisions and setting out guiding principles for cooperation. Efforts are
also being made within the context of other regional agreements, such as NAFTA, MERCOSUR and
the Energy Charter Treaty.
Still, the question arises whether, to sustain the regionalization and globalization of markets
and production structures, something more than expanded bilateral and regional cooperation is
required. Indeed, recent international discussions reflect a growing recognition by the international
community of the links between FDI policy, trade and competition policy. This is underlined in
particular by the decision taken at the Ministerial Conference of the World Trade Organization in
Singapore in December 1996 to establish one Working Group to examine the relationship between
trade and investment, and another to study issues raised by members relating to the interaction
between trade and competition policy, including anticompetitive practices, in order to identify any
areas that may merit further consideration in the WTO framework. As furthermore stated in the
Ministerial Declaration, these Working Groups are to draw upon each other’s work if necessary and
also to draw upon the work in UNCTAD and other appropriate intergovernmental fora.
xxxiv
Overview
...while recognizing that the pursuit of contestability does not necessarily always lead to
desired outcomes, especially where development considerations weigh heavily.
While FDI liberalization can increase competition in markets and thereby contribute to
economic efficiency, growth, development and, ultimately, consumer welfare, there are limitations
to competition. They arise in particular when markets tend naturally towards high level of
concentration and when market outcomes conflict with other policy objectives.
In the first instance, limitations can arise from the fact that such natural factors as economies
of scale, high sunk costs and high risk-related costs can make some markets, to a greater or lesser
degree, difficult to contest (although technological developments can change the importance of some
of these natural factors). One of the antidotes to these natural limits to contestability involves an
increase in the size of the relevant market, especially through investment and trade liberalization.
Where market enlargement is difficult to achieve, regulations can help to prevent abuses of dominant
positions of market power.
Limitations also arise because governments in all countries are often (if not always) faced
with having to choose between competing objectives, and a number of these can conflict with the
market outcomes that would be generated by reasonably competitive markets. Improving economic
efficiency by making markets more competitive is subject to the same need to make choices.
Competing objectives include safeguarding national security; protecting labour rights; safeguarding
culture; promoting positive externalities; protecting property rights; avoiding negative externalities;
protecting consumers; and promoting development.
For developing countries, of course, the promotion of development takes pride of place.
Given the particular characteristics of developing countries -- low income levels, skewed distribution
of wealth, insufficient infrastructure, low levels of education, asymmetries in information, to mention
but a few -- the incidence of conflicts between market outcomes and competing objectives is often
more frequent, especially when dynamic efficiency considerations are taken into account. Where
such conflicts occur, their resolution may require creating a mix of policies that limit contestability
for a given period of time and that include fade-out provisions, on the one hand, and measures to
assist and encourage the building up of domestic capabilities, on the other hand. Indeed, the key
issue is to help domestic firms to develop their potential, so that they can participate effectively in
international competition and move up the value-added chain.
xxxv
PART ONE
TRENDS
CHAPTER I
GLOBAL TRENDS
GLOBAL
A. Overall trends
1. Trends
Trends
Flows into 54 countries and outflows from 20 countries set new records during the year
(annex tables B.1 and 2). Many countries with large FDI inflows also had large outflows. That
suggests that the factors that make a country attractive to FDI are linked to the conditions and
competitive advantages which encourage firms based in that country to expand by investing
abroad. But while more countries are becoming significant hosts as well as homes to FDI -- and
the size of investment flows of some of these countries in both directions is converging (figure
I.1) -- many others remain marginalized in the competition for FDI.
The stock of FDI reached about $3.2 trillion in 1996, rising from $2 trillion in 1993 and $1
trillion in 1987. Sales and assets of TNCs are growing faster than world GDP, exports and gross
fixed capital formation. About 44,000 TNCs with almost 280,000 foreign affiliates are active
today (table I.2). The growth of their international production reflects rapid changes in their
corporate structure and is being pursued through a wide variety of equity and non-equity link-
ups and investment channels.
Reinvested earnings, which had been negative in the early 1990s, accounted for about a
tenth of total FDI inflows in 1995, the latest year for which data are available (figure I.2). Their
recovery was partly due to stronger economic growth in many parts of the world. But it is also
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Memorandum:
GDP at factor cost 28 264 30 142 10.7 6.4 9.5 6.6
Gross fixed capital formation 6 088 .. 10.7 4.5 f 12.4 ..
Royalties and fees receipts 48 .. 21.9 12.0 f 16.4 ..
Exports of goods and non-factor services 5 848 6 111 14.3 7.4 16.2 4.5
attributable to improved returns on investments made in earlier years, as these became more
profitable. The importance of equity in total FDI flows has also increased recently, partly as a
consequence of the growing role played by mergers and acquisitions. As a percentage of the
total value of FDI flows in 1996, these (including minority-held investments) accounted for 78
per cent.
Both reinvested earnings and equity capital are sensitive to the economic environment
of host countries, while intra-company loans are affected by business conditions in both home
and host countries. Low interest rates during 1995-1996, compared with interest rates during
the FDI recession of the early 1990s (annex table A.1), may have induced TNCs to borrow more
funds for investing abroad. On the demand side, particularly in developing countries, a shortage
of savings to finance investments implies that these countries have to rely on foreign funds --
including FDI -- to finance that gap.
Other notable FDI trends in 1996 for each region include (for details, see chapter II):
• Developed countries invested $295 billion abroad and received $208 billion in 1996,
compared to $291 billion and $205 billion, respectively, in 1995. The United States
absorbed one of every four dollars spent on FDI in the world, and was by far the largest
investor abroad, followed by the United Kingdom, Germany, France and Japan (figure
I.1). The European Union remained the largest host and home region, accounting for a
half of FDI inflows to developed countries.
4
Chapter I
Figure I.1. Top ten largest host and home countries for FDI, among developed
countries, developing countries and Central and Eastern Europe, 1996
• Developing countries invested $51 billion abroad and received $129 billion in 1996,
compared to $47 billion and $96 billion, respectively, in 1995. Their share of total world
outflows rose to 15 per cent that year, almost the same share as in 1995, while their share
of inflows grew to 37 per cent, from 30 per cent the previous year. China was again the
largest host country after the United States, while Hong Kong1 had the largest investment
outflow and outward FDI stock of any developing economy.
5
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Table I.2. Number of parent corporations and foreign affiliates, by area and country, latest available year
(Number)
Parent corporations Foreign affiliates
Area/economy Year based in country located in economy a
Developed countries 36380 b 93628
Western Europe 26161 61902
European Union 22111 b 54862
Austria 1994 877 2205
Belgium 1996 152 2000 c
Denmark 1992 800 1289 d
Finland 1996 1200 1200
France 1995 2126 8682
Germany 1994 7292 e 11581 f
Greece 1991 .. 798
Ireland 1995 80 1050
Italy 1995 966 1630
Netherlands 1993 1608 g 2259 g
Portugal 1996 1657 6671
Spain 1995 236 6232 h
Sweden 1996 3650 5371
United Kingdomi 1992 1467 j 3894 k
6
Chapter I
Source: UNCTAD.
a Represents the number of foreign affiliates in the economy shown, as defined by it (see section on definitions and
sources in the annex).
b Total does not include countries for which data are not available.
c Estimated by Banque Nationale de Belgique.
d 1991.
e Does not include holding companies abroad that are dependent on German-owned capital and which, in turn, hold
participating interests of more than 20 per cent abroad (indirect German participating interests).
f Does not include the number of foreign-owned holding companies in Germany which, in turn, hold participating
interests in Germany (indirect foreign participating interests).
g 1989.
h 1992.
i Data on the number of parent companies based in the United Kingdom, and the number of foreign affiliates in the
United Kingdom are based on the register of companies held for inquiries on the United Kingdom FDI abroad, and FDI into
the United Kingdom conducted by the Central Statistical Office. On that basis, the numbers are probably understated because
of the lags in identifying investment in greenfield sites and because some companies with small presence in the United Kingdom
and abroad have not yet been identified.
j Represents a total of 24 bank parent companies and 1,443 non-bank parent companies in 1991.
k Represents 518 foreign affiliates in banking in 1992 and 3,376 non-bank foreign affiliates in 1991.
l The number of parent companies not including finance, insurance and real estate industries in March 1995 (3,695)
plus the number of parent companies in finance, insurance and real estate industries in December 1992 (272).
m The number of foreign affiliates not including finance, insurance and real estate industries in March 1995 (3,121)
plus the number of foreign affiliates, insurance and real estate industries in November 1995 (284).
n Represents a total of 2,658 non-bank parent companies in 1994 and 89 bank parent companies in 1989 with at least
one foreign affiliate whose asset, sales or net income exceeded $3 million, and 723 non-bank and bank parent companies
in 1989 whose affiliate(s) had assets, sales and net income under $3 million.
o Represents a total of 12,523 bank and non-bank affiliates in 1994 whose assets, sales or net income exceeded $1
million, and 5,551 bank and non-bank affiliates in 1992 with assets, sales and net income under $1 million, and 534 United
States affiliates that are depositary institutions. Each affiliate represents a fully consolidated United States business entreprise,
which may consist of a number of individual companies.
p As of June 1996.
q Number of foreign companies registred under DL600.
r 1989.
s 1988.
t As of October 1993.
u As of May 1995.
v This number covers all firms with foreign equity, i.e., equity ownership by non-resident corporations and/or non-
resident individuals, registred with the Securities Exchange Commission from 1989 to 1995.
w Data are for the number of investment projects.
Note: the data can vary significantly from preceding years, as data become available for countries that had not been
covered before, as definitions change, or as older data are updated.
7
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
• South, East and South-East Asia and Latin America attained record FDI inflows, with a
number of countries breaking past records in 1996.2 Better economic performance and
continued liberalization -- factors that have characterized Asian economies for some
time -- helped to increase investment flows to Latin America. Flows to South, East and
South-East Asia increased by 25 per cent, to more than $80 billion, while those to Latin
America were nearly $39 billion in 1996, about $13 billion more than in 1995.
• Africa attracted little FDI in 1996, though more than in 1995. Investment flows as a
8
Chapter I
percentage of gross fixed capital formation reached around 7 per cent in 1995, approaching
the level in South, East and South-East Asia and surpassing that of Western Europe
(annex table B.5).
• After divestments in 1995 (-$763 million) due to large capital withdrawals from Saudi
Arabia, flows into West Asia turned positive in 1996 ($1.9 billion). Flows to the non-oil
sector in oil producing countries and non-oil producing countries are increasing in relative
importance.
• Flows into Central and Eastern Europe declined in 1996, after more than doubling in value
in 1995.
• The least developed countries received a mere 0.5 per cent of world FDI flows in 1996.
In all regions of the world, but especially in the United States and Western Europe, mergers
and acquisitions played an important role in driving FDI. Cross-border mergers and acquisitions
rose during the past six years, to a record $275 billion (including some minority-held transactions
classified as portfolio investments) in 1996, an increase of 16 per cent over the 1995 level ($237
billion) (annex tables B.7-9).3 If only majority-held transactions are considered, the 1996 figure
would be $163 billion, or 47 per cent of global FDI inflows, compared to $140 billion and 44 per
cent, respectively, in 1995 (figure I.3). In 1996, there were 45 deals worth more than $1 billion
(annex table A.2), compared to 35 deals in 1995 (UNCTAD, 1996a, table I.5), almost all between
developed-country firms. Transnational corporations based in the United States and the United
Kingdom were the biggest players, accounting for 40 per cent of the value of purchases in
majority-held mergers and acquisitions and 57 per cent of sales in 1996.4
9
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
investments as their mode of Figure I.4. Greenfield investment and mergers and acquisitions
entry, 5 even they have been in the United States inward FDIa, 1985-1995
shifting recently to mergers and
acquisitions (JETRO, 1997).
• The 1986-1990 FDI boom. Many countries emerged as important sources of FDI, most
notably Japan, which became the largest outward investor. Investment flows were
influenced by heightened
Figure I.5. FDI inflows and outflows, 1970-1996 protectionist pressures, but also by
the beginning of widespread FDI
liberalization, rapid economic
growth in developing countries and
the development and adoption of
information and
telecommunication technologies by
firms. These technologies enable
firms better to coordinate far-flung
international production activities,
manage foreign affiliates and
conduct international transactions.
The 1986-1990 FDI boom was a
developed-country phenomenon:
FDI flows into these countries grew
Source: UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database. faster than to developing countries
10
Chapter I
(annex table A.3). Mergers and acquisitions were a major mode of investing. Among
the developing countries, China began to emerge as a large recipient for FDI flows.
• The current FDI boom (since 1995). Although a number of countries have registered record
levels thus far, much of the global FDI inflow increase is attributable to only two countries,
China and the United States. Together, they absorbed about one-third of global FDI
inflows during 1995-1996. The United States and the United Kingdom drove the increase
in outflows, together accounting for 40 per cent of global outflows during this period.
The geographical distribution of FDI flows may become more balanced before this boom
is over. Indeed, there are already signs that other countries (France, Germany and a
number of developing
countries on the Figure I.6. Growth of domestic and foreign direct investment,
outflow side, and Latin 1980-1996
American countries on (Index, 1980=100)
the inflow side) are
becoming more active
as home and host
countries.
Figure I.7. Share of developing countries in FDI inflows, exports shares at the beginning of the 1980s
and imports, 1970-1996 (figure I.7). Qualitatively,
(Per cent) however, the recent developing-
country shares reflect a variety of
locational advantages. In the early
1980s, by contrast, their equally
high shares were mainly the
outcome of sudden increases in
flows to a few oil producing
economies.
11
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
example, their share in global inflows fell. Firms shifted their investments to developed countries
at that time because they wanted to use their limited FDI funds to support their affiliates there
during that period of deep recession. During the most recent FDI recession (1991-1993), however,
TNCs invested heavily in East and South-East Asia, the most dynamic host region, boosting the
developing-country share of global FDI inflows even at the time of recession. During the FDI
boom of 1986-1990, the developing-country share of FDI inflows fell because most FDI took
place through mergers and acquisitions by TNCs based in developed countries and such
investment was directed to developed countries. In contrast, during the FDI boom of 1979-
1981, TNCs invested heavily in developing countries -- mostly in oil producing economies --
which offered investment opportunities not taken up by domestic firms. Many TNCs escaped
the effects of the second oil crisis and invested abroad. Although the recent high shares of
developing countries in FDI inflows do not set new records, the composition of the major FDI
recipients among developing countries has changed dramatically, with oil producing countries
no longer being important hosts. These countries accounted for a half of FDI flows to developing
countries during 1979-1981, compared to one-fifth during 1995-1996.
Cross-border agreements between firms based in different countries have become increasingly
important complements to traditional FDI activities, with the range of such agreements growing
ever wider. They include arrangements involving joint ventures, licensing, subcontracting,
franchising, marketing, manufacturing, research-and-development (R&D) and exploration
agreements. These agreements may be equity-based (e.g., joint ventures), or may entail no equity
participation (e.g., franchising). The number of these agreements (apart from strategic R&D
partnerships, discussed separately) concluded annually increased from 1,760 in 1990 to 4,600 in 1995
(figure I.8). Their share of all inter-firm agreements -- including those between firms based in the
same country -- remained stable (on average) at about 61 per cent between the periods 1990-1991
and 1994-1995. This rapid growth
in the number suggests that TNCs Figure I.8. Number of cross-border inter-firm agreementsa and
have increasingly used such number of all inter-firm agreements,a 1990-1995
arrangements instead of, as well as (Number)
in addition to, FDI to undertake
international production.
12
Chapter I
from around 440 in 1990 to some Figure I.9. Cross-border inter-firm agreements (excluding
2,120 in 1994 (but appears to have strategic R&D partnerships), 1990-1995
fallen to around 560 in 1995) (figure (Number)
I.9). Their share of the total number
of cross-border inter-firm
agreements increased (on average)
from 27 per cent during 1990-1992
to 35 per cent during 1993-1995. (In
contrast, the corresponding share
of Central and Eastern European
participation was halved between
the same periods.)
These developments prompted firms to seek new ways to identify and appropriate
developments in critical technologies (Mytelka and Delapierre, 1996; Safarian, 1993), sometimes
prompted and sponsored by governments (Fransman, 1990; Mytelka, 1991; Lawton, 1997; Spencer,
1997). Many firms therefore turned to strategic partnerships to achieve objectives that they had once
sought to achieve exclusively through FDI. These advantages included concentrating on critical
competences (Hagedoorn, 1996), obtaining ownership and internalization advantages and exploiting
host-country locational advantages. Strategic partnerships provide access to complementary
technologies, reduce costs and risks and create synergies and spillovers. In advanced-technology
industries, the aims of such partnerships typically include greater technological synergies, faster
innovation, accessing tangible and intangible resources and reducing the costs and risks associated
with R&D. For firms from developing countries, strategic partnerships provide an opportunity to
strengthen technological capabilities and move more rapidly towards higher value-added
products. For small and medium-sized enterprises, partnerships are an important means of
overcoming size disadvantages in R&D, as well as in accessing markets and sometimes
production.
13
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
14
Chapter I
at least one United States partner, 42 per cent had at least one European Union partner and 31
per cent had at least one Japanese partner (figure I.12). However, developing-country firms are
also becoming more involved in these partnerships (box I.1): the participation of developing
countries in the total number increased from 3 per cent in 1989 to 13 per cent in 1995 (figure
I.12). This suggests that some developing-country firms have attained enough sophistication
and have deepened their technological capacity sufficiently to partner with developed country
firms.
Source: UNCTAD, based on IFR Securities Data Company, London and New York.
Note: the number of partnerships for which the regional or country participation breakdown is available is
222 for 1990 and 398 for 1995. The total number of such agreements was 304 for 1990 and 432 for 1995.
15
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Computel (Brazil) is a software company specialized in voice processing, i.e., voice-mail and
voice recognition. In 1994, it had about 80 employees, most of whom were engineers and software
analysts, and a turnover of some $30 million. As a small firm in Latin America, Computel found it
difficult to keep up as the pace of innovation accelerated in the late 1980s. Its voicemail systems were
sold mainly to foreign-based TNCs, such as NEC, Equitel/Siemens, Ericsson and Alcatel, for use as
add-ons to their PABX (a telephone switching system). But Computel’s volume of output was not
generating the revenues needed to support the growing amount of R&D required if the firm were to
remain competitive. Moreover, penetrating foreign markets for a small largely unknown company
was difficult. Computel worked its way around these problems through a strategic partnership with
Boston Technology (United States) that includes both a technology and a marketing partnership. As
part of that partnership, Computel and Boston Technology share technical information. By using a
mix of locally developed and imported technology, Computel is now able to develop new products
that interface with those of Boston Technology. This has made possible a marketing partnership in
voicemail platforms. Computel sells Boston Technology’s large platforms in Brazil and Boston
Technology sells Computel’s small platforms in the United States and abroad.
Source: UNCTAD, based on company interviews (conducted in 1995).
2. International production
All indicators of the size of international production -- worldwide FDI stock, gross
product, sales and exports (including intra-firm exports) of foreign affiliates -- have to be
estimated and should be treated with caution. The most recent year for which data are available
for such indicators is 1994 (except for FDI stock).
• Stock. Between 1982 and 1994, worldwide FDI stock increased fourfold, and doubled
as a percentage of world GDP (annex table B.6). The developing countries’ share of the
worldwide FDI inward stock increased over the past ten years, to reach 28 per cent by
1996. The investment stock in South, East and South-East Asia surpassed that in Latin
America in 1988 and, since then, the disparity has widened. The United States’ share of
world outward stock declined from more than 40 per cent in 1982 to one-quarter in
1996. Developing countries increased their share from 3 per cent to 9 per cent between
1982 and 1996.
• Gr oss pr
Gross oduct (value added) of for
product foreign filiates. According to this value-added measure,
affiliates.
eign af
foreign affiliate output accounted for 5 per cent of world GDP in 1982, 7 per cent in 1990
and 6 per cent in 1994 (the latest available year) (annex table A.4). Between 1982 and
1994, the gross product of foreign affiliates almost tripled. One dollar of FDI stock
generates value added worth 64 cents.10 In small economies in Africa and developing
Oceania, the value added generated by TNCs, though small, is significant compared
with the size of the economy. In general, foreign affiliates have contributed more in
terms of the share of their value added in the GDP of developing countries than that of
developed countries. This trend continued in the 1990s.
• Sales of foreign af
foreign filiates. Firms rely increasingly on sales from international production,
affiliates.
rather than on exports, to service foreign markets (table I.3). Sales of foreign affiliates
increased by 8 per cent annually between 1982 and 1994 (table I.3). In each developed
16
Chapter I
region, sales by foreign affiliates outweigh exports, but in developing regions, as expected,
exports are still the dominant mode of servicing foreign markets. Foreign affiliates in
North America and non-European Union member states, such as Switzerland, serve
foreign markets through international production more than foreign affiliates in other
regions. Sales of foreign affiliates in South, East and South-East Asia were higher than
those in Latin America in the 1990s. During the past decade, sales by TNCs based in
developing Asia have been rising. Sales of foreign affiliates are also increasing rapidly
relative to imports. In Latin America (as well as in developing Oceania) sales of foreign
affiliates are more than twice as large as imports (table I.3). By the mid-1990s, sales of
foreign affiliates were higher than imports of South, East and South-East Asia.
Source: UNCTAD.
a Worldwide sales are estimated by extrapolating the worldwide sales of foreign affiliates of TNCs from Germany,
Japan and the United States for 1982 and France, Germany, Italy, Japan and the United States for 1994 (for France, 1992 data)
on the basis of the shares of these countries in the worldwide inward FDI stock. Regional sales are estimated by applying the
share of each region in the worldwide inward stock to the estimated worldwide sales. Sales attributed to the region’s TNCs are
estimated by applying the share of each region in the worldwide outward stock to the estimated worldwide sales.
17
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
has increasingly flowed into the services sector. At the same time, the share of exports
directed to affiliated firms (parent firms and other foreign affiliates) in total exports of
foreign affiliates increased. Complex integration strategies pursued by TNCs and the
proliferation and deepening of regional integration schemes have facilitated trade among
affiliates of the same TNC system. More than a half of foreign affiliate exports of Japanese
and United States TNCs are conducted on an intra-firm basis (Japan, MITI, 1994; and
United States, Department of Commerce, 1997). More than 40 per cent of the exports by
parent firms of these TNCs are shipped to their foreign affiliates.11 All in all, around
one-third of world trade takes place within transnational corporate networks (UNCTAD,
1995a). The ratio of non-arm’s-length transactions to those of an arm’s-length nature
increased from 1.6 in 1982 to 1.9 in 1994.12 This implies that about two-thirds of
international transactions are associated with the international production of TNCs. In
the case of the United States, arm’s-length transactions accounted only for one-fifth of
all transactions (UNCTAD, 1995a, p. 39) in 1992, rising from 14 per cent in 1982. For
Japan, intra-firm transactions associated with international production relative to arm’s-
length transactions (4.7 times as large as arm’s-length trade in 1994) have become even
more important than in the United States (3.5 times as large as arm’s-length trade in
1994). A decade earlier, Japan’s share of intra-firm transactions was less than twice as
large as arm’s-length trade, and considerably lower than the share for the United States.
18
Chapter I
The desire of governments Figure I.13. Types of changes in FDI laws and regulations, 1996a
to facilitate FDI flows is also
reflected in a dramatic increase in
the number of bilateral investment
treaties (BITs) for the protection and
promotion of investment during
the 1990s. As of 1 January 1997,
there was a total of 1,330 such
treaties in the world, involving 162
countries (annex table B.10),
compared with less than 400 at the
beginning of the 1990s. More than
two-thirds of these treaties came
into existence during the 1990s,
around 180 in 1996 alone -- a rate
of almost one every other day.
Source: UNCTAD.
a There were 138 changes in 114 measures that were implemented
The pattern of BITs has
in 65 countries.
changed considerably. Historically,
virtually all BITs had one developed country as a partner, and such countries accounted for 83 per
cent of all BITs at the end of the 1980s. But, by 1996, only 822 BITs, or 62 per cent of the worldwide
total, involved developed countries (figure I.14).
The countries of Central and Eastern Europe have adopted this treaty practice energetically
since the late 1980s, concluding many such treaties among themselves, as well as with developed
and developing countries. Indeed, Romania has 82 BITs, more than any other non-OECD country.
Of some 530 BITs concluded by countries of this region by 1996, 16 per cent were with one another,
and 39 per cent with developing countries. The trend reflects a readiness to protect FDI and to fill a
gap in investment protection legislation while reforms of national laws are being undertaken.
Figure I.14. Growth of BITs, 1959-1996
Developing countries, too,
(Cumulative)
began to conclude BITs with one
another, increasingly with other
developing countries in the same
region (figure I.15). To date, 16 per cent
of all BITs are among developing
countries, up from 11 per cent at the
end of the 1980s. In 1996 alone, nearly
one-third of all BITs concluded were
between developing countries, led by
China, Chile, Algeria and the Republic
of Korea. This development reflects
the emergence of firms from
developing countries as outward
investors. Thus, developing countries
accounted for 15 per cent of world FDI
outflows in 1996, compared with only
Source: UNCTAD, BITs database. 3 per cent in 1980. In Asia, for
19
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
example, some 40 per cent of all Figure I.15. Growth of intra-regional BITs in developing
FDI flows into the developing countries and economies in transition, 1960s through 1990sa
countries in the region originate (Cumulative number)
in other Asian developing
countries.
Among developing
countries, China has concluded
the most treaties, followed by the
Republic of Korea, Argentina and
Egypt. African countries recently
concluded BITs at a slower pace
than in previous decades. To
date, they have concluded 267
BITs, with 45 African developing
countries having at least one
treaty. Developing countries in
Latin America and the Caribbean
have been actively adopting this
Source: UNCTAD, BITs database.
treaty practice only recently. By a Up to 1996.
1996, 31 countries in that region
had concluded one or more BITs, totalling 261, of which 37 are between countries in the region.
There has also been a sharp rise in the number of BITs concluded by Asian and Pacific countries
in the 1990s. Currently, 33 countries in that region have concluded a total of 491 BITs (compared
with 146 by the end of the1980s), with the number of intra-regional BITs increasing to 75.
Global payments of fees and royalties for technology quadrupled to an estimated $48
billion between 1983 and 1995.13 If data for the United States and Germany are indicative, some
four-fifths of these payments take place between parent firms and their foreign affiliates (table
I.5). This phenomenon underscores the close relationship between FDI and intangible technology
flows, as well as the strong proprietary asset base of FDI.
But technology flows also take place independently of FDI. This is reflected in the
payments for intellectual property rights and related specialized services and the growing
strategic partnerships between unaffiliated firms. Thus, although much of the trade in technology
takes place between affiliated companies in different countries, there has also been a significant
increase in technology flows and linkages between unaffiliated firms. For the United States
there has been an increase of 175 per cent in United States-sourced technology flows among
unaffiliated firms between 1986 and 1995 (United States, Department of Commerce, 1996a). In
Japan, while royalty and fee receipts for technology and technical services take place largely on
an intra-firm basis -- from foreign affiliates to parent firms -- payments for technology for patents
are made mostly to unaffiliated foreign companies in the United States and Europe (Japan,
Bank of Japan, 1996; and Japan, MITI, 1989 and 1994). Technology flows through unaffiliated
companies are also important for some developing countries, such as India, the Republic of
Korea and Malaysia, in which large national firms have entered into arm’s-length technology
agreements with foreign firms (Singh, 1991).
20
Chapter I
Table I.5. Receipts and payments of technology-related flows in selected developed countries, 1995
(Millions of dollars)
Source: UNCTAD, based on France, Banque de France, 1996; Japan, Bank of Japan, 1996 and MITI, 1994;
Deutsche Bundesbank, 1996; United Kingdom, Central Statistical Office, 1996; and United States, Department of
Commerce, 1996a.
a 1992 (fiscal year).
• The dominance of United States firms in royalty and fees receipts. In 1995, United States firms
received an estimated $27 billion in royalties and licence fees (table I.5), accounting for
56 per cent of total global receipts, compared with $6 billion and 50 per cent in 1983
(IMF, 1996b).
• A high degree of concentration of royalty and fees receipts among a few developed countries.
Technology exchanges in terms of patents, royalties and licence fees between the United
States on the one hand, and Japan, Germany, United Kingdom, France and the
Netherlands on the other hand, have been large and increasing. Some 20 per cent of
United States firms’ 1995 receipts were accounted for by transfers from Japanese firms
alone. Germany, the United Kingdom, France and the Netherlands together accounted
for another 33 per cent (United States, Department of Commerce, 1996a). In most
countries other than the United States, increases in technology receipts have not been
enough to offset payments. Technology transactions of German firms have been mostly
with companies in developed countries, although there has also been a substantial increase
in affiliate and non-affiliate licensing to certain developing countries (Deutsche
Bundesbank, 1996). For French firms, transactions with developing countries in the
form of non-affiliate licensing and technological services have been increasing steadily
since the 1980s (France, Ministère de l’Économie et du Budget, various issues). Outflows
of technology from Japan, often accompanying FDI, have tended to concentrate on the
United States and certain Western European countries, as well as in the newly
industrializing economies of South-East Asia (Japan, Bank of Japan, 1996).
• Small technology flows to developing countries. While most regulatory measures as regards
foreign technology agreements have been liberalized substantially, the boom in FDI flows
to developing countries has not always been accompanied by a boom in technology
21
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
flows. In China, technology payments did not increase in line with FDI inflows during
the mid-1990s. This can be partly explained by the gap between when an investment
takes place and when payments for technology are made (although it is also possible
that foreign affiliates do not always pay fully for the technology they receive or that
perhaps they are not always permitted to do so). In the Republic of Korea, Singapore
and Taiwan Province of China, however, technology imports and technology payments
have tended to be high. This reflects the fact that technology flows are concentrated in
high-technology industries, such as micro-electronics or new materials. In developing
countries, royalty payments for manufacturing technology generally reach their peak
only 3-4 years after the initial investment has taken place. Thus, higher technology
payments associated with the large investment flows to developing countries in the
1990s are likely to materialize only in the second half of the 1990s. In the case of royalties
for patents that can be absorbed rapidly in new products and processes, as is often the
case for patent-related transactions among developed-country firms, the time gap
between the initial investments and payments receipts for technology may be much
smaller.
• Differences in the pattern of technology flows between developed and developing countries. A
high proportion of technology payments by, for example, Japanese and Western European
companies relates to royalties for the use of patents. In few cases are royalties paid for
unpatented know-how. These payments cover a wide range: from biotechnology, new
materials and information technologies, to industrial automation, software,
telecommunications, space and aeronautics. They also cover new patents in chemicals,
food and beverages, machinery and equipment. In the case of developing countries,
technology flows are directed to high-technology industries, mainly in the Asian newly
industrializing economies, Brazil and Mexico. By contrast, much of technology flows to
other developing countries, including China and India, relates to industrial know-how.
In sum, the liberalization of regulatory policies on foreign technology agreements has not
been sufficient to bridge the technology gap between developed and developing countries. Whether
the implementation of the Uruguay Round Agreement on trade-related intellectual property rights
would lead to increased technology flows to developing countries is still unclear (UNCTAD, 1996b).
The evidence for developed countries so far suggests that, while stronger intellectual property rights
are important for FDI in some industries (e.g., pharmaceuticals) and can influence the speed of
investment and technology flows, their effects on FDI often depend on such factors as the size of the
domestic market, the structure of production factors, technological infrastructure and the
macroeconomic policy environment.
22
Chapter I
Expressing nominal FDI in real terms involves adjustments for both exchange-rate
fluctuations and changes in price levels in countries that are host as well as home to TNCs.
Estimating FDI (and other financial flows) in real terms is made difficult by various statistical
and methodological problems:15
• There are no price and quantity elements in FDI required to construct price indices.
• Since inward and outward FDI involve a variety of different currencies, an index
capturing fluctuations between them is difficult to devise.
• Because FDI includes, by definition, funds from at least two countries, at least two different
price deflators should be considered.
• Some FDI is used to acquire investments in intangible or financial assets, the value of
which is difficult to measure.
All these complexities and difficulties make it difficult to construct a price index for FDI that
addresses both exchange-rate and price fluctuations.
What, then, is the most appropriate index to be used? Since inward FDI takes place in a
host country, one candidate is the investment deflator (the implicit price index of capital formation
in that country’s national accounts). However, since FDI is also a cross-border flow, discounting
nominal FDI by the investment deflator may result in an overestimation because the exchange
rate used to convert foreign-currency denominated FDI into local currency may already reflect
the inflation rate of the host country concerned. If either the investment deflator or the GDP
deflator is applied to FDI inflows received by some Latin American countries during the period
of hyper-inflation, the revalued FDI flows turn out to have unrealistically high levels.16
Bearing all these problems in mind, revaluing nominal FDI inflows using a different
import-price index of each country and 1987 as the base year makes inflows larger than their
nominal level prior to 1990 and smaller after 1990 (figure I.16).17 Expressed in real terms, FDI
flows declined in 1972 and 1990 (and also during 1975-1976, 1982-1983 and 1991). In nominal
terms, FDI inflows declined in 1985, but not in real terms. In general, growth rates of real FDI
flows are more moderate than those of nominal FDI flows (annex table A.6). Not surprisingly,
real FDI flows during the 1970s and early 1980s did not grow as much as nominal flows, or as
real flows during the late 1980s. This supports the general view that FDI has grown rapidly
only since the mid-1980s. The real value of global FDI inflows in 1996 was only twice as large as
the 1987 level, compared with 2.5 times if FDI is expressed in nominal terms. The distribution
of FDI inflows between developed and developing countries does not show remarkable
differences between real and nominal FDI flows. The relative importance of developing countries
remains the same when FDI inflows are expressed in real terms.
Revaluing FDI stocks in real terms is even more complicated. Data on FDI stocks collected
by countries are, in most cases, unadjusted book values. They reflect the prices of assets etc., at
the time when the investment was made. Before making any attempt to estimate constant-price
23
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
FDI stock, it is therefore necessary to adjust book values to current-period prices. Australia and the
United States have to date estimated FDI stocks in current prices. The United States Department of
Commerce has revalued historical-cost (valued in the prices at the time of acquisition) FDI positions
on the basis of current costs and market values.18 This estimation, however, does not show FDI
stocks in real prices, but only reflects current-period prices of direct investment positions.
In the absence of a method of estimating real FDI stocks, the accumulation of real FDI flows
is used here as a proxy. One way of doing this is to revalue changes in FDI stocks between consecutive
years by a market-value index (e.g., a share-price index) and then to adjust these values using constant
exchange rates (Gray and Rugman, 1994). The revalued FDI stock is an accumulation of adjusted
flows. Another way is to cumulate real FDI flows adjusted by the import-price index as calculated
24
Chapter I
above. Cumulating real FDI flows for the period 1970-1996 gives rise to a real FDI stock valued at
$2.8 trillion in 1996, only 0.1 per cent lower than the value of the FDI stock calculated by cumulating
nominal FDI flows. Neither method, however, takes into account the components of changes in the
FDI stock, such as gross investments, retirements and depreciation (Bellak and Cantwell, 1996).
Both methods of estimation give only rough approximations of the size of real FDI stocks.
As discussed in the previous section, FDI data -- the commonly used measure of direct
investment abroad by TNCs -- suffer from valuation and other data-related problems. They also do
not reflect the actual size of investment in foreign affiliates from other, fundamental, perspectives.
Specifically, they include funds involving only a TNC (parent firm and foreign affiliates) and exclude
funds for investment raised outside the TNC. Given the many external sources of funds available to
TNCs, funds used in direct investment projects that have been raised outside a TNC are likely to be
quite significant. All this has considerable implications when assessing the importance of the capital
component of international production in relation to domestic investment or other economic variables.
Direct investment abroad, as currently measured by FDI data, is estimated on the basis of
financial transactions between parent firms and their foreign affiliates in the form of equity or loans,
or earnings of affiliates that are not repatriated. Specifically, it comprises equity capital that includes
capitalized investment “in kind” (e.g., capital goods), intra-firm loans (loans from parent firms to
foreign affiliates or from foreign affiliates to parent firms) and reinvested earnings of foreign affiliates
(earnings that are retained and not repatriated, usually, but not necessarily, invested in direct
investment projects in the host country). But foreign affiliates can be financed from other sources as
well. Among these are: loans obtained by parent firms or foreign affiliates from commercial financial
institutions in host or third countries; funds raised by parent firms or foreign affiliates in host or third
country capital markets; and loans received by foreign affiliates from home country financial
institutions.
The importance of funds raised from these sources is apparent from an examination of how
the total assets of majority-owned (non-bank) foreign affiliates of United States-based TNCs are
financed (annex table A.7). In 1994, the latest year for which a complete breakdown is available,
parent firms financed slightly more than one-third of the value of the total assets of their foreign
affiliates. (That share includes the parent firms’ share of their affiliates retained earnings.) Most of
these assets were financed by debt instruments: around 30 per cent of the assets was financed by
financial institutions located in the country of the foreign affiliate. Retained earnings of foreign
affiliates (including the share of owners other than the parent firm) financed 15 per cent of these
assets.
This suggests that the value of capital that TNCs mobilize and control abroad annually
in direct investment projects can be approximated by looking at year-to-year changes in total
assets of foreign affiliates. The value of these assets reflects funds from sources other than the
25
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
TNC itself, and as such it gives a Figure I.17. World FDI outflows and changes in global
more accurate picture of the size foreign-affiliate assets,a 1982-1994
of annual investment abroad by (Billions of dollars)
TNCs. Changes in worldwide
foreign-affiliate assets, estimated
on the basis of United States and
German data, indicate that annual
investment abroad by TNCs are, in
some years, considerably above
the levels indicated by FDI flows
alone (figure I.17). This confirms
the picture that emerges from the
financial composition of total
assets of United States affiliates
abroad, namely, that sources of
funds other than the TNC itself
(parent firm and foreign affiliates) Source: UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database and UNCTAD estimates.
finance nearly two-thirds of a Between consecutive years. Global assets are estimated by applying
foreign-affiliate total assets (annex the share of world FDI stock accounted for by Germany and the United States
to the foreign-affiliate assets of TNCs based in these countries. The data are
table A.7).19
for non-bank foreign affiliates only.
For the United States alone, the value of changes in majority-owned (non-bank) foreign-
affiliate total assets between
Figure I.18. United States and German FDI outflows consecutive years is considerably
a
and changes in foreign-affiliate assets between higher (and fluctuates more) than
consecutive years, 1982-1994 the value of FDI outflows (figure
(Millions of national currency) I.18). The change in the value of
foreign-affiliate assets between
1992 and 1993, for example, was
around $290 billion, almost four
times the level of the 1993 FDI
outflow. The same ratio applies to
Germany, where FDI outflows are
considerably smaller than the
value of changes in foreign-affiliate
assets (figure I.18).
26
Chapter I
TNCs from various sources for Table I.6. Financing direct investment abroad by
financing their foreign affiliates. United States and Japanese TNCs, 1994 and 1992
(With the exception of limited (Millions of dollars)
information available for the United
States and Japan, no other country United States, 1994 Japan, 1992 a
provides such data.) As an Transnational corporations 51 007 b 16 925
illustration for the United States, if Equity outflows 12 666 17 166
all means of financing foreign Reinvested earnings 31 730 ..
Intra-firm loans 6 611 - 238
affiliates are taken into account, the Other home-country sources -22 808 c 4 088 d
size of investment abroad in 1994 Host-country sources 59 394 c 3 041 e
would be more than $200 billion, Sources in other countries 117 647 c 43 222 f
around four times higher than the Total 205 240 67 276
size of FDI outflows ($51 billion)
Sources: UNCTAD, based on United States, Department of
reported in that year (table I.6).
Commerce, 1997; Japan, MITI, 1994; and UNCTAD, FDI/TNC
(Virtually the same ratio applies to
database.
inward FDI in the United States: the a Fiscal year.
reported inflows of $50 billion in b “In kind” capital contributions of parent firms to their affiliates
1994 compare with $170 billion of and conversions of intra-company debt to equity are included in the equity
the estimated actual size (United component of FDI. Excluding the finance industry of the Netherlands
States, Department of Commerce, Antilles.
c Calculated as changes in financial position of foreign affiliates
1996b).) Interestingly, the value of between consecutive years. The data are for majority-owned non-bank
funds raised in host countries (e.g., foreign affiliates only. Therefore, the data are not strictly comparable to
loans from commercial banks) is those in the first four lines which are based on all foreign affiliates.
d Long-term loans from non-Japanese parent firms.
slightly more than the size of all FDI
e Long-term loans from local banks and affiliates of Japanese
outflows, while the value of funds
banks in host country.
raised in countries other than the f Debentures and corporate bonds in home, host or other country
home or host, is more than twice as plus long-term loans in other countries.
high as the level of all FDI outflows.
This underlines the importance of sources other than those captured by FDI data.
27
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
The ratio of annual investment in foreign affiliates, using all capital sources of FDI
outflows for both Japan and the United States, to FDI flows as reported in balance of payments,
has been stable over time, at approximately 4 to 1. On the assumption that this ratio applies to
all countries, the actual value of investment made by TNCs abroad -- the capital component of
international production -- can, therefore, be estimated to be in the neighbourhood of $1.4 trillion
in 1996 (figure I.19). This estimate is in line with the earlier estimate calculated on the basis of
changes in total foreign-affiliate assets between consecutive years (figure I.17).
For the fifth consecutive year, Royal Dutch Shell (United Kingdom/Netherlands) topped
the list of the largest 100 TNCs worldwide ranked by foreign assets (table I.7).20 Daewoo
Corporation (Republic of Korea) led the largest 50 TNCs originating from developing countries
for the second consecutive year (table I.8). The largest TNCs control the bulk of FDI stock in
many major home countries: in most of the countries for which data are available, the top 25
outward investors control over a half of the outward FDI stock (table I.9). For smaller home
countries the share controlled by the top 50 TNCs may be over 70 per cent.
For the first time, the list of the top 100 TNCs includes two TNCs from developing
countries -- Daewoo Corporation, a diversified firm with activities in many industries, and
Petroleos de Venezuela S.A., a state-owned petroleum firm. Their rank in the top 100 TNCs list
was 52 and 88, respectively. On average, a member of the top 100 club is about 10 times larger,
in terms of total assets, than a member of the top 50 club.
• Foreign assets. Total foreign assets of the top 100 TNCs amounted to $1.7 trillion in 1995,
compared to $79 billion total foreign assets of the top 50 TNCs based in developing
countries. Between 1993 and 1995,21 foreign assets of the top 100 TNCs increased by 30
per cent; the corresponding increase for the top 50 developing-country TNCs was 280
per cent.22 The ratio of foreign to total assets increased from 0.34 in 1993 to 0.41 in 1995
(the corresponding share for the top 50 developing-country TNCs rose from 0.1 to 0.17),
highlighting the continuous trend towards increased transnationality (table I.10).
• Foreign sales. Total foreign sales of the top 100 TNCs amounted to $2 trillion in 1995
(foreign sales of the top 50 developing-country TNCs were $120 billion). Foreign sales
of the top 100 TNCs increased by 26 per cent between 1993 and 1995. The ratio of
foreign-to-total sales increased from 0.43 in 1993 to 0.48 in 1995 and from 0.21 to 0.34 for
28
Table I.7. The top 100 TNCs ranked by foreign assets, 1995
(Billions of dollars and number of employees)
1 17 Shell, Royal Dutch c United Kingdom/Netherlands Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 79.7 117.6 80.6 109.9 81000 104000 73.0
2 83 Ford Motor Company United States Automotive 69.2 238.5 41.9 137.1 103334 e 346990 29.8
3 87 General Electric Company United States Electronics 69.2 228.0 17.1 70.0 72000 222000 29.1
4 22 Exxon Corporation United States Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 66.7 91.3 96.9 121.8 44000 82000 68.8
5 86 General Motors United States Automotive 54.1 217.1 47.8 163.9 252699 745000 29.3
6 27 Volkswagen AG Germany Automotive 49.8 58.7 37.4 61.5 114000 257000 63.4
7 43 IBM United States Computers 41.7 80.3 45.1 71.9 112944 225347 54.9
8 78 Toyota Motor Corporation Japan Automotive 36.0 118.2 50.4 111.7 33796 146855 32.9
9 1 Nestlé SA Switzerland Food 33.2 38.2 47.8 48.7 213637 220172 94.0
10 71 Mitsubishi Corporation Japan Diversified ...d 79.3 51.0 124.9 3859 9241 39.5
11 18 Bayer AG Germany Chemicals 28.1 31.3 19.7 31.1 78000 142900 69.3
12 6 ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd. Switzerland Electrical equipment 27.2 32.1 29.4 33.7 196937 209637 88.6
13 66 Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Japan Automotive 26.9 63.0 24.9 56.3 60795 e 139856 43.5
14 40 Elf Aquitaine SA France Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 26.9 49.4 27.8 42.5 40650 85500 55.8
15 32 Mobil Corporation United States Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 26.0 42.1 48.4 73.4 26300 50400 60.0
16 70 Daimler-Benz AG Germany Automotive 26.0 66.3 45.6 72.1 68907 310993 41.5
17 8 Unilever f United Kingdom/Netherlands Food 25.8 30.1 42.7 49.7 276000 307000 87.1
18 9 Philips Electronics N.V. Netherlands Electronics 25.2 32.7 38.4 40.1 221000 265100 85.4
19 10 Roche Holding AG Switzerland Pharmaceuticals 24.5 30.9 12.0 12.5 40422 50497 85.1
20 54 Fiat Spa Italy Automotive 24.4 59.1 26.3 40.6 95930 248180 48.2
21 59 Siemens AG Germany Electronics 24.0 57.7 35.5 62.0 162000 373000 47.4
e
22 33 Sony Corporation Japan Electronics 47.6 30.3 43.3 90000 151000 59.1
23 30 Alcatel Alsthom France Electronics 22.7 51.2 24.2 32.1 117400 191830 60.3
24 53 Hoechst Germany Chemicals 21.9 36.7 13.4 36.3 100035 e 161618 48.3
25 68 Renault SA France Automotive 21.2 44.6 19.1 36.8 40066 139950 42.7
26 62 Philip Morris United States Food/tobacco/beverages 19.5 53.8 27.7 66.1 88201 151000 45.5
27 24 British Petroleum United Kingdom Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 19.3 28.9 34.8 57.0 41350 58150 66.3
28 67 Du Pont (E.I.) De Nemours United States Chemicals 17.8 37.3 20.6 42.2 35000 105000 43.3
29 36 BASF AG Germany Chemicals 17.6 29.3 23.5 32.3 42850 106565 57.7
30 4 Seagram Company Ltd. Canada Beverages 17.5 21.4 9.5 9.7 14447 e 16100 89.7
31 23 B.A.T. Industries Plc United Kingdom Tobacco 17.5 55.1 29.3 36.3 155162 170412 67.9
32 79 Mitsui & Co., Ltd. Japan Diversified 16.6 68.5 66.6 163.3 3696 e 11378 32.5
33 28 Rhone-Poulenc SA France Chemicals/pharmaceuticals 16.1 27.6 12.4 17.0 47009 82556 62.8
34 38 BMW Germany Automotive 15.6 28.5 22.5 32.2 52416 e 115763 56.7
35 46 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. Japan Automotive 15.5 33.7 23.5 39.6 50937 e 96800 52.6
36 92 Itochu Corporation Japan Trading 15.1 72.0 45.1 186.6 2649 9994 23.9
37 29 TOTAL SA France Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 15.0 28.4 19.6 27.2 30215 53536 60.5
38 34 Ciba-Geigy AG Switzerland Chemicals 14.9 26.5 7.5 17.5 63674 84077 58.2
39 81 Nissho Iwai Corporation Japan Trading ...d 47.2 29.5 89.1 2103 e 6684 31.5
29
Chapter I
/...
(Table I.7, cont'd)
30
Ranking by: Assets Sales Employment
Policy
For. assets Index a Corporation Economy Industry b Foreign Total Foreign Total Foreign Total Index a
40 95 Hitachi, Ltd. Japan Electronics 14.7 102.7 20.5 94.7 80000 331673 20.0
e
41 16 News Corporation Ltd. Australia Media 14.5 24.1 9.0 10.3 22062 30000 73.5
e
42 89 ENI Group Italy Oil, gas, coal and rel. services ...d 55.9 12.4 37.3 15713 86422 25.6
43 76 Chevron Corporation United States Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 13.8 34.3 11.9 36.3 12434 43019 34.0
44 39 Dow Chemical Company United States Chemicals 13.5 23.6 11.2 20.2 22185 39500 56.2
e
45 91 Marubeni Corporation Japan Trading 13.4 71.0 42.8 144.9 2307 9533 24.2
46 51 Hewlett-Packard Company United States Computers 13.0 24.4 17.6 31.5 42049 102300 50.0
47 61 Texaco Incorporated United States Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 12.2 24.9 18.2 35.6 10460 28247 45.8
e
48 98 AT&T Corp. United States Telecommunications 12.1 62.7 8.7 51.4 54371 300000 18.1
49 48 Procter & Gamble Company United States Diversified 12.1 28.1 16.8 33.4 62000 99200 51.9
World Investment Report 1997: T
50 45 Robert Bosch GmbH Germany Automotive ...d 19.9 14.0 25.0 66000 158372 52.7
e e
51 85 Sumitomo Corporation Japan Trading 12.0 50.7 58.4 152.5 11200 29.5
52 56 Daewoo Corporation Republic of Korea Diversified 11.9 28.9 8.2 26.0 28100 39920 47.7
53 21 Saint-gobain SA France Construction 11.7 18.6 9.6 13.5 67064 89852 69.7
54 3 Holderbank Financiere Switzerland Construction 11.5 12.5 6.5 7.0 40473 43923 92.1
55 14 Cable and Wireless Plc United Kingdom Telecommunication 11.2 13.8 5.9 8.5 30466 39636 75.6
Transnational
56 77 Matsushita Electric Japan Electronics 11.1 75.6 28.9 64.1 107530 265538 33.5
e
57 69 Hanson Plc United Kingdom Construction 11.1 37.4 8.5 15.8 27034 65000 41.6
58 7 Electrolux AB Sweden Electronics 10.7 12.4 15.0 16.3 97351 112300 88.3
59 15 Volvo AB Sweden Automotive 10.7 20.7 21.8 25.6 67129 79050 73.8
e
60 55 Xerox Corporation United States Machinery and equipment 10.4 26.0 9.2 16.6 40717 85200 47.8
61 65 BCE Inc. Canada Telecommunications 10.2 28.4 10.7 18.1 46000 121000 44.4
e
62 82 Mitsubishi Motors Corp. Japan Automotive 10.2 27.7 7.8 33.0 8587 28383 30.3
63 74 International Paper United States Paper 10.1 24.0 5.5 19.8 30068 81500 35.6
64 2 Thomson Corporation Canada Publishing and printing 9.6 10.0 6.7 7.2 40000 44400 93.3
e
65 19 Grand Metropolitan Plc United Kingdom Food/beverages 9.5 17.5 11.4 12.6 45978 63533 72.4
66 90 Amoco Corporation United States Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 9.1 29.8 6.7 31.0 8872 42689 24.3
e
67 35 Michelin France Mechanical rubber goods 8.7 14.2 10.9 13.2 35091 114397 58.1
e
68 94 Nippon Steel Corporation Japan Metal ...d 42.0 5.6 27.5 8203 27583 23.5
69 13 Glaxo Wellcome Plc United Kingdom Pharmaceuticals 8.4 13.2 11.1 12.1 40392 54359 76.5
70 88 Fujitsu Limited Japan Electronics 8.4 40.3 10.3 35.1 50000 165000 24.9
ransnational Corporations, Market Structur
e
71 42 McDonald’s Corporation United States Recreation 8.2 15.4 5.3 9.8 125000 212000 55.5
72 57 Motorola, Inc. United States Electronics 8.3 22.8 17.0 27.0 63200 142000 47.9
73 50 Johnson & Johnson United States Chemicals/pharmaceuticals 8.2 17.9 9.7 18.8 44300 82300 50.3
74 5 Solvay SA Belgium Chemicals ...d 8.9 8.8 9.3 36608 38616 89.6
75 52 Canon Electronics Inc. Japan Computers 8.0 23.9 14.1 21.0 35101 72280 49.6
e
76 26 BTR Plc United Kingdom Chemicals 7.9 15.3 11.0 14.0 81329 125065 65.0
77 80 BHP Australia Metals 7.8 21.8 4.4 12.7 12900 48500 32.3
78 12 Northern Telecom Ltd. Canada Telecommunication 7.7 9.4 9.2 10.7 42689 63715 78.4
e
Structuree and Competition
79 84 Pepsico, Inc. United States Diversified 7.7 25.4 8.7 30.4 142008 480000 29.6
e
80 31 Coca-Cola Company United States Beverages 7.5 15.0 12.7 18.0 19238 32000 60.1
/...
(Table I.7, cont'd)
Ranking by: Assets Sales Employment
a b
For. assets Index Corporation Economy Industry Foreign Total Foreign Total Foreign Total Index a
81 47 Rtz Cra g United Kingdom/ Australia Mining 7.3 15.8 4.7 9.3 31616 51492 52.5
82 20 Petrofina SA Belgium Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 7.3 11.5 15.0 18.7 9262 13653 70.4
83 73 Mannesmann AG Germany Metals 7.2 15.8 7.6 22.3 42000 122684 37.9
84 58 Carrefour SA France Trading 7.2 13.1 11.2 29.5 51200 102900 47.6
85 11 SCA Sweden Paper 7.2 10.2 8.3 9.1 27165 34857 79.7
e
86 25 Pharmacia & Upjohn, Inc. United States Pharmaceuticals 7.2 11.5 4.7 6.9 22893 35000 65.4
87 100 Chrysler Corporation United States Automotive 7.0 53.3 5.9 53.2 25000 126000 14.7
88 64 Petroleos De Venezuela Venezuela Diversified/trading 6.8 40.5 24.5 26.0 13420 60007 44.4
e
89 63 Groupe Danone SA France Food 6.7 19.0 8.6 16.2 32770 73823 44.4
90 49 Sara Lee Corporation United States Food 6.7 12.4 7.1 17.7 91439 149085 51.7
91 72 American Home Products United States Pharmaceuticals 6.6 21.4 5.4 13.4 23196 64712 35.8
e
92 96 Toshiba Corporation Japan Electronics 6.5 51.8 12.7 47.7 36437 186000 19.6
93 97 NEC Corporation Japan Electronics 6.3 43.8 11.3 41.1 21059 152719 18.6
94 41 Thomson SA France Electronics 6.3 17.9 10.7 14.4 55215 96000 55.6
e
95 99 GTE Corporation United States Telecommunication 6.2 37.0 2.6 20.0 15751 106000 14.9
e
96 93 Atlantic Richfield United States Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 6.2 24.0 3.4 15.8 5168 22000 23.5
97 37 ICI United Kingdom Chemicals 6.1 14.7 9.5 15.9 45900 64800 57.4
98 60 United Technologies United States Aerospace 6.0 16.0 10.3 22.8 99700 170600 47.0
99 75 RJR Nabisco Holdings Corp. United States Food and tobacco 5.8 31.5 4.7 16.0 42066 76000 34.4
100 44 Pechiney SA France Metals 5.8 11.4 8.6 13.8 17979 37214 59.9
31
Chapter I
32
Table I.8. The top 50 TNCs based in developing economies ranked by foreign assets, 1995
(Millions of dollars and number of employees)
Policy
1 9 Daewoo Corporation c Republic of Korea Diversified/trading 11946.0 28898.0 8202.0 26044.0 28140 38920 48.4
2 12 Petroleos de Venezuela SA Venezuela Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 6796.0 40502.0 24488.0 26041.0 13420 60007 44.4
3 8 Cemex SA Mexico Construction 4226.7 8407.9 1435.2 2575.8 7300 17212 49.5
4 2 First Pacific Company Ltd. Hong Kong, China Electronics Parts 3779.2 6821.2 4694.3 5249.7 33467 45911 72.6
e
5 13 LG Electronics, Ltd. Republic of Korea d Electronics 15084.8 7100.0 12199.9 14113 34961 40.4
g
6 7 Jardine Matheson Holdings Ltd. Bermuda Diversified 3092.6 11582.7 7417.3 10636.0 140000 200000 55.5
7 14 Hutchison Whampoa Limited Hong Kong, China Diversified/retailer 2900.0 e 11699.0 1632.2 4531.0 16115 29137 38.7
8 23 YPF Sociedad Anonima Argentina Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 2551.0 11572.0 1960.0 4970.0 2275 9256 28.7
World Investment Report 1997: T
13 45 China Chemicals, Imp. & Exp., Corp. China Diversified/trading 2016.5 h 8317.6 0.0
14 42 Petroleo Brasileiro S/A - Petrobas Brazil Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 1881.5 31699.8 1274.0 23456.5 23 46226 3.8
15 32 Singapore Telecommunications Ltd. Singapore Utilities 1546.2 5661.7 66.2 2840.2 1625 10966 14.8
16 40 Hyundai Corporation Republic of Korea d Diversified/machinery 1485.2 11480.0 2432.7 15130.7 923 44736 10.4
17 38 Companhia Vale Do Rio Doce Brazil Mining 1471.0 14564.0 1407.0 5214.0 90 15573 12.6
g
18 19 Grupo Televisa S.A. De C.V. Mexico Media 1385.0 3215.0 280.0 1149.0 6981 20700 33.7
19 18 New World Development Co. Limited Hong Kong, China Diversified/construction 1160.7 12395.6 470.9 2159.3 33550 45000 35.2
20 11 Citic Pacific Ltd. Hong Kong, China Diversified/trading/automotive 1069.6 5093.5 693.7 1401.1 7900 11500 46.4
g
21 1 Panamerican Beverages Inc. Mexico Beverages 1003.6 1372.1 1236.3 1608.3 21001 28000 75.0
g
22 3 Gruma S.A. De C.V. Mexico Food 992.5 1095.5 537.7 995.1 9834 13598 72.3
23 10 Dairy Farm International
Holdings Ltd. Hong Kong, China Retailing 965.8 2934.8 3979.5 6235.5 24956 51600 48.4
24 36 Companhia Cervejaria Brahma Brazil Beverages 962.8 3310.2 173.2 2304.7 541.0 8467.0
25 6 Fraser & Neave Limited Singapore Beverages 957.0 3199.0 1066.0 1809.0 8190 10064 56.7
e g
ransnational Corporations, Market Structur
26 21 Acer Group Taiwan Province of China Electronics 3645.0 2493.6 f 5825.0 4324 15352 31.7
e g
27 29 Keppel Corporation Limited Singapore Diversified 11217.7 269.7 1701.6 3420 13128 16.5
28 30 San Miguel Corporation Philippines Beverages 840.7 3328.4 324.5 f 2953.0 3536 31485 15.9
29 5 Guangdong Investment Limited Hong Kong, China Miscellaneous 839.6 1519.7 642.3 1059.1 6008 7434 65.6
30 33 South African Breweries Limited South Africa Beverages 819.0 5062.0 1127.0 7663.0 12983 110100 14.2
g
31 20 Tatung Co. Taiwan Province of China Electrical 813.0 e 2929.2 1083.0 f 3099.9 9543 27254 32.6
32 26 Sime Darby Berhad Malaysia Diversified 755.9 10631.8 2169.8 4320.5 6900 28635 27.1
h h h h
33 46 China Metals and Minerals China Diversified/trading 754.0 2390.3 0.0
34 15 Dong-ah Construction Ind. Co. Republic of Korea d Construction 738.0 4256.0 1065.0 2850.0 8425 14619 37.4
Structuree and Competition
35 27 Genting Berhad Malaysia Hotels and motels 691.5 2282.9 61.5 982.3 18.3
/...
(Table I.8, cont'd)
Ranking by: Assets Sales Employment
a b
For. assets Index Corporation Economy Industry Foreign Total Foreign Total Foreign Total Indexa
h h h
36 47 China Harbours Engineering Group China Diversified/construction 596.0 442.5 0.0
37 22 Wing on Company International
Limited Hong Kong, China Retailers 576.0 1344.0 40.0 366.0 1435 4006 29.9
38 24 Barlow Limited South Africa Diversified 567.1 2320.5 1525.4 4369.0 7711 30660 29.9
h h h h
39 48 China Shougang Group China Diversified/metals 468.7 1127.0 0.0
40 49 China Cereals, Oils, Food
h h h h
Import and Export China Diversified/trading 467.3 6230.0 0.0
41 37 Sadia Concordia S/A Industria Brazil Food 445.0 1784.0 397.0 2904.0 135 32767 13.0
42 4 Creative Technology Ltd. Singapore Electronics 405.0 661.2 1175.0 1202.0 2048 4185 69.3
43 31 Vitro Sociedad Anonima Mexico Miscellaneous 385.0 3129.0 393.0 1878.0 3703 31001
44 28 Empresas CMPC S.A. Chile Pulp and paper 384.0 3110.0 260.0 1292.0 1919 10731 16.8
e g
45 43 Chinese Petroleum Taiwan Province of China Oil, gas, coal and rel. services 15406.0 248.0 f 11765.5 3651 2.1
g
46 16 Grupo Celanese SA Mexico Chemicals 343.6 1056.3 559.4 1369.1 2607 7104 36.7
e g
47 39 Formosa Plastic Group Taiwan Province of China Chemicals 2325.6 241.0 f 1650.0 3449 10.4
48 25 Hongkong and Shanghai Hotels Ltd. Hong Kong, China Hotel/transportation 319.0 2712.0 55.1 297.0 3014 5772 27.5
49 50 China Foreign Trade Transportation
h h h h
Corp. China Diversified/transportion 312.6 318.6 0.0
50 41 Ssangyong Cement Industrial
Co., Ltd. Republic of Korea d Construction 307.3 4001.0 207.6 4170.0 658 4488 9.1
33
Chapter I
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
the top 50 developing- Table I.9. The share of top TNCs in outward FDI stock,
country TNCs. The selected countries, 1995
top foreign sellers in (Percentage)
both lists are TNCs
Country Top 5 Top 10 Top 15 Top 25 Top 50
operating in the
petroleum industry. Australia a 45.0 57.0 66.0 80.0 96.0
Austria 10.0 17.3 22.2 30.5 44.0
• Foreign employment . Canada 22.6 33.5 40.1 50.1 64.4
Total foreign Finland 33.0 47.0 56.0 69.0 84.0
France 14.0 23.0 31.0 42.0 59.0
employment of the top Germany 17.5 29.3 35.0 41.8 51.5
100 TNCs amounted to Norway 63.8 75.2 81.1 86.8 92.9
some 5,800,000 in 1995 Sweden 23.0 37.0 48.0 59.0 76.0
and 470,000 for the top United Kingdom 28.0 40.0 47.0 57.0 71.0
50 developing-country United States b 19.0 33.0 42.0 51.0 63.0
TNCs.23 For the top Source: UNCTAD, based on data provided by national central
100 TNCs, the increase banks and statitistical offices.
in foreign employment a 1996.
between 1993 and 1995 b Preliminary estimate on the basis of 1994 data and foreign-affiliate
was 4 per cent, while assets.
total employment
decreased by 4 per cent. The ratio of foreign to total employment therefore increased
slightly from 0.44 in 1993 to 0.48 in 1995.24 Firms in the electronics industry are by far
the largest employers abroad, accounting for around 24 per cent of all foreign employment
of the top 100 TNCs (and, correspondingly, 16 per cent for the top 50 developing-country
TNCs).
• Trends by country of origin. The list of the top 100 TNCs is dominated by a few countries
in the European Union, the United States and Japan: 88 per cent of the foreign assets and
87 of the listed companies are accounted for by these countries (table I.11). Although the
number of entrees of TNCs based in the European Union, Japan and the United States
has not changed much over the past five years, the country composition of the list has
changed: while the number of the United States TNCs has remained almost the same,
the number of Japanese TNCs
Table I.10. Transnationality index, by industry, 1993 and 1995 increased and that of the European
Union TNCs declined. The list of
(Percentage)
the top 50 developing-country
Top 50 developing- TNCs is dominated by the
Top 100 TNCs country TNCs Republic of Korea, Hong Kong,
Industry 1993 1995 1993 1995 China, Mexico and increasingly
All industries 47 51 19 32 China. Some two-thirds of the
foreign assets and 28 of the listed
Petroleum and mining 54 50 3 18
Food and beverages 61 61 16 37 companies are accounted for by
Construction 72 68 23 28 TNCs from these economies.
Metals 45 38 5 -
Chemicals and pharmaceuticals 41 59 - 20 • Trends by industry. Petroleum
Automotive 60 44 - - and mining as well as electronics
Electronics 42 49 28 44
were among the largest industries
Source: UNCTAD, in cooperation with Erasmus University. in terms of foreign assets and sales
in each of the lists (table I.12).25
34
Chapter I
Three TNCs of each industrial sector feature among the top 5 firms in both lists.
Automotives, as well as pharmaceuticals and chemicals, feature prominently, but more
so in the list of the top 100 TNCs than in the list of the top 50 developing-country TNCs
(table I.12).
Table I.11. Geographical concentration of TNCs by foreign assets, foreign sales,
foreign employment and number of entries
(Percentage of total and number)
Top 100 TNCs
Region/economy Foreign assets Foreign sales Foreign employment Number of entries
European Union 37 38 46 39
France 9 8 9 11
Germany 12 11 12 9
Netherlands 8 8 10 3
United Kingdom 12 12 15 11
Japan 16 26 10 18
United States 33 27 30 30
Table I.12. Distribution of foreign assets, foreign sales and foreign employment of the top 100 TNCs and
the top 50 developing-country TNCs, by industry, 1995
(Percentage)
35
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
2. Future trends
The unprecedented increase in FDI flows makes it important for recipient countries to have
as clear an understanding as possible of the likely pattern of future flows and the factors that determine
where such investments will be made. A number of useful pointers are provided by a survey of
TNC managers , undertaken in 1996 (UNCTAD, Invest in France Mission and Arthur Andersen, in
collaboration with DATAR, 1997). The results suggest the following medium-term trends:
• A greater rreliance
greater eliance on mergers, acquisitions, alliances and joint ventur
mergers, es as vehicles for
ventures
international expansion (figure I.21). The particularly rapid growth expected for
international joint
ventures -- in particular Figure I.20. Future trends: significance of exports and
asset-augmenting joint production abroad, 1992-1996 and 1997-2001
(Number)
ventures (Dunning,
1995) -- reflects TNCs’
desire to share risks
and costs, and the need
for complementary
partners when entering
new countries (e.g.,
China), or developing
new products
requiring expertise in
several different areas.
Similar considerations
apply to strategic
Source: UNCTAD, Invest in France Mission and Arthur
alliances, inter-firm Andersen, in collaboration with DATAR (1997).
agreements and
Note: average of responses, where 0=not used and 4=very
corporate partnering. frequently used.
Further corporate
36
Chapter I
• Continued emphasis
on developing
countries. The survey
points to a marked
shift in priorities
f a v o u r i n g
international markets
at the expense of
domestic markets,
with developing Source: UNCTAD, Invest in France Mission and Arthur
Andersen, in collaboration with DATAR (1997).
economies likely to be
Note: average of responses, where 0=not used and 4=very
the main beneficiaries
frequently used.
(figure I.22). Most
respondents indicated that an increasing amount of investment would be directed to
developing Asia and, to a lesser extent, Latin America and Central and Eastern Europe,
while there would be little change in the level of priority attached for investment in
Western Europe and North America.27
37
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
- Industries in which internationalization is still limited, but practically all the factors
favouring a surge in FDI inflows are present: a shift in demand patterns favouring
developing countries; massive corporate restructuring in developed
countries; swift changes in technology and organizational approaches; and removal
of FDI barriers allowing rapid international expansion. This category includes such
industries as public utilities, especially telecommunications, and some non-financial
services, such as media and retailing.
- Industries in which there are powerful factors favouring FDI growth, but
internationalization has already progressed to a point at which the scope for further
expansion is limited. These industries span all forms of manufacturing,29 including
those involving advanced technology.
The survey responses point to a general rise in FDI flows over the next five years, with
outflows from the four main source regions increasing rapidly, and more so in the case of the
newly industrializing Asian economies (figure I.24): fifty per cent of all respondents expect to
increase FDI by over 20 per cent up to the year 2001, while 49 per cent consider that FDI will rise
by over 20 percentage points as a proportion of their investment budgets. Sixty-nine per cent of
companies in the sample based in the latter plan a considerable increase in investment abroad,
compared with 57 per cent in Europe, 54 per cent in the United States and 48 per cent in Japan.
For Asian TNCs, increased FDI is partly a response to a rise in domestic costs. High domestic
costs are also a factor in Europe, as are expected Europe-wide restructurings in a number of
38
Chapter I
major industries and the desire to expand in developing Asian markets. Foreign expansion by
United States firms will be driven by renewed competitiveness and sound finances, as well as
the desire to increase the contribution of sales abroad.
Notes
1 Hong Kong become a Special Administrative Region of the People's Republic of China, on 1 July 1997,
hereinafter referred to in this Report as Hong Kong, China.
2 Countries that attained a record high in FDI inflows in 1996 were: Cambodia, China, India, Indonesia,
Republic of Korea, Lao People’s Democratic Republic, Malaysia, Maldives, Pakistan, Singapore and
Viet Nam in South, East and South-East Asia, and Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Paraguay
and Peru in Latin America.
3 Data reported by KPMG.
4 Ross Tieman, “Business draw $38.5bn from overseas buyers”, Financial Times, 20 January 1997.
5 Shown by the share of FDI projects accounted for by mergers and acquisitions, which has remained
stable, at about 12 per cent between 1986 and 1992 (Japan, MITI, 1989 and 1994).
6 Data provided by IFR Securities Data Company, London and New York.
7 Some mergers and acquisitions were formed to exploit short-term commercial opportunities, while
strategic partnerships have longer-term goals in view.
8 According to data collected by MERIT-CATI at the University of Maastricht (Netherlands). This trend
is corroborated by data provided by the IFR Securities Data Company on the number of cross-border,
non-equity strategic R&D partnerships, the type of partnership that comes nearest to the definition of
strategic technology partnerships used by MERIT-CATI. The number of cross-border equity strategic
R&D partnerships increased from 66 in 1990 to 228 in 1995 (IFR Securities Data Company, London and
New York).
9 According to data provided by IFR Securities Data Company, London and New York. No data are
presently available after 1993 from MERIT-CATI to corroborate this finding.
10 This figure is calculated as the value of gross product (value added) of United States affiliates divided
by the United States FDI stock (United States, Department of Commerce, 1997).
11 For example, 42 per cent of exports by United States parent firms in 1994 and 43 per cent of exports by
Japanese parent firms in fiscal year 1992 were directed to their foreign affiliates (United States, Department
of Commerce, 1997 and Japan, MITI, 1994).
39
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
12 Non-arm’s-length transactions refer to transactions associated with the international production within
TNC systems (here, total sales of foreign affiliates and total intra-firm exports (exports to affiliated
firms abroad) of parent firms) and arm’s-length transactions refer to external trade only.
13 Besides royalties and fees for technology, there are a number of service transactions, several of which
are closely related to technology functions and are of an intangible nature, such as research and
development, training and management services. However, such data are often aggregated and not
separately available for foreign affiliates and unaffiliated companies.
14 The growth rates of FDI inflows adjusted only for foreign-exchange changes by expressing them in
SDRs, a basket of major countries’ exchange rates, compared with the growth rates of nominal FDI
inflows (in dollars) are as follows:
Item 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996
Source: UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database and IMF, International Financial Statistics, various issues.
15 The World Bank has estimated real global FDI flows by deflating them with the world’s import price
index (World Bank, 1993, p.51).
16 For example, in Brazil, the implicit deflator for gross domestic investment was 0.003 in 1970, 0.011 in
1975 and 308,756 in 1990, with 1987 as the base year (100).
17 A caveat needs to be made, namely that not all FDI flows entail the purchase of assets whose real values
fluctuate in tandem with prices of imported goods.
18 The current-cost method revalues a direct investment position by re-estimating the net stock of direct
investment capital (tangible assets on the asset side of the balance sheet) at its current cost, while the
market-value method revalues a direct investment position by re-estimating the owners’ equity portion
of the direct investment position at market value using indexes of stock-market prices. See, Landefeld
and Lawson, 1991.
19 Strictly speaking, this share is underestimated because parent firms have a claim on only a part of
assets of foreign affiliates, perhaps somewhere in the range of 25-30 per cent. In 1994, if the parent
financing can be measured by taking the direct investment position as a percentage of total affiliates
assets, parent firms financed 26 per cent of affiliate assets ($621 billion/$2,360 billion) (United States,
Department of Commerce, 1997a).
20 Industrial and service TNCs other than financial services (banking, insurance etc.).
21 The first year for which data are available for the top 50.
22 This percentage increase may be biased upwards reflecting a more complete list of developing-country
TNCs in 1995.
23 Foreign employment data on Chinese TNCs are not available and therefore not included in the total.
24 For the top 50 developing-country TNCs a similar calculation could not be undertaken because of
insufficient data.
25 Firms that cannot be associated predominantly with a single industry are classified as “diversified”.
This category appears more frequently in the list of the top 50 developing-country TNCs than in the list
of the top 100 TNCs.
26 Electronic sector TNCs in the top 50 TNCs outpaced their competitors in the top 100 TNCs considerably
in terms of transnationality increases.
27 These conclusions are in accordance with those of a similar survey of the top 100 TNCs worldwide
(UNCTAD, 1996a).
28 Similar conclusions emerge from other studies on the same subject. See in particular UNCTC (1992a)
for a review of the literature on factors influencing FDI, and Jun and Singh (1996).
29 With the exceptions of automobiles and consumer goods, where investment can be expected to rise
rapidly.
40
CHAPTER II
REGIONAL TRENDS
A. Developed countries
Developed countries invested $295 billion abroad and received $208 billion of FDI inflows in
1996. They accounted for 60 per cent of global inflows and 85 per cent of global outflows in that year,
shares that have been declining slowly but steadily in the 1990s (annex tables B.1 and 2). Among the
developed countries, the United Kingdom regained the second highest position in terms of both FDI
inflows and outflows after the United States in 1996 (figures II.1 and II.2). Measured in terms of
gross domestic product and gross (domestic) fixed capital formation, the economic contribution of
inward FDI was highest in Belgium-Luxembourg, Ireland, the Netherlands, New Zealand and
Sweden. On the same basis, the importance of outward FDI was highest in the Netherlands, Sweden,
Switzerland and the United Kingdom (figures II.3 and II.4). On the other hand, inward FDI in
Germany, Italy and Japan appears low in relation to the size and growth of their markets, though
international comparisons of FDI flows are fraught with problems because of differences between
the figures reported by host and home countries (box II.1).
The Triad (European Union, Japan and the United States) accounted for around 90 per cent
of both inflows and outflows of developed countries in 1996 (annex tables B.1 and 2). In recent
years, however, developing countries have become more important, both as FDI recipients from,
and investors in, the Triad (figure II.5). Outside the Triad, Australia (discussed below), Canada and
Switzerland have also emerged as significant outward investors, as well as FDI recipients (figure
II.2).
1. United States
In 1996, the United States was again the largest host and home country of FDI, receiving $42
billion more than the second largest host country (China) and investing abroad $31 billion more than
the second largest home country (United Kingdom). United States investment inflows and outflows
both reached about $85 billion (table II.1). Inflows increased by 39 per cent. Although outflows
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Figure II.1. FDI flows into developed countries, 1995 and 1996
(Billions of dollars)
Figure II.2. FDI outflows from developed countries, 1995 and 1996
(Billions of dollars)
42
Chapter II
Figure II.3. FDI inflows as a percentage of gross fixed capital formation in developed countries, 1995
(Percentage)
43
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Box II.1. Why do FDI flows reported by host and home countries differ?
differ?
According to a recent study by the German Bundesbank (Jost, 1997), 18 OECD countries
reported FDI outflows to Germany between 1984 and 1994 three times higher than inflows reported in
the balance-of-payments data of Germany ($80 billion and $21 billion, respectively). One reason for
this discrepancy is different thresholds in the definition of FDI. In the German balance-of-payments
data, this threshold is set at 20 per cent of the equity capital of the affiliate (before 1989, it was 25 per
cent). In contrast, many other investing countries use a threshold of 10 per cent, in accordance with
OECD and IMF guidelines (OECD, 1995; IMF, 1993). The higher participation threshold in Germany,
however, only explains a minor part of the difference between investors and German FDI data. More
important is the treatment of short-term financial operations of foreign affiliates, which until recently
were not included under direct investment in Germany’s statistics. Diverging valuation principles,
particularly as concerns reinvested earnings, is another source of discrepancy. Some countries include
unrealized book profits (i.e., valuation gains arising from changes in exchange rates), whereas others
do not. The resulting difference can be considerable: the discrepancy between the lower German
figures and those reported by the United States was over DM25 billion in 1984-1994 (Jost, 1997).
Italy also applies a 20 per cent threshold, whereas Japan has no definitive minimum threshold.
Other reasons for discrepancies in FDI flows reported by host and home countries include differences
in the treatment of unremitted branch profits, treatment of unrealized and realized capital gains and
losses, methods of data collection and reporting on FDI, and treatment of real estate, construction and
indirect investment by the affiliates abroad (UNCTC, 1992b, p. 15).
declined, their level was significantly above the annual average during 1991-1994 ($50 billion).
European Union countries
accounted for almost 68 per Table II.1. United States: FDI inflows and outflows,a
cent of United States inflows in 1995 and 1996
1996, slightly lower than the (Billions of dollars and percentage)
previous year, but their share of
outflows declined more Inflows Outflows
sharply (table II.1). Region/country 1995 1996b 1995 1996b
Nonetheless, the European Total (Billions of dollars) 60.8 84.6 93.3 85.4
Union received more than two-
Of which (per cent):
fifths of United States FDI Developed countries 102.0 c 99.9 72.4 66.5
outflows in 1996, more than Canada 7.4 8.5 8.3 9.4
any other region in the European Union 71.6 67.6 49.6 43.0
developed world. Japan’s Japan 8.6 16.2 1.7 3.9
Developing countries -1.9 c 0.1 27.4 29.1
share of United States inflows
Africa - -0.5 0.7 1.0
doubled in 1996, but was still
Latin America -3.6 c 0.2 15.7 19.7
far below its annual average South, East and South-East Asia 2.3 -0.5 8.8 7.5
share of one-third of these West Asia -0.5 1.0 1.1 0.7
inflows during 1988-1991, the Central and Eastern Europe - - 1.4 1.9
period of the Japanese
investment boom in the United Source: UNCTAD, based on data provided by the United States
States. The share of developing Department of Commerce.
a Data for outflows are somewhat different from those in annex table 2 as
countries in United States FDI
outflows increased to 29 per FDI in the Netherlands Antilles is not adjusted in this table.
b Preliminary.
cent in 1996 (table II.1), less c Negative FDI flows from developing countries, in particular from tax
than in the early 1990s. haven economies in Latin America and the Caribbean.
44
Chapter II
Sustained economic Figure II.5. Share of developing countries in the total FDI
growth in many countries was a outflows from, and FDI flows into, the Triad, 1987-1994
major cause of high United States (Percentage)
FDI outflows. Favourable growth
prospects and large and growing
consumer markets in developing
countries encouraged increased
interest from United States TNCs.1
By contrast, the European Union’s
still sluggish economic growth in
1996 and, perhaps more
importantly, the end of a major
phase of adjustment by United
States TNCs to regional
integration in Europe, caused the
European Union’s share of United
States FDI outflows to fall. That
share declined to 43 per cent in
1996, from 50 per cent in 1995, a
year when United States TNCs
engaged in a number of very large
mergers and acquisitions in
Europe. Source: UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database, and OECD, 1996b.
Equity inflows accounted for nearly two-thirds of United States FDI inflows in 1995 (United
States, Department of Commerce, 1996c). Reinvested earnings increased as well (by some $5 billion,
to almost $14 billion in 1995). The figures for total inflows, however, conceal significant differences
in approaches to investing in the United States (annex table A.8). European investors rely more on
intra-company loans for financing their investments in the United States. Declining interest rates in
several European countries, as well as Japan, encouraged this mode of financing. The share of FDI
flows from Europe into the United States accounted for by equity inflows was well below those of
other major home countries (annex table A.8). United States FDI inflows from Canada had the
highest share of reinvested earnings during 1994-1995, whereas reinvested earnings by Japanese
affiliates in the United States during the same period were negative.
More than a half of United States FDI outflows was financed by reinvested earnings during
1994-1995 (annex table A.8), a share that has increased in recent years. This is partly because the
profitability of operations in the United States has reduced the need for foreign affiliates to remit
earnings back to their parent firms and partly because foreign affiliates are using these earnings to
expand their own operations abroad.
45
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
2. Western Europe
Western
Western Europe received $105 billion and invested $176 billion abroad in 1996 (annex tables
B.1 and 2). As a region the European Union continues to record the biggest FDI inflows and outflows
in the world. However, the structure of European Union FDI changed significantly during the period
1990-1994. After intra-European Union FDI peaked in 1992, the official deadline for completion of
the internal market, the share of non-European Union countries in total FDI outflows from the then
twelve European Union members increased considerably, from 28 per cent in 1992 to 45 per cent in
1994 (figure II.6).2 The shift towards destinations outside the European Union would have been
even more pronounced if Austria, Finland and Sweden, which became European Union members in
1995, had not attracted soaring investment flows from European Union countries: indeed, European
Union countries accounted for 53 per cent of all inflows received by these three countries in 1994 ($4
billion), compared with 32 per cent in 1992 ($800 million).
Among non-European Union destinations, developing countries and the United States
received 13 per cent and 10 per cent, respectively, of total European Union FDI outflows (excluding
reinvested earnings) in 1994 (Eurostat, 1997). However, the European Union’s FDI outflows to the
United States, and the United States’ share of European Union outflows in 1994, were still well
below the levels of the late 1980s. Likewise, the share of Central and Eastern Europe in the European
Union’s outflows increased only by 1.4 percentage points (to 4 per cent) between 1992 and 1994. Not
surprisingly, the growth of European Union FDI in that region during the early 1990s, when “first
movers” established themselves there, was not sustained. “Followers” were probably reluctant to
invest in the region because of concerns regarding the speed of economic recovery in the region
during the transition period. European Union FDI outflows (excluding reinvested earnings) to non-
European Union members in Western Europe stagnated at $2 billion during 1992-1994, or 2 per cent
of total outflows (Eurostat, 1997).
More than a half of total European Union inflows have come from European Union members
over the past decade (figure II.6). Although some European Union countries continued to attract
large inflows, overall European
Union companies (as well as non-
European Union firms) invested Figure II.6. Share of intra-European Uniona FDI in total
less in the European Union in 1994 European Uniona FDI flows, 1985-1994b
than in the previous four years. (Percentage)
This was partly because of slow
economic growth, and possibly
also because they had already
adjusted to the completion of the
single market. This fall-off applied
especially to Japanese TNCs;
European Union FDI inflows
(excluding reinvested earnings)
from Japan dropped to almost $2
billion in 1994 compared with
almost $7 billion in 1990 (Eurostat,
1997). The same appears true,
though to a lesser extent, of the
most recent European Union
members: FDI outflows Source: Eurostat, 1997, p. 65.
(excluding reinvested earnings) a Twelve European Union member States only.
b Not including reinvested earnings.
from Austria, Finland and Sweden
46
Chapter II
to the European Union halved between 1990 and 1994, from $12 billion to $6 billion. Most of these
trends continued in 1994-1996, as recent data on German FDI inflows and outflows suggest (table
II.2).
About a half of both European Union FDI outflows and inflows during 1994-1996 were related
to cross-border mergers and acquisitions (annex tables B.1, 2, 7 and 8). However, these figured far
less prominently (in particular, in inflows) when compared with the importance of mergers and
acquisitions in those of the non-European Union countries. This suggests that it is more difficult for
foreign investors to acquire existing firms (e.g., through take-overs) in some European Union
countries, such as Germany and Italy, than in other developed countries (notably the United States).
On average, the European Union share of merger-and-acquisition sales of all developed countries
was considerably below the corresponding share of such purchases. One exception was during the
period prior to the start date for the internal market, when many non-European Union companies
engaged in mergers and acquisitions in the European Union, although most deals were still among
European Union companies.
3. Japan
While the recovery of Japan’s FDI outflows continued in 1996 -- $23 billion (on a balance-of-
payments basis) -- they were still only slightly over half their peak level of annual average outflows
of $41 billion during 1989-1991. On a notification basis, FDI outflow increases were 16 per cent in
1995 and 9 per cent in 1996 (fiscal year). When total outflows approached their 1989 peak, FDI
outflows in the manufacturing sector alone (based on notifications) exceeded the 1989 peak level.
Both balance-of-payments and notification data underestimate FDI outflows because they do not
include reinvested earnings. These are estimated to be $14 billion in manufacturing in 1994, nearly
the sum of equity investment and intra-company loans reported as FDI outflows in the balance of
payments and nearly twice as large as the reinvested earnings in 1989 (JETRO, 1997, pp. 31-32). If
reinvested earnings were added to the reported FDI outflows in manufacturing,3 investments in
manufacturing would in 1994 have exceeded the 1989 peak.
As in 1995, Japan’s outflows in 1996 were strongly focused on Asia and the United States.
Most Asian host countries increased their share of Japanese FDI outflows. But China’s share fell
from 9 per cent to 5 per cent, on a notification basis. This was mainly because investors responded to
Table II.2. Germany: recent developments in FDI inflows and outflows, 1994-1996a
(DM billion)
Inflows Outflows
Region 1994 1995 1996b 1994 1995 1996b
47
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
fiscal policy changes (elimination of the capital-goods import duty exemption) by advancing to 1995
investments planned for 1996. The United States attracted a rising share of Japanese FDI. Outflows
to Brazil in 1996 on a notification basis were more than three times their 1995 level as Japanese
investors responded favourably, though with some delay, to economic stabilization and liberalization
in Brazil. The engagement of Japanese investors in Central and Eastern Europe (including the Russian
Federation) continued to be very weak (about 0.1 per cent of Japan’s total outflows). The share of
Western Europe declined by 2 percentage points -- to 15 per cent -- in 1996, but there were remarkable
differences between countries in that region: Belgium and France received substantially lower
investment flows from Japan, whereas the United Kingdom increased its share of Japan’s outflows
by 1 percentage point.
The geographical pattern of the recent Japanese FDI outflows has changed since the peak
period of Japanese FDI in the late 1980s
and early 1990s (table II.3). The most
Table II.3. Geographical distribution of Japanese FDI
obvious difference is the shift from
outflows, peak period and post-recession period
developed countries towards South, (Billions of dollars and percentage)
East and South-East Asia. This partly
reflects the disposal of some large Post-recession
investments made in the United States Peak period period
during the late 1980s, which proved Region/country (1989-1991) (1994-1996)a
disappointing (e.g., the sell-offs of All countries (Billion dollars) 41.0 21
MCA, Inc. by Matsushita Electric
Developed countries (Per cent) 83.0 58
Industrial Co. and the Rockefeller United States 51.0 37
Group by Mitsubishi Estate Co. in European Union 23.0 13
1995). In 1995 alone, 75 Japanese
Developing countries (Per cent) 17.0 42
affiliates in the United States were sold South, East and South-East Asia 11.0 34
off or closed (and 103 new affiliates China 1.1 12
were established) (Toyo Keizai, 1996, p.
Central and Eastern Europe
12). The divestments also reflect
(Per cent) 0.1 -
changes in Japanese TNCs’ strategic
priority; their aim now is to maximize Source: UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database.
production efficiency and profitability, a The distribution share is based on the data for 1994-1995
a shift which favours investment in only.
South, East and South-East Asia. In
that region, the ratio of current income to sales of Japanese affiliates is more than twice that in the
United States or Europe.
Japan is well known for being a small FDI recipient. Investment inflows peaked at around
$3 billion in 1992, but dwindled thereafter, to only $42 million in 1995, when large divestments (of
$700 million) by Canadian firms took place. In 1996 inflows increased to $220 million. European
TNCs are the most important investors in Japan, undertaking investments of about $1 billion in
1996, a half of which originated in Germany. Hong Kong was the second largest investor after
Germany in that year. The sharp drop of FDI inflows after 1992 may be attributed to the fact that
Japan experienced three years of low economic growth after the burst of the “bubble economy”,
coupled with the appreciation of the yen until 1995.
Although total inflows are low, foreign affiliates operating in Japan have higher profits than
domestic Japanese firms (figure II.7) and some TNCs, especially from the United States, have
responded through FDI to profit opportunities. In 1993, investment income of United States affiliates
in Japan was less than 6 per cent of their FDI stock (annex table A.9). That share doubled within two
years, and the rate of return of United States FDI in Japan is now the same as the average rate of
48
Chapter II
return in all host countries. Figure II.7. Profitabilitya of foreign affiliatesb in Japan,
Meanwhile, reinvested earnings of 1988-1994c
United States affiliates in Japan (Percentage)
have soared and have even
exceeded equity and intra-
company loans (the other two FDI
components) from the United
States to Japan in certain years.
The rising share of earnings
reinvested in Japan suggests that
United States affiliates already
present in Japan are becoming
more confident of doing business
there.
4. Australia
Source: Japan, MITI, Gaishi-kei Kigyo no Doko (Tokyo,
During the early 1970s, Ministry of Finance Printing Bureau, various issues).
a Share of current income in total sales.
Australia, as well as New Zealand,
b All foreign affiliates and three major investors.
had the highest degree of c Fiscal year. The 1994 data for Germany and the United Kingdom
protection and the most restrictive are not available.
FDI regimes among the developed
countries (Anderson, 1995). By the mid-1980s, they both adopted far- reaching policies of
liberalization, deregulation and privatization.4 Investment inflows and outflows for Australia have
typically paralleled the global trend: a decline, followed by a strong recovery, followed by a surge in
the late 1980s. In 1994 and 1995, respectively, FDI outflows and inflows reached their highest-ever
levels (annex tables B.1 and 2). The predominant sources of FDI for Australia are Europe and the
United States; in 1995, they accounted for 62 per cent of the total stock (figure II.8 (a)). Japan is the
third largest source country, accounting for 15 per cent of the total stock. By contrast, in 1948, the
United Kingdom accounted for 95 per cent of all inflows (Australia, Bureau of Industry Economics,
1993). The decline in the importance of the United Kingdom is due to several factors, including the
orientation of its investments to other European countries and the rise in investment by United
States TNCs in the post-Second World War era. As with most countries, the increase in Japanese
investment into Australia was consistent with the general surge in outflows from Japan during the
late 1980s.
The United Kingdom is the most important destination for Australia’s outward FDI,
accounting for 38 per cent of its total stock as of 1995 (figure II.8 (b)). The second largest destination
is the United States, followed by New Zealand.
When it comes to sectoral distribution, services and manufacturing each received over a
third of Australia’s total FDI inflows in 1995 (figure II.9). However, the importance of the services
sector, which is soon likely to become the dominant sector for FDI,5 is a recent phenomenon. In the
late 1950s, mining and agriculture accounted for only 12 per cent of inflows, services for 11 per cent
and manufacturing for 77 per cent (Australia, Bureau of Industry Economics, 1993).
The most interesting aspect of Australia’s outward FDI, however, is the very low proportion
of these investments in East and South-East Asia. The ASEAN countries host only 6 per cent of
Australia’s outward FDI stock, and Hong Kong, China accounts for 1 per cent of that stock. As
recently as 1980, ASEAN countries and Hong Kong together held 46 per cent of Australia’s outward
stock. This decline is noteworthy for two reasons:
49
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Figure II.8. Australia's FDI inward and outward stocks, by country, 1995
(Billions of dollars)
• East and South-East Asia has been the most dynamic host region for world FDI
since the late 1980s (Bora, 1996a and 1996b).
50
Chapter II
Foreign direct investment often follows exports as a mechanism to enhance market access
(UNCTAD, 1996a). Yet, although East and South-East Asia’s markets have opened gradually over
the past twenty years, Australian investors seem to be turning away from that region. More puzzling
still, recent surveys have found that Australian investors still rank East and South-East Asia high as
an investment location in the short- to medium-term (Australia, Bureau of Industry Economics,
1995).
Several possible reasons for this paradox have been advanced. One is that Australian
investors have not been aware of the developments and opportunities in the Asia-Pacific region and
are risk averse (Australia, East Asian Analytical Unit, 1994). Another is that policies in East and
South-East Asia have also discouraged investment by restricting local equity, imposing sectoral
restrictions and lacking assurances against expropriation and compensation (Australia, East Asian
Analytical Unit, 1994; Australia, Bureau of Industry Economics, 1995). But while investment regimes
in South and South-East Asia may not be as open as those in developed countries, they are not
discriminatory, in the sense that preferences were granted to non-Australian investors (APEC, 1995a
and 1995b). Hence, none of these reasons explains Australia’s low FDI in East and South-East Asia.
A more plausible explanation may be the structure of Australia’s industrial base. Most
Australian firms in manufacturing that are not affiliates of foreign-based TNCs are of small or
medium size. Australia’s small and medium-sized enterprises have not yet reached a stage of
development that would allow them to internationalize significantly via FDI. In addition, they may
be discouraged from investing abroad as this appears to be associated with reducing domestic
employment. Furthermore, the parent firms of foreign affiliates in Australia historically have
sometimes discouraged their affiliates’ investments abroad, especially in Asia; instead, parent firms’
investments in Asia have been channelled through their existing Asian affiliates.
Another factor that requires closer investigation is the industrial structure of Australia’s FDI
outflows to East and South-East Asia compared with its factor-content of trade. Preliminary
investigations have found that the decline in the share of FDI going to the ASEAN region was almost
entirely in the manufacturing sector (Australia, Bureau of Industry Economics, 1995): in 1981, ASEAN
members held 68 per cent of Australia’s outward FDI stock in manufacturing, a share that collapsed
to under 5 per cent by 1987.6 The composition of exports to the region is also changing: primary
products now account for less than 30 per cent, a share that has been constantly declining over the
years (from nearly 40 per cent in 1989). The decline in FDI and increase in exports, however, should
be considered within the context of increasing exports aided by tariff cuts. The direction and
composition of FDI outflows are also influenced by large investments in one or two countries as the
level of Australian outward FDI is relatively low. Yet, the decline in the share of Australian FDI may
simply reflect a mismatch between the factors that make East and South-East Asia attractive as a
host for FDI and the “ownership” advantages possessed by Australian firms when they seek to
invest abroad. For example, a significant portion of FDI into East and South-East Asia has been in
labour-intensive manufacturing industries. Australian TNCs, however, do not have many
“ownership” advantages in this area; hence they have not been active investors in these industries in
the region. In general, compared to the services sector, the manufacturing sector in Australia was
not globally competitive until the late 1980s. The services sector is relatively competitive, but many
industries in this sector in Asia were not opened to foreign investment until recently. Supply factors
are the key to understanding changes in FDI structure. There is some evidence that Australian FDI
into Asia’s manufacturing sector is increasing, but there is little indication that the region will soon
regain its importance as a destination for Australia’s investments.
51
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
B. Developing countries
(a) Trends
The 48 least developed countries (LDCs) (32 of them in sub-Saharan Africa)7 have captured
very little of the increase in FDI flows into developing countries during the 1990s. Although their
annual average FDI inflows almost tripled between the periods 1986-1990 and 1991-1996, their share
of developing-country inflows declined from 2.1 per cent to 1.8 per cent. In comparison, the value of
goods imported by LDCs rose by 27 per cent between the periods 1986-1990 and 1991-1995 and their
share of developing-country imports fell from 3.4 to 2.3 per cent. Typically, LDCs suffer from a
variety of drawbacks that discourage FDI, not all of them readily amenable to policy reforms: the
small size of their domestic market (in terms of both population size and per capita incomes),8 poor
infrastructural facilities, adverse climatic conditions, remote geographical or land-locked positions
(in some cases) and political instability (see also UNCTAD, 1995b).
In 1996, flows to LDCs rose by 56 per cent. Cambodia, Angola and the United Republic of
Tanzania topped the LDC league in terms of absolute amounts (figure II.10). Vanuatu, Angola and
Liberia had the highest ratios of FDI inflows to gross fixed capital formation (figure II.11); as these
data indicate, FDI inflows are of great importance for some LDCs, much greater than for many
countries. Within the LDC group, FDI flows vary widely across regional groupings or individual
Figure II.10. FDI flows into the top 20 LDCs, 1995 and 1996
(Millions of dollars)
52
Chapter II
countries, as well as from year to year, with disinvestments or large repatriations of earnings in one
year followed by positive investment flows the next. African LDCs are the main recipients of FDI
flows in absolute terms, but their share in total LDC inflows of 91 per cent during the period 1986-
1990 declined, on average, to 50 per cent during the period 1991-1996. In contrast, the eleven LDCs
in South, East and South-East Asia and the Pacific have seen the absolute levels and their share of
LDC inflows increase from 8 per cent on average during the period 1986-1990 to 22 per cent during
1991-1996.9 Cambodia, with $350 million in 1996, was the star performer among them (box II.2).
While all South, East and South-East Asian LDCs, without exception, have captured growing
amounts of FDI inflows between the two periods mentioned above, only some two-thirds of the
African LDCs have succeeded in attracting more FDI.
The disparity between African and Asian LDCs reflects, in part, the importance for the latter
group of intra-regional FDI as a source of investment. In Myanmar, for example, developing Asia
accounted for 39 per cent of cumulative FDI inflows during 1990 and 1994. The corresponding figure
for Bangladesh was 83 per cent.10 Asian LDCs’ share of intra-Asian FDI, mainly from China, the
Republic of Korea, Malaysia and Thailand, averaged 6 per cent during the period 1991-1995, with a
peak value of 9 per cent in 1992 due to strong outward flows from Thailand. For example, between
October 1988 and end-September 1996 some 204 projects were approved by Myanmar, with Singapore
emerging as the leading source of FDI, followed by the United Kingdom, France and Malaysia (EIU,
1996a). With some United States TNCs, such as Pepsi Cola, and European TNCs, such as Carlsberg
(Denmark) and Heineken (the Netherlands) pulling out of Myanmar in 1996,11 the share of Asian
investments is likely to increase
53
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Cambodia has attracted larger FDI flows than any other least developed country in 1996 (see
figure II.10). In Cambodia FDI is a relatively recent phenomenon that has emerged on a significant
scale only after the conclusion of the United Nations peace-keeping operation in 1993. Upon taking
office after the United Nations supervised elections, the Royal Government of Cambodia moved quickly
to put in place an appropriate legal framework and to create the necessary institutions to promote FDI.
The Law on Investments adopted by the National Assembly in August 1994 created the Council
for the Development of Cambodia (CDC) and the Cambodian Investment Board, which operates as an
integral part of the CDC, and serves as a one-stop agency responsible for processing applications and
granting incentives to eligible investors. The major investment incentives listed in the law include:
eight-year exemption from corporate income tax; 9 per cent rate of corporate income tax; 5 year loss
carry-forward; exemption from import duties; repatriation of profits free of tax; and the distribution of
dividends free of tax.
Because the sub-decree implementing the Law on Investments has not yet been adopted (it is
expected to take effect in mid-1997), the application of the law has not followed a fixed pattern. The
CDC has developed a matrix for calculating eligibility for the tax holiday incentive based on the
following factors: capitalization, location, technology transfer, training, exports, value added,
employment of women, total jobs created, and the employment of the handicapped and veterans.
However, some observers are now arguing that the financial incentives are too generous, too much of
a burden on public revenue, and in any case larger than what is required to make Cambodia a
competitive investment environment.
The rise in FDI inflows since the inception of CDC has been impressive, especially considering
that Cambodia is a least developed country. From August 1994 to end-1996, CDC approved 405 projects
representing about $4 billion of proposed fixed capital investment and additional employment of about
145,000. These figures represent investors’ stated plans, rather than actual out-turns: the recorded
flow of direct investment to Cambodia over this period is significantly lower (see annex table B.1).
Data available so far for 1997 indicate that investors’ plans remain buoyant: the dollar value of projects
approved during the first four months of 1997 was more than twice that of the comparable period a
year earlier.
Like almost all least developed countries, Cambodia’s internal market is small and
characterized by the low purchasing power of consumers. Investment in Cambodia therefore tends to
be oriented towards production for markets abroad, making use of Cambodian raw materials and
inexpensive Cambodian labour. When ranked by the number of proposed jobs created, the most
important and most rapidly growing sectoral destination for investment is garment manufacture.
Investors have also shown interest in rubber and palm oil, wood processing and food processing.
Although its projected impact on employment is relatively small, investment in the tourist sector
accounted for a relatively large part of the total projected dollar value of fixed capital investment.
Because it tends to be oriented towards production for export, direct investment has been,
and will continue to be, influenced by trade policies. Cambodia has obtained most-favoured-nation
status with most developed countries — most recently with the United States — and this is influencing
direct investment, especially in the garment sector. Cambodia has also secured its participation in GSP
schemes — again most recently with the United States — and this can be expected to shape direct
investment in the period ahead. Finally, if and when Cambodia joins ASEAN, the country will participate
in the ASEAN Free Trade Area and the planned ASEAN Investment Area. This can be expected to
stimulate a further increase in investment flows from other ASEAN member states.
54
Chapter II
further. From August 1994 to the end of March 1996, more than a half of the investment in Cambodia
came from Malaysia and Singapore, with other economies (such as Canada, China, the United
Kingdom, Taiwan Province of China and Thailand) accounting for most of the rest.12 The ”flying
geese” model of industrial restructuring (UNCTAD, 1995a and 1996c), observable in the newly
industrializing economies of the region, has benefited many neighbouring South, East and South-
East Asian LDCs, by stimulating FDI into low-cost, labour-intensive activities in which these LDCs
have a locational advantage.
A similar industrial restructuring that would give rise to large and persistent flows of intra-
regional investment is, however, not observed in Africa at this stage, although southern African
LDCs could, potentially, benefit from such a process in the context of FDI from South Africa (see
below). Potentially, the North African countries could also begin to move low value added labour-
intensive production to their neighbours in the south, most of which are LDCs, as part of their own
industrial restructuring efforts.
The implication is that the opportunities available to Asian LDCs to integrate themselves
into the investment plans of TNCs from the newly industrializing economies of the same region, as
the latter upgrade their industrial structures, are not available yet to African LDCs, because such
restructuring is not presently taking place in Africa on a significant scale.
(b) Prospects
Prospects
Least developed countries are trying hard to attract more investment. Several have stepped
up their efforts to expand the size of markets by cooperating with neighbouring countries, through
such channels as preferential trade areas and speedy customs clearance. COMESA (Common Market
for Eastern and Southern Africa), a common market fostering economic growth through investment,
production and trade among 20 member States, is one example of such regional integration efforts.
The CFA Franc Zone of UEMOA (West African Economic and Monetary Union), of which Guinea-
Bissau became a member as of January 1997,13 is another example. Other regional cooperation
initiatives have been undertaken by the countries through which the Mekong river flows (Cambodia,
China, Lao People’s Democratic Republic, Myanmar, Thailand and Viet Nam), three of which are
LDCs. Together, they have planned several projects involving foreign private investors for improving
infrastructural facilities in transportation, telecommunications and power generation for the whole
region. For instance, some of the hydroelectric dams on the Mekong river and a fibre-optics
telecommunication loop for the region have attracted considerable foreign-investor interest. 14
Finally, if and when Cambodia, Lao People’s Democratic Republic and Myanmar become members
of ASEAN, these countries can benefit from the common investment regime being created for that
area, as well as any common investment promotion activities in the future.
Furthermore, several LDCs, particularly in sub-Saharan Africa, have stepped up their efforts
to attract FDI through wide-ranging reforms for greater liberalization, notably by eliminating foreign
exchange restrictions applicable to foreign investors; the privatization of state enterprises; the
establishment of “one-stop” shops; and policies to improve the overall macroeconomic environment,
together with the adoption of stable exchange rates. These efforts have been complemented, on the
international side, by the conclusion of 137 bilateral investment treaties as of 1 January 1997, of
which 25 are between countries within the same region; however, the density of these treaties is
lower for LDCs than for the three developing-country regions as well as Central and Eastern Europe.
For Asian LDCs, liberalization policies have already contributed to sizeable increases in FDI inflows,
illustrated by the recent FDI performance of Bangladesh.
55
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
With the easing or the end of prolonged conflicts in some African LDCs (e.g., Angola and
Mozambique), liberalization and the opening up of state-owned mining enterprises to foreign
investors, together with improved world mineral prices since 1994, signs of an FDI revival are
beginning to appear. Several major mining projects with foreign participation are planned or are
already under way: oil and diamonds in Angola, gold in Mali and the United Republic of Tanzania,
bauxite in Guinea and copper in Zambia (UNCTAD, 1995b). And as more welcoming FDI regimes
are set up and the domestic economic situation improves, foreign investors are seeking investment
opportunities outside mining, such as in fishing, cut flowers, fruits and vegetables, light
manufacturing and tourism. For example, Lesotho’s proximity with South Africa, the largest market
in the region, has prompted TNCs to invest in asparagus processing in the former (EIU, 1996e). In
turn, South Africa has invested in Lesotho’s cellular telephone development (EIU, 1996e) and in
December 1996 Peugeot (France) announced plans to produce components of a car model designed
for African markets in Madagascar. South African investors have also expressed interest in
Mozambique, in projects such as power links, an aluminium smelter and tourism development.
One obstacle to attracting FDI to LDCs has been the lack of information on investment
opportunities in most of those countries. Only 2 per cent of over 200 investment guides -- an
important medium for disseminating information on a country’s investment environment and
business opportunities -- published by the top six international accounting firms cover LDCs.17 And
only 6 of the 48 LDCs provide comprehensive guides to foreign investors.18 In today’s highly
competitive FDI market, a low level of awareness of the investment opportunities available, lack of
information on investment conditions and legal frameworks and lack of readily available information
on contact points in the countries themselves can hamper inward FDI.
2. Africa
(a) Trends
Foreign-direct-investment inflows into Africa increased 5.3 per cent,19 to almost $5, billion in
1996. (Investment trends for South Africa are discussed in box II.3.) Nigeria, Egypt and Morocco
topped the African league of the largest recipients in 1996 (figure II.12). But in relation to gross fixed
domestic capital formation, Nigeria, Angola and Seychelles head this league (figure II.13). Africa’s
share of developing-country inflows was 3.8 per cent in 1996, the lowest share since the early 1980s.
On average, Africa’s share of developing-country inflows has more than halved, from 11 per cent
during 1986-1990 to 5 per cent during 1991-1996. This suggests that Africa has not participated in
the surge of FDI flows to developing countries.
56
Chapter II
After a period of disinvestments (negative FDI inflows), FDI flows to South Africa reached
over $300 million both in 1994 and 1995 (box figure). A good part of that investment is concentrated in
the Gauteng province around Johannesburg, where 80 per cent of all foreign affiliates and more than
75 per cent of all persons employed by foreign affiliates are located (IRRC, 1996, p. 4).
United States' firms have made by far the largest investment commitments in South Africa
since the April 1994 election. These commitments, valued at 8 billion Rand, are more than twice the
level of commitments by German TNCs (3.2 billion Rand), the next most important investors. In terms
of employment, United States affiliates account for 60,000 of the 500,000 employees currently employed
by all foreign affiliates in South Africa (IRRC, 1996, p. 2). Other important sources of investment are
the United Kingdom, Switzerland, France, as well as the Republic of Korea and Malaysia.
The growth of FDI from Asia is an important new phenomenon. Investors from the Republic
of Korea plan major investments in the motor and auto-components industry,a while Malaysian TNCs
are concentrating on services (hotels, property and telecommunications) and petroleum. In 1996,
Malaysia’s Petronas announced plans to spend $436 million to purchase a controlling stake in Engen,
a large South African oil refinery.b Telekom Malaysia has formed a consortium with SBC International
(United States) which acquired a 30 per cent stake (for about $1.3 billion) in the privatized South
African Telkom in 1997.c
Food and beverages, motors and automobile components, electronics and information
technologies, some services and property were the most important recipients of FDI into South Africa
between May 1994 and May 1996. Food and beverages, as well as clothing, hotels and leisure, are
areas of strong interest to United States TNCs. German TNCs concentrate particularly on the
manufacturing sector, with a focus on motors and automobile components, while United Kingdom
TNCs invest in a variety of industries, including banking and other financial services, chemicals,
beverages, publishing and motor components (Business Map, 1996, p. 11). Between May 1994 and
May 1996, 74 per cent of all TNCs entering South Africa invested in the services sector, 24 per cent
invested in manufacturing, and only 2 per cent invested in mining (IRRC, 1996).
By establishing investment facilities in South Africa, TNCs also aim to supply the regional
and world markets. In particular, some automobile TNCs started to integrate their South African
affiliates into their international production networks, and export part of their output back to the
home country or to other countries. This puts pressure on other foreign affiliates to integrate their TNC
networks as well, in order to enhance their ability to access world markets and become more efficient.
For instance, BMW announced in 1995 that it would step up its investment commitments by 1 billion
Rand, to make its South African affiliate a full-fledged member of BMW’s global manufacturing and
distribution network.d
/...
57
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
58
Chapter II
• The absolute level of FDI flows into Africa is increasing, from an annual average of
$800 million during 1975-1980 to an annual average of $3.9 billion during 1990-
1996. Although rising from a small level, FDI inflows into Africa grew by fivefold
between the periods 1975-1980 and 1990-1996, compared with 4.7 times for Latin
America and sevenfold for developed countries as a whole. Asia, however, has
performed much better, mainly because the countries of that region have the benefit
of substantial interregional investment flows, and both Asia and Latin America have
shown a particularly dynamic FDI performance in the most recent years.
Figure II.12. FDI flows into the top 20 countries in Africa, 1995 and 1996
(Millions of dollars)
59
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
the level of development of Africa is lower, the difference between the performance
of Africa and that of other regions using this indicator is not that unexpected.
• While FDI flows into Africa account for only a small share of flows into developing
countries as a whole, the relative importance of the FDI inflows that the continent
receives is quite high: in relation to gross fixed capital formation during 1990-1995,
FDI flows accounted for 5.4 per cent, in comparison with nearly 5.5 per cent for
Asia, 8.4 per cent for Latin America and the Caribbean and 5.9 per cent for Western
Europe. There are a number of countries in Africa which, by this measure, received
more FDI than major developing countries in Asia and Latin America.
• While flows continue to be concentrated in a few host countries (Nigeria and Egypt
accounted for over a half of FDI into Africa during the first half of the 1990s), other
countries are beginning to receive sizeable inflows (box II.4).
• While FDI in the primary sector in Africa is, relatively speaking, far more important
than in other continents, the secondary and tertiary sectors together now account
for perhaps as much as two-thirds of all FDI in Africa. It is a picture that is also
reflected in the principal oil exporting countries: in Nigeria, for example, the primary
sector accounted for about 33 per cent of the total FDI stock, with manufacturing
contributing 48 per cent and services 19 per cent in 1992. The respective figures for
Egypt in 1995 were 4 per cent, 47 per cent and 48 per cent; and for Algeria in the
same year, 5 per cent, 25 per cent and 70 per cent (UNCTAD, 1997a).
• To the extent that data for United States' affiliates in Africa can be generalized, the
rate of return on FDI in Africa has been considerably higher -- and consistently so -
Figure II.13. FDI inflows as a percentage of gross fixed capital formation in the
top 20 countries in Africa, 1995
(Percentage)
60
Chapter II
- than that in Latin America, and higher than the average for both developed and
developing countries (UNCTAD, 1995b).
• Perhaps most interestingly, a number of firms from Africa are themselves beginning
to become TNCs, i.e., they are emerging as outward investors. Although African
TNCs remain relatively rare and small in size (with an outward FDI stock of $26
billion in 1996, including South Africa), this shows that there are firms in Africa that
can be competitive internationally, not only through trade but also through
production in foreign markets. Firms from South Africa lead, followed by those
from Nigeria. Together they accounted for two-thirds of FDI from the region in the
1990s (UNCTAD, 1997a).
During the 1990s, broad macroeconomic reforms have created a favourable investment climate
in Morocco. The privatization programme and the liberalization of the FDI regime have also contributed
to making the country attractive to foreign investors. As a result, FDI inflows to Morocco increased
almost fivefold, from an average of $83 million during 1985-1990 to an average of $419 million during
1991-1996, with $400 million in inflows in 1996 alone.
Prospects for sustained inflows are promising. Recent announcements of large investment
projects included a $900 million investment by Daewoo (Republic of Korea), ACCOR’s plans to construct
19 hotel units, ABB-CMS’ planned investment of $1.6 billion and SGS Thomson’s plan to invest $400
million in micro-electronics.
Morocco is now the third largest recipient of FDI in Africa — and it is at the forefront of
changing the image of Africa.
Source: UNCTAD, based on information provided by the Ministry of Finance and Foreign
Investment of Morocco.
This suggests that the picture is mixed. And, of course, these figures are aggregates and
mask a wide range of performances. But this is precisely the point: one needs to take a differentiated
look at Africa, examining each country -- and perhaps even each industry -- on its own merit to see
whether investment opportunities exist. And, of course, these figures do not say anything about the
desire of African countries to attract more FDI -- or, indeed, about the potential for more FDI in
Africa.
Within Africa, the host subregional or country pattern has not changed significantly during
the past decade (annex table B.1):
• The share of North Africa in Africa’s total inflows has declined from an average of
44 per cent during 1986-1990 to an average of 38 per cent during 1991-1996.
• The corresponding share of sub-Saharan Africa has risen slightly,20 from 56 per cent
to 62 per cent between the two periods.
• The share of oil exporting African economies in Africa’s total inflows has increased
marginally, from 71 per cent during 1986-1990 to 73 per cent during 1991-1996.
61
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
• The share of Africa’s FDI inflows accounted for by the least developed countries in
that region has remained almost the same: an average of 18 per cent during 1986-
1990 and an average of 17 per cent during 1991-1996 (see the earlier discussion).
• Investment flows into Africa have become less concentrated. The five largest
recipients during 1991-1996 -- Nigeria, Egypt, Morocco, Tunisia and Angola --
accounted for 78 per cent of all investment inflows to that region. But the
corresponding share during 1981-1985 of the top five recipients -- Egypt, Nigeria,
Tunisia, Cameroon and Angola -- was 93 per cent.
Geographical proximity, historical ties and recent trade agreements between North African
countries and the European Union continue to render Western Europe the principal source of
investment flows to Africa.21 Two countries, France and the United Kingdom, together accounted
for 88 per cent of Western European investment to Africa during the first half of the 1990s. The
United States accounted for 15 per cent of all investment flows into Africa originating from the
developed countries. A new development is that developing countries, mainly in Asia, are also
becoming a growing source of investment for Africa (box II.5), although North African countries
receive considerable investment from West Asia, mostly in finance.22
Most FDI flows in some North African countries, such as Algeria and the Libyan Arab
Jamahiriya, go into the hydrocarbon industry. New oil discoveries in Algeria, coupled with a gas
pipeline completed in 1996 that has already started to pump gas to Portugal and Spain via Morocco,
are prompting the arrival of more petroleum investment. Privatization and high and sustained
growth rates in Egypt, Morocco and Tunisia have attracted rising FDI in industries as diverse as
hotels, cars, electronics and infrastructure. BMW (Germany) has announced plans to open its first
assembly plant in Egypt in 1997.23 Egypt is also attracting considerable investment in infrastructure,
including telecommunications and airports, mostly through build-operate-transfer projects.
(b) Prospects
Prospects
Several factors hold out the prospect of improvements in FDI performance in some parts of
Africa. These factors are:
• FDI (and trade) liberalization. In an effort to improve their investment regimes, several
countries in Africa have removed ownership restrictions,24 reduced taxation rates
and abolished price controls. They have also encouraged private-sector initiatives.
As of 1 January 1997, some 45 African developing nations had concluded at least
one bilateral investment treaty and, in total, had signed 267 BITs, of which 17 were
with countries in the continent.
62
Chapter II
Transnational corporations from developing economies in South, East and South-East Asia
(which already play a substantial role in intra-Asian FDI flows) are beginning to discover Africa (box
table).
Box table. Major Asian FDI flows to Africa,a 1990-1996
(Millions of dollars)
Examples are numerous. Daewoo (Republic of Korea) plans a multi-billion dollar expansion
of its investments in Morocco.a Hyundai (Republic of Korea) began building a new assembly plant in
Botswana in 1996 to make vehicles for the African market. The JR Group (Hong Kong) is planning to
expand into the Seychelles’ tourism industry and to set up an offshore bank there (EIU, 1996f). Telekom
Malaysia purchased a 30 per cent stake in Ghana Telecom. In addition, agreements were signed in
1996 between firms from Malaysia and Ghana in industries as diverse as hotels, banking, real estate
and palm-oil development, aimed at attracting FDI in joint ventures or in wholly foreign-owned projects
in the latter country. Furthermore, in order to facilitate business exchanges, Ghana and Malaysia
accorded each other most-favoured-nation status, and Ghana waived visa requirements for Malaysians.b
PRC Trading of Huang Gu (China) established a brewery in Accra in 1996,c and another Chinese firm
has expressed interest in processing cocoa in Ghana for export to Asia. Finally, there are a number of
important investments by Asian firms in South Africa (see box II.3). All of these examples indicate a
growing interest of Asian developing economies in investment opportunities in Africa.
a “Bilan du monde”, Le Monde, Edition 1997, p. 87.
b K. Hardi, “Rawlings looks East for growth”, Africa Business, February 1996, pp. 28-29.
c Asmah George, “Chinese to brew beer in Accra”, African Business, April 1996, p. 29.
compared with $74 million in 1990 (table II.4). Mozambique and Zambia, for
example, have large-scale privatization programmes. Government efforts to nurture
private business have been backed with more prudent macroeconomic
management.25 Some privatizations involving foreign investors have led to the
upgrading of capital, know-how and technology. Consequently, some loss-making
state-owned firms were transformed into profitable and dynamic enterprises.
63
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
• Links with other regions . The most significant developments are the free-trade
agreements between North African countries and the European Union, the Lomé
Convention and its possible extension to South Africa, and the African Growth and
Opportunity Act introduced in the United States Congress in April 1997.26 While
the customs-union agreement between North African countries and the European
Union allows for enlarged trade and FDI flows through facilitated market access
and lower tariff rates, the Lomé Convention (signed between the 70 African,
Caribbean and Pacific States, on the one hand, and the European Union, on the
other) permits manufactured goods and most agricultural exports to gain duty-free
access to the European Union.
Overall, prospects for an improved FDI performance during the second half of the 1990s
appear favourable. Oil and mining companies, for example, have announced investment plans for
Africa in 1997 totalling some $5 billion.27 Prospects for investments in manufacturing and services
are also improving. Even if there should be a further decline in Africa’s share in world FDI flows, the
importance of FDI for the continents might increase. In fact, during the period of a declining share,
FDI stock as a percentage of GDP doubled from 6 per cent in 1985 to 13 per cent in 1995. More
generally, it is the growth rate of FDI that matters, rather than the share of the region in world FDI
flows. Naturally, Africa’s prospects in this respect (and especially those of the continent’s least
developed countries) would improve if a broader basis for sustained economic growth could be
created -- a task in which the international community has an important role to play, especially
through official development assistance.
(c)
c) South African transnational corporations and the economic
development of southern Africa
Since the beginning of the 1990s, economic liberalization and regional integration in the
southern African region have been on the rise. Within the Southern African Development Community
(SADC) (box II.6), a group of countries with the strongest economic links with South Africa, hopes
have been high that post-apartheid South Africa could emerge as a “growth pole” for the region,
contributing positively via trade and FDI to the development of its neighbours. There have even
been expectations that South Africa would initiate a regional restructuring process similar to the one
which centred on Japan in East and South-East Asia. This section analyses the particular conditions
64
Chapter II
i. Growth pole
To become a regional growth pole, South Africa would need to contribute to the development
of the neighbouring economies, mainly through trade and FDI.28 With a GDP of more than $125
billion in 1996, South Africa’s economy is by far the largest in the region. Due to South Africa’s
political and economic isolation during the apartheid era, trade with its neighbours remained modest.
However, since South Africa’s 1994 elections, its trade with neighbouring countries has expended
rapidly. This growth has been largely accounted for by increases in South Africa’s imports of primary
and intermediate goods and the expansion of its manufactured exports. However, this has been
achieved at the cost of rising trade deficits incurred by many of South Africa’s neighbours.
In principle, direct investment by South African TNCs could play a crucial role in the
development of neighbouring countries, by serving as an “engine of growth” (UNCTC, 1992b), in
particular in the following ways:
• Provision of capital and contributing to capital formation in the host economy. Already
before the elections in 1994, South African FDI in southern Africa increased
significantly (table II.5). Traditionally, most of these investments have been by mining
companies, often accompanied by investments from financial institutions that seek
to provide financial services to them (Business Map, 1996, p. 13). More recently,
South African TNCs have been investing also in food processing, retailing and other
services in countries in the region. Privatization programmes in these countries are
also attracting investment from South Africa. South African Breweries, for example,
purchased a major stake in Tanzanian Breweries when it was partially privatized in
1993 (annex table A.10).
The Southern African Development Community (SADC), the successor of the Southern African
Development Coordination Conference, comprises Angola, Botswana, Lesotho, Malawi, Mauritius,
Mozambique, Namibia, South Africa, Swaziland, United Republic of Tanzania, Zambia and Zimbabwe.
SADC was established in August 1992, with South Africa (1994) and Mauritius (1995) joining later. The
SADC treaty foresees, among other things, deeper economic cooperation and integration, on the basis
of equality and mutual benefit through cross-border investment and trade as well as freer movement
of factors of production; it thus goes farther than previous regional initiatives that just sought to
coordinate rather than integrate the economies of member states. In August 1996, member states
initialled the SADC trade protocol. It foresees the creation of a free-trade area within 8 years after the
protocol is ratified by member states as part of the strategy change of SADC away from regional project
coordination towards the liberalization of trade in services, goods and capital. At the SADC summit in
September 1997, member states will discuss an internal tariff-reduction schedule. Botswana, Lesotho,
Namibia, South Africa and Swaziland have already established free trade among them, as they also
represent the Southern African Custom Union (SACU), which originates from a 1910 Custom Union
Agreement between South Africa and several then British High Commission territories. In this
connection, the question of dual membership in SADC and other regional organizations, such as SACU
or COMESA (Common Market for Eastern and Southern Africa), is not yet fully resolved.
65
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Table II.5. South African FDIa stock in selected SADC countries, 1991-1994
(Millions of Rand)
Country 1991 1992 1993 1994
Botswana 76 169 198 232
Lesotho 11 20 32 43
Malawi 10 5 7 8
Mozambique 4 4 4 3
Namibia 45 82 94 96
Swaziland 89 72 85 605
Zambia 4 2 5 7
Zimbabwe 85 61 72 65
Total SADC 324 415 497 1 059
Memorandum:
Other Africa 1 454 2 194 2 281 2 693
Total Africa 1 778 2 609 2 778 3 762
Source: UNCTAD, based on data provided by the South African Reserve Bank.
a The threshold in the definition of FDI used here is different from the one used by the International Monetary Fund
(see definitions and sources in the annex). Up to 1994, the South African Reserve Bank defined FDI on the basis of a
threshold of 25 per cent. This means that the FDI used here are, in comparison to IMF data, an underestimation.
• Providing opportunities for additional export revenues. Few data are available on the
contribution of South Africa’s TNCs to the export revenues of host countries in the
region. But the more firms invest there to produce goods that are exported back to
South Africa, the more positive should be the effect on the bilateral trade balances
of those countries.
To sum up, South Africa’s potential as a regional growth pole through trade and FDI is by no
means exhausted. However, the feasibility and success of a growth-pole strategy depends crucially
on two factors. The first is free access to the South African market for exports produced in
neighbouring economies. Since 1995, when South Africa started with a process of progressive import-
tariff reductions in accordance with its WTO obligations, the country has taken some decisive steps
in this direction. Average import protection in manufacturing is due to be reduced to 8 per cent in
the year 2000, from 19 per cent in 1994. But, despite significant reductions in many industries, some
goods will still be subject to relatively high protection in the year 2000. For instance, clothing
(excluding footwear) will still have a nominal rate of tariff protection of more than 45 per cent until
2000, despite a planned 44 per cent reduction (Industrial Development Corporation, 1996, p.6).29
66
Chapter II
The second condition is faster demand growth in South Africa, which has risen rather
modestly since 1994 (with GDP growth rates not exceeding 4 per cent; Vayenas, 1997). At present,
prospects hinge largely on the results of the Growth, Employment and Redistribution (GEAR)
programme, which is the main instrument of the Government of South Africa for stimulating the
domestic economy.
The need for restructuring is underlined by the findings of surveys of productivity in South
Africa’s manufacturing industries (Nordås, 1996). These suggest that South Africa’s present trade
regime has not helped the creation of globally competitive firms outside mining and energy. It is
very likely that some industries will decline once exposed to global competition. South African
policy makers have identified several industries (including aluminium, forestry, stainless and carbon
steel) that could offset the negative effects of contraction in other industries (Maia, 1997). High
unemployment makes the creation of new industries or the upgrading of existing ones all the more
imperative. Trade liberalization also increases the need for restructuring in neighbouring economies.
However, it is not evident that restructuring will take place along the lines of relocating
production through FDI from South Africa to other SADC members with lower labour costs only.
This would tackle only some of the problems of low productivity and weak competitiveness. These
are often due to deficiencies such as outdated management and organizational structures that cannot
be solved simply by relocating production processes to areas with lower wage costs.32 Also, an
untapped reservoir of labour in South Africa suggests that the potential for labour-intensive
production in that country has not yet been exhausted. In this connection, it is important to note that
intra-regional restructuring does not refer solely to the relocation of production processes;
partnerships and alliances with firms in neighbouring countries, for instance, as regard research-
and-development activities, as well as cross-border subcontracting linkages, can increase the
competitiveness of South African firms without necessarily implying a reduction in employment in
South Africa.
Still, it seems quite probable that at least some South African firms will attempt to improve
their efficiency by combining their firm-specific assets with the locational advantages of other
countries. But how far is such interactive restructuring likely to go, and how closely will it follow the
“flying geese” model of East and South-East Asia?
67
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Some answers can be found by comparing the situation in southern Africa with the conditions
that accompanied the TNC-assisted interactive restructuring process in Asia (UNCTAD, 1995a, pp.
260-261). The six conditions are: different levels of development; ability to restructure; sufficient
demand and markets; market verification of restructured industries through internationally
competitive exports; enabling framework for the transmission of TNC assets; and a favourable
investment climate.
Of these conditions, only the first is met by the southern Africa region at present. Several
indicators suggest that the region possesses complementary economic structures that could enable
TNCs to take advantage of differences in comparative advantages in order to match their own
tangible and intangible assets with those of individual host countries.
Although GDP per capita in a few countries in the region is on a par with that of South Africa
(table II.6),33 its level of development is significantly higher than that of most of them. This was also
true of Japan vis-à-vis the Asian economies when the “flying geese” model took shape. Variations in
GDP per capita in southern Africa are matched by differences in labour costs (table II.7), suggesting
a comparative advantage in labour-intensive production processes for those countries in the region
which already have a sufficiently developed industrial base. These cost advantages are enhanced by
considerable disparities between labour laws, which, from an employer’s perspective, seem more
restrictive in South Africa than in neighbouring countries.34 On the other hand, average figures for
wages and GDP tend to mask the significant social and regional disparities within South Africa.
Thus, wages for black workers are still far lower than the average (Standing et al., 1996), and
production is highly concentrated in the Gauteng-Province around Johannesburg, leaving some
regions in the country at a lower level of development than others. However, South Africa’s relatively
rich endowment of human capital is conducive to the development of new industries, which could
gradually replace those that are based primarily on an abundant supply of cheap labour.
Table II.6. Intra-regional disparities in GDP per capita levels in SADC (1994)
and in East and South-East Asia (1970)
(Dollars and percentage)
GDP per GDP per
capita levels in capita levels in
GDP per 1994 as share of GDP per 1970 as share of
capita South African GDP capita Japanese GDP
SADC 1994 per capita in 1994 East and South-East Asia 1970 per capita in 1970
Source: UNCTAD, based on Summers and Heston (1991), and data retrieved from Web site http://
www.nber.org/pwt56.html.
68
Chapter II
As to the other conditions, good Table II.7. Annual average wagesa and share of
progress has been made in creating an manufacturing in GDP in SADC countries, 1994
enabling framework for FDI, as well as in (Dollars and percentage)
implementing economic liberalization
Annual Share of
policies. However, most of the conditions average manufacturing
necessary for the initiation of intra-regional wages in GDP
restructuring are still far from being in place: Country (Dollars) (Per cent)
69
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
on stronger demand from South Africa for goods other than raw materials. 37
According to a recent study (International Trade Centre, 1997, p. 8), the main export
opportunities South Africa offers neighbouring countries lie in low-processed food
products and in some manufactured goods, in particular textiles.38 Though South
Africa is becoming an increasingly important trading partner for many sub-Saharan
economies, overseas demand will also remain important to stimulate the traditional
production of unprocessed, low value-added primary commodities.
• Enabling framework for the transmission of TNC assets . The transmission of such TNC
assets as capital, technology and management know-how requires a set of
increasingly liberal policies at national and regional levels. In sub-Saharan Africa,
despite a general trend towards more liberalization, there is still room for improving
the enabling framework. In particular, foreign-exchange controls are often cited as
significant obstacles to cross-border investment. 39 Also, bilateral investment
agreements within the region are rare.40 However, this was not much different in
Asia in the early stages of the restructuring process.
SADC 1st level 2nd level 3rd level East and South-East Asia 1st level 2nd level 3rd level
70
Chapter II
iii. Conclusions
While there is a potential for South Africa to become a regional growth pole, it is unlikely to
initiate vigorous TNC-assisted interactive regional restructuring processes in the near future. This is
also reflected in the natural resource-seeking, rather than efficiency-seeking, character of most FDI
flows from South Africa to neighbouring countries. At present, the “geese” do not seem to be ready
for take-off. Rather, they are still in the “nest-building” stage.41 National efforts are paramount in
this respect. But they could benefit substantially from regional cooperation and international support.
South Africa could lead the way by further reducing the remaining barriers to outward FDI to her
SADC partners.
Since the opening up of the port of Maputo in 1996, the Governments of South Africa and
Mozambique have developed a number of activities to spur economic development in the region
between Johannesburg and Maputo (including the South African provinces of Mpumalanga and
Kwazulu/Natal), including the establishment of a joint investment promotion company and the
upgrading of railway links and other infrastructure facilities. The private sector responded to these
new developments: according to the Development Bank of Southern Africa, investment commitments
by South African (as well as other) firms have reached $2 billion. Most of these commitments are in
mining, chemicals and agro-processing industries. Many investors are attracted by the location of
Maputo, the nearest port to South Africa’s industrial heartland around Johannesburg. They are also
attracted by the prospects of cheap energy supplies, which may come in the near future from planned
hydropower plants in the north of Mozambique. The infrastructure facilities in the corridor, including
the Maputo port and the railways between Maputo and Johannesburg, are to be privatized and thus
may offer additional investment opportunities for foreign companies in the corridor. The project might
serve as a successful example for further joint initiatives to attract foreign investors. Further development
corridors of the same type in other parts of South Africa are planned as part of the “spatial development
initiative” of the Government of South Africa that focuses on the development of certain regions. a
a Jourdan and Gordhan, 1996.
In the period of volatility in portfolio investments in Latin America and the Caribbean in
1995, FDI inflows into the region registered small increases overall, despite substantial ones into
individual countries. By contrast, in 1996, FDI flows to the region increased significantly, by 52 per
cent, to nearly $39 billion, a record level. The region accounted for 30 per cent of all FDI inflows
received by developing countries. Investment flows are also becoming more diversified in terms of
recipient countries than they were in the beginning of the 1990s. In 1996, eight countries received
average inflows of over $1 billion, compared with only two countries in 1990. Particularly significant
have been investments in mining (Chile and Peru), petroleum (Colombia, Ecuador and Venezuela),
manufacturing (Argentina, Brazil and Mexico), and in export-oriented activities in Mexico’s
maquiladoras and in some Central American and Caribbean countries. Transnational corporations,
especially in automobiles, are integrating Latin America more extensively into their global strategies.
With nearly $10 billion, Brazil was the largest recipient of FDI inflows, easily topping Mexico
(nearly $8 billion). This represents a dramatic reversal: in 1992, when Mexico received over $4 billion
and Argentina nearly $3 billion, Brazil received only $2 billion. Brazil’s impressive FDI performance
71
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
in 1996 may be an indication of things to come. Inflows for the first four months of 1997 were over $4
billion — two and a half times that of the same period in 1996.42 A survey by the Government found
that FDI funds worth some $221 billion are ready to enter Brazil between 1996 and 2000.43 At the
same time, the re-activation of Brazil’s privatization programme, in which foreign-investor
participation is expected to be substantial, could generate more than $12 billion worth of FDI between
the same years. The automobile industry has proven to be particularly attractive. Several large
TNCs have made investments or announced plans to do so.
After a slump in 1994 and 1995, FDI inflows into Argentina showed the second largest
increase of all countries in Latin America in 1996 (after Brazil), to about $4.3 billion, placing that
country again high in the league of Latin American recipients (figure II.14). (In relation to gross
domestic capital formation, however, Argentina is in seventeenth place; see figure II.15.) The main
factors were privatization schemes that encouraged the participation of foreign enterprises and
foreign banks, membership of MERCOSUR -- in particular the benefits of a regulatory framework
for the automobile and auto-parts industries and provision of preferential financing means -- and
recent liberalizations in mining legislation (Chudnovsky, Lopez and Porta, 1997). As in Brazil, this
increase may be the beginning of a period of sustained inflows. In particular, the automobiles, food
and beverages, mining, oil and petrochemicals, construction and telecommunications industries are
expected to receive up to $23 billion in FDI until the year 2000.44
During the first half of the 1990s, FDI flows to Mexico were concentrated in services, especially
in the case of privatization programmes. Having reached a record FDI level of $11 billion in 1994,
Mexico’s inflows declined in 1995, but increased somewhat in 1996. Mexico’s prospects for more
FDI flows are good, especially in the automobile industry. For example, Volkswagen (Germany) had
announced investments of $500 million for the period 1995-1996. The change in Mexico’s policy on
Figure II.14. FDI flows into the top 20 countries in Latin America and
the Caribbean, 1995-1996
(Billions of dollars)
72
Chapter II
petrochemical privatization may pull in investment, even though the Government decided to retain
51 per cent of the capital of existing petrochemical plants. (But it also authorized, in 1997, the
establishment of new firms in that industry in which the private sector could have participation up
to 100 per cent.)
During the first half of the 1990s, FDI flows to the region had been influenced heavily by
privatization programmes implemented by various countries. In 1996, privatizations accounted for
almost a quarter of all FDI inflows, compared to a half in 1993. Investment flows to Latin America
are now increasingly in the form of greenfield investments. Even in privatized firms, sequential FDI
flows aimed at modernizing the existing facilities take the form of greenfield investments. Latin
American privatizations, however, are far from being completed. While, according to some estimates,
about $60 billion worth of state-owned assets have been sold, a further $70 billion worth of such
assets are likely candidates for privatization (Dermota, 1996, p. 52). Therefore, there is still
considerable potential for privatization-associated FDI.
The main trends among sources of FDI for Latin America and the Caribbean are:
• The United States remains the foremost foreign investor in the region. Cumulative
FDI flows from the United States during the period 1990-1995 reached nearly $66
billion and accounted for about 58 per cent of Latin America’s total cumulative
investments.45 According to the United States Department of Commerce, United-
States TNCs are now investing more heavily in Brazil than in any other foreign
country,46 and will continue to account for the majority of that country’s inward
FDI.
Figure II.15. FDI inflows as a percentage of gross fixed capital formation in the
top 20 countries in Latin America and the Caribbean, 1995
(Percentage)
73
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
• European FDI flows to Latin America and the Caribbean increased by 39 per cent in
1995, to nearly $6 billion -- a historic high (IRELA and IADB, 1996). The members
of MERCOSUR received more than a half of European Union FDI flows to that region
(IRELA and IADB, 1996). The main destinations were Brazil ($2 billion), Argentina
($1 billion) and Mexico ($880 million). Germany and Spain are the largest European
investors in that region. Most European FDI is concentrated in natural resources
and services, with energy and telecommunications being the primary recipients in
the context of privatization plans. Almost a half of Europe’s FDI to Latin America
came through privatizations schemes, with Spain, Italy and France being the most
active investors through such schemes. However, in 1995 and 1996, European
investment has become more prevalent in the manufacturing sector, especially
through large investments by German, French and Italian automobile TNCs in
MERCOSUR. The Framework Agreement of 15 December 1995 between the
European Union and MERCOSUR is likely to encourage further European FDI in
that region.
• Japan’s share of Latin America’s FDI inflows remains low (about 13 per cent in
1995). Japanese FDI in Latin America is concentrated mostly in finance and insurance
(34 per cent) and transport (32 per cent). The region remains the second largest
target for Japanese outward investment to developing countries. Some 70 per cent
of Japanese investment in Latin America is in tax havens (the Cayman Islands and
the Virgin Islands) and another one-fifth is in Brazil and Mexico.
• Investment flows from Asian developing economies (in particular, China, India,
Hong Kong, Malaysia and Singapore) continued to leave their mark in the region,
particularly for trade-supporting purposes and in the manufacturing of consumer
goods (electronics, bicycles and textiles). Investments by Asian TNCs are mostly
market-seeking, spurred by the region’s recent integration efforts (MERCOSUR).
* * *
Several recent surveys and forecasts suggest that FDI flows to Latin America and the
Caribbean are likely to increase considerably during 1997. According to a survey of the Fortune 1000
companies by the Bank of Boston, 80 per cent of the executives surveyed are more confident of Latin
America’s business prospects than they were five years ago.48 Foreign investors placed Mexico and
Brazil in first and second place, respectively, and Chile in third place. The Institute of International
Finance estimated that FDI flows to Latin America and the Caribbean will increase in 1997, with
Brazil receiving the bulk of inflows ($13 billion), followed by Mexico ($8 billion), Colombia ($3 billion)
and Chile (1.5 billion).49
74
Chapter II
(b) A rregulatory
egulatory shift
Over the past few years, Latin American and Caribbean countries have undertaken a number
of changes regarding their treatment of FDI. In particular, they:
The revival and recent dynamism of economic integration has been accompanied by an expansion of
intra-regional investment flows which, in turn, has encouraged the negotiation of investment
arrangements among the countries of the region, either bilaterally or in the context of the various
existing trade and economic integration agreements.
The policy reforms led to a substantial shift in economic theory and practice throughout the region
as countries decided to replace their traditional, inward-oriented policies by a development strategy
meant to enhance their participation in the world economy. This new strategy required a new
approach to FDI. Up to the mid-1980s, what permeated FDI regimes was the idea of control: countries
established controls for the entry of TNCs, controls for their operations after they were established,
controls on the remittance of profits and other dividends, controls for the transfer of technology,
exchange controls and so on. Latin American and Caribbean countries sought to control what they
perceived were the negative effects of FDI; this “controlling” philosophy was, of course, fully
consistent with the economic model in place in most countries at that time.
The opening of the region’s economies in the late 1980s and early 1990s also brought a
liberalization of investment regimes. Just as the protected economies of the past required a restrictive
investment framework, the trade-liberalizing economies of the present are seen to demand open
investment policies. Policy coherence is meant to maximize the positive effects of the overall
development strategy of any particular country. The changes effected by Latin American and
Caribbean countries regarding their national investment regimes are characterized as follows:
• The de facto, if not de jure, granting of national treatment to foreign investors. The
previous policies tended to discriminate against foreign investors by denying them
certain privileges to which only nationally owned firms were entitled, i.e., access to
local financial markets.
• The elimination or significant reduction of controls on profit and capital remittances.
Before, it was common to request from foreign investors that they send only a
percentage of their profits abroad.
75
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
• The opening of entire industries that were previously closed to foreign investors,
e.g., public utilities, banking and petroleum.
These changes are the foundations on which Latin American and Caribbean countries have
built their network of bilateral and regional investment arrangements. These arrangements are
intended to encourage investment from the participating countries and, increasingly, to protect their
own investments, i.e., indigenous investment originated in the Latin American and Caribbean
countries. In looking at agreements negotiated among the Latin American and Caribbean countries,
as well as those negotiated by them with the United States and Canada (i.e., the investment
agreements concluded in the Americas), the following characteristics stand out.
First, the number of agreements: as of 1 January 1997, there were 53 BITs between the
countries of the Americas, 50 of which were negotiated in the 1990s. Thirty-seven of these BITs were
negotiated between Latin American and Caribbean countries; only nine BITs have been concluded
by the United States with other countries of the region, and seven have been negotiated by Canada.
In addition to BITs, there are eight investment arrangements negotiated in the context of the existing
trade and integration agreements, five of which are of a subregional nature: the NAFTA and the
Group of 3 (Colombia, Mexico and Venezuela) chapters on investment, two protocols on investment
concluded by the MERCOSUR countries,50 and a decision on investment taken by the Andean
Group.51 The remaining three arrangements are chapters in the bilateral free trade agreements
negotiated by Bolivia and Mexico, Costa Rica and Mexico and Chile and Canada; although bilateral
in nature, these three agreements are not BITs as they cover a broader range of issues than do BITs.
Second, the various investment arrangements share important common features. A broad
consensus has emerged in the Americas on issues that seemed controversial not long ago. Common
approaches have been adopted in investment agreements in such areas as scope of application,
treatment of investment, transfers, expropriation and dispute-settlement. More specifically:
• The investment arrangements require the host country to guarantee the free transfer
of funds related to investments. Almost all treaties define in great detail which types
of payments should be included in the transfer clause. These generally refer to
76
Chapter II
returns (profits, interest, dividends, and other current incomes); repayment of loans;
and proceeds of a total or partial liquidation of an investment. Most treaties also
stipulate that transfers should be effected in a convertible currency. It is normally
stated that transfers shall be made at the normal exchange rate applicable on the
date of the transfer, and without delay. There are some exceptions or limitations on
transfers, due for instance to balance-of-payments problems.
• All investment treaties and agreements include separate provisions dealing with
disputes between a contracting party and an investor, and contemplate arbitration
as a means of dispute-settlement. This constitutes a major departure from traditional
practice in Latin American countries, which have followed the Calvo doctrine. This
holds that disputes between a foreign investor and a host country should be handled
by the courts, and according to the law, of the host country. Thus foreign investors
were limited to bringing claims against the host state in a domestic court or having
their home countries assume their claims against the host state (diplomatic
protection). The agreements normally refer to specific institutional arbitration
mechanisms, including the ICSID Convention (or the ICSID Additional Facility
Rules, in cases in which either the host or home state of the foreign investor is not
an ICSID contracting party).
As well as many common features, the arrangements concluded by countries in the Americas
also contain differences. The most important are related to the entry and establishment of investments
and investors. Two approaches have been adopted in the agreements concluded among countries of
the region. Newer instruments, such as the Colonia Protocol, and the chapters on investment in the
NAFTA and other free-trade agreements, as well as the BITs signed by the United States and Canada,
call for national treatment and most-favoured-nation treatment of both the pre-establishment phase
(entry) and the post-establishment phase, and prohibit performance requirements as a condition for
establishment. In the other bilateral and regional investment agreements, the national treatment and
the most-favoured-nation standards are only applied at the post-establishment phase.
In addition to the existing investment agreements, three of the countries of the Americas (the
United States, Canada and Mexico) are participating in the OECD negotiations on a Multilateral
Agreement on Investment. The countries of the Americas have also been discussing the elements of
a hemispheric-wide agreement on investment and have set up, in the context of the FTAA, a working
group dealing specifically with this issue. This working group has been meeting since late 1995, and
has already identified the main elements that may be included in such a hemispheric agreement.
77
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
China, with $42 billion in 1996, was once again the largest FDI recipient among developing
countries, and the second largest in the world. China accounted for over two fifths of the $16 billion
increase of FDI inflows into the region (figure II.16). Inflows into China set a new record, partly
because of the rush of foreign investors to establish and implement FDI projects before the enactment
of policies that would abolish some of the preferential treatment for foreign investors (on 1 April
1996, with an extension of six months for certain types of projects). Another factor has been the
Government’s recent efforts to promote FDI to mid-west provinces that offer such locational
advantages as rich natural resources and low-cost labour and land. Foreign investors have shown a
growing interest in these provinces, where inflows increased by over 35 per cent, compared with 18
per cent for the country as a whole in 1996. In addition, a successful “soft landing” and continuing
macroeconomic reforms;52 further liberalization of the FDI regime for some industries (particularly
those that had been opened only partially and on a trial basis in the past); and the continued
consolidation and expansion of investments by large TNCs; have all contributed to China’s successful
FDI performance.
Investments into the newly industrializing economies of Hong Kong, Republic of Korea,
Singapore and Taiwan Province of China in 1996 increased by about 27 per cent over the previous
year. Singapore was the star performer, maintaining its lead as the second largest recipient in the
Figure II.16. FDI flows into the top 20 countries in South, East and
South-East Asia and the Pacific, 1995-1996
(Billions of dollars)
78
Chapter II
region. Combined
inflows to the other three newly industrializing economies, at $6 billion in 1996, were below
Singapore’s $9 billion. Electronics was the leading recipient industry for the Republic of Korea,
Singapore and Taiwan Province of China, and services were the biggest recipient for Hong Kong.
For decades, Hong Kong has been one of the most important international business centres in the
region; however, there has been some concern whether that position can be maintained after its
return to China. Results of recent surveys have shown that foreign investors have confidence in the
future of Hong Kong, China as a regional business centre (box II.8).
Box II.8. Foreign investors’ confidence in Hong Kong, China, after reversion
Hong Kong, China has emerged as a major regional trade, financial and business-services
centre. With annual average outflows estimated at over $20 billion during 1993-1996, Hong Kong,
China is the world’s fifth largest FDI source economy.a It is also a major recipient of FDI, attracting an
average annual flow of about $2 billion in the 1990s. According to Hong Kong’s Industry Department,
Hong Kong’s manufacturing FDI stock has quadrupled between 1984 and 1995. Accumulated
investment from China during 1985-1995 is estimated to have exceeded $10 billion (Zhan, 1995). The
United States, the United Kingdom and Japan have also obtained sizeable stakes in Hong Kong.
Hong Kong became a “Special Administrative Region” of China on 1 July 1997. According to
the scenario of “one country, two systems”, within one sovereign State, the territory will retain its own
economic, financial and social systems. Hong Kong, China is to remain autonomous for another 50
years in all areas except defence and foreign affairs. How is foreign investors’ confidence going to be
affected now that Hong Kong’s sovereignty has reverted to China?
During the second half of 1996, the chambers of commerce of Germany, Japan, Switzerland,
the United Kingdom and the United States conducted surveys of their respective foreign affiliates in
Hong Kong (box figure).b These surveys found that 83 per cent of companies surveyed expected Hong
Kong, China’s business environment in the next five years to remain favourable. About 45 per cent of
the companies plan to expand their presence in Hong Kong, China through additional investment.
The vast majority of the respondents (80 per cent of the German firms) aim at launching strategies to
penetrate China’s market via Hong Kong, China to take advantage of the territory’s considerable
experience of doing business in China and its excellent business infrastructure.
Box figure. Hong Kong, China investment climate assessments for the second half of the 1990s
Source: UNCTAD, based on Delegate of German Industry and Commerce: Hong Kong, South China, Viet Nam and
German Association of Hong Kong (1996); Hong Kong Companies Registry (1996); "Japanese firms adopted cautions
attitude", Nihon Keizai Shimbun, 17 October 1996; Swiss Business Council of Hong Kong (1996) and American Chamber
of Commerce in Hong Kong (1996).
a "Favourable" includes unchanged assessments.
b "Favourable" includes "very favourable".
/...
79
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Similar findings emerged from a survey by the Hong Kong Trade Development Council in
1995. Over 92 per cent of the 2,500 local and foreign trade and manufacturing companies surveyed
said they would keep their regional headquarters in Hong Kong, China after 1997, while most of the
remaining firms said they would move to China. Nearly all of the respondents expected to stay in
Hong Kong, China well beyond 1997.
The steady increase in the establishment of regional headquarters and regional representative
offices set up by TNCs in Hong Kong, China also demonstrates business confidence. According to the
Hong Kong Companies Registry (1996), the number of foreign regional representations in Hong Kong
reached 2,307 as of late 1996, an increase of 12 per cent over 1995 (box table). The most significant
increase -- 600 per cent between 1993 and 1996 -- was recorded by companies from Taiwan Province of
China. During the same period, 106 new United States companies registered in the territory (American
Chamber of Commerce in Hong Kong, 1996). An increasing number of Japanese trading houses are
moving their textile-business headquarters to Hong Kong, China.
Source: UNCTAD, based on data provided by the Hong Kong Industry Department.
Nevertheless, the general sense of optimism is tempered with cautious pragmatism. For
example, 52 per cent of the Swiss companies in Hong Kong, China have drawn up contingency plans
in case Hong Kong, China’s evolution does not live up to expectations. Some firms have also adopted
a “wait-and-see” approach to short-term plans during Hong Kong’s transition, but believe that business
will be back to normal by 1998.
Overall, the surveys of foreign investors have found that Hong Kong, China’s geographical
proximity and trade and investment links with China, low taxation and free trade policy and the
financial, communications and transport infrastructure are enduring attractions for FDI. The political
climate was ranked eleventh place in a list of seventeen factors likely to affect investment decisions
according to the 1996 Survey of External Investment in Hong Kong’s Manufacturing, and seventh in a list
of sixteen factors according to the 1996 Survey of Regional Representation by Overseas Companies in Hong
Kong. Cost considerations, which have been a concern for companies doing business in Hong Kong,
China, overshadowed by political uncertainty, could re-emerge in the medium-term as the factor most
detracting from Hong Kong, China’s business environment. Recent increases in commercial property
rentals are expected to be followed by increases in residential rentals and labour costs.
Should China remain on a stable course of development with continued reform and liberalization,
then Hong Kong, China stands a good chance of sustaining its favourable investment environment. In the
meantime, Hong Kong, China’s continued prosperity after 1997 contributes to China’s economic
development. However, Hong Kong, China is being used less and less as a gateway for FDI into China and
also less and less as a “window” for China onto the outside world, reflecting China’s openness and the
increasing role of some coastal cities such as Guangzhou, Shanghai and Xiamen, as well as the preference of
both foreign and Chinese firms to have direct transactions to save costs and time.
a It should be noted that about 30 per cent of this investment is indirect FDI, i.e., investment by foreign
affiliates in Hong Kong, China, and more than half of it is directed towards China (UNCTAD, 1997b).
b According to Hong Kong’s Industry Department, investment from these five countries accounted for
61 per cent of the total FDI stock in Hong Kong, China. Investment from China accounted for another 20 per
cent.
80
Chapter II
Flows into four ASEAN Figure II.17. Share of ASEANa in total flows into South,
member countries (Indonesia, East and South-East Asia, 1980-1996
Malaysia, the Philippines and (Percentage)
Thailand) increased by 43 per cent
in 1996, to an estimated $17 billion.
This was attributed to the
significant growth experienced in
Indonesia, Malaysia and Thailand,
while flows into the Philippines
fell below the 1995 level. Despite
absolute increases in FDI over the
past six years, ASEAN economies
as a whole (i.e., including Brunei
Darussalam and Viet Nam) have
experienced sharp decreases in
their share of inflows to South,
East and South-East Asia, from 61
per cent during 1990-1991 to over
30 per cent during 1994-1996 Source: UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database.
(figure II.17). One reason is that a Includes Brunei Darussalam, Indonesia, Malaysia, Philippines,
ASEAN countries have faced Singapore, Thailand and Viet Nam.
domestic capacity constraints and
infrastructure bottlenecks, while other economies in the region are now offering low labour costs
and attractive incentives to foreign investors. Similar circumstances also helped to propel the earlier
FDI take-offs of the ASEAN economies. ASEAN is now responding by proposing an ASEAN
Investment Area to enhance its attractiveness to foreign investors. While the ASEAN Investment
Area is still at the design stage, the types of activities planned -- ranging from coordination of legal
and regulatory measures for further investment liberalization to information exchange, training,
promotion, facilitation and network activities -- will widen the scope for investment in the member
States.
Viet Nam experienced a dramatic decrease of FDI contractual commitments during the first
eleven months of 1996 but, at the end of that year, two large projects pushed the year ’s FDI
commitments to a record-breaking $9 billion, a 29 per cent increase over the previous year.53 The
increase in actual investments, however, was much smaller -- 8 per cent compared with 169 per cent
in 1995.
Investment flows to South Asia rose to about $3.5 billion in 1996, mostly reflecting a
remarkable increase of about 34 per cent in flows to India. After a 47 per cent increase in 1995,
inflows to India reached an estimated $2.6 billion in 1996. For the first time in recent years, FDI
overtook portfolio investment, which accounted for the largest share of private capital inflows into
that country.54 The Government of India has stepped up its efforts to attract FDI, including
investments from overseas Indians, in an effort to raise annual inflows to $10 billion. Recently, India
has become an attractive FDI location for Asian newly industrializing economies. Indeed, the pace
of investment from the Republic of Korea in India is outstripping even that of the United States and
the United Kingdom, traditionally India’s biggest trade and investment partners.55 Firms from the
Republic of Korea plans to invest $4 billion in India in the next two years.56 FDI flows to the rest of
the economies in South Asia remain low, but are growing.
Flows into the Pacific economies were an estimated $375 million in 1996, a decline from their
1995 peak of $590 million. Papua New Guinea continued to be the largest host economy in the
Pacific.
81
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Ranking the countries of Figure II.18. FDI inflows as a percentage of gross fixed capital
the region by the ratio of FDI formation in South, East and South-East Asia, 1995
flows to gross domestic capital (Percentage)
formation in 1995 reveals that FDI
has played a significant role
(about a quarter) in China,
Singapore and Malaysia (figure
II.18). For most of the other
economies in that region,
however, the ratio is less than 10
per cent. Fiji, Papua New Guinea
and Vanuatu, however, enjoyed
particularly high ratios of FDI
flows to gross domestic capital
formation. Malaysia has the
highest ratio of inward FDI stock
to GDP, followed by Singapore,
Indonesia, Hong Kong and China
(figure II.19). The shares of FDI
inflows in gross fixed capital
formation and FDI stock in GDP
Source: UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database.
for the entire region in 1995 were
9 per cent (8 per cent in 1994) and
15 per cent (14 per cent in 1994), respectively. While there is a general recognition that FDI has
contributed to South, East and South-East Asia’s growth and development, the question has also
been raised whether the large current account deficit in some economies can be attributed to the fast
growth of FDI inflows (discussed below).
Intra-regional investment remains the principal FDI source for the region, despite the
remarkable growth of FDI by TNCs from developed countries. For the major Asian developing
economies, the FDI stock
Figure II.19. Inward FDI stock as a percentage of GDP in attributed to other Asian
selected host economies, 1995 developing economies, at nearly 40
(Percentage) per cent, is still larger than that
from either Europe, Japan or the
United States (UNCTAD, 1997b, p.
xiv). The “flying-geese” process of
regional industrial restructuring
remains the driving force behind
intra-regional flows, with more
and more countries taking part. To
keep moving up the value-added
chain of production and stay
competitive, the newly
industrializing economies are
competing to become regional
business centres, trying to attract
FDI in services and high-
technology industries, while the
four ASEAN countries and China
Source: UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database and annex table B.6. have adopted a more selective
approach to FDI, targeting
82
Chapter II
“qualitative investments” for Figure II.20. FDI outflows from South, East and
upgrading their industrial bases. South-East Asia, 1995 and 1996
In the meantime, the rising costs (Billions of dollars)
of land and labour have increased
the speed at which firms based in
the newly industrializing
economies are moving labour-
intensive activities to other parts
of the region, including LDCs (see
above).
Investment outflows
from the region rose by 10 per
cent in 1996, to $46 billion, with
Hong Kong topping the league of
outward investors (figure II.20).
The region accounted for 89 per
cent of FDI outflows from all
developing countries in 1996, and
four fifths of the FDI stock held
by these countries as of that year.
Source: UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database and annex table B.2.
One important feature of the
region’s FDI is its recent great
leap outward, leading to a greater geographical diversity. Outside the region, North America,
Australia and Latin America remain the most important FDI destinations. Asian TNCs are also
expanding rapidly into the European Union (box II.9). More recently they have begun to invest in
Central and Eastern Europe, taking advantage of privatization programmes, rising local demand for
consumer goods and proximity to the European Union market. In the meanwhile, some Asian TNCs,
particularly from Malaysia, China and the newly industrializing economies are also moving into
Africa (see section on Africa).57 Investment from developing Asia to South Africa accounted for
over 20 per cent of the total inflows of that country during 1994-1996.
Developing Asia’s outward FDI exhibits a distinct pattern, reflecting differing stages of
development of the home economies. Firms from the newly industrializing economies, mainly the
Republic of Korea and, to a lesser extent, Taiwan Province of China, are setting up global production
facilities in capital- and technology-intensive industries. These economies, which possess advanced
skills, research and industrial bases and large indigenous firms, are investing extensively in
electronics, automobiles, petrochemicals and oil refineries. Firms from Singapore and Hong Kong
tend to invest more in high value-added services, ranging from trade and finance to tourism, as well
as in some manufacturing niches. The four ASEAN countries are developing indigenous specialized
capabilities in component manufacturing, resource-based activities (e.g., wood, rubber and
petrochemicals) and labour-intensive activities (e.g., textiles). Investments from China and India,
both countries with diversified industrial bases, are also broad-based. Many Asian investors have
been involved extensively in real estate development and infrastructure building.
The extent to which Asian developing economies are becoming more transnationalized is
reflected in the rising ratio of FDI outflows to gross domestic fixed capital formation (annex table
B.5). Although the average ratio for all Asian developing countries is still low by the standards of
the industrialized countries, it is considerably higher than the average for the developing world as a
whole. Among the major home economies in the region, except for Hong Kong (most of whose
outward investment went to mainland China), Singapore recorded the highest degree of international
investment activity in 1991-
83
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Box. II.9. Investment from developing Asia into the European Union is on the rise
Investment outflows from South, East, and South-East Asian developing economies into
Europe increased from an annual average of $100 million during 1989-1991 to an annual average of $
5 billion during the early 1990s. While North America remains their main investment location outside
Asia, manufacturing and services investments in the European Union have gathered momentum.
Still, the European Union accounted for only 4 per cent of Asia’s outward FDI stock in the
early 1990s. Although low, that share reflects the fact that Asian firms are only just beginning to penetrate
the European market. Many firms from the Asian newly industrializing economies increasingly see a
need for a physical presence in the European Union in order to serve this large and rich market. Other
firms from these economies are seeking access to advanced technology, skills or research-and-
development facilities.
Investments in both manufacturing and services projects are primarily located in the United
Kingdom and Germany, followed by France and the Netherlands. The same ranking of host countries
prevails with regards to electronics. The major host countries in the European Union have attracted a
similar number of FDI projects from Asia’s newly industrializing economies, both in manufacturing
and services. The only exception is France, where manufacturing projects (all but one in electronics)
account for two-thirds of the total number of projects. The United Kingdom hosts Asian FDI projects
in all major service industries. In the services sector of Germany, the focus of investors from the Asian
newly industrializing economies has been clearly on trade and, to a lesser extent, on finance and sea
transport.
Partly driven by growing exports, Asian FDI in Europe is on the rise. Still, it is at an early
stage and needs to be nurtured, especially since most Asian firms have little or no experience of investing
in Europe. Governments have a role to play. Asian governments, in addition to gradual liberalization,
could give a helping hand to their outward investors, including through training and orientation
programmes, provision of information, promotion of partnerships and contacts, and rendering financial
support.
Governments of European Union countries could liberalize further FDI frameworks and
remove any remaining impediments to foreign investors. Governments of member countries and the
European Commission could also make greater efforts to assist prospective Asian investors in
establishing themselves in Europe.
1995, followed by Malaysia and Taiwan Province of China (estimates based on annex table B.5).
China, the Republic of Korea and Thailand are catching up rapidly. In fact, the ratio of FDI outflows
to gross fixed capital formation (during 1991-1995) was 9.5 per cent for Singapore and 6.9 per cent
for Malaysia; this compares with 5.6 per cent for all developed countries, 7.9 per cent for the European
Union and 6.6 per cent for the United States.
84
Chapter II
The trend in the transnationalization of firms from the region is likely to continue. For
example, the big six chaebols of the Republic of Korea (Daewoo, Hyundai, LG, Samsung, Sangyong
and Sunkyong) have planned to invest $80 billion abroad between 1996-2005 (EIU, 1996g). At the
same time, the region will most likely maintain its lead in attracting FDI, thanks to the projected
sustained dynamism of the region’s economy.
In the past decade, a number of East and South-East Asian countries experienced remarkable
economic growth, which was partly export-led and associated with an upsurge of FDI during that
period. A feature of this performance is that, despite rapid export growth, large and persistent
current account deficits were registered in some countries, such as Malaysia and Thailand. These
deficits were mainly financed by heavy inflows of private capital, of which FDI constituted a
significant portion. The weakening of global industrial production -- which started in 1995 and
which was particularly severe in the electronic industries -- was a major factor contributing to the
general decline in the pace of export expansion and the deterioration in the current account position
of the region as a whole. In the event, the export slowdown turned out to be short-lived but it,
nevertheless, focused attention on the continuing current account deficits experienced by some
countries and raised questions about the role of FDI in this regard. This section examines this issue,
focusing on the balance-of-payments (BOP) impact of inward FDI. There is no implication that FDI
can or should be judged solely on the basis of its BOP impact. This should be viewed in the broader
context of the general macroeconomic setting and in relation to the role of TNCs as regards other
national objectives, such as growth and development.58
The current account balance is one of the principal indicators that economic authorities follow
closely.59 At certain stages of the development process, large current account deficits need not be a
cause for alarm. Such deficits are normal at the initial stage of industrialization or when there are
major structural changes brought about by the diversification, deepening or upgrading of the
industrial base which involve heavy imports of capital and intermediate goods. Nor is it surprising
that large FDI inflows are at times associated with large current account deficits, as such inflows are
normally used to finance new projects or the expansion or modernization of existing production
facilities. These almost inevitably require the importation of new and advanced machinery.
Nevertheless, the persistence of large deficits raises a number of concerns and entails the risk of a
sudden shift in investors’ confidence, leading to reversals in capital inflows, particularly of portfolio
capital.
In assessing the sustainability of persistent current account imbalances, the ratio of the deficit
to GDP has to be considered in relation to the structural features of the economy, the macroeconomic
policy stance and the political situation.60 Among the structural features are high levels of gross
domestic investment used to expand productive capacity, to promote future economic growth and
to enhance a country’s ability to generate future trade surpluses with which to meet external
obligations. Investment and savings rates could also serve as measures of creditworthiness and as
indicators of the growth potential that international lenders and portfolio investors find attractive.
Another consideration is the importance of the export sector in the economy as measured by the
ratio of exports to GDP. As exports are a source of foreign exchange, a large export sector indicates
a capacity to service and, ultimately, to reduce external indebtedness. The manner in which the
current account deficit is financed as well as the level and composition of external liabilities have an
impact on a country’s ability to absorb external shocks. In the case of foreign debt, the country bears
most of the burden arising from such shocks, whereas equity financing, such as through FDI, allows
asset price adjustments so that foreign investors share part of the negative impact. As to the volatility
of capital flows, this varies according to the type of instrument, with, for example, short-term debt
85
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
and portfolio investment being potentially more volatile than FDI. A satisfactory international reserve
position can also serve as a safety net in times of payments difficulties.
The impact of FDI on the BOP of a country varies, depending on the purpose of the
investment, the nature of the activity and the age of the project. In general, trading transactions of
market-seeking foreign affiliates are likely to entail more imports than exports, particularly in the
initial stage when a substantial proportion of machinery and inputs is likely to be imported.61 By
contrast, resource-based or efficiency-seeking affiliates will generally record higher exports than
imports. The trading consequences of strategic asset-seeking investment are likely to be ambiguous,
depending on the type of investment (Dunning, 1993). Different value-added activities require
different proportions of tradable inputs and outputs. For example, studies on selected Asian
countries show that industries producing apparel and electrical machinery have much higher export
propensities than the chemical industry.62 This finding could also reflect the production orientation
of these industries, whether import substituting or export oriented, as well as differences in
comparative advantage. At the firm or project level, the type of linkages created and the age of a
project are important determinants of the BOP impact; new projects normally require heavy imports
of machinery and equipment as well as intermediate inputs but, as the project matures, import
requirements per unit of output may be expected to decline as local sourcing tends to increase over
time.63 Payments of direct investment income are also likely to increase over time as they are a
function of the stock of inward FDI; such payments necessarily begin only after new investments
become productive and/or profitable. Outflows also result from the payment of royalties, which
can be quite substantial, and, where it occurs, from transfer pricing (Vaitsos, 1973). Factors specific
to a host country, such as the importance of TNCs in the economy, the country’s stage of development,
its size and its resource endowments influence the extent and nature of external transactions of
TNCs. Thus, the effects of FDI on the BOP are bound to be country specific and sensitive to the type
of investment, the industry mix and the maturity structure of investment.
There are various approaches to estimating the impact of TNC activities on the BOP of host
countries.64 One approach, used in the discussion below, is to identify the transactions associated
with their activities that are reflected in the current and financial accounts of the BOP either as
credit(+) or debit(-) entries.65 These are referred to as direct effects. The trading activities of TNCs
generally produce the largest BOP impact. Exports of goods and related freight and insurance
services are credits in the current account, whereas imports are debits. Of particular interest are
payments of direct investment income(-) consisting of dividends, distributed branch profits and
interest on intra-company loans as well as payments of royalties and licence fees used in FDI
operations(-). The most immediate impact on the BOP of FDI may be reflected in the financial
account under the item direct investment in a country (+), comprising equity capital and
intercompany claims and liabilities. Borrowing from offshore capital markets to finance TNC
activities(+) and interest paid on such loans(-) also have immediate and longer term impacts on the
BOP. The sum of all these items would constitute the actual direct BOP effect of TNC activities. If
positive, this would normally involve a foreign exchange inflow; if negative, an outflow.
The operations of TNCs also have indirect BOP effects. These arise mainly from the
contribution of FDI to gross domestic capital formation, which (through the interaction of the
multiplier and accelerator effects) is generally growth enhancing. Higher economic growth, in turn,
influences other macroeconomic variables (e.g., exports, imports and savings) which are reflected
directly or indirectly in the BOP. Large capital inflows or outflows resulting from TNC activities can
also affect the exchange rate and hence the price and volume of traded goods. Transnational
corporations may also induce domestic firms to produce goods for which there is demand abroad,
thus raising exports; or they may use inputs of local suppliers, the production of which requires
86
Chapter II
imported goods, thus raising imports (UNCTC, 1981). These are just some examples of how FDI
affects the BOP indirectly. The indirect effects could be significant, but are difficult to quantify and
the validity of estimates depends on the realism of simplifying assumptions.
Another problem is that the BOP effect of FDI cannot be measured exactly without knowing
what would have happened if the FDI had not occurred (Dunning, 1993). It is the “net effect” that
counts, measured by the difference between the actual external transactions associated with TNC
activities and those that would have occurred in their absence. Any such assessment is bound to be
conjectural, and its validity depends on the conduct of macroeconomic policy and various
behavioural assumptions. Another approach that is widely used is regression analysis relating FDI
with important BOP and other macroeconomic variables. In this case, the choice of explanatory
variables would necessarily be selective. Despite measurement problems and other limitations, a
number of empirical studies examine the effect of FDI on the BOP by applying these different
approaches mentioned. Most of the literature deals with the BOP impact of outward investment,
but there are also some important studies on inward FDI (see box II.10).
This section examines the BOP impact of inward FDI on four Asian economies -- China,
Malaysia, Singapore and Thailand -- in which FDI has played an important role, particularly since
the mid-1980s. They represent countries at various stages of development, with different market
sizes and resource endowments. Singapore has generally had, and continues to have, a healthy BOP
position. Malaysia and Thailand, while experiencing rapid export growth, due largely to FDI in
export-oriented industries, registered large and persistent current account deficits in the 1990s.
China’s current account balance in the past decade has, on average, been positive.
Table II.9 presents quantitative estimates of transactions by foreign affiliates that would be
captured in the BOP of these countries. There are serious data constraints on trade and financial
flows related specifically to foreign affiliates in a host country. For some countries, inward FDI was
the only variable for which complete time-series data are available. Sometimes, existing trade data
provide only partial coverage of TNC activities. In view of these data limitations, only imperfect
insights into the repercussions of TNC activities on the BOP can be gleaned. Nevertheless, the analysis
and comparison of country experiences can give an indication of which factors were responsible for
differences in the impact on the individual country’s BOP.
i. Singapore
Of the four countries, Singapore is the most economically advanced, and is characterized by
a high degree of industrial sophistication and technological capability. Foreign direct investment
has been vital to the economic development of the country. During the period 1991-1995, FDI
accounted for about a quarter of gross fixed capital formation. The manufacturing sector is heavily
dominated by foreign affiliates whose share in total exports was 87 per cent in 1994. Since 1988, the
current account has registered a healthy and rising surplus, averaging over $13 billion a year in
1994-1996. This surplus combined with high capital inflows has allowed international reserves and
outward investment to increase steadily. The surplus is a reflexion of a very high domestic savings
rate relative to the investment rate -- 49 per cent and 35 per cent, respectively, in 1995.
Singapore’s statistics do not distinguish payments of direct investment income from those of
other investment income. There are no figures on imports of TNCs so that the net trade effect cannot be
determined. There is, however, reason to believe that the net contribution of FDI to the BOP is positive.
Studies have shown that TNCs have significantly higher export propensities than domestic firms.66 The
87
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Sanjaya Lall and Paul Streeten (1977) conducted empirical studies to quantify the BOP and income
effects of FDI in the manufacturing sector of six developing countries (Colombia, India, the Islamic Republic
of Iran, Jamaica, Kenya and Malaysia). The studies covered a sample of 159 firms, of which 147 had foreign
equity participation. Except for Kenya, the overall direct effects of the activities of sample firms on the BOP
of host countries were found to be negative. As a percentage of sample firms’ sales, the negative effects
ranged from 12 per cent in India to 55 per cent in the Islamic Republic of Iran. The surprisingly positive
direct effect for Kenya, amounting to 3 per cent of sales, can be explained by the large exports of some firms
surveyed which were probably not representative of all foreign firms in the country. Regardless of the
industry or source of control, a large majority of sample firms had negative direct effects. On average,
foreign-controlled firms had more adverse direct effects than locally controlled firms. These results can be
attributed largely to the nature of import-substituting industrialization at that time. Government policies
clearly induced FDI into industries that were neither very competitive nor export oriented. Moreover, the
bulk of FDI in manufacturing was heavily dependent on imports.
Lall and Streeten recognized that a comprehensive evaluation of the BOP effects of FDI must
compare the actual situation with what would have happened had FDI not occurred, and calculate the
direct and indirect effects under each situation. The approach used was to calculate social income effects of
FDI in a cost-benefit framework. Three alternatives to FDI were considered, the first of which was importing
the entire output produced by foreign firms. The net income effects were negative in about 40 per cent of
sample firms, though this had no relation to “foreignness”. The main determinant of variations in the
income effects was the extent of protection granted to the firms. The second — the financial replacement
alternative — compared the actual cost of servicing FDI (through profits, interest and royalty payments)
with the social cost of alternative sources, such as local capital or foreign borrowing. The finding was that
the purely financial contribution of FDI appeared to be negligible or negative, implying that it would have
been cheaper to use alternative sources. The third alternative was the most likely local replacement. By
means of a composite index of technology and entrepreneurship ability, each sample firm was assigned a
certain degree of local replacement. The results showed that some 30 per cent of firms with foreign equity
appeared to be totally replaceable by local firms, 50 per cent were partially replaceable, and the rest totally
irreplaceable. However, the study emphasized that the calculations might have overlooked some other
relevant factors.
The United Nations Centre on Transnational Corporations (1981) conducted a study on the direct
effects of TNCs on the BOP of Mexico, based on the 1977 trade of all foreign affiliates in Mexico identified
as having international trade transactions. Assumptions were made as to the foreign-affiliate share of other
BOP items for which TNC transactions were not separately identified. The study showed a current account
deficit of $758 million for foreign affiliates, representing 47 per cent of the country’s current account deficit
in 1977. The overall BOP deficit arising from activities of foreign affiliates, including FDI-related capital
flows, amounted to $521 million. A disaggregation by industry showed discernible differences in the export
and import orientation of TNCs. The largest importers were in pharmaceuticals, machinery and automobiles,
accounting for 65 per cent of total imports of foreign affiliates, largely surpassing their share of exports of 34
per cent. In contrast, heavy industries had the highest share of exports (47 per cent), compared with a 30
per cent share of imports. These trade patterns are reflected in their respective share in the trade deficit: 92
per cent for the former and 4 per cent for the latter. Non-durable consumer goods accounted for the remaining
4 per cent.
The studies mentioned above were undertaken several years ago. Conditions and policy
orientation have since changed, which could raise doubts as to the studies’ relevance to current analysis. A
recent study (Fry, 1996) examined the effects of FDI inflows on a group of six Asian economies (Indonesia,
Republic of Korea, Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore and Thailand). Through regression equations, the five
channels through which FDI influences the economy and hence the BOP were examined, namely, savings,
investment, exports, imports and economic growth. Positive effects were found on the first four variables,
with a lagged response for exports. The impact on economic growth was felt indirectly through the effects
on investment and exports. The result of a dynamic simulation showed that FDI raised investment initially
and worsened the current account balance. However, in the steady state (i.e., constant ratio of FDI to GDP
over time) savings increased even more than investment because of the growth resulting from current
and previous FDI, thus leading to an improvement in the current account balance in the long run.
88
Chapter II
Table II.9. Balance-of-payments transactions of foreign affiliates in selected Asian countries, 1990-1995a
(Millions of dollars)
Country 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995
China
Trade, net ... ... -9 015 -16 596 -18 221 -16 050
Exports ... 12 000 17 356 25 237 34 713 46 890
Imports ... ... -26 371 -41 833 -52 934 -62 940
Direct investment incomeb - 46 - 10 - 22 - 231 - 400 -9 953
Subtotal: current account ... ... -9 037 -16 827 -18 621 -26 003
FDI in country 3 487 4 366 11 156 27 515 33 787 35 849
Total transactions of affiliates ... ... 2 119 10 688 15 166 9 846
Memo item: Country
Current account balance 11 997 13 272 6 401 -11 609 6 908 1 618
c
Malaysia
Trade, net 787 -1 302 349 -166 -2 028 ...
Exports 15 462 18 284 22 316 26 177 34 483 ...
Imports, c.i.f. -14 675 -19 586 -21 967 -26 343 -36 511 ...
Royalties - 176 - 216 - 275 - 273 - 273 ...
Direct investment income -1 926 -2 275 -2 939 -3 222 -3 846 -5 350
Subtotal: current account -1 315 -3 793 -2 865 -3 661 -6 147 ...
FDI in country 2 332 3 998 5 183 5 006 4 348 4 700
Total transactions of affiliates 1 017 205 2 318 1 345 -1 799 ...
Memo item: Country
Current account balance - 870 -4 183 -2 167 -2 809 -4 147 -6 800
Singapore
Trade, net ... ... ... ... ... ...
Exports, manufacturing 22 504 22 620 24 331 ... ... ...
Imports ... ... ... ... ... ...
Direct investment income ... ... ... ... ... ...
Subtotal: current account ... ... ... ... ... ...
FDI in country 5 575 4 887 2 204 4 686 5 480 6 912
Total transactions of affiliates ... ... ... ... ... ...
Memo item: Country
Current account balance 3 097 4 884 5 615 4 205 11 284 15 093
Thailand
Trade, net ... ... ... ... ... ...
Exports ... ... ... ... ... ...
Imports ... ... ... ... ... ...
Royalties and license feesd - 170 - 206 - 281 - 427 - 452 - 630
Direct investment income - 312 - 56 ... ... ... ...
Subtotal: current account ... ... ... ... ... ...
FDI in country 2 444 2 014 2 114 1 730 1 322 2 003
Total transactions of affiliates ... ... ... ... ... ...
Memo item: Country
Current account balance -7 281 -7 571 -6 303 -6 364 -8 085 -13 554
Sources: UNCTAD, based on IMF, 1996b; and other international and national sources.
a Positive figures are credits; negative figures are debits.
b Profits and dividend payments were not recorded before 1995.
c Trade data for 1990-1992 are based on Phang (forthcoming), whereas 1993-1994 data are extrapolations using the
growth in trade of foreign affiliates (limited companies only); 1994 royalties assumed to be the same as 1993.
d Total paid, includes non-TNCs.
89
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
presence of many local firms that supply and service foreign affiliates in Singapore implies that
domestically-sourced inputs and value added are likely to be significant. Data on United States'
non-bank foreign affiliates suggest that TNCs from the United States contribute positively to the
merchandise trade balance of Singapore. In 1993, United States imports of goods shipped by these
affiliates from Singapore amounted to $9 billion, or more than double the exports of goods shipped
from the United States to these affiliates in Singapore of $4 billion.67 However, United States foreign
affiliates represented less than 12 per cent of Singapore’s total merchandise exports and less than
one-fifth of its stock of foreign direct equity investment in that year, so that it is difficult to make
generalizations on the overall trade contribution of TNCs only on the basis of United States data. It
should be noted that the overall trade balance (including trade-related services) of Singapore has
been in deficit in the 1990s and the major contribution to the current account surplus derives from
other services. Singapore has a highly developed traded services sector and already has a strong
position in the region as a financial and offshore banking centre. These are areas in which foreign
affiliates are quite active. In the electronic industries, which are dominant in Singapore, constant
upgrading and diversification have failed to prevent a declining trend in the importance of
manufacturing. This trend coincides with an expansion of the country’s role as a regional
procurement and operational headquarters, as well as a research-and-development centre. The stock
of FDI in the services sector now exceeds by a large margin those in the primary and secondary
sectors. While there are no data on the TNC contribution to the substantial surplus in the service
account, this is likely to be significant. (The services sector is, in general, less import-intensive then,
but probably as export-intensive as the manufacturing sector (UNCTC, 1989).) Inward FDI flows
have been sustained at a fairly high level in the 1990s, but remittances of profits have also been
rising.
The benefits of FDI to the BOP and to the economy as a whole result from deliberate
government policy. Creating an attractive business environment for TNCs has been a principal
concern (of the Government). Therefore, the Government has invested substantially to provide
adequate infrastructure, education and training, R&D and public services. FDI policies have been
directed at supporting priority sectors and achieving sustained and diversified growth.
ii. Malaysia
Malaysia is one of the fastest growing countries of the region, with growth averaging about
9 per cent a year between 1990 to 1996. The structural transformation of the economy over the past
two decades has placed it at the forefront of the second-tier of newly industrializing economies.
Transnational corporations have played an important role in this transformation and in the
spectacular expansion of manufacturing exports. These accounted for 80 per cent of total exports in
1995, compared with 21 per cent in 1980. Malaysia has been one of the largest recipients of FDI
among developing countries. The big surge in FDI with a decisive export orientation occurred in the
late 1980s and has been sustained throughout the 1990s. Malaysia has a high savings rate but the
investment rate is even higher. This is reflected in the current account, which registered rising deficits
throughout the 1990s, reaching a peak of $6.8 billion or 7.7 per cent of GDP in 1995. The deficit
declined in 1996 with an easing of overheating pressures in response to weakening export demand,
which led to slower import growth.
90
Chapter II
gross output in 1981 to 22 per cent in 1992. A survey of 18 of the largest foreign affiliates in the
industry carried out in 1995 showed that the value of imported materials and components accounted
for 78 per cent of their total inputs (Ariff and Yew, 1996); this is much higher than the average for all
manufacturing industries. The global electrical and electronics industry is highly competitive and
requires specialized inputs that meet precise quality standards. These inputs may not easily be
available locally. Building a network of local suppliers takes time, although already there are
encouraging signs of foreign affiliates forging backward linkages.68 Evidence points to local
technological capabilities influencing the extent of local procurement. There are indications of
technological deepening and upgrading, and of serious efforts to diversify beyond the electrical/
electronic industries. There may also be possibilities for the country, with its rich natural resources,
to develop resource-based industries; this could be beneficial to the BOP as relatively fewer imported
inputs would be required and higher domestic value added per unit of output.69 This suggests an
area where more FDI can be attracted, but the pace of all these changes appears slow, as does
technological absorption. A principal constraint is the shortage of skilled labour and there are other
deficiencies in transport, telecommunications and energy, which the Government is attempting to
remedy. The economy is almost close to full employment and has lost its comparative advantage in
low-skilled labour-intensive type activities, which characterize a substantial part of TNC activities
in the country. With a labour shortage, and based on what has been achieved so far, the country may
need to shift to higher value-added activities, which would require substantial investment in R&D
and a strengthening of the human resource base.
The contribution of TNCs to the trade balance in 1990-1994 was on the whole negative.
With profit remittances and other direct investment income payments averaging $2.8 billion per
year, foreign affiliates had large current account deficits during the period, generally surpassing the
deficits registered for the country as a whole. This implies that, in contrast, local firms and other
entities had contributed positively to the current account. Because of heavy inflows of FDI, the
overall direct effect of TNC activities on the balance of payments was positive. However, remittances
of profits show a steadily rising trend. That is not unexpected, given the heavy inflows of FDI since
the late 1980s, which added substantially to the FDI stock. Profit remittances may soon exceed
inward FDI flows, which have not grown much in recent years. An extrapolation of available data
suggests that the total direct effect has probably been negative in the past few years. International
reserves dropped in 1994 and 1995, although an increase was registered in 1996. After some time
lag, the impact of FDI on the BOP may turn positive. There is, moreover, scope for improving such
gains by reducing import dependence and moving towards more profitable value-added activities.
Foreign direct investment has contributed to a major structural transformation in Malaysia, but now
a major challenge for the country is how to create the conditions which would encourage FDI that
would upgrade and diversify the country’s industrial base.
iii. Thailand
Like Malaysia, Thailand benefited from the currency appreciation and higher labour cost in
Japan and other Asian newly industrializing economies, which led to a sharp rise in FDI inflows in
the late 1980s. The expansion of largely export-oriented FDI fuelled strong export growth and
triggered an investment boom. Economic growth has been rapid, averaging 8 per cent per year
between 1990 to 1996. However, Thailand was among the countries in the region most affected by
the 1996 export slowdown. For the first time in almost a decade, GDP growth fell below 7 per cent.
In the 1990s, Thailand registered a widening of the current account deficit, which reached
around 8 per cent of GDP in 1995 and 1996. This was, of course, a manifestation of the large savings-
investment gap. The savings rate of 34 per cent in 1990-1995, high in relation to the average of
around 25 per cent for developing countries as a whole,70 was surpassed by the gross domestic
91
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
investment rate of over 41 per cent. The large current account deficits were only partly financed by
FDI. Most of the financing was through external borrowing, particularly bank loans. In recent
years, these have shown a shift in maturity structure, with a rising share of short-term debt, that is
creating concern.
Data limitations again prevent a definite assessment of the BOP effects of FDI. Investment
inflows averaged $2 billion a year in 1990-1995.71 Royalty payments and licence fees have been
increasing as well as investment income, of which profit remittances are a significant part. Indications
are that FDI has played an important role in the large trade deficit, which constitutes the bulk of the
current account deficit. An analysis of the impact of FDI flows, using a dynamic simulation exercise
for the period 1987-1991 of a simple macroeconomic model of Thailand, confirmed the expansionary
effect of FDI on exports, private investment and GDP growth (Jansen, 1995). However, FDI also led
to an adjustment process in which imports and investment income payments rose sharply, resulting
in enlarging the current account deficit by more than the increase in FDI. A decomposition analysis
of the sharp increase in the import to GDP ratio from 25 per cent in 1985 to 40 per cent in 1991
showed that this was largely due to a rise in import dependency, which was related to the growing
role of FDI. Foreign investment projects imported 90 per cent of all machinery and equipment and
over 50 per cent of raw materials. The trend towards intra-regional networks of FDI and trade may
have further strengthened this dependence. In 1995, the ratio of total merchandise imports to GDP
increased even further to over 42 per cent. However, import dependency that is related to FDI,
especially that involving imports for processing, is likely to be cyclically sensitive. Hence, imports
will probably decrease as capacities in affected industries become less fully utilized. Moreover,
considering that over 43 per cent of total imports in 1990-1995 were capital goods, the current BOP
constraint resulting from such imports has to be weighed against future growth in income and
savings.
The heavy reliance on imported inputs, coupled with low value added, limit the realization
of potential foreign exchange gains from FDI. Although backward linkages exist in resource-based
and lower-end manufacturing, few local linkages have been generated for more technologically
sophisticated industries because of the inability of local support industries to provide quality inputs
and services. Thailand needs to upgrade and diversify its industrial base, not only to increase value
added, but because it is already losing its competitive edge in low value-added labour-intensive
industries, which have accounted for much of the FDI in the past decade. Higher technology
industries are slowly coming onstream. But there appear to be bottlenecks due to the shortage of
skilled labour and inadequate resources devoted to research and development. In view of the long-
term nature of these activities, upgrading may take time. In the near future, it is expected that the
current account deficit will narrow, as an improvement in the savings rate is accompanied by lower
investment and import rates, due to surplus capacity in many basic industries.
iv. China
China has been the largest developing country recipient of FDI since 1992. During 1993-
1996, it accounted for 36 per cent of FDI flows to developing countries, with average annual FDI
amounting to almost $35 billion.72 China constitutes an attractive location not only because of its
size, but because of its economic growth. This averaged more than 10 per cent a year during 1990-
1996. But market access has not been the only motive for FDI; relatively low labour costs have made
China an important export platform for TNCs engaged in labour-intensive industries.
China generally enjoyed current account surpluses in the 1990s.73 However, the figures
need to be revised downwards, as the reporting of dividends and profit remittances only started in
1995. The
92
Chapter II
total direct impact of the BOP transactions of foreign affiliates has been positive (even allowing for
adjustments in payments of direct investment income), but this has largely been due to heavy inflows
of FDI. The net trade effect of TNC activities has been negative and substantial. A decomposition of
1994-1996 trade data into processing and non-processing shows large deficits, averaging $22.5 billion
a year in non-processing trade of foreign affiliates, a substantial portion of which consisted of imports
of investment goods (table II.10). In contrast, processing trade registered a rising net surplus, reaching
$11.6 billion in 1996. This reflects a marked decline for foreign affiliates in the import intensity of
processed exports (as measured by the ratio of imports for processing to exports after processing)
from 92 per cent in 1994 to 78 per cent in 1996. However, this still compares unfavourably with the
1996 ratio for local firms of 66 per cent, implying higher local value added for the latter. This suggests
an area where further improvement in the BOP contribution of FDI could take place, provided that
local suppliers are competitive and are up to international standards. It is expected that the deficit
on invisibles would widen because of rising direct investment income payments. This, combined
with heavy investment requirements, leads to a forecast of current account deficits for China in the
coming years. But FDI inflows are likely to remain high, which should be sufficient to finance the
deficit (EIU,1996h).
***
The impact of FDI-related activities on the balance of payments is bound to be country specific
and sensitive to the type of investment, the industry mix and the age structure of investment. Results
of a dynamic simulation of a macroeconomic model of six Asian countries showed that FDI raised
investment initially and worsened the current account balance (Fry, 1996). However, in the steady
state (i.e., constant ratio of FDI to GDP over time), savings increased even more than investment
because of the growth resulting from current and previous FDI leading to an improvement in the
current account balance in the long run. Factors specific to a host country, such as the importance of
TNCs in the economy, the country’s stage of development, its size and its resource endowments,
influence the extent and nature of external transactions of TNCs. As the overall BOP effect of FDI
comprises direct and indirect effects, the validity of estimates depends on the adequacy of the data
and the realism of the assumptions associated with indirect effects. The counterfactual situation is
also virtually impossible to determine, and thus efforts to evaluate the BOP effects of TNC activities
can at best allow only partial conclusions.
Foreign affiliates 34.8 53.0 - 18.2 46.9 62.9 - 16.1 61.5 75.6 - 14.1
Processing trade 30.6 28.1 2.5 42.1 37.1 5.0 53.1 41.5 11.6
Non-processing trade 4.2 24.9 - 20.7 4.8 25.9 - 21.1 8.4 34.1 - 25.7
All firms 121.0 115.0 6.0 148.8 132.1 16.7 151.1 138.8 12.2
Processing trade 57.0 47.0 10.0 73.7 58.4 15.4 84.4 62.3 22.1
Non-processing trade 64.0 68.0 - 4.0 75.1 73.7 1.3 66.7 76.5 - 9.8
Source: UNCTAD, based on International Trade Centre; UNCTAD/WTO calculations, based on ITC’s
ChinaTraders database, provided by the Statistics Department, Customs General Administration, China.
a Foreign affiliates include fully foreign-owned, equity joint ventures and contractual joint ventures. Components
may not add up to totals due to rounding.
b Differences in trade data from table II.9 may be due to rounding.
93
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Beyond that, it is clear that FDI cannot be judged solely on the basis of its BOP impact.
Whatever the impact, it should be viewed in relation to TNCs’ contributions to other objectives,
such as growth and development. Moreover, an evaluation of the effects of TNC operations on the
BOP needs to be placed in the context of a country’s overall macroeconomic performance. At some
stages in the development process, for example, the presence of large current account deficits need
not cause alarm. The persistence of large deficits, of course, can raise the concern of economic
authorities. But, in assessing their sustainability, the level of deficits must be considered in relation
to the structural features of a country’s economy; its macroeconomic policy stance; and the political
situation; which all influence a country’s ability to meet future payments obligations and absorb
external shocks. Nonetheless, the importance of government policies that facilitate and encourage
foreign affiliates to build forward and backward linkages and to raise domestic value added needs
to be emphasized. Such policies not only help improve the BOP but, above all, contribute to the
strengthening of domestic enterprises and, therefore, to growth and development.
5. West Asia
West
After a slowdown of FDI flows to developing West Asia (annex table B.1) in 1994 and large
disinvestments in 1995,74 particularly in Saudi Arabia and Yemen, investment flows attained a level
of nearly $2 billion in 1996. Flows to West Asia in that year accounted for 1.5 per cent of all FDI flows
to developing countries. (Including Israel, flows to West Asia accounted for 1 per cent of global FDI
flows in 1996.) The nearly $3 billion increase in FDI inflows in 1996 reflected mainly increases in
Saudi Arabia, Syrian Arab Republic, Turkey and Yemen. Some three-fifths of the countries in the
region have received higher inflows in 1996 than in 1995 (figure II.21). Turkey alone received $1.1
billion in 1996, an increase of 26 per cent over 1995.
94
Chapter II
Investment flows to West Asia have been declining over time. West Asia’s share of
developing-country inflows fell from 30 per cent during the period 1981-1985 to 2 per cent during
the period 1991-1996. This reflected mainly decreases in FDI flows to the eight oil exporting
countries,75 whose share of total developing-country inflows declined markedly -- from 29 per cent
to 0.3 per cent -- between the same periods. However, the share of developing-country inflows
accounted for by the six non-oil exporting economies has increased only marginally,76 from 1.2 per
cent to 1.7 per cent, between the above-mentioned periods. This poor performance of West Asia as a
host to FDI is also reflected in the low ratio of FDI to gross fixed capital formation, which averaged
1.2 per cent during the period 1991-1995, whilst in Africa (another region receiving little FDI) the
corresponding share was 6 per cent (figure II.22).
The past ten years (1986-1996) have been characterized by significant year-to-year
fluctuations in investment flows to West Asia. Saudi Arabia and, to a lesser extent, Yemen are
responsible for most of these fluctuations. Investment in oil exploration and other natural resources
in these economies tends to be “lumpy”, because large FDI inflows may occur in one year, but not in
following years. In Yemen, for example, large investment inflows in oil exploration took place
between 1991 and 1993 (e.g., by Canadian Occidental Petroleum Ltd. (Canada) in partnership with
Pecten Yemen and Consolidated Contractors International Co. (Lebanon)77 ), but these inflows
dropped to minuscule levels thereafter and even turned negative in some years, because of net
disinvestments. If Saudi Arabia and Yemen are omitted, a more stable FDI trend emerges over the
1990s. Furthermore, 1996 (and not 1993) emerges as the peak year for investment inflows in the past
decade. In other words, the volatility of inflows into two West Asian economies -- albeit major ones
-- masks recent improvements in the FDI performance of other countries in the same region.
Figure II.22. FDI inflows as a percentage of gross fixed capital formation in West Asia, 1995
(Percentage)
95
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
West Asian countries are beginning to make stronger efforts to create a business-friendly
environment. However, countries that are members of the Gulf Co-operation Council (GCC)78 are
relatively less open to non-GCC investors.79 For example, in Oman, effective from January 1997, the
new corporation tax code penalizes companies with foreign-equity stakes by requiring them to pay
tax rates of 25 to 50 per cent on profits (depending on the level of foreign ownership), while wholly
owned Omani firms pay tax rates ranging between 5 to 7.5 per cent (EIU, 1996i). However, the
preferential FDI treatment given to GCC members is not reflected in the pattern of bilateral
investment treaties. As of 1 January 1997, only 7 of the 152 treaties concluded by these countries for
the promotion and protection of FDI were intra-regional bilateral arrangements. France, Germany
and the United Kingdom together accounted for some three-fifths of the treaties signed by West
Asian countries with developed countries (UNCTAD, 1997c).
Most FDI outflows from West Asia originate mainly from Kuwait and Saudi Arabia and are
directed to GCC members. Though small, annual average intra-regional flows have tripled between
the periods 1980-1985 and 1991-1994, attaining $640 million in the latter period (UNCTAD, 1997c).
While the petroleum industry of the oil exporting countries receives most FDI inflows, in the
non- oil exporting economies FDI flows go mainly to the secondary and tertiary sectors. Activities
to expand the oil and gas industry and plans for large investments mainly in Oman, Qatar and the
United Arab Emirates to supply gas to Asian markets, encourages petroleum FDI into these
countries.80 Saudi Arabia’s application in 1997 to join the WTO, if successful, could enable its
petrochemical industry to gain better access to international markets, as well as boost its non-oil
exports through enhanced investment and trade liberalization.81 FDI flows to non-oil producing
economies, such as Jordan, Lebanon and Turkey are increasingly going into manufacturing. In the
case of Turkey, manufacturing FDI, rising since 1988, has been encouraged by the 1989 customs
union agreement with the European Union. The privatization of large state-owned firms, notably
the planned sale of a 30 per cent stake in Turk Telekom in 1997, could lead to more FDI in services.
Flows to Cyprus are concentrated in tourism and financial services.
1. Trends
Trends
In 1996, FDI flows into Central and Eastern Europe fell to $12 billion from $14 billion in the
previous year (annex table B.1). Nonetheless, inflows during 1995-1996 were more than twice as
high as the annual average inflow (of nearly $6 billion) during 1992-1994. Large declines were
registered by Hungary (nearly $3 billion), the Czech Republic (over $1 billion) and the Russian
Federation ($200 million). Among the largest recipients in that region (figure II.23), only Poland saw
a substantial increase in inflows in 1996, to $5.2 billion.82 The region’s inward FDI stock in 1996, at
$46 billion, was less than that of Indonesia ($59 billion).
The reduced flows into Central and Eastern Europe reflect, in part, declines in privatization-
related investments. In Hungary, for example, FDI flows worth $600 million in 1996 (or 29 per cent
of its inflows) were received in connection with privatizations, compared with about $3 billion in
1995 (or 66 per cent of inflows in that year).83 The decline in FDI inflows also reflects problems
related to transition to a market economy. Without a stable market economy in place, some foreign
investors may have overestimated the region’s potential to absorb FDI and temporarily shelved
plans for expansion.
96
Chapter II
Nonetheless, prospects for privatization-related investment in the region are still good,
especially in those countries that are only now embarking on large-scale privatization schemes, such
as Bulgaria (in 1997-1998) and Romania (in 1997). Even in countries in which privatization is quite
advanced, such as the Czech Republic, there are still good prospects for sequential FDI, although the
extent to which such FDI takes place varies from privatization project to privatization project. There
are also signs that investments that are unconnected with privatization schemes, and are geared to
both domestic and regional markets, are increasing, propelled by closer trade links with the European
Union.84 Efficiency-seeking investments are also on the rise, as TNCs, especially automobile
manufacturers, are taking advantage of the availability of skilled low-cost labour in several countries
in the region.85
Investment flows to the region remain concentrated in the Czech Republic, Hungary, Poland
and the Russian Federation. The first three countries alone accounted for 68 per cent of the region’s
inflows (and 73 per cent of its inward stock) in 1996. (It should be noted, however, that these countries
together also accounted for 30 per cent of the region’s GDP in 1995.) Western European TNCs still
dominate the FDI source picture, followed closely by TNCs from the United States and the Asian
newly industrializing economies, in particular the Republic of Korea (UN-ECE, 1996a). Japanese
TNCs remain on the sideline.
Figure II.23. FDI flows into the top 20 countries in Central and Eastern Europe, 1995-1996a
(Billions of dollars)
97
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Trade within the region by the Czech Republic, Hungary, Poland and Slovakia rose by 40 per cent in
1995, and trade between the Czech Republic and Poland has more than doubled since 1995 (UN-
ECE, 1996b). Several Central and Eastern European companies are also investing in the region (box
II.11), including through mergers and acquisitions and joint ventures. For example, Slovakia’s VSZ
a.s. merged with Trinecke Zelezarny a.s. from the Czech Republic, to form a steel-making company,
and the Russian gas company Gazprom acquired Hungary’s General Banking & Trust Co.87
The growing importance of intra-regional FDI is also reflected in the fact that 16 per cent of
the BITs concluded by Central and Eastern European countries are with other countries of the region,
most of them settled in 1996. Romania leads, together with Poland, in BITs concluded with other
transitional economies, followed by the Czech Republic, Hungary and Ukraine (see annex table
B.10).
In 1996, Hungary experienced record FDI outflows of $58 million. In the first quarter of
1997, more than $50 million FDI outflows were approved.a Last year, the National Bank of Hungary
registered 385 licences and approved another 74 licences for outward investment. Hungarian firms
initiated new investments in 44 countries in 1996, mostly in Romania, followed by the United States
and Slovakia. The favoured locations for Hungarian FDI were Slovakia, Romania and Austria. In
Romania, Hungary was the twentieth largest foreign investor, contributing $23 million in cumulative
inflows out of an estimated total of $2.2 billion between 1989 and 1996.
Oil and Gas Ltd. (MOL), Hungary’s largest company and its second biggest exporter, has
become that country’s most active outward investor. In Croatia, Oil and Gas Ltd. is negotiating the
acquisition (for DM 92.8 million) of a 12.5 per cent stake in the Adriatic Sea-Hungary pipeline. The
company has also expanded its network of petroleum distribution in neighbouring countries and has
participated in oil exploration and drilling in the Commonwealth of Independent States, as well as in
other oil-endowed countries in other regions. Hungarian pharmaceutical producer Richter Gedeon
has established, together with a Russian partner, a packaging factory in the Russian Federation. In
Romania, pharmaceutical producer Pharmavit has been the most successful Hungarian investor.b
Zalakerámia, a ceramic tile manufacturer, acquired a producer in Croatia and, recently, the majority
stake in the Cesaron factory in Romania.c
• Most major Hungarian enterprises have been privatized and have, by now, consolidated their
activities and strengthened their financial position. Some are listed on the local stock exchange,
enabling them to raise capital, including for outward investment.
• The small size of Hungary’s economy leaves many enterprises with international expansion as
the only avenue for becoming competitive internationally.
98
Chapter II
The available data suggest that Hungarian FDI in Central and Eastern European countries is
concentrated in manufacturing, whereas the country’s FDI in Western countries appears to be more
geared towards establishing a trading presence.
Hungary’s investment abroad has been facilitated by the liberalization of its FDI regime in
compliance with the country’s OECD membership. In 1996, the regulation of capital outflows was
simplified. A two-step procedure for authorization for outward FDI, involving both the Ministry of
Industry and Trade and the Ministry of Finance, was replaced by a one-stop reporting and registration
obligation with the National Bank of Hungary. Only portfolio investments and special cases not fulfilling
all provisions of the new law (e.g., where the host country is not an OECD member country and no
bilateral investment treaty exists) now require prior authorization by the National Bank of Hungary.
The Government is also considering measures to promote further outward FDI, such as
establishment of a promotion fund, preferential credit lines and investment guarantees. The promotion
fund would operate as a joint stock investment company, co-investing with Hungarian private
enterprises that invest abroad and selling its stake in the fund to those enterprises after a period of
time. The Hungarian Export Credit Guarantee Corporation (MEHIB) has developed a political risk
insurance scheme for Hungarian outward investors. Investment locations are ranked on the basis of
four risk categories that are revised twice a year. A fifth category applies to countries on an ad hoc
basis.
a See Világgazdaság, “Növekszik a magyar tökekivitel” (”Hungarian capital exports increase”), vol. 29,
no. 46, 5 June 1997, pp. 1 and 3.
b See Magyar Hirlap, “Egyre több magyar cég lépi át a határokat” (”There are more and more Hungarian
firms investing abroad”), 8 February 1997, pp. 1 and 10.
c See Tamás G. Korányi, “Bukarestben vett gyárat a Zalakerámia” (”Zalakerámia has bought factory in
Bucharest”), Napi Gazdaság, vol. 6, no. 209, 4 June 1997.
99
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
By increasing competition in local markets, FDI has had a major influence on market
structures in several countries of Central and Eastern Europe. There are many examples of FDI
liberalization contributing to a healthier competitive market. Foreign direct investment, particularly
in small and medium-sized enterprises, has helped to de-monopolize markets and stimulate
competitive behaviour. Foreign-investor participation in the restructuring and privatization of large
state-owned enterprises has helped to overcome the “legacy of monopolization” (Fingleton et al.,
1997). Foreign affiliates typically have better marketing capabilities, a superior market performance
and are also engaged more actively in exporting than are purely domestic firms (UNCTAD, 1995a).88
Competition introduced by such firms, either in the form of products and services unavailable
previously or of higher quality, is forcing local producers and service providers to try and enhance
their own performance (OECD, 1996c; see also Hooley et al., 1996). This is particularly visible in
consumer-related services and manufacturing industries that were neglected under the centrally
planned system (box II.12).
The rush of TNCs to establish a local presence in the region has resulted, in many industries,
in too many companies fighting for too few consumers. That has further improved consumer welfare
through quality improvements and price decreases and a consumer orientation of goods and services
hitherto unknown in the countries of the region. This has been further accentuated by growing
competition from local manufacturers who are taking advantage of the new business opportunities
and are winning customers back from foreign companies (and brands) by improving quality and
offering less expensive products.
Box II.12. TNCs in consumer and service industries in Central and Eastern Europe
Services industries and consumer-oriented manufacturing were mostly neglected under the
centrally-planned economic systems in Central and Eastern Europe. After the market-opening, prior
unavailable products and services were introduced through trade and investment. For example, retailing
companies such as Globi (Belgium), Robert/Auchan (France), Savia/Tesco (United Kingdom), Seham/
Ahold & Allkauf (Germany), Marks & Spencer (United Kingdom), Ikea (Netherlands) and Metro
(Switzerland) expanded their networks of supermarkets and hypermarkets to the Baltics, the Czech
Republic, Hungary, Poland and Slovakia.a In the tobacco industry, companies such as B.A.T. (United
Kingdom), Phillip Morris (United States), R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Co. (United States), Reemtsma
(Germany) and Rothmans International (United Kingdom) invested more than $3 billion to buy cigarette
factories in the region. Similarily, the world’s largest hotel groups (Trust House Forte Plc (United
Kingdom), Holiday Corporation (United Sates), Intercontinental (Japan) and Sheraton (ITT Corp., United
States)), and the world’s biggest music companies (Bertelsmann Music Group (Germany), EMI (United
Kingdom), Polygram (Netherlands), Sony (Japan) and Time Warner (United States)) moved swiftly
into Central and Eastern Europe. And, as Western consumer-related companies moved into the region,
the global advertising agencies that promote and market their products followed closely behind
(including Bates, Saatchi &Saatchi, BBDO, Grey, McKann Erickson, Young & Rubicom and FCB). Perhaps
more important, several insurance companies established a presence after restrictions on foreign
involvement were lifted -- among others, Nationale Nederlanden (Netherlands), Sedgwick (United
Kingdom), Marsh & McLennan (United States).b Similar examples can be found in other producer
services, particularly nontradable banking, financial and other business services.c
a See “Survey consumerism”, Business Central Europe, June 1997, pp. 37-46.
b See “Survey insurance”, Business Central Europe, November 1993, pp. 33-47.
c See, e.g., “Long-term punt”, Business Central Europe, February 1997, pp. 51-52.
100
Chapter II
Foreign direct investment has also helped to ease the adverse effects on domestic production
of opening an economy to competition through trade. The Hungarian pharmaceutical industry is an
illustration. Here, the ability of the industry to compete with foreign imports after the market was
opened benefited from foreign investment: the slowdown in the decline of domestic production in
total sales over 1994-1995 (the market share of domestic products fell from 74 per cent in 1990 to 47
per cent in 1994 and 45 per cent in 1995) was due to the fact that five of the ten leading pharmaceutical
companies became foreign-owned.89 Likewise, the increase in car sales in Poland to more than
370,000 units in 1996 (an increase of 41 per cent over 1995 -- the biggest increase recorded in Europe
that year) occurred after Fiat purchased its long-standing Polish partner FSM in 1992. Fiat’s
production in Poland meant that imports could be kept at a low level of 108,000 units in 1996 and
that domestic production was able to compete successfully with foreign imports.90
Competition through FDI also helped to expose goods and services produced by Central
and Eastern European firms to world market prices. This has sometimes led to closures of local
companies incapable of competing with foreign affiliates in their own country. As a result, some
industries became almost entirely foreign-owned. In the Visegrad countries, for example, only a few
established television-producing firms (such as OTF in Slovakia, Videoton in Hungary and Elemis
and Unimor in Poland) have survived competition from imports, foreign affiliates and private start-
ups.91
In some instances, however, TNCs have led to reduced competition by, for example,
foreclosing market entry, fixing prices and engaging in anti-competitive mergers. Eager to attract
FDI, several countries in Central and Eastern Europe have sometimes made concessions to individual
TNCs by, for example, granting exclusive market-supply rights for extended periods. As countries
became more aware of the adverse impact on competition of providing such exclusive rights, they
began to withdraw them. For countries aspiring to join the European Union, removing such exclusive
privileges was a necessity. In Poland, for example, Daewoo’s tariff incentives (in the form of duty-
free imports of components which were granted under its $1.2 billion purchasing agreement of car-
producer FSO in 1996 and are guaranteed until March 1998) have become an issue in the preliminary
discussions on the country’s European Union membership. The European Union has said the
incentives are an anti-competitive practice that discriminates against European Union car-producers,
which have to pay duties on their exports to Poland.92
3. Conclusion
Central and Eastern Europe’s success in attracting FDI remains weak by global standards.
In addition, the continued dependency of FDI inflows on privatization programmes in the region
does not augur favourably for future FDI inflows. Most advanced economies -- with the exception
of Poland -- have largely concluded their privatization drives, and the likelihood of major
101
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
privatization efforts in the next-tier countries looks small. However, once a major privatization that
allows for foreign participation gets under way in the Russian Federation, FDI can be expected to
increase considerably.
Despite the small numbers, FDI has been a factor in the region’s transition process towards
creating market economies. This has been particularly apparent in areas where foreign enterprises
have introduced competition and the benefits arising therefrom (in the form of quality improvements,
price-decreases and a consumer-orientation) in local markets, and where they salvaged domestic
production from all-but-sure extinction brought about by the market opening to Western imports.
Notes
1 Real GDP growth in Latin America is estimated to be 3.8-4.6 per cent during 1997-1998, compared with
5-10 per cent for developing Asia and 3 per cent for all developed countries (OECD, 1996a, table 24).
2 Data reported by Eurostat do not include reinvested earnings in order to make FDI data comparable
among all European Union member countries.
3 The data on reinvested earnings have been included in Japan’s official balance-of-payments statistics
only since 1996. The 1996 outflow data including and excluding reinvested earnings are $25,485 million
and $22,994 million, respectively (Japan, Bank of Japan, 1997).
4 One aspect of New Zealand’s and Australian’s liberalization programmes that is not well understood is
the role played by their bilateral agreement, the Australia New Zealand Closer Economic Relations
Agreement. Although it is a preferential agreement motivated by the small size of their domestic
markets, there was very little to gain from having preferential access to each other’s market because the
combined market is still small and there are a number of similarities between the two regions (Scollay,
1996). To increase market size, what is important is access to much larger markets -- hence Australia
liberalized unilaterally vis-à-vis the rest of the world.
5 There is also scope for more FDI in Australia’s financial industry, as recommended in a recent inquiry
into the Australian financial system.
6 This figure has started to rise again during the past two years, but it is unlikely to match the 1981 level
for some time.
7 For a list of these countries, see note to annex table B.1.
8 At least 11 LDCs have populations below 1 million (World Bank, 1996, pp. 188-189). By definition,
among other criteria, the per capita GDP of LDCs is $765 or less.
9 Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Cambodia, Kiribati, Lao People’s Democratic Republic, Maldives, Myanmar,
Nepal, Samoa, Solomon Islands and Vanuatu.
10 Data from UNCTAD, FDI/TNCs data base.
11 “Worlds apart”, Far Eastern Economic Review, 25 July 1996, p. 81.
12 Hiebert Murray and Lee Matthew, “Investors flock to Cambodia, but beware”, Far Eastern Economic
Review, 11 July 1996, p. 56.
13 Stéphane Dupont, “La zone franc s’élargit à la Guinée-Bissau”, Les Echos, 2 January 1997.
14 “Watching the Mekong flow”, The Economist, 7 September 1996, p. 59.
15 “Private-sector beer is best”, The Economist, 2 November 1996, p. 54.
16 Mark Ashurst, “Africans forge closer trading links”, Financial Times, 26 November 1996, p. 6.
17 This does not mean that no information is available: various publications (e.g., the Economist Intelligence
Unit’s country studies), some databases and a number of international organizations providing FDI
promotion services, such as UNCTAD, World Bank and UNIDO, as well as governmental bodies and
chambers of commerce in home countries touch upon FDI and provide some relevant information.
18 Through their IPAs, most LDCs offer promotional brochures and similar material, typically of short
length, to foreign investors.
19 The discussion of FDI trends refers to all countries in Africa except South Africa, which is classified as
a developed country.
102
Chapter II
20 Sub-Saharan Africa includes all developing countries in Africa except the six North African countries
(Algeria, Egypt, Libyan Arab Jamahiriya, Morocco, The Sudan and Tunisia).
21 In 1995, Tunisia concluded a free trade zone agreement with the European Union to be phased in over
12 years. See, Roula Khalat, “Tunisia steps up sell-offs to attract funds”, Financial Times, 29 May 1996.
22 James Whittington and Mark Dennis, “Most markets restrict foreign investors”, Financial Times, 10
January 1996.
23 “New horizon economies”, Union Bank of Switzerland, First Quarter, 1997, p. 84.
24 In 1995, for example, Nigeria promulgated an indigenization decree allowing foreign companies to
take a majority stake in local firms. See, “Foreign investors are in no hurry to divest”, Financial Times, 14
November 1995.
25 “An African success story”, The Economist, 14 June 1997, p. 53.
26 Nancy Dunne, “U.S. to reward growth in Africa”, Financial Times, 30 April 1997, p. 5.
27 “The world in 1997", The Economist, 1996, p. 79.
28 If South Africa should become a growth pole, it may initiate a dynamic in the framework of which the
country becomes increasingly a location for foreign investors from neighbouring countries.
29 However, in the case of Malawi and Zimbabwe, bilateral trade agreements make these tariff barriers, at
least in some products, less significant.
30 See, for instance, Christopher Vadot, “La SADC et le modèle asiatique”, Jeune Afrique économie, 16
September 1996, pp. 56-59.
31 For a more detailed discussion of the “flying geese” paradigm, see UNCTAD, 1995a.
32 ILO, “Unemployment in South Africa is probably lower than estimated, says ILO study”. Press release,
ILO/96/31, ILO: Geneva, 14 October 1996, p. 2.
33 Almost the same results are obtained when more sophisticated indicators for levels of development are
applied, for instance, the UNDP Human Development Index (HDI). According to the HDI, other SADC
countries, namely, Mauritius and Botswana with index values of 0.825 and 0.741, respectively, are ranked
higher than South Africa which has an index value of 0.649 (UNDP, 1996).
34 Based on oral communication with South African experts.
35 UNCTAD trade database, unpublished data.
36 “America loses its Afrophobia”, The Economist, 26 April 1997, p. 23.
37 For instance, Mauritius and Zimbabwe, two of the more advanced countries in the region, seem to
possess particular competitive advantages in food-processing and some manufactured goods, e.g. textiles.
38 The study analyses trade opportunities between SADC and SACU. Therefore, the statement also holds
true for SACU members other than South Africa, i.e., Botswana, Lesotho, Namibia and Swaziland.
39 “Exchange curbs keep investors on wrong side of SA border”, Sunday Times, 5 May 1996.
40 At present, South Africa has not concluded any BITs within SADC. The country has prepared a draft of
such a treaty with Mozambique, which may serve as a blueprint for similar agreements with other
African states.
41 The concept is Terutomo Ozawa’s.
42 Central Bank of Brazil, 1997.
43 Latin American Special Report, August 1996, p. 5.
44 Prensa Economica, March 1997, p. 56.
45 UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database.
46 See United States Department of Commerce, 1996d.
47 Bernard Simon, “Time to learn Spanish”, Financial Times, 22 April 1996.
48 “Investors in Latin America more confident”, Financial Times, 17 March 1997.
49 Ibid.
50 These are the Colonia Protocol for the Reciprocal Promotion and Protection of Investments in
MERCOSUR of 17 January 1994 which applies to investments among MERCOSUR members; and the
Buenos Aires Protocol for the Promotion and Protection of Investments of Third States of 5 August
1994, which applies to investments from non-MERCOSUR countries. Contained in UNCTAD, 1996d.
51 The Decision 291 of the Commission of the Cartagena Agreement: Common Code for the Treatment of
Foreign Capital, Trademarks, Patents, Licenses, and Royalties of 21 March 1991, which replaced the old
103
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
104
Chapter II
71 Since the creation of the Bangkok International Banking Facilities (BIBF) in March 1993, there has been
a shift from intra-company loans to BIBF loans. For 1995, the rebooking of FDI loans was estimated at
$437 million. This figure should be added to FDI in table II.9 to derive the total financial flows associated
with FDI (Thailand, Bank of Thailand, 1996).
72 Foreign-direct-investment data should be treated with caution because of problems of over-valuation
and round-tripping (see UNCTAD, 1995a, pp. 59-60) but measures introduced recently towards national
treatment should reduce data distortions.
73 In 1993 and 1996, China recorded current account deficits amounting to around $12 billion and $5
billion, respectively.
74 Israel, a developed country according to UNCTAD’s classification, is not included unless otherwise
specified.
75 Bahrain, Islamic Republic of Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia and United Arab Emirates.
76 Cyprus, Jordan, Lebanon, Syrian Arab Republic, Turkey and Yemen.
77 Reported in the Oil & Gas Journal, vol. 89 (2 December 1991), pp. 37-44.
78 Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia and United Arab Emirates.
79 J. Whittington and M. Dennis, “Most markets restrict foreign investors”, Financial Times, 10 January
1996.
80 “Bilan du monde”, Le Monde, 1997, p. 113.
81 “New horizon economies”, Union Bank of Switzerland, First quarter 1997, p. 89.
82 “A survey of Poland”, Business Central Europe, February 1997, pp. 42-45.
83 See BNA’s Eastern Europe Reporter, 24 February 1997, p. 119; see also Figyelö, 6 February 1997, p. 7.
84 Lansbury and Pain found a significant effect from privatization programmes, labour costs and research
intensity, and existing trade linkages; see Lansbury and Pain (1997).
85 For the automobile industry, see, e.g., Haig Simonian, “Into the east at full throttle”, Financial Times, 13
February 1997, p. 11.
86 For example, over the first nine months of 1995, 40 joint ventures between CIS partners were registered
in Kazaksthan, 1,042 in the Russian Federation and 63 in Uzbekistan. See V. Komarov, “Investitsionnoye
sotrudnichestvo stran SNG”, Ekonomist, May 1996, pp. 82-87.
87 Business Central Europe, 1996, various issues.
88 This finding has been recently supported by econometric research in Hungary. See Hooley et al. (1996).
89 Information provided by the Hungarian Ministry of Industry, Trade and Tourism, Division of Trade
Development and Investment Promotion.
90 See Stefan Wagstyl, “Manufacturers have moved into the fast lane”, Financial Times, 26 March 1997, p.
9.
91 See “Twilight zone”, Business Central Europe, March 1996, p. 33.
92 See Christopher Bobinski, “Poland tightens up on Daewoo under EU pressure”, Financial Times, 3
February 1997; and BNA’s Eastern Europe Reporter, 24 February 1997, p. 140.
93 “Crossborder monitor”, Business Eastern Europe, 8 February 1995, p. 3.
94 Ibid..
95 See Péter Kaderják, “A hazai közvetlen külföldi befektetéseket meghatározó tényezökröl - egy kvantitativ
elemzés”, Közgazdasagi Szemle, December 1996, pp. 1072-1087.
105
CHAPTER III
FOREIGN PORTFOLIO EQ
PORTFOLIO UITY INVESTMENT
EQUITY
Liberalization and globalization have stimulated the development of closer financial (as
well as trade) relations between developed countries and emerging markets.1 Foreign direct
investment (FDI) has become an important source of capital inflows for emerging markets since the
late 1980s. Another is foreign portfolio equity investment (FPEI), which has spread to emerging
markets as regulatory barriers to capital movements have fallen. By contributing or participating in
the equity capital of firms, both FDI and FPEI can enhance the development of the enterprise sector
in host countries. This chapter addresses trends and issues relating to FPEI flows to emerging
markets. In the first section, the linkages between FDI and FPEI are analysed. The second section
discusses the trends in FPEI flows to emerging markets; and the third section provides an overview
of the main mechanisms through which these flows are channelled (these are elaborated further in
annex C at the end of this volume). The conclusions briefly raise a number of issues relating to FPEI
that require further in-depth analysis.
In principle, FPEI is distinguished from FDI by the degree of management control that foreign
investors exercise in a venture: portfolio equity investors usually provide only financial capital by
purchasing shares of a company without any involvement in the company’s management. Foreign
portfolio equity investment typically has a shorter investment horizon than FDI, sometimes just a
few weeks or months, although this horizon can extend to ten years or more. The type of investor is
also different: while FDI investors are firms engaged in the production of goods and services, portfolio
equity investors are more often either financial institutions, institutional investors (such as pension
funds, insurance companies or investment trusts), or individuals, and are typically interested only
in the financial returns of their investments.
In practice, these distinctions are often less than clear-cut and are subject to a number of
qualifications:
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
• The ownership threshold commonly used to distinguish FDI and FPEI is somewhat
arbitrary. An investment is normally counted as FDI when it involves an equity capital
stake of 10 per cent or more of the ordinary shares in an incorporated enterprise, or its
equivalent for an unincorporated enterprise. This is held to indicate a lasting interest in,
or a degree of control over, the management of the enterprise (IMF, 1993). An equity
stake of less than 10 per cent is categorised as foreign portfolio equity investment.
• The role of venture capital investors. These provide equity capital for young unquoted
companies, often at the start-up stage, and are often very closely involved in managing
them, either directly or indirectly, by providing advisory services. Although their
overriding motive is to achieve a capital gain, venture capital investors often wait several
years before selling their equity stakes.
• Data constraints. Only a few countries (including major source countries, such as OECD
members) have systematically recorded equity capital flows in their balance-of-payments
accounts under categories that distinguish FDI from FPEI. The lack of accurate data on
cross-border FPEI flows is a serious handicap for analysis. The recent nature of FPEI
flows to emerging markets poses an additional challenge. A special effort is therefore
made here to use data from a variety of sources: host countries,2 home countries and
international financial institutions (box III.1).
Flows of FPEI normally take place through transactions involving shares of companies
quoted in stock markets, although some FPEI flows also take place in unquoted companies (for
example, in the case of venture capital funds). The contribution of FPEI to the financing of domestic
enterprises can be significant (box III.2) . It is most direct when the investment is made in the market
for primary issues, in the local stock market, or in international markets through international equity
offerings or issues of depositary receipts. Share purchases in the local secondary market contribute
indirectly to the financing of local firms by pushing up equity prices and thus lowering the cost of
raising capital in the stock market, thereby encouraging new equity issues. Furthermore, FPEI may
increase the liquidity of the local stock exchange, bringing benefits to other segments of the capital
market, such as the bond market, and increasing the volume of finance available for both local firms
and foreign companies established in a country. Consequently, FPEI can help strengthen the local
financial infrastructure, which can facilitate the operations of TNCs. An efficient financial system
can also contribute to attracting FDI. At the same time, as FPEI finances in part the capital requirements
of local companies, it can also increase the competitiveness of these companies. Although portfolio
investors are attracted in the first place by “blue-chip” companies in emerging markets, investors
also seek opportunities to take advantage of “price anomalies” by investing in companies that appear
to be undervalued on the basis of, for example, the price-earnings ratio. These need not necessarily
be blue-chip companies; they can be companies with high growth potential. Foreign investment
can ease the access of these companies to capital markets and reduce their cost of capital investment.
108
Chapter III
Flows of FPEI are intimately linked to the development of stock markets in recipient countries.
Many venture-capital fund investments in unquoted companies are made with the expectation of
reaping capital gains subsequent to the listing of such companies on the stock market once they
become mature. Likewise, some country funds are set up in developing countries in anticipation of
the establishment of a local stock market. With regard to mergers and acquisitions, there is a close
relationship between FDI and FPEI. In many cases, cross-border mergers and acquisitions are
considered as FDI transactions because they confer a lasting and significant management interest in
the merged or acquired company. However, it is possible for such transactions to take place with a
minority equity interest, in which case the transaction would be recorded as a FPEI flow.
There is a partial overlap in the motivations underlying FDI and FPEI. For both types of
investment, the rate of economic growth (as well as potential rate of growth) of the host country are
an important influence on decisions on where to invest. For efficiency- or asset-seeking FDI, however,
this element may be of lesser importance. For instance, in the case of FDI made with the intention of
There is no single perfect source of data on FPEI flows. Because of the variety of instruments
through which such investments can be made, and their increasingly global nature, few individual
countries have reliable and accurate statistics on FPEI flows. At the global level, in particular, the
accurate tracking of these flows remains a challenge.
There are several commonly utilized sources of data on regional and global FPEI flows. The
World Bank reports its estimates annually in Global Development Finance (formerly entitled the World
Debt Tables), and the IMF does likewise in its Balance of Payments Statistics Yearbook. The World Bank
publishes only FPEI data on emerging markets, while the IMF also includes data on FPEI in developed
countries. The report on cross-border capital flows produced in the past by Baring Securities has also
been a frequently referenced data source; this report will in future be published by Cross Border Capital.
The World Bank defines FPEI as the sum of country funds, depositary receipts (American and Global)
and direct purchases of shares by foreign investors. The data on these three sources of FPEI are based
on information from a number of sources, including Euromoney databases and publications; Micropal
Inc.; Lipper Analytical Services; published reports of private investment houses, central banks, national
securities commissions and national stock exchanges; and the World Bank’s Debtor Reporting System.
The IMF reports balance-of-payments data received from its member countries. The magnitudes
published by these three sources are different due to the differences in methodologies utilized in
producing the data.
In light of the limitations in utilizing balance-of-payments data, the data used here are from
the World Bank, which appear to be the most comprehensive available at this time. Inputs from actual
market sources of data give some assurance that these data represent reasonably reliable and
comprehensive estimates of actual FPEI flows.
An alternative method of producing estimates for FPEI flows is to use consolidated data
from home (as opposed to host) countries. The most important sources of this type of investment are
the United States, Japan and the United Kingdom. This, however, has proven difficult because Japanese
authorities have only recently begun to record geographically disaggregated FPEI data, while authorities
in the United Kingdom do not provide disaggregated data at all. The United States Treasury Department,
however, maintains a detailed data set, which is used in this chapter. Five major recipient countries
have also provided relatively detailed information, which is also used here.
109
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Information on new capital raised by domestic enterprises and FPEI flows into two emerging
markets, Malaysia and Thailand, has shown that FPEI has played an important role in the financing of
enterprises through the local stock market (box table).
Box table. New equity issues and FPEI inflows in Malaysia and Thailand, 1993-1995
(Millions of dollars)
Country 1993 1994 1995
Malaysia
New equity issues 1566.4 3383.6 5237.5
FPEI flows 8938.7 4289.6 1150.0
Thailand
New equity issues .. 4905.8 5294.8
FPEI flows 2681.8 408.1 2118.8
In Malaysia, FPEI exceeded the amount of capital raised through new equity issues in 1993
and 1994, implying that part of that investment was made in the secondary market. In 1995, however,
FPEI was about a fifth of the total amount of capital raised. In Malaysia, FPEI flows exceeded FDI
flows in 1993. In Thailand, such flows have been lower than capital raised from new equity issues and
represented about 40 per cent of all capital raised in 1995. In Thailand, FPEI flows have exceeded FDI
flows in 1993 and 1995.
Market capitalization and growth potential are important factors in determining the overall
magnitude of FPEI. Not surprisingly, countries with high ratios of market capitalization to GDP have
attracted stable FPEI inflows. Indeed, such inflows have been an important source of financing of
domestic enterprises in these emerging markets.
Source: UNCTAD, based on International Federation of Stock Exchanges, 1994 and 1995.
rationalizing production or establishing an export base, the cost and skill level of the labour force,
the state of physical and communications infrastructure, the host country’s geographical location
(distance to target markets), as well as the existence of free trade agreements between the host
country and target markets that facilitate market access, may be of greater importance than the host
country’s growth rate (UNCTAD, 1993a). For market-seeking FDI, the size and economic growth of
the market are particularly important determinants (UNCTAD, 1993a). Host-country market size,
however, does not appear to be the most important determinant of FPEI flows. In a survey of
international equity investment funds recently conducted by UNCTAD,3 the potential rate of
economic growth was identified most frequently as being highly important in investment decisions.
Market size can have, however, an indirect influence in so far as the size of stock market capitalization,
and hence its degree of liquidity, is in many cases related to the size of the economy.4 Political
stability is also important for both FPEI and FDI; the same is true for the degree of volatility of
exchange rates. For portfolio equity investors, the level of ease of capital repatriation and disclosure
standards for companies operating in the local market appear to be very important. Typically, FDI
does not attach an equally high degree of importance to the latter.
110
Chapter III
These differences highlight a major contrast between the investment motivations for FDI
and FPEI. The overriding motivation for investment by portfolio equity investors is their participation
in the earnings of local enterprises through capital gains and dividends. Hence, it is more important
for them that capital be easily transferable and that disclosure standards be high. Transnational
corporations tend to be more interested in accessing markets and resources and, more generally, in
the contribution that the investment can make to the competitiveness of the transnational corporate
system as a whole (UNCTAD, 1995a). The latter concern is particularly important for firms that
have integrated international production structures and have an intra-firm specialization in
production. In general, TNCs tend to have a longer-term investment horizon than portfolio equity
investors, especially when their investment involves a capital outlay (in the case of greenfield
investment, for example).
The contrast in motives between TNCs and portfolio equity investors is not, however, always
so stark. In particular, the investment horizon of venture capital investment tends to be somewhat
longer than for FPEI in general, and the existence of significant (and perhaps also long-term)
management control is not unusual. In that case, it is very difficult to differentiate between FDI and
FPEI. However, the principal underlying motives remain different. For venture capitalists, the
foremost motivation is to share in the capital gains of the equity of a local enterprise when it is listed
eventually on the stock exchange. The stock exchange acts as a mechanism through which venture
capitalists “exit” the investment. Thus, venture capitalists, while closely affiliated with the
management of the enterprise in question, are also focused for the duration of their investment on
their eventual exit. Venture-capital investments, therefore, represent a case in which the linkage
between FDI and FPEI can be quite strong.
The discussion above helps to illustrate why FPEI flows are more volatile than FDI flows.
Since the prime motivations behind the two types of investment are mostly different, so are the
investment horizons. Typically, it is easier for portfolio equity investors to liquidate their investments
by selling their equity positions in the secondary securities market than for TNCs to sell their foreign
affiliates, especially if these are intertwined in international production networks or “sunk” costs
are high. The volatility of FPEI flows may, however, vary with the type of mechanism through
which an investment is made. In particular, venture-capital portfolio investment is less volatile
than some other types of FPEI flows. Similarly, investments placed through large institutional
investors (e.g., via country funds) appear to be less volatile than portfolio investments made directly
in the local market; portfolio equity investments through closed-end investment funds5 appear to
be less volatile than investments placed by open-end investment funds (for reasons examined below).6
Investment flows in the secondary market for depositary receipts do not affect the flow of funds in
or out of the local stock market because trading activity is conducted on foreign stock exchanges.
Thus the issue of volatility of FPEI flows does not arise in this case. Direct portfolio equity investment
in the local stock market is probably the most volatile form of FPEI, particularly when such
investments are managed by retail investors, who tend to invest more speculatively, and do not
have access to the sophisticated investment methods or the extensive information and resources for
research typically available to large institutional investors.
Overall, total FPEI flows to emerging markets have fluctuated more widely than total FDI
flows during the period 1986-1995 (annex table A.11). This is indicated by the greater relative variance
of FPEI flows compared with FDI flows - - four times that of FDI flows.7 Evidence at the country
level also shows that FPEI flows are more volatile than FDI flows, although the degree of volatility
may be influenced by the extent of domestic macroeconomic instability (box III.3). For example, in
111
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
the five emerging markets for which fairly detailed data on FPEI flows have been obtained, the
relative variance of these flows is many times higher than that of FDI flows (annex tables A.12
through A.16).
The volatility of FPEI flows tends to be higher in countries with high levels of macroeconomic
instability. (Although causality could operate in either direction, it appears that, in general, the variability
of FPEI flows reflects actual or expected macroeconomic instability.) Ranking Malaysia, South Africa,
Thailand, Turkey and Venezuela according to the degree of domestic macroeconomic instability (based
on the level of inflation and the variability in exchange rates) (annex table A.17), and comparing that
ranking with a ranking of the degree of volatility in capital flows in general, and in FPEI in particular,
shows a correspondence between the two rankings. Turkey, Venezuela and South Africa have
experienced high volatility in these macroeconomic indicators (in descending order of degree of
volatility), while Thailand and Malaysia have experienced relatively low levels of volatility in these
indicators. Turkey and South Africa, followed by Venezuela, have also experienced higher volatility in
capital flows in general, and in FPEI flows in particular (South Africa first, followed by Turkey and
Venezuela).
Source: UNCTAD.
B. Trends
Trends
1. General trends
Substantial FPEI flows into emerging markets is a relatively recent phenomenon, dating
from the early 1990s. A watershed was reached in 1993, when the level of FPEI trebled, compared
with a year earlier (annex table A.11). Flows declined in 1994 and 1995, partly in response to the
financial crisis in Mexico in December 1994. However, they recovered in 1996: the volume of new
equity raised on international
capital markets in 1996 by
Figure III.1. Emerging markets share of world market
emerging markets increased by 34
capitalization, 1986-1995
per cent over 1995, reaching some (Trillions of dollars and percentage)
$15 billion (World Bank, 1997b, p.
18).
112
Chapter III
traded in emerging capital markets - - the equivalent of about 90 per cent of the number of companies
listed in developed-country markets.
The aftermath of the financial crisis that hit Mexico at the end of 1994 and spread for a short
period to other emerging markets illustrates the resilience of emerging markets. Countries with a
large domestic financial sector and a broad domestic savings base recovered especially quickly from
the crisis. Thus, an analysis of the impact of the Mexican crisis on the performance of 26 emerging
stock markets other than Mexico shows that it has been significant beyond December 1994 for only
four countries (Atlan et al., 1996).8 Of these four countries, two are in the same region (Brazil and
Colombia) and two have gone through domestic turbulence that has weakened their domestic
financial sectors (Pakistan and Hungary).
A closer look at recent trends in FPEI flows in the two main recipient regions, Asia and Latin
America (flows to Africa and to the emerging markets of Europe and Central Asia are relatively
small) (figure III.2), reveals some similarities in the movements of these flows. Between 1992 and
Figure III.2. Evolution of FDI and foreign portfolio equity investment in emerging markets, 1986-1995
113
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
1993, flows to both regions increased substantially -- by 560 per cent in Asia and 230 per cent in Latin
America. In 1994, they decreased by 2 per cent in Asia and 51 per cent in Latin America. In 1995,
however, FPEI flows increased slightly (by 4 per cent) in Asia, and decreased (by 45 per cent) in
Latin America.
The two major factors behind the increase in FPEI flows to emerging markets are the
liberalization and globalization of financial markets and the concentration of substantial financial
resources in the hands of institutional investors. The globalization of financial markets implies that
financial capital can move more freely and at lower cost between countries. This has been facilitated
by financial-market liberalization and by the rapid flow of market information made possible by
improvements in communications technology. Investors are thus in possession of the tools and
information that allow them to move funds quickly between different countries and regions of the
world. They have also been willing to take more risk because they expect higher returns in new and
fast-growing emerging markets. Between 1988 and 1995, there was a significant increase in the
number of emerging markets establishing liberal regimes towards foreign investment. In 1988, only
three emerging stock markets were classified by the International Finance Corporation as “free”
with respect to foreign investment in stocks listed locally; eleven markets were categorized as relatively
free (annex table A.18). By 1995, 26 emerging markets were classified as free, 11 markets as relatively
free, and only one market was closed to foreign investment.
The second major factor responsible for the surge in FPEI flows to emerging markets is the
institutionalization of savings and investments in developed countries. It has been estimated that
insurance companies, pension funds and mutual funds in developed countries (and some emerging
markets) had an identifiable pool of savings worth nearly $21 trillion in 1993 (Howell et al., 1995, p.
58).9 It is also estimated that the six largest developed countries are holding around $38 trillion in
savings. These figures, although not strictly comparable, provide a very rough indication of the
heavy concentration of developed-country savings under the management of institutional investors.
In comparison, global equity market capitalization in the same year was $14 trillion. Investment by
developed-country mutual funds in emerging markets has been particularly important (annex table
A.19). However, by one estimate, the average share of emerging market securities in institutional
investors’ portfolios is only around 1 per cent (IMF, 1995, p. 172). In general, institutional investors
in developed countries are biased in favour of investments in domestic assets, mainly because they
are risk averse or lack familiarity with foreign economies and financial markets, although this is
beginning to change. Hence, a very small shift (in percentage terms) in their investment portfolios
in favour of emerging markets would result in a substantial increase in the volume of FPEI flows to
these markets. There is a high correlation between FPEI flows in emerging markets and interest
rates in developed countries (for example, interest rates of United States Treasury Bills).10 Indeed,
low returns on financial investments in developed markets during 1993 induced a surge in FPEI
flows into emerging markets in that year.
The trend of rising FPEI flows during the 1990s (compared with the 1980s) appears to be a
longer-term structural phenomenon, rather than a cyclical one. This can be explained by the fact
that growth remains higher in emerging markets than in developed ones, with the former offering
good opportunities for diversification of portfolio-investment risks. Even though there has recently
been a strong upturn in developed-country capital market performances, especially in the United
States in 1996, FPEI flows to emerging markets have remained strong. There are indications that
investors are exploring new frontiers of investment,11 and that the volume of international equity
offerings by companies from emerging markets is increasing.
114
Chapter III
For the most important of these source countries, the United States, FPEI flows to emerging
markets increased substantially in 1993, but decreased in 1994 and 1995 (annex table A.20). They
rose again in 1996, despite a clear upturn in stock-market returns in the United States.12 Overall,
FPEI flows from the United States were hosted by over 39 emerging markets.13 However, the majority
of funds (89 per cent of the total in 1995) have been placed in a handful of countries with large equity
markets: Argentina, Brazil, Chile and Mexico in Latin America; China, India, Indonesia, the Republic
of Korea, Malaysia and the Philippines in Asia; and South Africa. The same group of countries
accounted for 69 per cent of United States FDI outflows to emerging markets in 1995. The degree of
concentration of FPEI flows in a few emerging markets is therefore higher than that in FDI outflows,
at least for the United States.
By comparison, the distribution of the total net assets of international emerging equity funds
indicates that country equity funds have been established for only 35 emerging markets (annex
table A.19). This does not, however, imply that only 35 emerging markets have hosted international
equity fund investments. The actual number could be significantly higher if investments placed via
regional and global equity funds are included. Nevertheless, almost the same group of emerging
markets (Brazil, Chile, China, India, Indonesia, the Republic of Korea, Malaysia, Mexico, the
Philippines, the Russian Federation, Taiwan Province of China and Thailand) has attracted the lion’s
share of equity funds.
It is not surprising that the distribution of FPEI is skewed towards upper-middle income
and large low-income countries with a high growth potential. These countries have dynamic securities
markets that offer a broad base for investment. Investors often claim that, besides the level of risk-
adjusted returns, the degree of market liquidity is a crucial element in the decision to invest in
emerging markets. In this respect, an adequate market infrastructure and the availability of exit
mechanisms (through stock exchanges) contribute to greater liquidity. More mature markets also
tend to offer a superior level of regulation regarding information-disclosure and accounting standards.
C. Investment mechanisms
There is a large variety of mechanisms through which FPEI flows are channelled. The
principal mechanisms are venture capital funds, country funds, American depositary receipts and
global depositary receipts, convertible bonds and bonds with equity warrants. Some mechanisms
are more suitable to a particular stage of development of an emerging market than others.
Furthermore, the credit standing of companies issuing equity shares also influences the level of their
access to particular segments of the international capital markets. Countries may prefer to channel
FPEI inflows through specific mechanisms in order to protect their markets from externally induced
turbulence.
115
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Since the late 1980s, many specialized venture capital institutions have been formed to invest
in emerging markets. Many are structured as two-tier investment funds, with management provided
by professional fund managers from international capital centres (see annex C for technical details).
While venture-capital institutions have been established in many countries, including several least
developed countries (e.g., Bangladesh, Madagascar, Mozambique and Uganda), they have expanded
fastest in the newly industrializing economies of Asia and the transition economies of Central and
Eastern Europe. The major trends in venture-capital funds are:
• The pool of investable venture capital funds in South and East Asia outside infrastructure
has increased rapidly over the past ten years, from an estimated $500 million to $6
billion. Several major regional and international financial institutions, including the
Hongkong and Shanghai Banking Corporation, the Development Bank of Singapore
and AIG Investment Corporation (Asia), have established venture capital or private
equity funds.
• There has been a similarly rapid expansion of venture capital financing in Central and
Eastern Europe. The number of venture capital funds investing there is estimated to
have reached 72 by 1995, with a total committed capital of about $4.5 billion. The European
Bank for Reconstruction and Development has supported actively the creation of equity
funds in the region.
Over the past two decades, the International Finance Corporation has promoted venture
capital funds in developing countries in an effort to improve the access of small and medium-sized
firms to equity finance and management expertise. The International Finance Corporation has worked
with institutional investors, investment banks and fund managers in structuring funds, identifying
fund managers and placing funds. By 1996, it had invested $196 million in 49 venture capital funds,
with a total initial capital of $1.5 billion.14
The Commonwealth Development Corporation has also expanded its venture capital
activities in developing countries, in particular by promoting venture capital funds, in order to
provide start-up capital to companies in eight African countries (Ghana, Kenya, Mozambique, South
Africa, Tanzania, Uganda, Zambia and Zimbabwe). These funds are generally smaller ($10-$15
million) than those in which the International Finance Corporation has invested, and are managed
directly by the Commonwealth Development Corporation.
However, the experience of venture capital investors in developing countries to date has
been mixed. It is clear that their success, and willingness to continue investing in emerging markets,
depends on a number of basic conditions being met. These include: finding enough firms with
business management skills and offering prospects of high returns on investment; attractive tax
regimes in host countries; and the availability of “exit” options for disposing of investments.
By pooling the investable funds of a large number of small investors, international investment
funds provide economies of scale that can lead to lower average transaction costs of entering foreign
markets directly (such costs can be prohibitive for small investors). They offer investors both
116
Chapter III
professional portfolio services and diversification of risks. These funds can invest on a global, regional,
subregional or individual country basis. They can also be structured either as closed-ended or
open-ended (see annex C for technical details).
From 1986 to 1996, the total number of international emerging equity market funds grew
from 28 to 1,435, while the net asset value of these funds increased from $2 billion to $135 billion
(annex table A.19). Of the total number of international equity funds as of September 1996, 298 were
global funds; 775 were dedicated to Asia; 239 to Latin America; 88 to emerging Europe; and 35 to
Africa and the Middle East. Asian funds accounted for the largest share of total net asset value of
emerging market equity funds (48 per cent), followed by Latin America (11 per cent).
The International Finance Corporation has been a leading sponsor of many closed-end funds
investing in emerging market securities. Closed-end funds are also established by investment banks,
investment management firms, host-country governments, and groups of individual investors. There
has been an evolution recently towards specialized funds, such as debt-equity conversion funds,
index funds, corporate debt funds and sectoral funds (such as infrastructure funds). Closed-end
country funds were initially set up to invest in countries that were largely closed to foreign investment
(for example, the Korea fund, launched in 1984), or in countries in which foreign investors have
found it difficult to invest for administrative reasons. Since the first emerging market fund, the
Mexico fund, was launched with a listing on the New York Stock Exchange in 1981, closed-end
funds have become the dominant form of vehicle for less-mature emerging market investments.
American depositary receipts are negotiable certificates issued by a commercial bank in the
United States known as a depositary. They certify the ownership of non-United States companies’
securities that have been deposited with either the depositary bank handling the issue (the depositary)
or with the depositary's custodian bank abroad (see annex C for technical details).
The market for depositary receipts has grown rapidly during the 1990s, due in large part to
increased emerging-market issuance activity. According to the Bank of New York, a total number of
10.7 billion depositary receipts with an overall value equivalent to $337 billion were traded in 1996
on United States securities exchanges; in addition, an estimated 1.5 billion depositary receipts with
a value between $20 and $25 billion were traded on European exchanges, or on the “over-the-counter”
market. Between 1990 and 1996, the compounded annual growth rate of trading in depositary-
receipt shares was 30 per cent, while in value terms trading increased by 22 per cent. The total
number of depositary-receipt programmes in existence at the end of 1996 exceeded 1,600 and included
issues from 63 countries. Non-United States companies are reported to have raised $19.5 billion
through depositary-receipt issues in 1996. This represents an increase of 63 per cent in the value
raised and 50 per cent in the number of new issues over 1995. Emerging markets accounted for
approximately 50 per cent of new issues in 1996, rising from 20 per cent in 1995.
Convertible bonds and bonds with equity warrants are hybrid debt securities that contain
equity-related features (see annex C for technical details). For the issuing companies, the major
advantage of issuing convertible debt may be that it enables them to attract financing which might
otherwise be more difficult to attract, and that it may allow a better matching of cash flows in the
117
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
early growth period of the company when financing may be particularly crucial. Generally, the
rights attached to these instruments will only be expected to be exercised in the event that the
company is successful and its market value and share price rises.
Emerging market issues of equity-related bonds have risen quite quickly during the past ten
years (annex table A.21). During that period, emerging-market issues grew at an annual average
rate of 192 per cent, compared with 21 per cent for developed countries and 23 per cent for all
markets. However, the size of emerging-market issues is small. During the past ten years, a total of
$374 billion of these securities were issued, of which emerging markets accounted for only 4 per cent
($16 billion); developed countries accounted for the rest. Nevertheless, the growth in emerging
market issues of these instruments coincides with the start of heavy institutional-investor interest in
emerging markets.
Most emerging market equity-related bond issues (84 per cent of the total) have been floated
in the Eurobond market. This has been the case especially with respect to issues of bonds with
equity warrants. A relatively small volume of issues has been floated in the market for foreign
bonds (bonds which are offered in one particular country and are denominated in the currency of
that country). Emerging-market countries have been more active in the market for convertible
bonds than in the market for bonds with equity warrants. The former accounted for 93 per cent of
total emerging-market issues of equity-related debt instruments during the past ten years, whereas
for developed economies convertible bond issues comprised only 32 per cent of the overall value of
equity-related bond issues. The issuance of bonds with equity warrants is also a more recent trend
in emerging markets than is the issue of convertible bonds (bonds with equity warrants were first
issued in 1989 in emerging markets, while convertible bonds have been issued since 1985). On a
regional basis, eight countries from Asia have dominated issuance activity (of equity-related bonds)
among emerging markets. Asian issues of convertible bonds have, on average, accounted for 81 per
cent of all emerging-market convertible bond issues, and for 85 per cent of emerging-market issues
of bonds with equity warrants. Emerging markets in Latin America, on average, accounted for 4 per
cent of all emerging-market convertible bond issues and 15 per cent of issues of bonds with equity
warrants.
The policy implications of the growth of FPEI, especially for development, are not yet fully
grasped. Although FPEI investors can provide a welcome source of external finance for domestic
companies, their generally short-term investment horizon (especially when compared with FDI
investors) raises concerns over the stability of such flows.
Flows of FPEI contribute most directly to the capital formation of companies in emerging
markets through the subscription of primary issues. Even if a foreign investment is made in the
secondary market, it can contribute to enterprise development through the reduction of the cost of
capital by boosting the stock index and thus encouraging companies to go public, or to launch new
equity issues. At the outset, there is some indication that a large part of FPEI flows to emerging
markets is directed towards the secondary market (Howell et al., 1995).15
Against this beneficial contribution, concerns have been raised with respect to the perceived
volatility of such flows and its potential negative impact on domestic economies. Some unresolved
issues that need to be addressed are:
118
Chapter III
• Are there policies or mechanisms that could be implemented in order to allow emerging
markets to withstand better potential volatility in FPEI flows?
• Are the causes of stock market volatility in host emerging markets more the result of
elements internal to the local market or of external events?
• In view of the pressure on institutional investors to secure capital gains, what distortions
might this introduce into investment choices in emerging markets?
• What measures can be taken to reduce stock market volatility? Does an enlargement of
the domestic-investor base, notably through the strengthening of the role of institutional
investors, help to reduce such volatility?
* * *
Foreign portfolio equity investors contribute to the equity financing of local companies and
do not generally seek management control of these companies. This is perhaps the most distinctive
feature of FPEI, as compared with FDI. Emerging markets have begun to host substantially increased
FPEI inflows during this decade. In absolute terms, these flows now represent an important class of
foreign capital in these countries in their own right. Such flows may rise further, given the continuing
liberalization and globalization of financial markets and continued superior growth performance in
emerging markets in comparison to developed countries, along with relatively fast rising market
capitalization in the former group.
In light of this trend, it is important to identify the potential impact of FPEI flows on host
countries’ economies and the policy implications resulting therefrom. In particular, it would be
useful to analyse the causes (and their direction) of volatility in these flows and their likely impact
on the financial sector and the real economy in host countries, especially developing ones.
Notes
1 The term “emerging markets” is used here to denote developing countries and transition economies in
Central and Eastern Europe. This chapter follows a methodology similar to that used by the International
Finance Corporation in classifying as an emerging market any country with a 1994 GNP per capita
level of $8,955 or less (this includes countries classified by the World Bank as low- and middle-income).
The group of countries so defined includes several countries that in other chapters are considered as
developed (such as Greece and Portugal) and excludes several economies that are considered as
developing elsewhere in this volume (such as Hong Kong, China and Singapore). For a more complete
listing of countries comprising emerging markets, see IFC, 1996.
2 Only a small number of countries have replied to UNCTAD’s questionnaire on FPEI. Data for these
countries are used here.
3 A survey of international emerging market equity fund managers was conducted by UNCTAD in
January 1997 in order to determine what elements they considered to be most important in making
investment decisions at the country level. The survey found the potential rate of economic growth to be
the factor most frequently cited as being important to investment decisions. The degree of ease of
119
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
capital repatriation and the existence of a favourable environment for foreign investors were second
most frequently mentioned, followed by disclosure standards. Other factors frequently identified as
being important include political stability, the existence of a good settlement system, the
comprehensiveness of securities market regulation, the degree of securities market liquidity and the
soundness of the local currency (or the degree of volatility in the exchange rate).
4 Market size is perhaps also relevant indirectly because larger markets tend to have better developed
capital markets, greater market capitalization and a wider array of investment opportunities. In less-
developed emerging markets in which total capitalization is especially small, market size may become
a constraint on FPEI by some large institutional investors that tend to invest in large blocks.
5 For a discussion of closed- and open-end funds, see annex C, section 2.
6 According for the IMF (IMF, 1995, p. 172) “Turnover ratios for open-end funds vary widely. Index
funds, for instance, typically have low turnover ratios, whereas actively managed funds often have
turnover ratios above 100 per cent, and many “aggressive” funds have turnover ratios of several hundred
per cent. The average open-end fund has a turnover ratio of about 100 per cent. Closed end funds
typically have turnover ratios below 50 per cent, and often in the neighbourhood of 20 per cent.”
7 The relative variance, one measure of the degree of variation of a set of points around their average, is
the square of the coefficient of variation. This measure of variability has been used for the purpose of
comparing the degree of variability between flows of differing absolute magnitudes.
8 The study contains an econometric analysis of the performance of 26 emerging markets following the
Mexican crisis of December 1994: seven in Latin America (Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Mexico,
Peru, Venezuela), six in Europe and Middle East (Greece, Hungary, Jordan, Poland, Portugal, Turkey),
11 in Asia (China, Hong Kong, China, India, Indonesia, Republic of Korea, Malaysia, Pakistan, Philippines,
Sri Lanka, Taiwan Province of China, Thailand) and two in Africa (South Africa, Zimbabwe). The Capital
Asset Pricing Model was applied to calculate the betas of each market, also taking into account the
regional impact (of Latin America and Asia) as well as the impact of the Mexican crisis.
9 The shifting demographic structure towards a larger proportion of the population into older age brackets
in developed countries indicates that the volume of funds managed by pension funds in these countries
will need to rise quickly in future if pension programmes there are to remain viable. The concentration
of developed country funds under management by institutional investors is therefore likely to further
increase.
10 On an annual basis over the period 1986-1995, the correlation coefficients between United States interest
rates on Treasury bills and FPEI flows to all emerging markets, FPEI flows to Asia, and FPEI flows to
Latin America were, respectively: -0.7, -0.6 and -0.8. These coefficients are statistically significant and
indicate that FPEI flows to emerging markets are heavily influenced by developments in United States
financial markets.
11 For example, a number of new investment funds for Africa, Eastern Europe and Central Asia were
launched in 1996.
12 This may, in part, reflect the increasing acceptance among institutional investors in the United States of
emerging markets and a concomitant rise in familiarity with these markets. It may, in addition, also
indicate a more general desire among investors in the United States to diversify into foreign markets in
response to anxiety over a possible reversal in rising returns in the United States markets.
13 The exact number of countries cannot be determined because some more marginal host countries are
included in the data under the “other” category.
14 Information provided by the International Finance Corporation.
15 This report estimated, for example, that, over the period 1992-1994, more than 70 per cent of FPEI flows
to emerging markets were made in the secondary markets for securities.
120
Introduction
Part Two
Foreign direct investment, market
structure and competition policy
121
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
122
Introduction
Introduction
The past decade has witnessed a remarkable process of liberalization of foreign-direct-
investment (FDI) policies worldwide. This has been part of a broader liberalization of international
trade in goods and services and flows of finance, technology and knowledge. In previous years, the
World Investment Report focused on two components of the process of FDI liberalization: the reduction
of restrictions on FDI and transnational corporation (TNC) activities, and the establishment of
standards of treatment and protection of FDI.1 These are the dimensions of liberalization to which
the attention of countries has also largely been devoted. As firms respond to these measures in the
broader context of their own strategic objectives by increasing investments abroad, a third component
of liberalization -- maintaining the proper functioning of the market -- becomes important, and
competition policy is central here. The issues addressed in this Part of WIR97 round out, therefore,
earlier discussions of FDI liberalization and related regulatory frameworks, including in reference
to international investment arrangements.
More specifically, Part Two of this Report examines the relationships between FDI, market
structure and competition (chapter IV) and considers policy implications, especially as they relate to
developing countries (chapter V). Foreign-direct-investment-related competition issues deserve
increased focus because TNCs play an important role in the globalizing world economy. The first of
the chapters that follow examines the interaction between FDI, market structure and competition in
product markets in the national economies of host countries. It also examines the evolving nature of
this relationship in the context of the regionalization or globalization of markets and production and,
especially, the emergence of integrated international production. The next chapter discusses the
implications for policies aimed at maintaining the contestability of markets and ensuring that markets
function as competitively as possible. Considerations related to competition and competition policy
become particularly relevant for developing countries as they liberalize and become more closely
integrated into the world economy -- albeit to different degrees and in different ways. Balancing
efficient resource-use with dynamic growth of their economies presents new challenges for countries
123
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
as regards maintaining policy coherence, as well as formulating and implementing competition policy.
This introduction highlights the main issues and questions that Part Two will address and introduces
the key terms and concepts that will be used in the analysis.
* * *
The ultimate objective of FDI liberalization is to enhance economic growth and welfare.
Developing countries, in particular, have increasingly turned to FDI as a source of the capital,
technology, managerial know-how and market access needed for sustained economic growth and
development. The move towards more open FDI regimes has been accompanied by a shift in many
countries towards greater deregulation of economic activity and greater reliance on market forces in
their domestic economies, as well as on international trade and factor movements (especially those
relating to capital and skilled human resources). Liberalization has contributed to increased FDI
flows to countries with those economic characteristics that TNCs find attractive, and has promoted
more complex and integrated patterns of international production by TNCs. However, the benefits
that result depend not only on the volume of the resource flows, but also on how competitive markets
are and how efficiently the industries and economies in which TNCs operate function. In addition,
the equitable distribution of the benefits may not be easy to achieve. The pain of adjustment to
competition is all the more severe when FDI liberalization, trade liberalization and domestic economic
reform go hand in hand, as is the case of many developing countries today.
In market economies, competition among firms and among consumers provides the incentive
for firms and consumers to behave in a manner that leads to efficiency. In economies that have
opened up to FDI, therefore, the efficient operation of industries with TNC participation, and of the
economies as a whole, depends on the extent and nature of competition that prevails. In particular,
it depends on whether FDI liberalization does, indeed, inject greater contestability into these markets,
and whether greater contestability is, indeed, maintained.
“Contestability” refers to the ease with which firms can enter and exit a market. A market is
deemed to be fully contestable if: (I) the suppliers are sufficiently numerous for none of them,
acting alone or in collusion with other suppliers, to be able to raise prices above average cost, yielding
super-normal profits; or (ii) entry into the market is sufficiently easy that, if incumbent suppliers
124
Introduction
Competition in a market refers to rivalry among the sellers and among the buyers of a good or
service; the sellers and buyers that can enter the contest constitute the market. The extent and nature of
market competition is considered important in determining the performance of economic systems. Under
static conditions (i.e., under given conditions with respect to technology or resources), economic performance
is judged in terms of efficiency, which has two elements:
• Technical efficiency, which exists when the production and distribution of goods take place with
minimum inputs, given technological constraints.
• Allocative efficiency, which exists when resources are allocated in the optimal manner -- that is, they
cannot be reallocated among parties, or production and distribution reorganized, to serve better the
demand for goods and services.
As mentioned, however, these concepts refer to performance under given technological constraints.
A third concept, that of “dynamic efficiency” or efficiency under conditions of technological change, becomes
important in order to assess performance over time. It refers to the rate at which technological constraints
change over time and new products are added to the feasible set.
The relationship between competition and economic performance was traditionally described in
terms of the “structure-conduct-performance” (SCP) paradigm, according to which economic performance
in a well defined market depends upon the interaction between the structure of the market and the conduct
of buyers and sellers in the market (Boner and Krueger, 1991, p. 3). As originally interpreted, this theory
held that market structure, as captured mainly by the concentration of sellers and barriers to entry, was the
primary determinant of both conduct and performance. At one extreme of perfect competition (with very
large numbers of sellers and no barriers to entry, among other conditions), no seller has the power to influence,
on his or her own, the price (or terms) at which a product is sold; at the other extreme, monopoly, the seller
has the power to set the price (or terms) most advantageous for her/him. A great majority of market situations
fall between these two situations and involve imperfect, but workable competition. In such markets, high
levels of seller concentration, protected by entry barriers, provide fertile conditions for collusive practices,
which will lead to high price, and perhaps costs (Bain, 1959).
More recent economic theory and empirical research have, however, established that both
“competition” and “market structure” are, in practice, multi-faceted concepts, and that the relationship
between the two defies simple generalizations, especially when deriving policy prescriptions:
• Most obviously, in a world in which many products are differentiated, consumer welfare does not
depend on price alone -- product variety, quality and innovation are all crucial, and there is little
evidence that large numbers, or the absence of concentration, necessarily fosters better performance
on these counts.
• As shown in contestable market theory (Baumol et al., 1982), even highly concentrated industries will
be forced to price “competitively” if they face the discipline for potential “hit and run” entry (see box
2). Thus, concentration is not the most important dimension of market structure; contestability (or
free entry and exit) is key, and here, the main factor is the extent to which entry requires expenditures
on sunk costs: without sunk costs, incumbent sellers, even oligopolists, will always be vulnerable to
the rapid entry of new firms, and thereby be unable to exploit their apparent market power. Of course,
many real world industries are, in fact, characterized by substantial sunk costs, and this may often
deter de novo domestic entry. However, the market may still be contestable to competition from
foreign firms which have already incurred the necessary sunk costs elsewhere or which may have
resources superior to those of potential domestic rivals. Whether they enter by exporting or through
FDI, their presence may render even markets for products of domestically concentrated industries in a
particular location inherently contestable.
/...
125
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
(Box 1, cont'd)
This raises, of course, the question of the relevant market. The appropriate scope of a market in terms of the
products to be included is usually defined in terms of products that are sufficiently close in attributes that a
rise in the price of one will induce consumers/buyers to substitute the other. However, in an increasingly
globalized world economy, the geographic scope of the market also needs to be defined -- it might be
national, regional or global. The level of concentration of domestic producers in a given country may tell
us very little about the extent of competition between sellers in that market (or the market for their product).
This is most obviously the case within blocks of countries, such as the European Union, in which, as markets
become increasingly integrated, the concentration of producers in a particular country may be of no more
relevance than was the concentration of producers within a particular region of a national market before
integration took place (Davies, Lyons et al., 1996).
• Furthermore, as boundaries blur between industries and new products emerge that are based on
technology discontinuities and on combinations of generic technologies from across hitherto distinct
industries, identification of the market becomes more difficult (Delapierre and Mytelka, forthcoming).
• Market structure and concentration are themselves the product of the competitive process. It has been
argued (Demsetz, 1973) that the reason why firms in concentrated industries earn higher profits is not
because they set higher prices, but, rather, because they are more efficient. It is this greater efficiency
which enables them simultaneously to secure dominant market positions and high profits. A somewhat
similar message emerges from some modern game theoretic analyses of market structure (e.g., Sutton,
1991), which show how tougher competition between incumbent firms may itself cause higher
concentration; the reason is that competition means lower prices, and lower prices force out marginal
producers, while offering less favourable prospects for new potential entrants.
Modern theory also highlights the importance of understanding the nature of the competitive
game, and the types of competitive weapons firms use. In particular, where goods are differentiated and/or
technologically sophisticated, competition may involve heavy and escalating outlays on advertising and
research and development, as incumbent firms strive to enhance the quality (either actual or perceived) of
their product, and new innovative firms enter the market. This is relevant for at least two reasons: first, it
underlines the earlier observation that consumer welfare does not depend on price alone; second, these
types of expenditure are invariably sunk costs. Thus, the competitive process may itself give rise to ever-
escalating sunk costs, making new entry difficult and the market less contestable. There is growing evidence
(e.g., Sutton, 1991; Davies, Lyons et al., 1996) that, in many such markets, market enlargement (and, by
implication, globalization) may not result in falling concentration; rather, as the market expands, sunk costs
increase apace, and there is the possibility that a stable and tightly-knit oligopolistic group will continue to
dominate (or emerge), unconstrained by the competitive discipline of potential entry. On the other hand, as
long as markets remain contestable, competition through innovation may ultimately contribute more to
economic performance by expanding production possibilities than competition through price or other variables
that merely ensure the best use of existing production possibilities.
In sum, there is no simple (inverse) mapping between concentration and the state of competition
in a particular market. If “structure” is to be a concept of operational relevance, it cannot be simply equated
to concentration: market contestability and openness to trade and FDI competition are equally important. It
is also important to define the scope of the effective market appropriately and to acknowledge that the
nature of the competitive process will differ importantly depending on the innate nature of the product(s)
involved.
Source: UNCTAD.
126
Introduction
tried to raise prices substantially, new entry would be likely to occur. In either case, firms would
hesitate to increase prices substantially, because of risk of loss of market share (boxes 1 and 2).
Thus, fully contestable markets (which may rarely exist in reality) are necessarily highly competitive.
More generally, the greater the ease of entry to (and exit from) a market, the more competitively and
hence, efficiently, it functions. In the context of a national market, this would refer to ease of entry
by domestic producers/sellers, by foreign producers selling the product through international trade,
and by TNCs engaged in FDI (or non-equity arrangements) for production and sale in the market.
The concept of “contestability” emphasizes the role that potential competition plays in disciplining
the behaviour of firms. According to the contestability theory of markets, even highly concentrated markets
would function as if they were competitive if entry and exit are free enough that the potential entry of
competitors will force incumbents (even in a two firm oligopoly or in a monopoly) to behave as if they were
price takers in a highly competitive market (Baumol et al., 1982). In a highly contestable market -- one
characterized by “ultra-free entry and exit” -- any supra-normal profits arising from the exercise of market
power will result in “hit-and-run” entry by new firms, the erosion of market share for incumbents and a
subsequent return to competitive behaviour on the part of these. The requirement of ultra-free exit implies
that there are no (or very limited) sunk costs to act as barriers to entry. The contestability paradigm --
which has yet to be established through rigorous and extensive empirical testing -- therefore considers ease
of entry and exit as the salient characteristic of market structures that give rise to efficient outcomes. The
concept of contestability associated with the paradigm focusses upon the “entry and exit” characteristics of
industries with a view to developing a conceptual framework that would allow for more informed regulatory
decisions related to these market structures and competition in specific industries.
A more recent literature has applied the idea of contestability to an analysis of the broader policy
framework and structural factors that affect the ease with which foreign firms can enter into and serve
national markets, be it through trade or investment (OECD, 1995; Lawrence, 1996; and Feketekuty and
Rogowsky, 1996). The term “contestability” is used in this literature mainly to emphasize that the ability of
foreign suppliers to serve markets depends on both the ease with which firms can enter an economy (which,
in turn, depends on the removal of impediments at the border) and the ease with which they can actually
participate in that economy’s markets (which depends upon many other factors that serve as impediments to
firms’ operations as producers and sellers). This new contestability literature differs in several respects
from the “contestability theory” literature. For example, whereas the latter emphasizes the importance of
both free entry and exit, the former largely focuses on the issue of entry. One reason for this is that, while
exit from a micro-economic perspective involves the termination of a firm’s activities in a particular industry,
exit of a foreign firm from a particular national market relates only to a firm’s activities in that market; the
issue of sunk costs as an impediment to exit is therefore muted in the new contestability literature to the
extent that sunk costs related to foreign market participation constitute a smaller share of the firm’s total
sunk costs.
Another difference relates to the attention paid to government policies. The earlier --contestability
theory -- literature emphasized the structural characteristics of particular industries (or markets) and their
implications for potential competition and the application of competition law. In contrast, the more recent
contestability literature has a broader policy-focus, and draws attention to the role played by trade and
investment policy, competition policy, government regulation, technology policy, government procurement,
corporate governance, standard setting and tax policies (Lawrence, 1996, p. 32) in achieving contestable
markets.
Source: UNCTAD.
127
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Governments rely on a number of policies and policy instruments to maintain the contestability
of, and competition in, their markets for goods and services: trade policy, including the rules governing
the supply of goods and services through international trade; FDI policy, including the rules governing
the entry and participation of foreign enterprises in production (and sales); competition policy,
including the rules governing arrangements among firms/suppliers and the conduct of individual
firms/suppliers generally (but not exclusively) in a national market; and other policies related to
economic activity that affect market transactions.
There is a high degree of inter-dependence between trade policy, FDI policy and competition
policy. Appropriately configured, these three policy tools can be mutually reinforcing and ensure
that markets function effectively to promote efficient resource allocation and economic development.
Indeed, failure to achieve proper coherence between the three can lead to distortions and reduced
welfare gains. For example, if investment policies are liberalized but trade policies remain restrictive,
the scope for foreign affiliates and domestic firms to abuse their market power is much increased,
because they are shielded from an important source of competition in the form of imports. Conversely,
free competition from imports will enable the market to check the propensity for abusive practices
such as collusion, price-rigging and profit-gouging. In the case of activities that are insulated from
trade competition -- in particular, non-tradeable services -- FDI becomes the principal modality of
competition by foreign providers; the role of competition policy, both for maintaining competition
in markets generally and as a critical element in the process of FDI liberalization, therefore, assumes
greater importance, since one important source of competition (imports) is lacking. Considering
that services account for more than half of GDP in all developed countries, and contribute the single
largest sector in most developing countries, this makes both FDI policy and competition policy
important for increasing the contestability of many markets.
Investment liberalization can be expected to make product markets more contestable in so far
as it reduces formal barriers to market entry by foreign firms seeking to establish operations to
produce for local sales, and allows incumbent monopolies or cartels to be challenged. Ease of entry
for the establishment of operations by foreign firms in export-oriented production would, moreover,
affect the contestability of the market(s) -- national, regional or global -- to which their output may
be exported.
Since FDI involves production, the initial impact of its entry will be on the contestability of
the markets for the factors of production on which TNCs draw for their production operations. This
has implications for competition in the factor markets concerned -- an issue (beyond the direct purview
of this volume) that is of interest particularly with regard to markets for non-mobile factors of
production, including, especially, labour (UNCTAD-DTCI, 1994). It is also of relevance because of
the links between factor and product markets: FDI contestability in product markets will depend on,
among other things, ease of entry into factor markets in host countries.
• The structure of the markets -- national, regional or global -- for the products of the industries
in which FDI takes place. Transnational corporations tend to enter industries with a relatively
high concentration of firms in production; this often translates into a concentration of sellers
128
Introduction
in the markets for their products. This suggests that opening up industries and their markets
to TNC entry increases contestability. However, the ownership-specific advantages of TNCs
might sometimes give them sufficient lead over single-nation competitors to create a new
pattern of concentration in which the former assume a dominant role. But concentration
within national markets is not necessarily important if there are no barriers to entry and exit
(see boxes 1 and 2); where such barriers exist, there is greater potential for anticompetitive
business practices by dominant firms, including TNCs. This also applies to regional or
global markets.
• The conduct of firms in the markets involved. The business practices or conduct of TNCs (as
of other firms) can also affect competition directly or by influencing market structure. Of
particular interest here are entry barriers that might be erected in an industry, as well as
anticompetitive practices (including restrictive business practices), especially by TNCs that
acquire dominant positions and that can benefit from their transnational character. Apart
from business practices of firms that replace regulatory impediments to entry with private
impediments, accepted business practices that characterize specific markets but pose special
difficulties for new foreign entrants are receiving increased attention.
• Government policy and practices. The relationship between FDI and competition may also
be influenced by public policy and practices that are not explicitly related to FDI restrictions
or standards of treatment, but which frequently continue in spite of FDI liberalization. Of
particular importance are government policies and actions aimed at attracting foreign
investors, especially when major investment projects are at stake. Exclusive or monopoly-
type inducements that grant legally protected market power may be given to TNCs by
governments, either because they are considered necessary to attract an investor, or because
they are required by firms as a precondition for undertaking an investment; such inducements,
by definition, undermine the pro-competitive effects of FDI. (Naturally, similar protection
can also be given to domestic private or state-owned companies for various reasons -- such
as, for example, building “national champions” -- with similar scope for anti-competitive
effects; these are not within the purview of this volume.) Also important are various
exemptions from competition legislation (for example, of corporate governance practices
that impede contestability) that act as impediments to FDI. What is common to all of these
policies and practices is that they do not allow the pro-competitive effects of FDI to occur
and therefore undermine the prospects for enhancing contestability through FDI liberalization.
The relationships between FDI, market structure and competition have several implications
for policy. In particular, as countries progressively liberalize their trade and FDI policies and therefore
increasingly exhaust the potential of these policy tools to contribute to greater contestability of their
markets, the relative importance of competition policy as a tool to increase further and maintain
contestability rises. This is not to suggest that trade and FDI policies (and, indeed, other domestic
policies, such as deregulation and privatization) have already exhausted their potential to contribute
to greater contestability -- in fact, changes that have taken place in this respect vary greatly among
countries and industries. Moreover, there are policy objectives other than contestability, and these
may require different policy approaches. And, in any event, it is not easy to put in place a well
functioning competition policy. Nevertheless, in a liberalizing world economy competition policy
is likely to acquire, in the long term, the status of primus inter pares among policy tools used to
promote contestability and ensure competition. Given that other aspects of the liberalization of FDI
and trade policies have been discussed earlier, special attention is therefore given in this volume to
the interface of competition policy and FDI.
129
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
The task of assuring consumers and entrepreneurs that efficient outcomes are not being disturbed
by anti-competitive practices, including restrictive business practices, is likely to become more
complex. Given the oligopolistic structures of many of the industries in which TNCs operate, and
the competitive strengths that a number of firms have in those industries, liberalization could increase
their market power. Another factor that underscores the importance of competition policy in a
liberalized environment is the concentrated market structures prevailing in many national economies,
especially developing economies, that have liberalized. Therefore, policies related to mergers and
acquisitions, as well as business practices, would assume greater significance with FDI liberalization.
Countries that have not adopted competition laws might find it increasingly necessary to do so, and
some countries that do have such laws might need to strengthen their provisions and the institutional
capabilities for implementing them. With regard to implementation, this includes competition
authorities taking into account explicitly -- and perhaps even on par with domestic producers and
imports -- new FDI when considering supply responses. This is particularly relevant as FDI has
become more important than trade in delivering goods and services to foreign markets, and as FDI is
by far the most important mechanism for such delivery when it comes to services.
While the competitive and efficient functioning of markets is the overriding objective of
competition policy, the balancing of efficiency objectives with competing objectives is a task facing
policy makers in both developed and especially developing countries. For example, although
concentration remains a rough parameter triggering competition concerns, many governments now
apply competition policy in this regard in a flexible manner, permitting highly concentrated markets
-- especially where market imperfections exist -- because these are seen as yielding dynamic efficiency
outcomes. In other words, limitations exist with respect to competition in the interest of long-term
economic growth. This has been the case, for example, as regards competition among firms --
generally TNCs -- in industries with high research-and-development costs or network-related scale
economies.
For policy makers in developing countries, the challenge of identifying and pursuing policies
and measures conducive to achieving their long-term economic development objectives, while
ensuring the positive benefits of increased contestability and competition through FDI liberalization,
is particularly complex. Coherent and mutually supportive policies balancing static and dynamic
efficiency considerations, as well as other economic and social objectives, are required if competition
policy is to support sustainable development (box 3) and, given the characteristics of industries and
markets in developing countries, this is not easy. Furthermore, resources and institutional capabilities
need to be strengthened if competition authorities in developing countries are to enforce competition
rules, advocate competition before their own governments, and educate firms and consumers on the
benefits of competitive markets.
Finally, the increasingly regional or global nature of markets and underlying production
structures more and more limits the extent to which competition policy can be pursued successfully
at the national level. Correspondingly, it increases the need for international cooperation on
competition issues. The scope for international cooperation is greatest as regards the exchange of
information and finding effective remedies to competitive abuses. Indeed, competition rules may,
ultimately, be needed at the international level. These and other policy issues are pursued in chapter
V.
130
Introduction
Competition allows the market to reward good performance and to penalize poor performance by
producers. It thus encourages entrepreneurial activity and market entry by new firms, and also provides a
stimulus for enterprises to become more efficient, to invest in the production of a greater variety of, or
better-quality, products at prices close to costs, and to create new products. This enhances consumer welfare
(including for business users of intermediate inputs, whose product quality and cost structure is improved
by competition among their suppliers), efficient resource allocation throughout the economy, growth and,
ultimately, development.
In the past, many countries, particularly developing countries, have seen competition as leading
to excess capacity or diseconomies of scale, and they have also been concerned about weakening the
market position of national enterprises vis-à-vis foreign firms. Such concerns have decreased in recent
years as it has been realized that exposure to competition is generally the most effective way of promoting
the ability of firms and industries to perform effectively in international markets (subject to competing
objectives). Conversely, the key role that competition can play in increasing efficiency and, thus, in supporting
development, has been better appreciated.
This shift in perception has contributed to the widespread adoption of market-oriented reforms
promoting competition. These include deregulation, price liberalization, demonopolization, privatization,
removal of barriers to market exit (such as subsidies) and liberalization of trade and FDI policies.
In parallel with these reforms, many countries from all regions have also adopted competition
policies, or reformed existing policies and strengthened their implementation. Amongst other things,
competition policy seeks to promote competition through the liberalization of governmental policies and
measures where they unduly distort competition. Indeed, many governments have tried to ensure that the
principles of competition policy are duly taken into account when developing and implementing other
governmental policies (competition policy authorities are often given an advocacy role to play in this respect).
Competition policy is also concerned with the enforcement of rules of the game to ensure that enterprises
do not undertake restrictive business practices and, again, many governments have attempted to ensure that
incumbent firms do not take advantage of liberalization to “privatize” governmental restraints and block
market entry -- particularly as there may be many disincentives to market entry in developing countries,
such as small market size, limited availability of entrepreneurial or technical skills or production inputs, or
inefficient distribution and communications systems.
This does not mean that competition policy is formulated and implemented in a doctrinaire and
inflexible manner. For example, action against restrictive business practices is usually taken on the basis of
economic analysis, which may take into account the likelihood of market entry (including actual or potential
competition from imported goods) and efficiency considerations (including economies of scale and the
competitiveness of national firms in domestic and overseas markets). Other public interest criteria may be
taken into account as well. In several competition laws, exemptions from restrictive-business-practice
controls (or relatively lenient controls) may be provided for some types of practices or for joint ventures,
for some industries, for small transactions or for cooperative arrangements among small enterprises.
Competition principles may also sometimes be modified in respect of some policies relating to trade or
industrial promotion.
In the context of developing countries, flexibility in applying competition policy may be even
more necessary in order not to impede efficiency, growth or development goals, and policy coherence should
be ensured between competition policy and other policies aimed at promoting development (chapter V
deals in more detail with such aspects of the development dimension, while box V.18 describes some
provisions of the Set of Multilaterally Agreed Equitable Principles and Rules for the Control of Restrictive
Business Practices relating to special and differential treatment of developing countries in this area). However,
while pragmatic compromises may sometimes be justified, the misuse of efficiency arguments by vested
interests needs to be guarded against, and the momentum of progressive movement towards competitive
markets should be encouraged. This requires a strong competition authority with the mandates and resources
to enable it to act as an effective “watchdog” for competition.
Source: UNCTAD.
131
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Note
1 For a more detailed discussion of the dimensions of the FDI liberalization process, see UNCTAD, 1994,
chapter VII, and UNCTAD, 1996, Part Three.
132
CHAPTER IV
Introduction
As countries liberalize their foreign-direct-investment (FDI) regimes, and firms increase
international investment and production, it is important to consider how the locational and
marketing strategies of transnational corporations (TNCs) interact with the competitive structure
and behaviour of the markets in which they operate. In a liberalized environment, markets play a
major role in determining how economic performance is influenced by FDI (see the introduction to
Part Two).
In today’s world of freer trade and FDI, the markets for many products -- and competition
in them -- are increasingly regional or global. Trade liberalization expands opportunities for firms
(or suppliers) to reach buyers located in an increasing number of countries, within a region or
across regions. The liberalization of FDI regimes enables firms to locate production -- final or
intermediate -- wherever it can be done most efficiently, with a view towards serving buyers not
only in host or home countries but also in other countries from locations best suited for reaching
them. Global convergence of tastes and demand, and technological improvements in transport and
communications, strengthen these tendencies.
What links TNC production in one location and consumers in other locations within a global
or regional market is international trade: through exports, firms compete in product markets other
than those where production takes place. This has always been the case in natural resource-based
industries. However, liberalization and globalization have reinforced the complementarity between
FDI and trade by extending it to a wider array of industries, products and activities and a wider set
of locations. As a consequence, many more firms today distribute their activities horizontally (at
the same point) or vertically (at different points) on their value chains in sites in different countries.
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Despite the emerging supranational geographic scope of many product markets, there are
good reasons for considering separately the impact of TNC activities on the structure of markets
and the strength and nature of competition within host economies. One important reason is that
many products in the services sector -- which accounts for more than a half of the economic activity
in all developed countries and is the single largest sector in most developing countries -- can only
be delivered to buyers by suppliers who are physically present in the same location as the buyers.
Although technological advances in information and telecommunications technologies have
rendered several information-intensive services transportable across distances, many producer as
well as consumer services require the coincidence of production and consumption. Secondly, in
some industries, physical proximity to customers carries significant benefits, either because of high
transport costs or the need to adapt the product to customers’ tastes. Furthermore, in many countries
-- especially developing countries -- markets for goods are still integrated only to a limited extent
into regional and global markets, either due to continued protection against trade of certain domestic
industries and markets, or because their small size and geographic location limits their involvement
in international trade. In all these cases, national markets are segmented, to a greater or less extent,
from one another, and FDI that enables the entry of foreign suppliers has the potential to influence
market structure and industry performance.
Section A of this chapter focuses on the nature of the interaction between inward FDI and
the structure of, and competition in, host country markets (for goods and services), and the
implications for industry performance and consumer welfare. The effects, at TNC entry, on the
structure of an industry and on the market for the product of the industry in a host country depend
mainly on the mode of entry. Once foreign affiliates are established in the market, their size and
competitive strengths relative to those of local or other foreign competitors, their growth strategies,
their behaviour with respect to competition and the responses of local firms and other foreign
suppliers may further affect the structure of the host country market. Within the context of the
post-FDI market structure, the behaviour of TNCs may be procompetitive, with potential benefits
in terms of static and dynamic efficiency for the performance of the industries in which they operate
and for consumer welfare. Under certain conditions, however, there may be scope for anticompetitive
behaviour as well. Government policies and actions to attract FDI, which might grant protected
markets to TNCs through special concessions in order to attract their investments, could further
expand the scope for anticompetitive effects.
Trade liberalization enables firms to sell to buyers regardless of where they are located, and
buyers to obtain products from sellers regardless of the latter’s location. The result is that the
markets for many (tradable) products transcend national boundaries. Investment liberalization
allows firms to combine international production and trade in the most effective manner to access
resources as well as markets. This has contributed to increased TNC activity and the proliferation
of networks of production facilities both within TNCs and between TNCs and unrelated firms,
134
Chapter IV
with potential implications for supply response in markets through FDI. Furthermore, the efficient
combination of FDI and trade and the efficiencies generated by integrated international production
that characterize TNCs in some industries often strengthen the competitiveness of the TNCs involved,
increasing competition, influencing market structures and affecting the performance of industries.
Section B of this chapter focuses on these issues, in particular the impact of integrated international
production on competition in regional or global markets, and the implications for consumers and
producers located in individual countries that participate in those markets.
The opening up of economies and markets to inward FDI and other forms of participation
by TNCs can contribute directly towards increasing the contestability of host country markets.
First, with the removal of restrictions and establishment of standards of treatment, these markets
can now be entered by firms from other countries by establishing affiliates (as well as entering
contractual arrangements) that produce goods and services for sale within the countries concerned.
In the case of the markets for many services and some goods, producing locally may be the only
way in which foreign firms could enter the markets. Furthermore, TNCs may be better able than
purely domestic firms in a host country to overcome some of the cost-related barriers to entry that
limit the number of firms in some industries (and the markets for their products).
Barriers to the entry of firms to a market arise from regulatory restrictions to the activities
of domestic firms, trade and/or FDI, from non-formal impediments to the above due to
organizational practices within a host country, and from barriers due to the particular geography of
the country. They also arise from high set-up costs that must be incurred in order to produce (and
sell) a product, and scale economies that limit the number of sellers who can enjoy positive profits;
some of the costs may be sunk costs, or costs that cannot be recovered if the firm were to decide to
leave the industry or market. The cost-related structural barriers to entry to an industry (and the
market for its product) are typically related to one or more of the following factors: large capital
costs for establishing an efficient scale of production; economies of scale (at the plant level) in
production; economies of scale (at the firm level) in advertising, marketing and/or research and
development (R&D) and organizational complexity which can also involve, in certain industries,
high fixed costs and scale economies (Caves, 1996, pp. 83-84).
Foreign direct investment by TNCs is generally based on firm-specific assets that arises
from several of these sources of structural barriers to entry. Firms investing abroad face costs that
domestic firms in a host country do not face. Overcoming them requires some competitive advantage
on the part of a firm, in the form of ownership-specific advantages or proprietary assets (UNCTC,
1992b; Dunning, 1993; Caves 1996). Such assets usually take the form of technological, organizational
or marketing knowledge, goodwill and/or brand names; these are typically associated with the
entry barriers mentioned above -- especially R&D, advertising and marketing expenditures.
Transnational corporations are therefore often better able than host country firms that are not
transnational enterprises to enter some host country markets in industries with such high cost-
related entry barriers.2 They establish affiliates abroad when they find transferring proprietary
assets internally advantageous -- that is, when they find such investment more profitable than
exporting final products or providing the services of the proprietary assets they possess through
contractual arrangements -- and enter into contractual arrangements for production when they
find such arrangements more convenient or profitable than either exporting or setting up their own
135
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
production operations.
In recent years, FDI by small and medium-sized enterprises, including firms based in
developing countries, has assumed increasing importance (UNCTAD, 1993b). The competitive
advantages of these enterprises are not conducive to overcoming most of the cost-related entry
barriers mentioned above. Most importantly, small and medium-sized TNCs have limited financial
capabilities and are therefore at a disadvantage in overcoming barriers due to scale economies.
However, they have intangible assets, developed through research and development, in the form of
proprietary technology, the ability to adapt or down-scale mature technologies, flexibility of
management, experience and knowledge of marketing, and market access (UNCTAD, 1993b, p.
89). Although these advantages seem capable of being developed by any firm, they can give small
and medium-sized TNCs an edge over small and medium-sized enterprises that serve only their
own local markets. Small and medium-sized TNCs typically exploit their advantages in niche
production for markets that do not attract FDI by larger TNCs, adding to the contestability of these
markets when regulatory barriers are removed.
The markets in which opening up to FDI is most likely to enhance contestability and inject
competition are those for services. Many services cannot be traded across distances, and FDI is the
only modality through which foreign providers can enter host country markets for these services.
It is therefore in the service industries that FDI makes (or might make) a considerable difference as
regards potential and actual competition. In manufacturing, FDI liberalization is likely to affect
entry to different host country industries (and the corresponding markets) differently, depending
upon the advantages of proximity to the consumer as compared with those of economies of scale at
the plant level.3
The entry and subsequent activities of TNCs interact with the structure of markets for goods
and services in developed and developing host countries in several different ways. Traditionally,
the aspect of market structure that has attracted most attention has been that of market
concentration.4 This remains a useful starting point for an analysis of the impact of FDI on host
country markets: although high concentration need not be equated with a lack of competition, it
facilitates the exercise of market power and anticompetitive behaviour, which is a major focus of
interest for competition-policy authorities. However, any observed association between
concentration and TNC activity needs to be carefully considered before concluding that there is a
136
Chapter IV
causal relationship. Above all, concentration must be viewed in the light of other elements of
market structure, especially the degree of contestability of a market and the extent of product
differentiation, and in the light of dynamic changes, such as innovation, that affect the performance
of an industry.
Conceptually as well as empirically, there are good reasons for expecting that the extent of
TNC activity is typically more pronounced in industries that are more highly concentrated. As
discussed, TNCs possess special advantages that are typically generated in industries with relatively
high cost -related barriers to entry and that are conducive to their entering such industries in host
countries. Moreover, there is widespread acceptance that FDI originates in home country oligopolies
(Frischtak and Newfarmer, 1994, p. 6). The positive correlation between the degree of
transnationalization of firms and the degree of concentration in industries can be illustrated with
respect to intra-European-Union FDI and industrial concentration within the European Union, where,
overall, the tendency of firms to engage in and disperse their production activity across borders
was greater, the more concentrated the industry (Davies, Lyons, et al.,1996).5 However, data for the
European Union also show that not all concentrated industries are characterized by high degrees of
firm transnationalization (table IV.1); in particular, TNC activity was relatively low in industries in
which production scale economies were high but in which there were relatively large intra-European
Union trade flows. Moreover, high degrees of TNC activity were not necessarily associated with
high concentration in industries; this lack of association was typically the case in industries
characterized by moderate production economies and low intra-European Union trade that were
also subject to significant product differentiation (but not R&D). Nevertheless, the general tendency
over the full population of manufacturing industries was that differentiated product industries
exposed to trade competition were not only the most concentrated as a group but also recorded the
highest TNC participation (table IV.2). Industries with smaller production-scale economies and
homogeneous products were the least concentrated and also had the lowest TNC participation.
As regards host countries, numerous studies for individual developing countries as well as
developed economies indicate a positive correlation between TNC activity and the concentration
of producers in host country industries.6 A positive correlation between TNC activity and market
concentration in host countries has also been observed, to some extent, with respect to small and
medium-sized TNCs.7 Although some of this evidence relates to industry rather than market
concentration, it could be (and generally seems to have been) interpreted to indicate a correlation
between TNC activity and seller concentration in host country markets. Strictly speaking, such an
interpretation would be correct only if host-country based producers of a good or service are the
only competitors in the relevant market, defined to include the market for reasonably substitutable
goods and services. This generally would be the case for non-tradables, e.g., many services. In the
case of traded goods and services, however, industry concentration would not necessarily reflect
market or seller concentration, unless, due to protection or other factors, there is no trade. Moreover,
due to limited data availability, production concentration ratios often apply to industries as a
whole, not to individual product markets. For example, although concentration in “pharmaceuticals”
is typically relatively moderate, concentration in some markets for individual types drugs is high.8
137
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Table IV.1. The most transnationalized and concentrated industriesa within the European Union, 1987
(Index)
Concentration
Transnationalization indexc Industry
Industry indexb (C5) typed
138
Chapter IV
Source: based on Davies, Lyons et al., 1996, table 7.2, and data from United Kingdom, Central Statistical
Office, 1995.
a The industries are grouped into the four groups indicated, using data on typical minimum efficient production scale,
advertising and R&D expenditures, and trade flows deflated by total industry sales. The groups are listed in inverse order
relative to their contestability based on the above-mentioned characteristics. The industry figures refer to averages for individual
3 digit industries within them and cover, in all, 100 three digit industries that cover, in principle, all manufacturing. Most are
self-explanatory; but consumer chemicals refers to paint, pharmaceuticals, toilet preparations, soaps and detergents; basic food
refers to grain, milling, animal feeds, meat products and fish products.
b Mean four-firm national (production) concentration ratio of the United States, Japan, the United Kingdom, Germany,
Italy and Belgium.
c Transnationalization is measured by the NM index (see notes to table IV.1).
d Mean four-firm national (production) concentration ratio for the United Kingdom.
e The proportion of total sales of United Kingdom-produced output accounted for by foreign affiliates.
139
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
concentration; they also suggest that, while a correlation can draw attention to situations in which
one or the other is more likely, the actual relationship must be examined on a case-by-case basis:
• First, FDI is generally associated with some form of firm-specific or proprietary asset
that enables a TNC to overcome the disadvantage of operating in a foreign environment.
Such assets -- including technology, organizational or managerial practices and
knowledge, brand names or marketing networks -- are usually associated with product
differentiation and large expenditures on advertising and marketing and on R&D and
innovation.
• Second, product differentiation, high R&D expenditures and high advertising costs are
closely related to the degree of concentration in an industry (Curry and George, 1983;
Davies and Lyons, 1989). As the size of a market increases, leading firms (in markets
with differentiated products) find it profitable to expand their expenditures on
“endogenous sunk costs” (R&D and advertising), as they strive for continuous quality
enhancement (actual or perceived). The upshot is that concentration remains high, as
compared to other markets in which the product is more homogeneous and competition
is conducted more simply via price.
Since FDI and industry concentration share common causes, the positive correlation between
TNC activity and market concentration in host countries could imply not only that TNC activity
leads to higher concentration or that higher concentration stimulates TNC entry; it could also imply
that both are related to a third factor: the tendency of firm-specific assets and product differentiation
and/or R&D to go hand in hand. Differentiated product industries and R&D intensive industries
(and markets) tend to be concentrated and to be populated by TNCs. The importance of each of the
above in explaining the observed correlation can be expected to vary in different cases, suggesting
that it is important to look at the changes that occur in a market due to the entry of FDI and the
activities of foreign affiliates in order to understand whether and to what extent FDI affects market
concentration.
Moving from the observed correlation to the possible effects of the entry of FDI and the
operations of TNCs on the number of firms and the concentration of sellers in the market for a
product, such effects may occur, initially, because the very entry of a TNC into a host country industry
could affect the number of sellers and their relative shares in the market for its product(s).
Subsequently, over the medium and long term, TNC participation and conduct may contribute to
increasing or decreasing concentration, depending upon the sizes of the market; its openness to
entry by domestic firms, TNCs and imports; the relative size and competitive strengths of foreign
affiliates and domestic firms and their respective strategies and behaviour with respect to growth
and competition; and the role played by imports.
140
Chapter IV
On the other hand, FDI through a merger or acquisition invariably leaves the number of producers
and sellers of a product unchanged.
This suggests that the initial direct effect of greenfield FDI is normally to reduce -- or, at
least, leave unchanged -- the concentration of producers in an industry and, hence, of sellers of the
product. An exception is if an entrant’s scale of production and sales is significantly larger than
that of incumbent firms in the local market (and of imports, in the case of tradables); then, it would
immediately secure a large share of the market, increasing concentration; in addition, if a single
TNC undertakes greenfield investment for producing a good or service that is new and unavailable
through trade, the foreign affiliate will, initially, be a monopoly. In comparison, FDI-entry through
a merger or acquisition (M&A) would increase the concentration of producers/sellers in a market if
the merger or take-over results in increased sales for the newly created foreign affiliates; or leave it
unchanged, if its size is the same as that of the incumbent firm acquired. (It is unlikely that the
scale of operations of the new firm would be reduced at the time of entry to such an extent that the
degree of concentration decreases.)
About half of FDI inflows worldwide during 1989-1996 (annex tables B.7 and B.8) is estimated
to have taken place through M&As, with 90 per cent of cross-border deals being made in developed
countries.9 Until 1992, entry of TNCs into the developing world through M&As was almost entirely
confined to transactions in Latin America and the Caribbean (UNCTAD, 1996a, p. 11). Since 1992,
the practice has extended to Asia and Central and Eastern Europe. Privatization during the 1990s
has contributed to increasing entry through M&As in developing countries and economies in
transition.
The choice of the route of entry is related to firm-, industry- and country-specific factors.
Entry obviously has to be via new plants when the investment is in an industry in which no local
producers are present. Furthermore, initial foreign entrants in a host economy or industry, especially
those with strong competitive advantages, as well as small and medium-sized TNCs, tend to prefer
greenfield entry (Dunning, 1993, p. 432; UNCTAD, 1993b, p. 82). This is particularly likely when
the industry entered is the same as that in which a TNC is based at home. By contrast, TNCs that
follow other firms -- often with a view towards protecting their international market positions --
may prefer an acquisition or merger that allows a speedier build-up of production capability in
host countries (Dubin, 1975; Knickerbocker, 1973). Speedier entry to particular markets through
M&As may also be preferred in order to pre-empt competitors from entering it, or to avoid the
unfavourable consequences of not being active in it. In some industries, the transaction costs
associated with M&As, especially those related to retraining the work force or infusing a new business
outlook and culture, may be perceived to be greater than the set up costs of a greenfield venture
(Dunning, 1993, p. 432). A merger or take-over may also be preferred if the investing company has
only some of the competitive advantages necessary for success and needs to augment its resources;
this is likely to be particularly important in industries in which firms produce for a market wider
than the host country market. Entry by acquisition has also been observed to be more common in
industries that are already concentrated (Caves and Mehra, 1986; Baldwin and Caves, 1991). In
fact, at the extreme, in an industry that is a “natural” monopoly due to increasing returns to scale,
the only way for a TNC to enter a host economy may be by the acquisition of an incumbent monopoly,
whether private or state-owned. Country-specific factors, including the size of the market (which
determine whether a new firm can profitably enter) and the institutional mechanisms, especially
the structure of capital markets for implementing M&As, also influence the mode of entry. For
example, some countries, such as Japan and many developing countries, are reluctant to allow
foreign acquisitions, while others such as the United Kingdom or the United States have a more
facilitating environment for M&As.
141
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
The high incidence of M&As as a mode of entry by TNCs into developed countries suggests
that the direct and immediate impact of FDI in reducing concentration in developed host country
markets may be limited. However, the specific implications will depend on the counterfactual, i.e.,
what would have happened to the market structure in the absence of FDI. For example, a cross-
border merger involving an ailing firm in a host economy may be quite different from one with a
thriving enterprise. If a merger or acquisition is undertaken with a view towards increasing efficiency
and reducing production costs, it may well allow the survival of an incumbent firm and its operations
in the host country, thereby preventing a reduction in the number of firms and increased
concentration in the market. A merger or acquisition may also lead to a down-scaling of the size of
operations of the acquired firm (or even its closing down), again raising the possibility of increased
concentration. Much depends on the rationale for any merger or acquisition (Dunning, 1993, p.
432).
In contrast, the traditional tendency of TNCs to enter developing countries primarily through
greenfield FDI suggests that, in these economies, the direct and immediate effect of FDI would
often be to increase the number of sellers and decrease concentration in the relevant markets. The
extent to which this follows depends, however, on the product, the degree to which the market for
it is already developed, and whether or not there is competition through trade. To the extent that
there are well-established incumbent firms/sellers of the products in which greenfield investments
take place, reduced concentration is quite likely. However, if FDI takes place in the market for a
new product or a market in which demand far exceeds the supply capacities of incumbent firms/
sellers, much depends upon how many TNCs enter a market. The entry of a single TNC could
result in its acquiring immediately a large share of the market, raising concentration or creating a
monopoly. This is sometimes the case in developing countries, especially in capital-intensive
industries, in new products or in segments of markets not served by incumbent competitors. On
the other hand, the entry of a number of TNCs will reduce this possibility; for example, in some
countries of Central and Eastern Europe, the entry of FDI, especially in small and medium-sized
enterprises, has helped to de-monopolize and broaden the structures of markets previously
dominated by large state-owned enterprises (chapter II).
Whatever its mode of entry, inward FDI can make a difference for market concentration in
the relevant host-country market, especially in industries with high barriers to entry. In particular,
TNC participation could reduce concentration in such industries and in the corresponding markets
for their products if the good or service produced by the foreign affiliate is sold in the local market.
This effect is likely to be especially important if the product is a good or service that must be produced
close to the customer (box IV.1).
However, the actual impact and implications of TNC participation on product market
concentration in any particular situation depend upon a number of factors:
• The number and size of TNC operations relative to indigenous and other competitors
in host country markets. The average size of foreign affiliates of TNCs often tends to be
larger than that of indigenous competitors, according to empirical studies relating to
developed as well as developing host countries.10 The tendency of TNCs to undertake
sequential investments to expand their foreign affiliate capacities can widen this gap, if
local firms’ investments do not rise proportionately. The growth strategies of TNCs
(after entry), which often include acquisition of local competitors, could also work in
the same direction (Frischtak and Newfarmer, 1994, p. 15). There is some evidence that
T N C s ,
142
Chapter IV
Transnational corporations are often able to enter host country markets that are effectively
barred to entry by domestic (non-TNC) firms, but the effects on concentration can differ. This is
illustrated by three specific examples from recent years, for the United Kingdom.
The first example is the entry of Mars (United States) into the United Kingdom ice-cream
market. The market for ice cream is dominated in many European countries by large TNCs, especially
Unilever and Nestlé. In the United Kingdom, Unilever had a market share of over 60 per cent. Success
on a national scale in this industry necessitates a strong brand image supported by heavy advertising
(United Kingdom, MMC, 1994). Given the fragmented nature of much of the retail market, it also
requires a firm to have well-developed expertise and facilities in distribution. For many years, the
United Kingdom industry had not witnessed significant entry, and this was presumably because of the
large sunk costs which would be needed to support that entry. However, in 1989, there was a significant
entrant -- Mars, the United States chocolate-bar manufacturer, a firm that had already incurred most of
the relevant sunk costs in the adjacent chocolate-bar industry in both the United Kingdom and elsewhere.
Importantly, the specific asset (a strong brand image and loyalty) was transferable, and Mars made
significant inroads into the market, achieving a market share of 14 per cent within four years.
Concentration clearly declined, both in terms of producers and sellers. In addition, Mars expanded
the ice-cream market considerably through the addition of new and upscale products, acting as a
catalyst for renewed focus on its worldwide activities in ice cream on the part of Unilever.
A second example, from the chocolate confectionary market, was the acquisition in 1989 of
one of the two largest United Kingdom manufacturers, Rowntree, by Nestlé (Switzerland). Most
informed opinion at the time interpreted the motive for acquisition as the purchase of the brand loyalty
associated with two of Rowntree’s strongest brands, Kit-Kat and Polo Mints. These complemented
Nestlé’s product range, placing it in a very strong market position in all segments of product space in
the United Kingdom and beyond. In this case, Nestlé was already selling in the United Kingdom
market prior to the acquisition, and its entry effectively reduced the number of large competitors from
four to three.
A third case is the entry, in the mid-1980s, of the Japanese car manufacturer Nissan through
a large-scale greenfield investment, sinking considerable costs, in the United Kingdom market. Nissan
previously exported to the United Kingdom. But a combination of voluntary export restraints and a
welcoming attitude on the part of the Government of the United Kingdom induced it to invest in the
country. Within a matter of a few years, it became a very prominent United Kingdom producer, with
a significant, and increasing share of United Kingdom production and sales. In this case, the
concentration of producers declined initially, while seller concentration remained the same. In the
long-run, Nissan’s share in the United Kingdom market rose further, facilitated by the avoidance of
tariff and transport costs associated with exporting and a strengthening of its competitive position.
The full impact in the longer-term of these new entries cannot, however, be understood without
an appreciation of the changes under way in competition and concentration at the global level. This is
especially the case with the automobile market, in which the United Kingdom market (like that of
most developed and many developing countries) is substantially integrated into the world market and
in which firms are increasingly competing through innovation and relying on knowledge-based inter-
firm networks for that purpose (Mytelka, forthcoming).
Source: based on Sutton (1991), appendix 12.1; United Kingdom, MMC (1994); Clarke, Davies
and Duffield (forthcoming).
143
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
because of their access to relatively large pools of resources, dominate M&As in host
countries, and that this sometimes leads to increased concentration, although
oligopolistic reaction prevented that from happening in some markets (Frischtak and
Newfarmer, 1994, p. 15). There are notable exceptions, however: for example, if FDI
takes place simply as part of a strategy to follow other firms and maintain a market
presence, or to establish foreign affiliates that are truncated or miniature versions of
parent companies, they could be smaller than their local counterparts. This was found
to be the case in developed countries with small domestic markets and in some
developing countries (Safarian, 1969, Jenkins, 1984). Moreover, the presence of other
foreign affiliates, outward-investor TNCs based in the host economy, and multiproduct
domestic firms which are also of large size, as well as of trade, can make a difference to
the relative importance of a new foreign affiliate and its share in the market. In addition,
in the case of small and medium-sized TNCs and TNCs from developing countries, the
disparity between the size of foreign affiliates and host country indigenous firms may
be smaller than that related to affiliates of developed country TNCs, although available
data show that small and medium-sized TNCs are larger, in terms of worldwide sales,
capital and employment than small and medium-sized firms on the average (UNCTAD,
1993b).
• The reaction of host country firms to TNC entry and operations. In existing product
markets, host country firms -- especially if previously protected from competition from
trade, FDI or even other domestic enterprises -- may pursue defensive strategies such
as combining their operations or entering into joint ventures with TNCs in order to
strengthen their competitiveness (box IV.2). Or they may exit the industry, being unused
to the kinds of competition (e.g., based on high advertising or R&D) introduced by
TNCs or unable to compete. This may result, at least in the initial stages of TNC
participation in a country, in increasing rather than decreasing concentration. In cases
in which a TNC introduces a new product into an economy, the host country market
can be expected, initially, to be a monopoly; its longer-term structure depends upon
whether more suppliers enter through FDI and trade, and whether domestic firms have
the technological and other capabilities to enter the newly created market or can learn
and compete. In developing countries, such entry to new product markets by indigenous
firms is often through joint ventures and non-equity arrangements with TNCs.
• The competitive performance of TNCs relative to that of domestic firms, and its effects on
indigenous firms in terms of their longer-term survival and strengthening of their
capabilities. There is considerable evidence to suggest that, because of their various
competitive strengths, stemming from the fact that they are part of TNC systems, foreign
affiliates are often more efficient and productive than their local counterparts in the industries
in which they operate (see below and UNCTAD, 1995a). This could have varying effects on
concentration and the market power that foreign firms may acquire in a host country market:
positive spillovers through competition (see below) could improve the performance of local
firms, enabling them to survive and maintain their shares of the market, leaving
concentration unaffected or decreasing it. On the other hand, if the gap in capabilities is
large and/or the economy relatively small, some indigenous firms might be forced to close,
with the possibility of increasing concentration and the role of foreign firms, especially in
the absence of trade. However, in certain industries and in host countries characterized by
relatively small product markets, TNCs focus on market segments that involve limited
domestic participation, so that, regardless of their size, they do not crowd out domestic
144
Chapter IV
As part of their liberalization of FDI policies, many developing countries are opening up a
number of service industries to FDI. Since FDI is the only modality whereby foreign firms can deliver
services to a market, this is likely to enhance competition in the provision of the services concerned.
The recent experience of the retailing industry in two Asian economies provides an illustration.
In January 1996, the Republic of Korea lifted almost all legal restrictions on foreign access to
its retail-trade industry. A number of TNCs have already entered into the Korean market and others
are preparing to do so. Foreign investors are entering almost all of the country’s distribution areas,
except for those related to grains and gasoline.
The leader of the wave of foreign investment in the industry is a Dutch-based cash-and-carry
trade company, Makro, which started as a Dutch-Korean joint venture, Makro Korea, and opened a
membership-only warehouse discount store in Inchon. The Makro Inchon store is equipped to sell as
many as 15,000 different products, while the average local discount store handles only 3,000 to 4,000
varieties of goods in much smaller space. The distinguishing feature of membership-only warehouse
stores is that they reduce expenditures in advertising, interior design and staff, while maximizing
operational efficiency by standardizing their operating system. As a result, these stores can offer
consumer lower prices for the products they sell. Similarly, by adopting self-service and quick-return
systems, many discount stores can lower their selling prices considerably. Consumers experienced the
effect of competition in this segment of the Korean distribution industry when simultaneously with
the opening of the Makro Inchon store, Price Club of Shinsegae and Kim’s Club of New Core Department
Store cut the prices of 400 and 200 items respectively, by an average of 2 to 3 per cent.
Competition can be expected to increase further when other TNCs considering entry, such as
Carrefour and Promodes of France, Wal-Mart of the United States and Marks and Spencer of the United
Kingdom, enter the Korean market. While foreign distribution firms are trying to capture a bigger
share of the retailing market, local companies are gearing up to keep this market from the new
competitors. In particular, large business conglomerates are aggressively entering the retail business.
For example, Samsung Corporation plans to open eight shopping malls, five logistics centres and about
30 supercentres and hypermarkets by the year 2000; in addition, it plans to open two department
stores (one of which will include a theme park in a 23-storied complex). Others with similar plans
include the Daewoo, Sunkyong and LG groups. Local department stores are also trying to reinforce
their competitiveness by expanding their stores and reorganizing their management systems; they are
expected to open about 100 new stores by the year 2000 in order to gain advantages in terms of economies
of scale and to broaden their existing stores. At the same time, they are developing their own branded
goods at low prices, and furnishing their stores with high-priced and high-quality goods.
In the Philippines, steps are being taken to allow TNCs to enter retailing. Since 1995, several bills
have been introduced in Congress to liberalize rules regarding the entry of foreign firms to retail trade, long
closed to foreign participation. At present, the structure of retail trade in the Philippines is quite fragmented
at one end and very concentrated at the other. According to one survey, 2,508 “department stores and
supermarkets” accounted for 6 per cent of the number of establishments and 37 per cent of employment in
retailing. Among retailers in nine product areas that were among the 5,000 largest companies in the
Philippines, the top three accounted for an average of 38 per cent of sales. Another indication of concentration
is that the Philippine Retailers Association has only just over a hundred members. The Philippine retailing
industry has been characterized as an oligopsony between a few retailers and many manufacturers and an
oligopoly between a few retailers and many consumers.a
Retailers have responded to the prospect of liberalization and increased competition from TNCs
in number of ways. The Philippine Retailers Association neither completely rejected the ideas of retail
trade liberalization nor did it articulate a favourable position. Its position was that the opening of the large-
scale segment of the retail business be done on the basis of joint ventures between Filipino and
/...
145
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
foreign firms in which the foreign partner controlled a maximum of 40 per cent of the shares. It is also
recommended keeping small and medium-sized business closed to foreign firms. Through the
Philippine Retailers Association, retailers submitted briefs to the Government stating that, despite the
industry structure, their profit margins on sales are the lowest in the region. Nevertheless, Filipino
retailers were doing well. They also claimed that foreign retailers will have a higher import propensity
than domestic ones. And, referring to the experience of other Asian countries, they warned that
unconditional entry of foreign retailers will displace small retailers and increase unemployment.
Beyond taking an active role in discussions related to the regulatory process, the largest
Philippine retailers have made a number of strategic moves. They have formed alliances with foreign
wholesalers to increase efficiency, since foreign entry is already permitted in the wholesale sector.
They have continued to expand the number of stores and malls. They have modernized existing stores
and malls to make them more attractive. They have incrased foreign sourcing, a major competitive
strength of foreign retailers. They have diversified geographically (e.g., Shoe Mart into China) and
into other industries (e.g., Ever’s parent company into real estate development). Some of the large
firms have also begun discussion with foreign retailers about joint ventures in the future. They have
taken several other initiatives as well, to upgrade their competitiveness.
The case of the Korean and Philippine retail industries illustrate how well-established
incumbent firms and other potential competitors can respond to potential or actual entry of TNCs in
concentrated industries to change the industry structure and/or the competition process: influencing
the regulatory process, increasing scale, scope and efficiency, lowering prices and margins, diversifying
geographically and into other industries and attempting to form alliances with potential entrants.
Source: UNCTAD, based on Y.J. Sohn, “Survival game: defeat or be defeated. Foreign giants
coming into the local distribution market”, Business Korea, February 1996, pp. 23-26; and information
obtained from the Philippine Retailers Association.
a By senator Sergio Osmeña, in the “explanatory note” to S.B. 1890.
firms (box IV.3). In either case, however, openness to entry by FDI and, in the case of
tradable products, trade is important for minimizing the possibility of market
concentration.
Furthermore, over time, the competitive advantages of foreign affiliates may be eroded,
and domestic firms may increase their shares and new ones enter. Indigenous firms
may build up their capabilities and reclaim an industry, reducing concentration as well
as the role of TNCs as is illustrated by the export-oriented garment industry in Thailand,
where most Japanese firms established in the 1970s had, by the 1980s, been taken over
by their Thai managers (Petri, 1993), and the same industry in Mauritius, in which
local affiliates of Hong Kong, China firms faced increasing competition from indigenous
firms (Wells, 1993). Much depends, of course, on the pace of technological capacity-
building by domestic entrepreneurs. For example, in the consumer electronics industry
of Thailand, unlike in the garment industry mentioned above, capacity building has
been slow and foreign-investors have continued to dominate and even increased their
dominance of the industry since its inception in the 1970s (Poapongsakorn and
Tonguthai, forthcoming).
• The conduct of TNCs and other firms in the market. If TNCs acquire dominant positions
(by virtue of their market power and facilitated, in some cases, by their transnationality),
some TNCs may be able to indulge in anticompetitive practices against domestic (and
other) incumbents, and erect even higher barriers to the entry of new firms (section
IV.A.3). The willingness of governments to give market power to TNCs in exchange
for FDI could also facilitate the erection of barriers to potential competitors and
contribute to further increasing market concentration (section IV.A.4).
146
Chapter IV
Box IV
IV.. 3. FDI, market structure and competition in South Africa’
Africa’ss banking industry
Transnational banks tend to focus their host country activities on certain market segments,
products and services, especially including those related to the banking services required by other
TNCs in host countries and those related to trade (UNCTC, 1989). One implication of this is that
liberalization of policies restricting FDI in banking does not necessarily result in increasing the
competition faced by national banks in all banking product markets, or substantial crowding out of
national banks. However, the entry of TNCs does inject competition into host country markets for
specific banking products, influencing market structure and the positions of incumbent banks. Recent
experience in the banking industry of South Africa provides an illustration.
Soon after the elections in 1994, South African legislation was amended to allow foreign
banks to conduct business in South Africa. Very quickly, foreign banks started to return to South
Africa. As of May 1997, 10 foreign banks, seven branches of foreign banks and 56 representative
offices of foreign banks had established themselves in South Africa (Business Map 1997, p.19). As the
foreign banks recognized that the size of the market was relatively small, they focused on penetrating
niche markets that were not dominated by the (four) major incumbent commercial banks (and two
strongly competitive merchant banks). These niche markets included those for advisory services in
industry issues; foreign currency loans; trade finance; large cross-border corporate financial deals;
privatization deals; and the distribution of local equities internationally -- in brief, all areas in which
they can take advantage of their specific assets, especially their better knowledge of foreign markets,
and the sheer size of their operations and financial strength. Areas where local competition was already
fierce before the entry were generally not among the main targets of foreign banks. Lending, for
instance, has been characterized by relatively small margins, making it attractive to foreign firms only
“if it was part of a broader relationship” with a firm involving also other services. According to some
sources, however, the entry of foreign firms lead to a further squeeze of profits in this business.
Local banks in South Africa have had some time to gear up for competition with foreign
affiliates of transnational banks. Many are apparently planning to enter into joint ventures and
partnerships with foreign banks in specific areas. Teaming up with offshore partners to make bids for
businesses, for instance, is considered to be of mutual advantage since “both banks earn a fee for
packaging the deal, the foreign bank may provide the funding and they get local expertise”.a
In developed host countries, empirical studies suggest that these various factors work, on
balance, to reduce concentration or leave it unchanged. According to studies for Australia (Brash,
1966), Canada (Safarian, 1969), France (Fishwick, 1982), the United Kingdom (Steuer et al., 1973),
and the United States (Knickerbocker, 1976), no positive association between inward FDI and
industrial or market concentration was found and, in fact, the relationship was in some cases negative,
i.e., inward FDI was associated with a decrease in concentration.11 In the smaller advanced countries,
however, industrial concentration increased in industries in which the participation of foreign firms
was most prominent (Newfarmer, 1985). According to a recent study for the United Kingdom, the
upsurge of inward FDI into that country between 1986 and 1992 was accompanied by a general
tendency for slightly falling concentration, with the share of the top five firms falling in the average
147
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
industry (table IV.3). This was because the increase in the joint market shares of leading TNCs
(defined as foreign firms within the top five producers in a given industry) was more than offset by
a corresponding decline in the share of leading domestic firms. However, the advance made by
leading TNCs was less pronounced in industries producing non-differentiated products than for
differentiated industries, so that, in the former group of products, concentration fell more
significantly. Overall, increasing TNC activity was accompanied by decreasing concentration, but
increased TNC activity dampened the general trend towards de-concentration.
Judging from data for the United Kingdom, individual TNCs seem more likely to secure
leading market shares than are other firms: in 1992, for all industries, leading TNCs accounted for
a higher proportion of the TNC share of total sales than the proportion of domestic firms’ share of
total sales that was accounted for by the leading domestic firms (table IV.2). In addition, in
differentiated industries that are more concentrated, the proportionate share of leading TNCs rises
much more rapidly than concentration, but in homogeneous product industries, it rises at almost
the same rate as concentration (table IV.2).12 Finally, TNCs tend to cluster in leading positions in
certain industries (table IV.3); in the United Kingdom, over one-fifth of the 100 industries examined
were dominated by TNCs in 1992, with three or more of the five leading positions being occupied
by TNCs. All but three of these industries produced differentiated products (table IV.3).
In developing host countries, on the other hand, empirical studies suggest that greater TNC
participation leads, on balance, to increased concentration. In studies for several countries --
including, among others, Brazil (Willmore, 1989), Guatemala (Willmore, 1976), Malaysia (Lall, 1979;
Kalirajan, 1991), and Mexico (Newfarmer and Mueller, 1975; Connor, 1977; Blömstrom, 1986) --
inward investment has been found to be associated with an increase in industry concentration.
Given that few foreign affiliates are fully export-oriented, this can be considered to denote also
increased market concentration, except where imports are important. In the case of some products,
including services, TNCs and local firms were found to operate in different market segments, with
TNCs introducing new products for which there was little or no local competition (UNCTC, 1989;
Lipsey and Zimny, 1993), at least in the short to medium-term. Furthermore, judging from
advertising/sales ratios, foreign affiliates in developing countries have a relatively higher tendency
than domestic firms to compete through product differentiation,13 and product differentiation tends
to heighten concentration in consumer industries serving primarily local markets (Manrique, 1982;
Newfarmer and Marsh, 1992; and Willmore, 1989).
* * *
To sum up, the relationship between FDI and market concentration in host countries is by
no means as clear-cut as the observed correlation between TNC presence and concentration might
suggest. Although TNCs are often able to enter host country industries and, hence, markets which
are sometimes effectively barred to domestic (non-TNC) entrants because of cost-related factors,
this does not mean that even the immediate, at-entry effect will be a reduction in seller concentration.
Post-entry effects depend upon several factors and, on balance, the risks of increasing concentration,
at least in the short to medium term, are likely to be greater in developing countries. More generally,
as TNCs consolidate and exploit their specific assets by capturing leading market positions, this
may have a concentrating effect, which is often accentuated by a clustering of a number of leading
TNCs in certain industries. The relationship between TNC activity and concentration tends to be
strongest in industries and markets that are concentrated by virtue of product differentiation and
innovation. Within such markets, TNCs often enjoy some advantage over domestic firms in host
countries.
148
Chapter IV
All industries
Differentiated products
Homogeneous products
Source: based on data from the United Kingdom, Central Statistical Office, 1988 and 1995.
a Sales-weighted mean 5-firm concentration ratios.
b Firms within the top five producers in a given industry.
Note: all figures are percentages of total sales in the United Kingdom (100 individual industries).
149
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
The characteristic features of TNCs that may cause FDI and the activities of foreign affiliates
to affect the structure of host-country markets along the lines discussed above can also have
consequences for the conduct of competition in a given market and, hence, for the performance of
firms and an industry as a whole. These consequences reflect what might be called the “distinctive”
features of TNCs (including competitive strengths arising from firm-specific assets, advantages
related to internalizing the use of those assets, and an array of locational assets when they operate
in a number of countries, and also their transaction cost disadvantages relative to domestic firms),
as well as their “circumstantial” features (i.e., those that would hold true, in principle, for any firm
with a similar market share in a similar market). This distinction is important because, as noted,
TNCs are not distributed across the economic landscape of host countries in the same way as other
firms. They tend to congregate in concentrated industries, to have larger-than-average market
shares, and to be market leaders. Moreover, they operate, more often than not, in markets for
differentiated goods, in which the competitive process operates as much through quality, advertising,
R&D and innovation as through price or quantity. Furthermore, high market shares and
concentration are more likely to be associated with the possibility and allegations of anticompetitive
behaviour; this is especially the case when advertising appears to have an entry-deterring effect.
Necessarily, therefore, anticompetitive investigations often concern TNCs (table IV.4) -- but, again,
this may not be because of their TNC status per se, but rather because of the circumstances.
In the discussion below, the nature of the (pro-) competitive behaviour of TNCs and its
effects on the performance of industries/markets and their implications for host countries are
considered first, drawing on studies that have tried to assess the impact of TNCs on host-country
performance. This is followed by an exploration of the types of competition concerns raised by
TNCs.
The entry and operations of a TNC can inject competition into a host country market,
particularly if the market has a limited number of sellers relative to its size prior to the foreign
firm’s entry. The process of competition could involve lower prices -- especially if the TNC is more
cost-efficient than local firms -- or, as is more likely, product differentiation and advertising. It
could also involve the introduction of new products based on innovatory activity by the TNC
involved. Inward FDI can then be expected to improve the performance of the industry concerned
and increase consumer welfare by lowering prices, improving product quality, increasing variety
and introducing new products, provided the relevant market continues to function efficiently. If,
however, there are no domestic firms operating in a market, or there is a large gap between the
competitive strengths of foreign affiliates and domestic firms, and competition from imports or
other foreign affiliates is lacking, the foreign affiliate assumes a dominant position in the market.
In that case, the market may not function efficiently and the impact on performance may be reflected
mainly in higher profits for the TNC concerned (as well as for the host country firms that remain in
the market), and benefits in terms of consumer welfare and/or dynamic growth of the industry
may be limited.
150
Chapter IV
example, foreign affiliates within given industries enjoyed higher value added per worker than
their Canadian-owned counterparts, primarily because they tended to be capital intensive and large
(Globerman et al., 1994, p.154).15 Foreign affiliates exploited economies of scale more fully than
their domestically-owned counterparts -- possibly because they enjoyed better access to foreign
markets, for example through intra-firm trade and network economies such that they operated at
larger scale, and because they could draw upon home country managerial expertise to help manage
the greater complexity of larger scale operations. In the United Kingdom, foreign firms enjoyed a
49 per cent differential in labour productivity compared to their local rivals, according to data for
1991 (Davies and Lyons, 1991). However, roughly a half of the differential was related to the fact
that TNCs tended to congregate in industries that are innately of high productivity, and a half with
superior performance when “like was compared to like” (within the same industry).
1990
Monopoly 4 1 Petrola (Esso, Shell, BP etc.)
Merger 20 7 Elder/Grand Met (beer, hotels), British Airways/Sabena; Michelin Tyre/NTS
1991
Monopoly 5 4 Coffeed (Nestlé), Soft drinksa c (Coca-Cola)
Merger 13 7 B.Aero/Thomson-CSF, Stora/Gillette
1992
Monopoly 4 3 Cars and car partsa b (Ford, GM, Rover, etc); matches and lightersd (Swedish Match)
Merger 7 3 Allied-Lyons/Carlsberg, Sara Lee/Reckitt and Colman
1993
Monopoly 7 3 Fine fragrancesb (L'Oréal, Revlon, Unilever, etc.)
Merger 3 1 Gillette/Parker Pen
1994
Monopoly 7 3 Ice creama (Unilever), Filmsb c (Warner, MGM etc.)
Merger 2 1 Alcatel/STC
1995
Monopoly 5 2 Video gamesb (Nintendo/Sega)
Merger 10 4 Lyonnaise des Eaux/Northumbrian Water; GEC/VSEL
Total 1990-1995
Monopoly 32 16
Merger 55 23
Source: based on data obtained from the annual reports of the United Kingdom Monopolies and Mergers
Commission for the years 1990-1995.
Note: The total number of anti-trust cases considered here comprises all cases considered and reported on by the
Monopolies and Mergers Commission with the following minor omissions: mergers in the newspaper publishing industry
(which is subject to special attention in the United Kingdom for reasons additional to purely competitive ones); one or two
cases brought under the Competition Act; and cases brought under specific acts in specific areas (e.g., broadcasting, privatized
industries etc.).
a Exclusive purchasing.
b Exclusive distribution.
c Tied-in sales.
d Monopoly pricing.
151
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
In developing countries, evidence suggests that foreign affiliates are often more efficient in
production than their domestic counterparts. According to studies for Brazil (Willmore, 1986),
Singapore (Lecraw, 1985), India (Kumar 1990), labour productivity in foreign affiliates tended to be
higher than that in domestic firms in the same industry. This was also observed for Malaysia,
Singapore and Thailand (Ramstetter, 1993, 1995 and 1996); however, in these cases, more rigorous
examination, including at the industry level showed fewer differences and, moreover, significant
differences observed in the 1970s disappeared in the 1980s. In the Republic of Korea, no significant
differences between the productivity of labour in foreign and domestic firms were found (Koo,
1985). Studies of total factor productivity for a few countries (e.g., Haddad and Harrison, 1994, for
Morocco; Okamoto, 1994, for Malaysia) also indicate a tendency for foreign firms to have higher
productivity. In some of the cases, the differences diminished when the data were controlled for
size of firm, suggesting that the productivity differences observed relate to differences in capital
intensity and scale as well as in technology and organizational capabilities. In addition, foreign
affiliates typically have better marketing capabilities and networks and higher propensities to export
(UNCTAD, 1995a, p. 211; Ramstetter, 1997).
Whatever the source of the greater productivity or sales performance, the entry of a TNC
(or any firm) that is more cost-efficient or introduces better quality or new products, or is able to
sell better than its competitors, will affect the position of the latter. Either they learn from, and/or
imitate it in terms of production performance, or they may be forced to exit the market. The upshot
could be an industry of surviving firms that is more efficient in production than it would be without
the TNC. This may not, however, be accompanied by market efficiency and optimum social welfare
but, rather, higher profits for TNCs, especially if other firms are forced to exit and a foreign affiliate
monopolizes the market, unless there is competition from trade and from the entry of more TNCs.
There is some evidence from industry-level studies within developing countries to suggest
that TNCs were more profitable than their domestic competitors (Caves, 1974; Donsimoni and Leoz-
Arguelles, 1980; Shapiro, 1983). In Brazil, the profits of a foreign affiliate were higher, the more
concentrated was an industry and the higher was the share of the foreign affiliate in the industry
(Connor, 1977). Similar results for TNCs were found for light manufacturing in South-East Asia
(Lecraw, 1983), but no evidence of a significant impact of concentration on profitability was found
in the case of India -- where foreign affiliates and domestic firms were found to operate in different
strategic groups, with the former protected more by entry barriers than their local counterparts
(Kumar, 1990).
There is no systematic evidence on the extent to which the procompetitive effects of TNC
participation take the form of lower prices for consumers, although that can happen, particularly in
non-differentiated goods and services, as the experience of FDI in Korean retailing suggests (see
box IV.2). On the other hand, there is considerable casual evidence to show that competition from
TNCs, especially in developing countries, results in the introduction of new products and
improvements in the quality or variety of existing products (box IV.4). Non-price competition
through product differentiation based on advertising as well as through innovation is an important
mode of competition in the industries in which TNCs are concentrated, and TNCs themselves often
tend to have higher levels of advertising than domestic firms.16 When TNCs move into an industry,
they may raise the industry level of advertising and compel domestic producers to counter with
increases in their own promotional expenditures. In some cases, resorting to advertising may enable
domestic firms to retain or enlarge market shares and profits even if foreign affiliates offer products
at lower prices. In the case of the Argentinian pharmaceutical industry, for example, Argentinian
producers -- who spent considerable parts of their revenues not only on R&D but also on advertising,
trying to establish strong brand names -- were able to sell their products at higher prices than the
152
Chapter IV
local affiliates of TNCs, and retain their profits when faced with competition from TNCs
(Chudnovsky, 1979).
Economic reforms and relaxation of FDI regulations in India since 1989 have increased
competition through new entrants, including TNCs, in markets for consumer goods. This has led to
changing market shares for firms, as well as increased supplies, a greater variety of products and the
introduction of new products for consumers. These changes are illustrated below with reference to
recent developments in the markets for soft drinks and for white goods.
* * *
In soft drinks, Pepsi (United States) entered the Indian market in 1990, soon after liberalization
began. By early 1994, Pepsi had captured about 24 per cent of the Indian soft drinks market. Pepsi
started with a 44 per cent share in its Indian joint venture, increased subsequently through the purchase
of the 48 per cent share held by its chief partner, Voltas Ltd. The remaining 8 per cent of Pepsi Foods
Limited was held by the Indian partner, Punjab Agro Industries.
In 1993, after a 16-year absence, Coca-Cola re-entered the Indian market for soft drinks through
a joint venture with Indian-owned Parle Exports, which accounted at that time for 60 per cent of the
$400 million Indian soft drinks market. Under the joint venture agreement, Parle would make available
to Coca-Cola all of its 60 franchises for production, bottling and distribution. The joint venture, Coca-
Cola India, would invest $20 million to upgrade Parle’s bottling plants.
Both Coca-Cola and Pepsi launched advertising campaigns to increase their respective market
shares. As of the first quarter of 1997, Coke had a 13 per cent market share in the cola segment (or more
than 50 per cent of the total Indian market for aerated soft drinks) and Pepsi had a share of 27 per
cent.a The competition between Coke and Pepsi led to the revitalization of the local cola brand, Thums
Up, one of the five local cola brands acquired by Coca-Cola. The popularity of Thums Up was recognized
by Coca-Cola India when it found it difficult to replace the local brand’s market share by that of Coke.
(Thums Up had a share of 17 per cent of India’s market for colas as of the first quarter of 1997.a ) The
other major player in India’s aerated soft drinks market is the indigenous Indian firm Pure Drinks Ltd,
the manufacturer of the Campa range of products.
How well local rivals will manage to compete with Coca-Cola and Pepsi is uncertain. India’s
tea producers have also expressed concern about facing competition from the entry of foreign cola and
soft drink firms, as the domestic growth of tea, the nation’s main beverage, could be thwarted.
* * *
In white goods, until recently, the Indian market was characterized by a small number of
producers and sellers. Imports were restricted. By the mid-1990s, however, a number of TNCs had
penetrated the Indian market, introducing a variety of new products. One recent entrant was Whirlpool
Corporation (United States), which acquired a majority share in Whirlpool of India in 1991, a joint
venture with a local firm. After initial difficulties and restructuring, it obtained an estimated market
share of 15-20 per cent of the market for washing machines, in which the market leader is Videocon, a
local firm.
In 1994, Whirlpool acquired a majority stake (51 per cent) in Kelvinator of India, the second
largest refrigerator maker at that time in the country. It also acquired the use of the Kelvinator brand
name until end-1996; Whirlpool was a virtually unknown brand in India. The challenge for Whirlpool
/...
153
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
was to hold on and increase its market share on the basis of its own brand name. Whirlpool began to
introduce new models, beginning with a 310 litre refrigerator. It also began to invest in no-frost
refrigerators, a market segment that is dominated presently by local producers. Competition between
Whirlpool, other TNCs that have entered India’s white goods market and local firms has provided
consumers a wider choice as regards refrigerators.
Whirlpool’s sales of refrigerators increased from 538,000 in 1995 to 665,000 in 1996 -- a market
share of nearly 27 per cent. In the direct cooled segment of the refrigerator market, Whirlpool captured
a 32 per cent market share. The market leader remains Godrej-GE, a joint venture between Godrej, a
local firm, and General Electric, with 39 per cent of the market for refrigerators overall in 1996-1997,
while two other firms have shares of around 15 per cent each. In the no-frost refrigerator market,
Godrej-GE has a market share of 40 per cent. It therefore appears that the largest incumbent firm
managed to hold on to its market shares, although in the future Whirlpool may be able to gain additional
market shares in segments of the refrigerator market.
Sources: “Raising India”, Beverage World, vol. 113, issue 1560, February 1994, pp. 46-48; “Coke
and Pepsi throw cans into the Indian-market mix”, The Asian Wall Street Journal, 21 June 1996; and
“Making an impact”, Business India, No. 500, 5-18 May 1997, pp. 82-83.
a Miriam Jordan, “In India, Coke takes new tack”, International Herald Tribune, 20 June 1997.
Effects on price and product variety or range reflect the static efficiency benefits of
competition in terms of enhancing consumer welfare. Of greater interest, especially as far as
developing countries are concerned, are the dynamic effects that result from competition by TNCs,
through positive spillovers of efficiency productivity and innovatory capabilities to local firms.
Local producers faced with competition from technologically sophisticated foreign affiliates may,
in some cases, be forced out of a market. On the other hand, in some countries and industries, local
firms may respond competitively, and improve their productivity in their efforts to retain market
shares.
The immediate reaction of a local firm to competition from inward FDI may be to enforce
stricter or more cost-conscious management and motivate employees to reduce slack or improve X-
efficiency. Over time, when foreign firms and local firms are in competition with each other,
producing similar products, on the same scale and for the same market, there is often a tendency
for local firms to adopt similar production techniques to those of the TNCs, as part of a general
survival strategy. When technical capabilities are well-developed, competition by TNCs may induce
R&D and innovation by domestic firms. Generalizations in these respects, however, are difficult.
Case studies at the firm and industry levels suggest that the spillover effects of competition (combined
with those of demonstration, which are difficult to separate) from TNCs vary according to the
technological and entrepreneurial capabilities of local firms relative to those of foreign affiliates
and the market strategies of TNCs and local firms, as the following examples show:
• For instance, in the Kenyan soap industry, the entry of foreign affiliates led to the
introduction of mechanized production of laundry soap and the adoption of mechanized
154
Chapter IV
technology by local firms, as the latter found themselves unable to sell handmade
laundry soap in the urban markets (despite its acknowledged quality). Local firms
were forced to introduce mechanized techniques and new packaging to stay in business.
They also had to produce a wider range of products, and to build up turnover, among
others, by subcontracting production from TNCs or producing under international brand
names (Langdon, 1981). Similarly, foreign entry into the Kenyan footwear industry led
to increased competition and changes in the production techniques of local firms
(Jenkins, 1990).
• In the Brazilian textile industry, the establishment of an affiliate by a foreign firm brought
synthetic fibres into the market; the consequent stagnation of demand for cotton textiles
led to the disappearance of some local firms, while others were forced to seek joint
ventures with foreign firms to obtain access to competitive technology (Evans, 1979).
• On the other hand, in the Indian pharmaceutical industry, local firms had built up
significant technological capabilities since the 1970s, with the support of weak patent
protection enabling imitation of patented products and processes, import controls and
licensing restrictions but also strict price controls (especially on large firms) limiting
price increases which forced them to be efficient imitators. They are now pursuing an
offensive strategy of increasing their investment in R&D to prepare themselves for
increased competition due to the entry of foreign firms into the Indian market in response
to policies liberalizing FDI and trade (Acharya, forthcoming).
• Even when technical capabilities are well developed, however, domestic firms may
find it difficult to compete with foreign affiliates through innovation. In the Brazilian
telecommunication-equipment industry, liberalization of FDI and the participation of
foreign affiliates resulted in a number of domestic firms having to reduce their R&D
activities and enter into alliances or joint ventures for production. As the affiliates of
TNCs did not have to rely entirely on their own R&D and could draw upon products
developed by their parent firms, the time-span required for the introduction of new
product generations accelerated and the mode of competition in the local market
changed from “competition based on technical proficiency, product differentiation and
an effort to search for exploitable domestic market niches to competition on the basis of
being ‘first’ into the market” (Mytelka, forthcoming, ch. 4, p. 14). Lacking comparable
technological and financial backstopping from parent companies, Brazilian firms,
particularly the smaller ones, found that the only way to survive competition with
foreign affiliates was to cooperate with the TNCs concerned. This led to a reduction in
local innovative capacity and, finally, to reduced competition, at least between domestic
and foreign firms.
155
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
of local firms when the gap between foreign and local firms’ productivity was not too large (Kokko,
1994; Kokko, Tansiniz and Zejan, 1994). This suggests that FDI by small and medium-sized
enterprises and developing country TNCs may hold greater possibilities for performance-enhancing
spillovers through competition. Since these TNCs usually operate in more labour-intensive or
lower technology industries and their competitive advantages are more modest than those of
developed country TNCs, the prospects are better for domestic firms to assimilate or acquire them.
This is likely, for instance, to have been a factor in the emergence of domestic firms as major
competitors to Hong Kong, China firms in textiles and garments that invested in Mauritius several
years ago (Wells, 1993, p. 183).
Spillovers from foreign affiliates may include not only those related to technological
upgrading and productivity improvements but also to the building up of marketing and especially
export capabilities. There is increasing evidence to suggest that export-oriented foreign firms act as
catalysts for the development of export capabilities by bringing with them access to buyers from
the countries in which their products are sold (Wells, 1993, p.183). In Indonesia, for instance,
anecdotal evidence suggests that Indonesian firms are taking advantage of the access to buyers that
the establishment of affiliates by TNCs from East Asian countries has brought to Indonesia; for
example, Nike, Adidas and Reebok all have offices in Indonesia, to be closer to their suppliers -- the
Indonesian affiliates of East Asian supplier-TNCs. Indonesian-owned firms are taking advantage
of their presence to build up linkages; exporting directly as well as selling components to foreign
affiliates that export (Wells, 1993). To the extent that these products are also sold in local markets,
the improvement in performance is also likely to affect host country markets for the goods, and
local firms emerge as competitors to TNCs in both export and host country markets.
The entry of TNCs and their activities may not only have potentially performance-enhancing
effects associated with the competition they inject in host-country markets and industries, but may
also, under certain conditions, carry a potential for, anticompetitive business practices that could
affect the performance of markets and the industries concerned. Although systematic studies in
this regard are lacking, TNCs have featured in some of the most conspicuous cases that have come
before competition agencies in developed countries in recent years. For example, a substantial
proportion of monopolies and mergers reports in the United Kingdom over the period 1990-1995,
in one way or another, have involved foreign-owned firms in the country (table IV.4). The specific
examples listed relate to the types of markets in which competition worries are most likely to be
pronounced: they are typically highly concentrated markets; many involve advertising-intensive
differentiated products with strong brand names; and they are often not subject to import
competition.
The discussion below introduces some of the main types of anticompetitive behaviour in
which TNCs may engage and that are of interest from the viewpoint of host countries. (For a more
extensive listing of restrictive business practices, see box V.3.) They are discussed further in chapter
V, in the context of policy approaches taken by countries.
i. Collusion
The possibility of collusive practices, ranging from full-fledged cartels to tacitly collusive
behaviour, has always been associated with highly concentrated industries protected by entry
barriers. Circumstantially, TNCs often operate in such industries, but it is not clear that they
156
Chapter IV
would be more orless inclined to act in a cooperative way than non-TNCs. On the one hand, at
least in the early yearsof its existence in a host country, a TNC might be less inclined to join in with
cosy collaborative local arrangements (Caves, 1996, p. 95). On the other hand, there are some essential
features of TNCs that might strengthen the prospects of collusion. For example, the sheer muscle of
a large TNC may provide it with credible means of punishing smaller firms contemplating deviations
from a collusive arrangement. Probably more important, however, is the prospect of collusion
amongst competing TNCs. Theoretically, one specific reason why such collusion could take place
is that a group of firms coming into contact in a series of separate national markets are more likely
to recognize their mutual interdependence, i.e., that the outcome of their individual actions depends
on the behaviour of the other(s). In certain circumstances, collusion will prove viable even in some
of the markets where it would not have been possible had the firms concerned had no contacts
(Bernheim and Whinston, 1990). Another possibility along similar lines is “mutual forbearance”:
firms share out the market, allowing each member of the group certain regions or countries that
will be uncontested by the others.
Although the potential for such collusion involving TNCs that is of specific relevance to
host countries exists, there is no systematic evidence, particularly for recent years, pointing to such
collusion. Most of the evidence regarding collusion, including cartels involving TNCs pre-dates
the second world war (Jones, 1986; Caves 1996). In the past few decades, conspicuous instances
have been far less common. The decrease in the occurrence of effective collusion involving TNCs
could be due to several factors, including, among others, the adoption and enforcement of
competition laws by an increasing number of countries; the shift of United States TNCs -- partly in
response to antitrust prosecutions, partly in response to opportunities opened up by the immediate
post-war reduction in the competitive strength of European firms -- from cooperative to competitive
behaviour; the decrease in seller concentration at the world level in most industries due to restored
competition from Europe and Japan; and the shift in the product-mix of industries from homogenous
goods to heterogenous or differentiated products (Caves, 1996, pp. 92-93). In fact, successful collusion
among TNCs seems to have been replaced by imitative rivalry, including reciprocal transnationality:
following entry by firm I from country A into country B, its international rival, firm II, located in B,
makes a countermove into country A. “The strategic value arises if a subsidiary on the invader ’s
turf establishes both a means of retaliation and a hostage that can be staked out in any subsequent
understanding between the two parents” (Caves, 1996, p. 93). Sometimes, companies may pursue
“backdoor” collusion through the formation of joint ventures (see box V.4, chapter V).
Although M&As that involve at least one TNC quite often transcend the purely national
level -- posing consequent problems for national competition authorities -- they do not raise
conceptually new issues as compared with those involving only national firms. In the case of
horizontal mergers, the main issues relate to the increased concentration of market power; in the
case of cross-border mergers involving inward FDI, several typical scenarios creating competition
concerns are possible. These include:
157
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Each of these can reduce competition in a host country. As far as vertical mergers are concerned, if
there is a competition dimension at all, this usually concerns the increased potential for foreclosure
of a rival and increasing the difficulty of new entry.
Vertical relationships, as a group, have generated considerable interest in recent years, and
competition law related to them are currently under review in a number of countries and in the
European Union. The subject is controversial because most specific examples of vertical restraints,
and vertical integration itself, entail claims of efficiency gains (removal of pricing distortions,
optimized investment levels and avoidance of transactions costs) that must be offset against alleged
anticompetitive consequences (foreclosure of rivals reducing contestability and softening of intra-
brand and/or inter-brand competition). Invariably, the products concerned in such examples are
differentiated, often with leading brand names. Very often, they are produced by TNCs. Although,
as a general rule, vertical restraints involving TNCs (or other firms) do not pose competition worries,
if combined with market power at one of the stages in the vertical chain, they have the potential to
reduce the contestability of markets. This will often depend on the type of industry in which TNCs
operate.
Predatory behaviour in general, and predatory pricing in particular, is the practice whereby
one, usually dominant, firm undercuts rivals, often new entrants, with the expressed intention to
force them out of the market (box IV.5). This can be a rational strategy, for example, if predators
achieve monopoly positions and can thereby reclaim their initial losses (assuming that, in the case
of TNCs the host country grants or allows such a position), or to create a reputation for toughness.
While predatory pricing can be used by domestic firms as well as foreign firms to force competitors
out of the market, transnationality may provide additional advantages in this respect -- for example,
if there is scope for manipulating transfer prices for this purpose. Underpricing goods and services
sold to foreign affiliates could enable them to price products sold in host country markets at
excessively low levels. Detecting such predatory pricing would be more difficult, since information
on transfer prices is considered an intra-company matter and is difficult to obtain. There is, however,
no systematic evidence on the extent to which such practices take place.
One (contested) example of alleged predatory behaviour in the European context involved
the Netherlands-based TNC, AKZO, and its behaviour towards a small United Kingdom competitor,
ECS. AKZO had a 50 per cent share of the European Union market for a particular type of chemical
additive (Utton, 1995); in the United Kingdom its share was 52 per cent, and it had only one substantive
competitor, ECS, a small independent firm. It appears that the alleged predatory behaviour was sparked
initially by new entry by ECS into the German market -- and an alleged threat from AKZO that, unless
ECS withdrew, it would retaliate in the United Kingdom market by “going below cost if necessary”
(European Commission vs AKZO, Decision 374/7). ECS applied for, and was granted, an injunction
against AKZO. The case continued, and eventually AKZO was fined.
This case illustrates some of the general issues involved. First, because of its sheer size, the
TNC (like any large firm) was well-positioned to sustain any losses it might have incurred in a short-
lived price war in the United Kingdom for a product. Second, price cutting in one geographical market
for one product might make strategic sense if it signalled AKZO’s intention to react aggressively to
entry by other firms into other markets (in both geographical and product space).
Source: UNCTAD, based partly on Utton (1995), pp. 113-116.
158
Chapter IV
Governments are sometimes so anxious to attract FDI, or to obtain the highest possible
price for the assets they sell to TNCs as part of privatization programmes, that they agree to offer
TNCs various kinds of arrangements that grant market power with legal protection against
competition in exchange for investment. Market-power inducements, by definition, restrict
competition, typically creating monopoly positions or market structures that provide scope for
anticompetitive behaviour. Even though there may be positive dynamic effects associated with
such inducements, their immediate effect is typically to reduce efficiency; when this occurs, it may
affect efficiency -- and, indeed, FDI flows -- in other parts of the economy. Market-power
inducements, granted either at the initiative of a government or at the request of a TNC, are examined
in this section.
Although some market-power inducements may be combined with fiscal concessions and
financial subsidies -- and, indeed, the latter by themselves may lead to market distortions -- fiscal
and financial incentives are not the subject of the discussion in this section.17 There are, moreover,
other arrangements such as allowing a TNC to invest in, or take over, a natural-monopoly-type
industry (which competitors are almost certain not to enter), especially with few or generous
stipulations as regards pricing, that might be attractive inducements because of the market-power
they involve. However, the focus here is exclusively on arrangements that involve granting legally-
protected market power to TNCs as an inducement to invest in a country. In these arrangements,
the main reward obtained by TNCs is not direct financial payment received up-front in the form of
financial assistance by the government, or foregone taxes later on, but rather the higher profits (or
potential profits) derived from operating in a less competitive environment. The underlying reason
for offering these inducements is that, otherwise, an investment would not (or would not be expected
to) be made -- and, hence, the benefits associated would not be obtained.
The frequency of market-power inducements for FDI is difficult to assess, and this discussion
does not attempt to evaluate their magnitude. Rather it explores, on the basis of concrete examples,
the different measures employed by governments to attract FDI and their rationale. (The policies
of governments to reduce the potential negative impact of such measures are discussed in chapter
V.) The most common market-power inducements used to attract FDI are:
159
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
liberal trade environments, if exclusive rights cover only production, competition may
decrease only marginally.
• Granting or transferring exclusive sales (market) rights. Exclusive sales rights eliminate
competition by local firms as well as imports. For example, in the case of a lubricant
company in Sri Lanka, exclusive sales rights granted to one foreign oil company
apparently impeded entry into Sri Lanka’s market by other foreign competitors (box
IV.6).
• Introducing or continuing prohibitive import tariffs and non-tariff measures. Trade protection
can be an important market-power inducement for tradable goods and services,
especially if supplemented by prohibitions on new FDI and local entry.
The sale of a stake of 51 per cent of the Lanka Lubricant Ltd. (LLL), a state-owned enterprise
that was the sole supplier of lubricant in Sri Lanka at the time, to a foreign TNC took place in July 1994.
Before privatization, LLL had been controlled by Ceylon Petroleum Corporation (CPC), which produced
and sold lubricants through its distribution outlets for the domestic market. CPC had been holding
exclusive import, export and sale rights for lubricants since 1964. The acquiring TNC had operations
in more than 60 countries, including Sri Lanka.
A 51 per cent share of LLL was sold to the foreign TNC on the following conditionsa:
(a) LLL was granted exclusive rights of importing and distributing lubricants until 1 March 1997.
This period was granted to enable the company to restructure and adjust before being exposed to
international competition (the exclusive rights did not extend to lubricants supplied to marine
vessels and aircraft within domestic harbours).
(c) Upon liberalization of imports, the Government agreed to an effective tariff protection of at least
10 per cent for the company. The ad valorem duty on base oils and additives (intermediate products
for the production of lubricants) imported by LLL would be at least 10 per cent lower than the ad
valorem duty on lubricants and greases manufactured by the company.
(d) The company, in spite of the lack of relevant legislation, would receive anti-dumping protection.
(e) CPC distribution outlets would sell exclusively lubricants and speciality products produced by
LLL for a ten-year period starting 14 July 1994.
(f) LLL would hold exclusive right to store lubricants and greases at CPC warehouses for a period of
ten-years starting 14 July 1994.
The TNC put forward a three-year modernization programme involving millions of dollars
to upgrade existing blending facilities. The exclusive rights granted to the TNC were given as an
incentive to attract the company to invest in the country. This was also expected to have a favourable
influence on attracting FDI in general to Sri Lanka.
At present, no other lubricant suppliers play a role in Sri Lanka’s national market, although
some foreign companies have shown interest in entering Sri Lanka, as the Fair Trading Commission
(Sri Lanka’s competition authority) discovered after the sale of LLL to the TNC.
/...
160
Chapter IV
Although LLL’s sole right of importing and distributing lubricants ended on 31 March 1997,
its exclusive blending rights stay in place until July 2000 and its exclusive distributional rights through
CPC outlets until mid-July 2004. As regards blending, at present, base oil is imported by LLL with a 10
per cent duty, and this oil is mixed with inorganic additives to produce lubricants. While other suppliers
of lubricants may now enter into the market, they have to pay a 20 per cent import duty (duty applicable
to the finished products). As for distribution, all CPC outlets will sell exclusively the main lubricant
product of the LLL, up to the year 2004. If other competitors wish to enter the market they would have
to create their own outlets. As noted by Sri Lanka’s Fair Trading Commission, no alternative distribution
outlets are now available and the establishment of a new distribution channel would be very difficult
and lengthy.
Once it was realized that other TNCs were ready to enter the market without requesting
exclusive rights, the Government of Sri Lanka considered the possibility of renegotiating the contract.
However, such renegotiation was not pursued because of the fear that the TNC might pull out of Sri
Lanka, thus giving a negative signal to other foreign investors considering to invest there. The only
mechanism in place to minimize the potential abuse of market power in the lubricant market is the
monitoring of LLL by the Fair Trading Commission. In fact, the Commission has the power, under
section 23 of the Industrial Promotion Act No. 46 of 1990, to investigate any unreasonable price increase
arising from abusive exploitation of market power.
Source: based on information obtained from the Fair Trading Commission of Sri Lanka.
a The terms of the exclusive rights granted to the TNC were disclosed in the LLL Share Offer Bulletin in
June 1996, when 30 per cent of LLL shares were offered to the public.
Quite often, different market-power inducements are combined and reinforce each other. Indeed,
trade protection is a type of market-power inducement that often accompanies other measures, as
illustrated by the cases of FDI in pineapple products in Kenya (box IV.7) and the privatization of
Lanka Lubricant Co. and the Colombo Gas Company (boxes IV.6 and IV.8). Another example is
provided by the tobacco industry in the Czech Republic (then the Czech and Slovak Republic)
where the previous state monopoly, Tabak, was sold in June 1992 to a TNC in the tobacco industry
in its entirety.18 The inducement in that case was inheriting a legal production monopoly, along
with a 65 per cent import tariff, which gave that TNC 80 per cent of the local cigarette market.
Finally, sometimes governments may not be fully aware of all the consequences of their
decisions on competition and, consequently, on consumer welfare and general economic
performance. Asymmetry of information is a major issue for developing countries when facing
TNCs with typically more information about international market conditions. Such asymmetry
may relate to both the start-up costs involved in an industry and the prospects for alternative sources
of FDI.
For their part, TNCs often base their requests for dominant power and/or protection on efficiency
arguments. Thus, it is argued that a dominant position, protection and exclusivities compensate for
high sunk costs and ensure a minimum scale of profitable operations. When the venture is mainly
161
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Box IV.7. Granting exclusive rights to induce FDI: two examples from Kenya
IV.7.
In Kenya, a large TNC had obtained (at independence and during the country’s import-
substitution phase) exclusive rights for the production and processing of pineapple products in the
country for a 99-year period. The firm also enjoys substantial protection from imports: a 50 per cent
tariff on imported canned pineapples. Imports are further restricted by the requirement of obtaining
prior ministerial approval for imports of fruits preserved in sugar (GATT, 1994). The reasons for the
exclusivity and protection seem to lie in the importance of processed fruits and vegetables as sources
of export revenues for Kenya, the world’s fifth largest exporter of tinned pineapple (GATT, 1994). In
terms of sales revenues, the affiliate was among the ten largest industrial affiliates in Kenya (UNCTAD,
1997a).
Another example is Kenya’s soda ash market where another large TNC holds an exclusive
mining and processing concession at Lake Magadi. In addition to the mining concession, the exclusivity
was extended to contiguous markets, such as the Magadi-Konza railway line that may be, in principle,
separate and competitive. The rationale for the exclusivity is probably related to the importance the
Government ascribes to the development of the soda ash industry and to the related export earnings.a
Domestically, some limited competition to the TNC-affiliate’s position comes from the small salt mines
at the Mombasa coast, which, however, are not able to match that affiliate’s market power in the
foreseeable future. Imports might create a more credible threat to that affiliate’s quasi-monopoly
position, but they are discouraged by a 31 per cent import tariff. Furthermore, foreign trade in minerals
is restricted to persons in possession of a mineral dealer’s licence issued by the Commissioner of Mines.
Source: based on information obtained from the Monopolies and Prices Commission, Kenya.
a In 1994, GATT estimated that soda ash and fluorspar provided over 2 per cent of Kenya’s export
revenue (GATT, 1994).
The privatization of the Colombo Gas Company (CGC), the Sri-Lankan State-owned
enterprise, took place in November 1995. A TNC acquired 51 per cent of CGC and was granted an
exclusive right to produce and sell gas in Sri Lanka for 5 years and a mandate to increase the price of
gas by 10 per cent every year. The major points in the contract were the following:
• The affiliate managed by the TNC would have the exclusive right in Sri Lanka to produce, import,
store, and distribute liquid petroleum gas (LPG) and fill cylinders for a five-year period.
• The Government would actively enforce the exclusive rights and prosecute any breach of those
rights.
• The company would be allowed to expand in other related activities, or be present in other
geographical markets (such as export markets).
Among the factors that apparently influenced the Government’s decision to grant the TNC
monopoly rights was the fact that the TNC, being a leading company in the petroleum and gas industry,
was expected to adopt superior technology and better safety standards than other firms. Furthermore,
the company offered to build a new terminal and a pipeline for an estimated investment of $33 million.
/...
162
Chapter IV
The 10 per cent price increases that were imposed in 1995 and 1996 led to consumer resistance.
Given this situation, the Government had another look at the contract. The matter was referred to the
Sri Lanka Attorney General’s Department to seek an opinion on how to go about renegotiating the
terms of the exclusivity.
The Fair Trading Commission (FTC) of Sri Lanka, the country’s competition authority, has
closely observed these developments. However, it has not been able to play an active role, since Sri
Lanka’s privatization process has been taking place quite independently from its activities.
Once the exclusivity period is over, the Government envisages permitting and encouraging
competition in the concerned market. The terminal facilities will be made accessible on “reasonable”
commercial terms to new entrants for import, unloading and distribution of LPG.
Source: based on information from the Fair Trading Commission of Sri Lanka.
export oriented, the dominant position, protection and exclusivities may be justified as being just
leverages in building global competitiveness. In the case of public utilities, on the other hand, a
request for monopoly position in exchange for investment may be justified in order to ensure
universal service requirements: an overall monopoly position is required so that the TNC can provide
certain services at below-cost prices to all consumers. These arguments are not unique to TNCs;
they are also routinely put forward by domestic producers who seek such privileges. Transnational
corporations can, however, make it explicit that, given these considerations, they would invest in
other countries should they not receive market-power inducements.
As barriers to trade, FDI and the movement of capital between countries have come down
and transport and communication costs have decreased, the options available to firms of where to
produce and where to sell, and to consumers of from where to buy, have increased. As a result,
markets in many industries have shown an increasing tendency to transcend national boundaries,
with firms from many countries competing to sell to buyers located in many countries. At the same
time, international production has grown rapidly as firms invest abroad, seeking to serve, not merely
the national markets of individual host countries, but the larger regional or global markets that are
emerging.
Under conditions of liberalization and globalization, TNCs, like other firms, serve markets
through international trade whenever they find it possible and profitable to do so, and through FDI
and various non-equity arrangements when cross-border trade is not possible or is less profitable
163
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
than delivery through the establishment of local production facilities or non-equity arrangements
with local firms. The difference between TNCs and other firms in this respect is that TNCs can
serve the markets for tradeable products from any production location that suits their strategic
objectives, while uninational firms, by definition, cannot or choose not to do so. Increasingly, TNCs
organize their international production to combine resources and markets as effectively as possible,
locating production activities in different countries according to their overall strategy and integrating
them through intra-firm (and/or inter-firm) networks of trade in tradeable goods and services for
serving markets through domestic sales in host countries or through trade (UNCTAD, 1995a). The
resulting complementarity between FDI and trade is indicated by the more rapid growth of sales
by foreign affiliates than arm’s length world exports (chapter I), the high share of exports by TNCs
in total world exports -- an estimated two thirds (UNCTAD, 1995a) -- and the decreasing share of
sales in host countries in total affiliate sales.19 The decrease in the share of local sales in total sales
is most noticeable for United States and Japanese affiliates in the European Union, reflecting the
fact that the elimination of national borders to trade and FDI has proceeded further within the
European Union than elsewhere.
With trade liberalization, regional or global markets can emerge for most goods, since they
are tradeable and can be delivered to buyers by sellers regardless of their respective locations around
the world. Such an expansion of the scope of markets has important implications for the contestability
of those markets and, depending upon the characteristics of an industry and the strategies of firms
as they respond to the opportunities and challenges presented by larger markets, for the structure
of, and competition in, these markets and the resulting impact on performance of the different
industries concerned. Foreign direct investment, closely intertwined with trade for obtaining inputs
to production as well as for serving these markets effectively, can play an important role in influencing
the market structures and the processes of competition in such markets and, hence, the performance
of the industries concerned.
The emergence of regional or global markets in the narrow sense described above does not
apply in the same manner to services, most of which remain non-tradeable (although modern
computer-telecommunication systems are making some of them increasingly tradeable). For them,
the geographical scope of the market remains national or even local. Since trade is virtually
impossible, markets cannot be integrated regionally or globally through trade. Local production by
domestic firms and foreign affiliates is the only means of contesting and serving these markets.
However, globalization and liberalization are affecting the structure of these markets and their
functioning as well (box IV.9). First, convergence in tastes and demand patterns has meant that
some non-tradable products can be standardized: Sheraton, for example, delivers more or less the
same set of services -- typically a standard core product with local adaptation -- to consumers in
host-country markets anywhere in the world through its affiliates, as does McDonalds. This implies
that even if these markets may not be linked regionally or globally through trade, they are regional
or global in the sense that they are standardized across borders. This standardization or
harmonization makes it easier for TNCs to serve markets through the establishment of affiliates or
non-equity arrangements. Furthermore, such standardized markets are likely to create regional or
global markets for the tradable inputs that form part of the value-added process in the final (non-
tradable) products.
Markets that are regional or global in scope are, in principle, more contestable than markets
confined within national borders: other things remaining the same, the number of firms that can serve
a consumer in a global or regional market should be greater than if the consumer were served by locally
based producers alone. Normally, therefore, one would expect that the actual number of firms
164
Chapter IV
Exchange carriers, the providers of basic telephone services, are becoming increasingly global
players, driven by competition and facilitated by deregulation at the national level and technological
developments. Although national carriers are still the predominant providers of basic telephone services
to their national market, the world telecommunication industry is moving rapidly towards a global
structure dominated by a few cross-border firm consortia, alliances, partnerships or distributorships
that supply consumers wherever they are located. And in the future these alliances are likely to include
not only exchange carriers, but information and entertainment companies as well (Kraemer, 1996).
Despite the fact that the configuration of many of these alliances is not yet firmly established, exemplified
recently by Telefonica of Spain to pull out of Unisource, a strategic alliance of European-based carriers,
and form an alliance with Concert, an alliance that includes British Telecommunications and MCI,a
competition is moving increasingly from the national to the regional and global levels in terms of
defining the relevant markets, and from competition between mostly national firms (such as AT&T
and MCI in the United States) to competition between international alliances (such as Concert and
WorldPartners).
One example of these trends is Global One, an alliance between the national exchange carriers
of France and Germany (France Télécom and Deutsche Telekom, both of which have a monopoly
position for the international calls of their respective countries) and Sprint (a United States-based
carrier which does not have a monopoly for international calls in the United States). Global One “can
deliver a common set of telephone services simultaneously in several countries” (ITU, 1996, p. 23) to
TNCs, business customers, other carriers and business travellers. In other words, the place where a
call originates and the place where it is completed may well be outside the place where the firms in
Global One are located. And Global One competes as a group both with other alliances, as well as with
national carriers.
Competition authorities allowed Global One only after safeguards were negotiated for
competing carriers. Potentially, alliances such as Global One could yield important benefits to consumers
in terms of price, quality of service and range of choice through price discrimination and special
concessions to customers as long as simple international resale is allowed (the connection of an
international private (leased) line to a public switched network) and nondiscriminatory local access
and interconnection terms exist. But they may also result in lesser competition if the supply of telephone
services is controlled at both ends of an international line by the firms in an alliance.
Sources: UNCTAD, based on Kraemer, 1996, and ITU, 1996.
a Alan Cane, “Everybody is talking”, Financial Times, 27-28 March 1997.
that serve any consumer, located anywhere, should increase (and competition intensify), when the
market for a product becomes regional or global due to trade and FDI liberalization. This would
indeed be the case if the number of firms producing in the industry at the regional or global level
remains unchanged when national barriers separating markets are removed.
In actual fact, the number of firms in an industry and in the market for its product and their
concentration in terms of shares in regional or global markets could well change when markets
shift from being primarily national to being regional or global. The nature of the change would
depend on the cost structure and the production characteristics of the industry and the response of
firms to the expanded geographical scope of markets for goods. Several possibilities exist as regards
concentration (at the supranational level) and competition (in markets for products that are tradable
and do not involve prohibitive transport costs):
• In industries in which the capital costs of entry are low, products are relatively
standardized, and/or technologies relatively simple and economies of scale (at the plant
165
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
as well as the firm level) relatively unimportant, increasing numbers of firms located
in different countries are likely to enter (the industry and) the market for the product in
response to its increased size due to regionalization or globalization. Such entry may
often be through exports, since in such industries there may not be strong enough
advantages from internalizing transactions based on ownership-specific advantages.
Foreign direct investment and, especially, non-equity arrangements between firms
located in different countries, may, however, play a role in increasing the number of
suppliers and quantities supplied to such markets, through the transfer of technology
for export-oriented production, as well as by providing marketing know-how and access
to trade networks to locations and firms lacking these capabilities. In such industries
(for example, many kinds of apparel), the structure of regional and global markets in
the products themselves is likely to be highly competitive, which brings benefits to
potential consumers but also requires considerable adjustment among producers as
they compete on the basis, essentially, of the combined competitive advantages of
particular locations in production and particular firms in international marketing.
• In industries with high set-up costs, large production scale economies at the plant level,
and organizational complexity, production is likely to be concentrated in a few locations
and goods delivered to regional or global markets through export. Such markets could
become highly concentrated as the limited number of firms that existed in the markets
prior to globalization respond to the larger size of regional or global markets by
increasing their scale further, including through mergers with other firms. (The
aerospace industry and the proposed Boeing-McDonnell Douglas merger are possible
examples.) In principle, the few firms in such an industry could be located anywhere
that they find suitable, and firms based in different countries could combine or form
alliances for specific purposes of raising capital, conducting R&D, marketing, or
undertaking intermediate activities, involving specific factors of production that could
be performed in countries other than those where the main production activity takes
place. Competition and its impact on performance will depend mainly on how many
firms or groups of firms worldwide have the capacities to invest on the scale required
for participating effectively in such markets.
• In industries in which economies of scale at the firm level (due, for example, to R&D,
advertising and/or marketing expenditure), economies of scope, and/or plant level
economies in intermediate production activities are important, and in which the value
chain can be separated into discrete activities, firms respond to the expanded regional
or global scope of markets by combining international production (through FDI or non-
equity arrangements) and trade efficiently; they organize (or in the case of firms that
are already transnational, reorganize) their production activities internationally in an
integrated manner to augment their resources, minimize their resource cost, reap
economies of scale at various points in the value chain and reach as large a market as
possible. In such industries, the number of firms operating in markets that are regional
or global could either decrease or increase (in comparison with those prevailing before
globalization), depending upon how many firms are able to build up and manage
effectively the intra-firm or inter-firm networks necessary to compete successfully.
Moreover, regardless of market structure in terms of the number of firms or
concentration, as long as entry is open, competition could be quite intense and industry
performance could improve, mainly because of the efficiency gains that can ensue from
integrated international production, and especially when such integration facilitates
innovation.
166
Chapter IV
The interaction between FDI and competition in regional and global markets is likely to be
most evident in the third type of industry, in which firms are most able and likely to take advantage
of the
opportunity to combine trade and FDI efficiently. Firms in such industries are rationalizing their
production across borders and pursuing complex integration strategies through intra-firm
production rationalization and inter-firm agreements and strategic partnerships (chapter I; see also
UNCTAD, 1993b).
Firms are doing this to become more cost-efficient and competitive. This restructuring in
production takes place through FDI that is efficiency-seeking/asset-acquiring and through cross-
border inter-firm agreements with similar objectives. Through FDI, some firms are strengthening
their core competencies and market positions, by establishing new production facilities, shedding
unrelated activities and merging with, or acquiring, related firms (witness, for example, the recent
wave of cross-border mergers and acquisitions). For TNCs that already have a network of foreign
affiliates, the response to the globalization of markets and increased competition is frequently an
intra-firm rationalization of production across the corporate network (UNCTAD, 1993b). Firms are
also establishing links with their international competitors for well-defined activities at specific
stages of the production process through strategic partnerships. In sum, firms in several industries
are locating production anywhere in the world from where they can supply products wherever the
markets are located, in a constant search for efficiencies in production and marketing.
The process of international restructuring has led to a reduction in the overall number of
producers in some industries at the regional or global levels. In the hard disk-drives industry, for
example (discussed below) -- an industry characterized by high R&D expenditure, scale economies
at the production stage, growing global markets and significant international production -- the
number of manufacturers worldwide has decreased from 59 in 1990 to 24 in 1995, with most of the
decline taking place after 1993.20 In pharmaceuticals, another industry characterized by high costs
of entry due to high capital and R&D intensity, the top 16 firms worldwide accounted for 35 per
cent of the global market in terms of sales in 1989, up from 33 per cent in 1981 (OECD, 1993, p. 140).
The reduction in the number of producers worldwide and the greater concentration at the
regional or global level provide greater scope for the emergence of international oligopolistic
structures. This is indeed the case in some industries, as illustrated by the market for hard disk
drives (see discussion below). However, these new international oligopolistic structures are often
qualitatively different from similar structures of earlier times. Like their predecessors, the new
oligopolistic structures involve a high degree of concentration; but they tend to be less hierarchical
and more network-based, and/or less stable and more loose than their predecessors. One example
is the formation of global knowledge-based networked oligopolies in bio-pharmaceuticals (box
IV.10) and another, the integrated international production structures in hard disk drives (see below).
Of particular interest are oligopolistic networks that take the form of strategic partnerships
involving a single component of the value chain, namely, R&D. Traditional concentration measures
defined in terms of shares in product markets do not capture the greater concentration in (the
market for) R&D that may be the outcome of such partnerships. Yet, greater concentration in (the
market for) R&D can, in turn, affect competition in product markets, for example, by giving the
TNCs involved in a partnership the power to reduce innovation competition for the creation of
substitute products.
Ease of entry (and exit) is a key determinant of market structure at the regional and global
levels. High cost-related barriers to entry (e.g., sunk costs) in industries in which TNCs tend to be
found imply that even when markets are regional or global, TNCs are often likely to compete in
highly concentrated markets. And to the extent that the integrated production structures of TNCs
strengthen entry barriers
167
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Within the pharmaceutical industry, there is evidence that a global networked, knowledge-
based bio-pharmaceutical oligopoly is emerging. By the end of the 1980s, the top ten pharmaceutical
firms in the world, all TNCs, had begun to consolidate their position in biotechnology through a wave
of acquisitions of smaller biotechnology firms facing financial difficulties because of sharply rising
R&D costs: for example, Genentech was acquired by Hoffmann La Roche, Chiron was acquired by
Ciba-Geigy and Affymax was acquired by Glaxo. At the same time, pharmaceutical companies began
to weave a net of cross-border R&D or knowledge-based alliances with other firms and research
institutions: SmithKline Beecham is reported to have more than 140 such alliances worldwide as of
1995 and Glaxo has more than 60 such alliances, 50 with universities in the United States. But despite
the proliferation of cross-border strategic alliances in pharmaceuticals in recent years, most alliances
are still undertaken between national firms, within countries.
The experience with strategic R&D partnerships to date has shown that, although the firms
involved cooperate with their international competitors in research and product development, they
continue to compete vigorously in the final goods market, as illustrated by the bio-pharmaceuticals
industry. However, the dynamic effects of these partnerships may give rise to anticompetitive practices,
especially as regards setting industry standards that may act as barriers to future entrants.
(by, for example, increasing the minimum scale of efficient production, as in the case of hard disk
drives, discussed below), the contestability of the market for an industry’s product could be reduced
and concentration increased.
At the same time, when international production is integrated, the intra-firm specialization
and rationalization of production on a regional or global scale enable TNCs to reduce costs and
achieve economies of scale and scope at more points along the value chain (UNCTAD, 1993b and
1995a):
168
Chapter IV
• Efficiency gains in marketing and distribution arise from economies of scale associated
with a functional division of labour that makes one (or few) affiliates within a TNC
system specialize in distribution, taking charge of the regional or global marketing
strategy and distribution to a number of locations for the firm’s product (e.g., developing
an overall theme for advertising that may then be slightly modified in campaigns
targeting individual countries).
As already mentioned, TNCs are also integrating specific activities of the value chain by
concluding cross-border inter-firm agreements and strategic partnerships with other firms (chapter
I; see also UNCTAD, 1993c). The principal motive for concluding such agreements is to improve
efficiency by sharing costs, expertise and knowledge or distribution outlets with other firms:
• Efficiency gains for TNCs engaged in cross-border agreements at the stage of final goods
production come from reducing production costs through component sharing
arrangements (e.g., Mazda and Ford sharing auto body platforms and transmissions),
“integrated” subcontracting agreements with local suppliers and from synchronizing
production cycles.
• Efficiency gains in marketing and distribution arise from economies of scale and from
cost-reduction through sharing outlets with other firms through inter-firm agreements.
By using each other ’s distribution network (for e.g., as in the case of alliances in
telecommunications or airline reservation systems), TNCs in a strategic alliance can
reach more consumers. Marketing costs can be reduced by sharing know-how and
information, or through joint advertising campaigns.
If the regional or global markets in which TNCs operate remain contestable (especially
through liberal trade and FDI policies in goods and a liberal FDI policy in services, as well as the
application of competition law), the scope for non-competitive or anticompetitive behaviour by
firms is likely to be limited. In that case, TNC activity is likely to increase competition through cost,
169
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
quality or innovation; and improved efficiency due to integrated international production is likely
to be procompetitive and benefit industry performance and consumer welfare in static as well as
dynamic terms -- that is, through cost reduction or increased range of products within existing
technological and resource constraints as well as through innovation and the introduction of new
products. The distribution of the gains from this improved industry performance will depend, in
the long term, on how productive factors in different countries are linked to an industry and the
spillover effects to domestic firms from competition with foreign firms. Productivity spillovers
from parent firms or affiliates to domestic firms in particular locations will depend to some extent
on factors similar to those discussed in section A. Given, however, that integrated international
production for regional or global markets implies a greater degree of specialization in each location,
much depends on the particular activity that a country can attract: here, building up the human
capital and infrastructure conducive to higher value-added activities and especially R&D becomes
crucial for benefiting from spillover effects. In their absence, the scope for TNC activity to contribute
to the dynamic comparative advantages of a particular location through contributions to innovatory
capacity is limited, both because of the reluctance of TNCs to locate such activity in such a location
and because of a lack of indigenous enterprises to compete with TNCs in the relevant market (regional
or global as well as national) and benefit from spillovers.
170
Chapter IV
setting could hinder the development of substitute products and could lead to market dominance
in the future. In other words, by cooperating in precisely those areas that form the basis for future
competition in product markets, TNCs in partnerships could become exclusionary networks
controlling the pace and type of innovation and flow of privileged information to firms that are not
members of that partnership.
The above set of competition concerns raises the issue of possible responses of local firms
when faced by integrated TNCs. Horizontal market power is normally harmful to consumers, but
can be attractive to local firms that benefit from higher market prices. However, the same is not
true of vertical integration. The possibilities of foreclosure and predation raise concerns to rival
producers, and ultimately also to consumers. Rival producers may also be worried by enhanced
efficiencies and the elimination of successive mark-ups by integrated TNCs because these tend to
reduce prices -- but these are likely to benefit consumers.
The hard disk-drive (HDD) industry, an important segment of the electronics industry,21
which is highly globalized in terms of international production as well as trade, serves to illustrate
some aspects of the interaction between FDI, market structure and competition under conditions of
globalization and integrated international production. It shows that, under certain circumstances,
globalization and the growth of integrated international production can go hand in hand with high
and increasing concentration of markets at the global level. Nonetheless, market positions of
individual firms can be volatile, and there can be several new market entrants, all leading to a
highly unstable global oligopoly and fierce competition in an industry.
Hard disk drives are widely used in computers of all sizes, from the most powerful super-
computers to laptop PCs. They are high-precision machines that contain and rotate rigid disks on
which data are magnetically recorded, and that control the flow of information to and from those
disks. These machines combine the characteristics of mass production with very short product
cycles and periodic trajectory-disrupting innovations (Ernst, 1996). Product differentiation is
relatively unimportant. Barriers to entry are high, deriving mainly from economies of scale in
production (at the assembly stage as well as in the production of the various components and parts
that go into a drive), and from demanding engineering requirements. High R&D costs, as firms
race to improve technology in order to squeeze ever more memory into diminishing space, are
another factor affecting the ability of firms to enter the industry. 22 At the same time, the subassembly
activities involved in the production of HDDs are labour-intensive and difficult to automate. All
this means that, to enter and remain competitive in the industry, firms must combine technological
and financial strengths with organizational efficiency to keep manufacturing costs low and deliver
the product rapidly to markets.
The internationalization of HDD production has proceeded rapidly since the early 1980s,
when Seagate (United States), only three years after its founding, decided to move a large part of its
drive assembly to Singapore. One year later, Seagate established a second affiliate in Bangkok
(Thailand). In 1984, Maxtor (United States), another leading HDD manufacturer, established an
171
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
affiliate in Singapore. Since then, all leading HDD manufacturers have shifted most of their final
assembly to Asia. The outcome has been a degree of reliance on international production well
beyond that in other product areas of the electronics industry, such as semiconductors (Ernst, 1983
and 1992) and consumer electronics (Bloom, 1992). In 1995, less than 5 per cent of the final assembly
of HDDs remained in the United States, while 64 per cent was conducted in South-East Asia.23
The current industry leader, Seagate, operates 22 plants worldwide, 14 of them in Asia.24
Asia has absorbed most of the company’s high-volume labour-intensive assembly activities and
the production of low- and mid-range components. High-end, knowledge-intensive stages of the
value chain, such as precision component manufacturing and R&D, remain in the United States, in
a few highly specialized regions in Minnesota and California. Furthermore, Seagate’s production
network in Asia has evolved to include a regional division of labour to take advantage of the differing
labour-cost advantages of countries in the region. Bottom-end work is done in Indonesia and China.
Malaysian and Thai plants make components and specialize in partial assembly, with the latter
accounting for the largest share of low labour cost manufacturing. Singapore is the centre of gravity
of this regional production network: its focus is on higher-end products and some important
coordination and support functions. It completes the regional production network by adding testing,
which requires precision. Increasingly, the managers and engineers in its Singapore operations are
drawn from the international labour market, including developing countries such as China, India
and the Philippines.
a. Increasing concentration
The production of HDDs is one of the most highly concentrated segments of the electronics
industry despite the highly globalized markets for its products. Concentration at the global level is
increasing. Furthermore, in 1995, nine companies went out of business, and only three companies
entered the industry, all of them in niche markets. During the same year, Seagate, the current
market leader, acquired Conner Peripherals, the company that was the world market leader in
1992. Two big companies, Hewlett Packard and DEC, left the HDD segment of the electronics
industry altogether in 1996.
172
Chapter IV
The four largest HDD firms account for over 50 per cent, and the eight largest for 90 per
cent of total revenues in the industry. United States' companies are clearly dominant, accounting
for the top six HDD producers.25 (One, Maxtor, has recently been acquired by the Hyundai group
(Republic of Korea)). 26 Concentration ratios are also quite high for the two main components of
HDDs: heads and media.
iv. Globalization and volatility of market positions: the dynamics of competition in hard
disk-drives
Despite its tight and concentrated oligopolistic structure, the market for HDDs is
characterized by continuous price wars, very short product cycles and highly volatile market
positions. No firm,
173
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
even the market leader, is safe from a sudden reversal of fortunes. Market leadership positions
change very frequently.
This means that the development of technology, products and markets in HDDs is not
dominated by a small group of (United States) firms. In other words, concentration in this industry
does not indicate a low degree of market contestability and competition. While concentration is
fostered by the large investment outlays and cost economies necessary to reap economies of scale
and scope in the industry, firms’ positions cannot be taken for granted. Only companies able to get
the right product at the right time to the highest volume segment of the market can survive. Entering
a new market on time can provide substantial profits. Being late can be a disaster that can force a
company out of business. Probably of greater importance, however, is the increasing uncertainty
that results from periodic trajectory-disrupting innovations.
Disruptions of market positions in the HDD industry can be traced to three main sources:
• Very short product cycles. In HDDs, on average, a new product is generated every 9 to 12
months, in some cases in as little as 6 months.30 This leads to rapid depreciation of
plants, equipment and R&D. It also leads to spurts of capacity expansion for rapidly
bringing new products to the market.31 The result is a built-in tendency for an
overshooting of investment in relation to the growth of demand. This has a paradoxical
consequence: as mismatches between demand and supply occur periodically, the
capacity to exit rapidly becomes as important as the capacity for rapid expansion of
production.
• Volatile demand patterns. The main market for HDDs is the computer industry. Computer
companies therefore exert considerable influence on the product mix, the product cycle
and the pricing strategies of HDD vendors. But because breakthrough innovations in
architectural design and in component technology have periodically caused serious
turmoil in HDDs (Christensen, 1993), passive subordination to customer needs may
lead to dangerous complacency. Market leaders have often listened too attentively to
their established customers and ignored new product architectures whose initial appeal
was in seemingly marginal markets (Christensen, 1993, pp. 21-22). To be competitive,
firms must combine technological strengths in the development of key components
and architectural design with the capacity to identify and develop new markets for
new applications.
* * *
174
Chapter IV
The HDD industry illustrates that, in contrast to what might be expected when FDI and
trade become freer and expand together, globalization may well increase concentration, and this
process may be accentuated by integrated international production. As high-technology industries
characterized by significant scale economies and sunk costs become more globalized, and firms
seek to take advantage of the larger markets that open up while minimizing costs through integrated
production networks, both sunk costs and scale economies increase, giving rise to further increases
in concentration. Price wars may cause higher concentration by forcing out marginal producers
and by reducing profit margins for potential new entrants. However, a high degree of concentration
need not necessarily be equated with the absence of competition or of the competitive discipline of
potential entry. Market disruptions -- caused, in the case of HDDs, by short product cycles and
volatile demand patterns, as well as interruptions in the complex supply chains of integrated
producers -- can give rise to unstable market positions for firms. The experience of the HDD industry
suggests that, as competition increasingly transcends national boundaries in a liberalized and
globalized world economy, while firms are free to combine FDI and trade in the pursuit of efficiency,
there is the need for a fresh look at the determinants of market structure and firm behaviour.
Under conditions of globalization and the liberalization of policies related to FDI and trade,
international production may not only affect the structure of, and competition in, supranational
markets in some industries, but may also affect the ways in which -- and the speed with which --
firms respond to non-transitory increases in prices in markets. Such price increases sometimes, for
example, when they follow a merger or acquisition or are undertaken by a dominant firm, trigger
concern on the part of competition authorities and lead to an examination of whether new supplies
are likely to enter a given market (“supply response” by potential competitors).
For a supply response to be relevant, it needs to be rather fast: between the time that an
opportunity ( e.g., a non-transitory price increase) arises and the time servicing a market can begin,
not more than, say, one to two years should elapse. If this condition could be met, FDI and non-
equity arrangements by TNCs would, indeed, represent an important supply response by potential
competitors, a possibility that needs to be taken into account explicitly and fully by competition
authorities (alongside that by local producers and imports). Its potential importance arises from
the fact that the value of sales of foreign affiliates is higher than that of world imports (of which, in
turn, about one-third are intra-firm) and that, for many services, FDI is the only way in which an
international supply response can take place.
There are a number of reasons which suggest that FDI and non-equity arrangements for
production by TNCs today allow a supply response to market opportunities that increasingly rivals
that by local firms and imports. Transnational corporations, of course, also respond, like other
firms, through trade and the expansion of supply by local facilities already in place. In the case of
trade, TNCs sometimes have greater flexibility to respond as they might rapidly be able to bring to
a specific market supplies of a product that they did not previously sell in that market, by rerouting
supplies of goods from other affiliates through distribution networks that have already been
established in the country in which a supply response is profitable; by concluding marketing
agreements with independent firms; or, simply, by using arm’s-length trade. The expansion of
supply by local facilities already in place may be facilitated because of the financial and technological
strengths of TNCs, which may make it easier to acquire firms or enter into mergers or alliances, so
that existing capacities could be strengthened in the relevant product market -- for example, by
using more fully or efficiently previously unused and underused facilities and assets, and by drawing
on the resources available in the TNC system. Transnational corporations may also be able to rely
on internationally recognized brand names which could make entry into a market easier.
175
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
♦ Experience. Experience gained through exporting (which often precedes FDI) and,
in the case of TNCs that already have networks of foreign affiliates, experience gained
through the establishment of those networks, make it easier for many TNCs to overcome
the costs and problems associated with setting up a new production facility in a foreign
location relatively quickly.
♦ Access to resources within TNC systems. The ability of TNCs, especially those with
large networks of affiliates, to access, within their corporate systems, assets needed for
production and marketing such as hard and soft technology and brand names (in
which costs have already been incurred in other parts of their transnational corporate
networks), as well as finance and other resources, such as managerial expertise, available
outside their corporate systems at low cost, wherever these may be located.
♦ Access to markets. The ability of TNCs to access larger geographic markets through
FDI and trade, thereby reducing the risks associated with entering any single national
market and, therefore, reducing vulnerability to business cycles.
♦ Spreading risks. The ability of TNCs to spread risks over a wider, internationally
diversified corporate base.
♦ Alliances. The ability of TNCs to overcome R&D and other barriers related to high
entry cost by engaging in strategic alliances.
♦ Assistance from affiliates. The ability of TNCs to draw upon affiliates already
established in or near a given location for assistance on specific matters related to a
new investment.
All this does not mean that TNCs do not face disadvantages related to transaction costs and
other difficulties of operating in a foreign environment. But, overall, the above factors facilitate
and, in some cases, give TNCs a competitive advantage in entering a market through new investment;
and, presumably, the more TNCs are established internationally, the greater this advantage becomes.
176
Chapter IV
Of course, the actual length of time it takes between identifying a profitable opportunity in
a market on the one hand, and creating new capacity and begin selling a product in a host country’s
market on the other, varies according to a number of factors, including the nature of the product
and the industry, the capabilities of the TNCs involved and the characteristics of the market in
question. But the considerations mentioned above suggest that the response by TNCs could be
quite quick.
In some manufacturing industries as well, duration can be quite short (box IV.11). There are
also signs that it is decreasing further: in hard disk drives, for instance, the time taken from the start
of production to bringing the product to the market on the basis of full capacity operations has
decreased to nine months. Even in such highly capital-intensive manufacturing industries as
automobiles, the time needed for establishing a production base and delivering the product to the
market is not that long. For example, large scale investments of some $500 million in passenger-car
production by BMW (Germany) and Daimler Benz (Germany) in the United States, and by Daimler
Benz jointly with Swatch (Switzerland) and SOFIREM (France) in France, took between two and a
half and three years after the start of construction of production facilities for the product to be
ready for delivery to customers.32
All this suggests that the supply response by TNCs which have not yet invested in a country,
or are not yet producing the product in which a profitable opportunity arises in the relevant market,
should be considered routinely, along with the responses of domestic producers and imports, in
assessing competition in a market.
Box IV.1
IV.11. Supply response through FDI
.11.
It took Siemens Semiconducters (Germany) under two years from the time of its decision to
locate the production of semiconductors in North Tyneside (United Kingdom), to have its facilities
ready for commercial production. Hyundai (Republic of Korea) announced its decision to invest in
semiconductors (64mb-drams) in Scotland in October 1996; the facility is expected to begin production
in October 1998. Similarly, the announcement of the decision to invest in Scotland was made by
Chungwa Picture Tubes (Taiwan Province of China) in November 1995, and production is expected to
start in September 1997.
Source: UNCTAD, based on information obtained from Siemens and Neil Hood.
C. Conclusions
As countries liberalize their FDI regimes and rely more on market forces to determine the
volume, nature and impact of TNC activities in their economies, the question of ensuring competition
and keeping markets functioning efficiently assumes increasing importance. Transnational
corporations can inject competition into markets for goods and services and contribute to improving
177
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
their efficient functioning. This is especially relevant in the case of markets for the products of
industries that have high start-up costs and economies of scale and scope that make entry difficult,
because TNCs tend to be particularly active in such industries. However, the same competitive
strength that enable firms to expand their international production activities could, under certain
conditions, also create opportunities for TNCs to eliminate competitors and assume dominant
positions within markets, leading to possible reduction in market efficiency, and to engage in
anticompetitive behaviour.
The product markets that are affected by FDI include those that are confined, in terms of
geographic space, to individual national economies, as well as product markets that span several
countries or the globe. With respect to national product markets, the principal interest centres
around markets in host countries, especially developing economies. Past experience suggests that
the entry and operations of TNCs may reduce concentration in host developed countries, although
the increasing trend towards entry by M&As could mean that this may be changing. In developing
host countries, the entry of FDI per se usually adds to the number of firms in an industry, with the
potential to decrease concentration and increase competition in the market. Foreign affiliates are,
however, often larger in size than their local rivals, and have greater technological, marketing and
innovatory capabilities; this could lead to increased concentration in the industry due to the crowding
out of domestic firms or the exit of some of them due to insufficient capacities to compete successfully.
Concentration, by itself, is not a problem if markets remain open to competition, including also
from imports in the case of goods and from TNCs in the case of services, and especially if the local
firms that remain in an industry are able to withstand competition from foreign affiliates and further
build up their own capabilities in response to it. In that case, competition from foreign affiliates not
only benefits consumers by improving market efficiency, but affects the production performance of
the host industry (and economy) through spillovers of efficiency and productivity from foreign
affiliates to local firms. It could also influence dynamic efficiency if competition takes place through
innovation.
However, if local firms have not yet built up the capabilities (as is often the case in developing
countries and especially the least developed countries) to compete with foreign affiliates, the impact
of FDI on competition and market efficiency in host countries depends upon the extent to which
foreign affiliates compete among themselves and also with foreign suppliers (in the case of traded
goods and services). If a concentrated market structure emerges, competition effects will also depend
on the conduct of the dominant firms, including TNCs. Over time, if domestic firms are able to
build up the capabilities necessary to re-enter an industry, competition would again increase.
If concentrated markets emerge as a result of TNC entry and participation, there may be
scope for firms to indulge in anticompetitive and restrictive business practices in host countries.
Some of these practices are related to, or facilitated, by cross-border relationships and contacts that
are specific to TNCs. In addition, granting TNCs market-power inducements (in the form of legal
restrictions on entry and competition by other firms) in order to attract their investments has, by
definition, anti-competitive effects, resulting in welfare losses that may not be necessary.
178
Chapter IV
Firms that achieve gains in production efficiency can lower prices, introduce better quality
and introduce new products to capture a greater market share; in this way, integrated TNCs can
compete vigorously with other firms -- both single-nation firms and other TNCs. This may lead to
increased concentration in the relevant market but could also yield benefits for consumers. The
degree of concentration (at the supranational level) in these markets is, nevertheless, a matter of
interest from the viewpoint of competition.
Integrating various activities located in different parts of the world through integrated
international production within TNC systems and through cross-border strategic partnerships
between firms is an increasingly important characteristic of several industries. This may appear to
reduce an industry’s contestability due to concentration among firms and, hence, to reduce
competition as well. However, a reduction in contestability is not due to integrated production or
strategic partnerships per se, but to the fact that sunk costs (and risks) and scale economies associated
with certain activities, such as R&D, innovation and new product development in some industries
are high. In fact, R&D partnerships could increase contestability by allowing firms, especially
small and medium-sized ones, that would not otherwise have the resources to do so, to enter an
industry, or put new products on the market faster than they would have been able to do in the
absence of partnerships. Integrating R&D through partnerships need not, therefore, necessarily
give rise to anticompetitive effects. In addition, how firms compete in the final goods markets
depends, more and more, upon what happens to competition at the stage of innovation. Intra-firm
integration of R&D activities within TNCs, as well as strategic cross-border R&D partnerships could
play an important role in fostering innovation for dynamic competition but could also, under
conditions of high concentration at the R&D level, reduce innovation-competition in a market.
Finally, the existence of networks of TNC affiliates enhances the role of a supply response
through FDI in markets. It is, moreover, the only kind of international supply response for most
services and other location-bound activities. This suggests that the speed of a supply response
through FDI must be considered when defining the relevant market or assessing the implications
of certain arrangements for competition in markets.
In sum, in a globalizing and liberalizing world economy, the number of actual or potential
entrants into foreign markets increases. This gives rise to a greater potential for competition in
markets regardless of their geographical scope. Entry barriers are less the outcome of government
policies and more associated with costs and know-how or technological advances. Thus, despite
the openness of the world economy to new competitors, entry barriers may lead to increased
concentration (followed perhaps by increased market power). On balance, the effects of liberalization
and globalization on market structure and competition depend substantially on industry
characteristics influencing market contestability. But in certain industries, especially those in which
integrated international production holds efficiency gains for firms, TNCs can play an important
role in the process.
Notes
1 It should be emphasized that the term “contestability” is used here simply to denote the ease of entry,
or openness of markets to competition and not in the narrower (specific or rigorous) sense in which it is
used in “contestability” theory (see Introduction to Part Two, box 2).
2 There is some evidence from statistical studies for Canadian and United Kingdom industries to support
the idea that TNCs find entry to host country industries/markets easier than do domestic firms (see
Goreski, 1976; Shapiro, 1983 and Geroski, 1991).
3 For a discussion of the factors determining the decisions of firms with respect to serving a market
179
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
through export or through FDI (i.e., local sales), see UNCTAD, 1996a, chapter III and IV.
4 Concentration can be measured in various ways (see Vanlommel et al., 1977). One common measure is
the Herfindahl index (HI) (also known as the Herfindahl-Hirshman index (HHI)), defined as the sum
of squared market shares and calculated as:
n n n
HI=HHI= ! (Xi/X)2 = !xi2 / ( ! xi)2
i=1 i=1 i=1
where x is the output/sales of plant/firm i, X is the output/sales of the industry, and n the total number
of firms in the industry/market. Another common measure is an absolute concentration measure
showing the share of the largest firms in an industry, e.g., the share of an industry’s output or sales
accounted for by the four largest firms.
5 The correlation between the degree of transnationalization (“NM” in table IV.1) and concentration for
the full sample of 100 industries examined by Davies, Lyons et al. was (+0.5). The correlation involved
the “common causes” of product differentiation and R&D. Sixteen of the 20 most concentrated industries
in the European Union were intensive in advertising and/or R&D, while none of the least concentrated
were. Similarly, 15 of the most transnationalized industries were characterized by high advertising
and/or R&D expenditures, while only three of the least transnationalized industries were associated
with high R&D and none with high advertising; 2 of the 3 exceptions were industries in which public
procurement was substantial (see Davies, Lyons et al., 1996, chapter 7).
6 See, among others, Dunning, 1958, and Steuer, 1973, for the United Kingdom; Fishwick, 1981, for France,
Germany and the United Kingdom; Parry and Watson, 1978, for Australia; Blomström, 1989, for Mexico;
Connor, 1977, for Brazil; and Davies, Lyons et al., 1996 for the United Kingdom.
7 According to a survey conducted by the United Nations, about 32 per cent of developing country
affiliates of small and medium-sized TNCs belonged to industries in which a handful of firms controlled
the bulk of the market, compared with 35 per cent for affiliates of large industries (UNCTAD, 1993b, p.
78). The affiliates of small and medium-sized TNCs accounted, moreover, for a sizeable share of the
markets for their primary products in host developing countries -- an average of 38 per cent, as compared
with 32 per cent for affiliates of large TNCs (UNCTAD, 1993b, p. 78). This suggests that the specialized
industry niches in which small and medium-sized TNCs operate conform to the oligopolistic pattern
associated with TNC activity.
8 Attempts have been made to “correct” production-concentration data for the effects of imports (e.g.,
Utton, 1982; Clarke, 1985). The typical finding is that this reduces the degree of concentration observed,
but that nevertheless the ranking of industries remains broadly similar. Other studies have looked at
the relationship between concentration at the aggregate (say, “3 digit”) level and concentration in
constituent (say, “4 digit”) markets. Here, the typical result is that “4 digit” concentration is higher
(especially where firms are not diversified across “4 digits”), but that, nevertheless, typically, a “3 digit”
concentration measure gives a reasonable indication of average constituent “4 digit” concentration
values. (Hart and Clarke, 1980, included a detailed analysis of concentration at different levels of
aggregation.)
9 This estimate is based on M&A sales that resulted in business combinations in which the foreign investor
acquired at least 50 per cent voting shares.
10 See, e.g., studies for Belgium, Canada, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, and the United Kingdom,
and for Brazil, Malaysia, Australia, India, Singapore and Morocco, cited by Dunning, 1993, p. 433.
11 See Dunning (1993), for a brief summary of findings.
12 According to the regression coefficients in the simple regressions shown in table IV.3; for differentiated
industries, this is nearly 1.5, while for homogeneous product industries, it is almost exactly 1.
13 See, for example, Willmore (1986) for Brazil; Lall and Streeten (1978) for Malaysia; and Dunning, 1985,
for the United Kingdom.
14 Earlier studies, based on rather aggregate data, include Caves, 1974 and Globerman, 1979. For a summary
of the findings of several of the studies cited here, see Dunning, 1993, p. 25.
15 A number of previous studies also identified higher average productivity levels of foreign affiliates
compared with those of Canadian-owned firms (see, e.g., studies cited in Globerman et al., 1994).
However, since they were based on cross-section comparisons of industry level data, it was not clear
180
Chapter IV
whether the higher productivity levels reflected a different mix of activities undertaken by the firms or
the efficiency with which resources are used to carry out the activities.
16 A study of Canadian industry found that the share of an industry accounted for by foreign firms was
positively related to advertising levels (Caves, 1980). Similar findings were reported from studies for
Brazil and Mexico, which showed that the level of foreign ownership was positively associated with
levels of industry advertising (Connor and Mueller, 1977). A study for Brazil found that the share of
TNCs in a market was a principal determinant of the level of product differentiation in 16 electrical sub-
industries in Brazil (Newfarmer and Marsh, 1981). However, studies of advertising conduct of TNCs
and domestic firms in Colombia found no differences in the behaviour of the two (Lall and Streeten,
1977); nor did a similar study for India (Kumar, 1990), in which it was argued that the dependence of
Indian affiliates of TNCs on their parents’ advertising may have been responsible for the observed lack
of difference.
17 See UNCTAD, 1996e, for a comprehensive discussion of fiscal and financial incentives.
18 See “Investing in the East offers one advantage: overnight monopolies”, The Wall Street Journal Europe,
8-9 October 1993, pp. 1-8.
19 During 1957-1990, the share of sales in local host-country markets by United States majority-owned
affiliates abroad decreased from three-fourths to two-thirds, while that of Japanese affiliates abroad
decreased from three-fourths to three-fifths (Van den Bulcke, 1995) (also see UNCTAD 1996a, table IV.5,
for data in this respect or United States foreign affiliates in Europe).
20 DISK/TREND, Inc., 1995 DISK/TREND Report. Rigid Disk Drives, Mountain View, California, October
1995, p. 4.
21 The world market for HDDs was estimated to be almost $26 billion in 1995. See DISK/TREND, Inc.,
1995 DISK/TREND Report. Rigid Disk Drives, Mountain View, California, October 1995, p. 9.
22 According to one estimate, in the future, disk-drive makers with less than $500 million in sales will find
it difficult to afford the steeply rising development costs of new generations of drives. See Ernst and
O’Connor, 1992, pp.193-194, from which this information has been summarized, for a fuller account.
23 By the end of 1996, the United States share of HDD final assembly had fallen to 1 per cent. This figure
is taken from Gourevitch, Bohn and McKendrick (1997).
24 Another widely quoted figure is that “...80% of Seagate’s production...” takes place in five Asian countries:
Singapore, Thailand, Malaysia, Indonesia and China (South China Morning Post, 16 May 1995 and
Asiaweek, 17 March 1995). The problem with this type of figure is that it is not clear what it measures
exactly.
25 A note of caution is in order here. Most statistics on HDDs are generated by the private consulting
company Disk/Trend Inc. which defines the nationality of a manufacturer by the location of the firm’s
headquarters, regardless of the location of individual manufacturing plants. This creates no problem
for Seagate, even though the firm manufactures most of its HDDs abroad. For Quantum, however, this
definition becomes problematic, as Matsushita Kotobuki today has moved from the position of a contract
manufacturer of low-end drives to the sole source of Quantum disk drives, including its leading-edge
products. The definition becomes outright misleading in the case of Maxtor: while the headquarters of
that company are located officially in Milpitas, California, Maxtor has been acquired by the Hyundai
group. In terms of ownership, Maxtor is no longer a United States' firm.
26 As of 1995, the four leading HDD manufacturers controlled almost 73 per cent of the world market (in
terms of revenue shares). The market shares of Seagate and Conner Peripherals have been lumped
together because Seagate acquired the latter in September 1995. See, DISK/TREND, Inc., 1995 DISK/
TREND Report. Rigid Disk Drives, Mountain View, California, October 1995.
27 The basic unit for counting HDD shipments are spindles or spindle disk assemblies. A spindle disk
assembly consists of the disk drive mechanism required to utilize a single disk of disk stack. Note that
Matsushita Kotobuki, already since 1984, has been a contract manufacturer for Quantum Corp., which
currently is the third largest vendor of HDDs.
28 This reflects the fact that, with almost $26 billion worldwide in sales revenues, the HDD industry has
become a major industry. Capacity requirements in this industry are driven by a rapid growth of demand:
unit worldwide shipments increased by 35 per cent in 1994, almost 26 per cent in 1995, and are projected
to increase by around 18 per cent in 1996. COMLINE Daily News Service from Korea, 6 March 1996.
181
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
29 DISK/TREND, Inc., 1995 DISK/TREND Report. Rigid Disk Drives, Mountain View, California, October
1995, p. 6.
30 Product cycles for HDDs have been drastically cut. For high-end products such as drives for servers
and mainframe computers, they have fallen from 24 months to about 12 months. They are considerably
shorter for desktop applications, where new drive generations are introduced about every nine months,
and for laptop PCS where the product cycle has been reduced to roughly six months. Product life cycles
in the HDD industry thus follow the same hectic rhythm that is now characteristic for the computer
industry. For some segments of this industry, like for instance multimedia home computers, product
cycles are now almost as short as those for fashion-intensive garments.
31 “If you’re early to market there’s a reward for that. You get gross margin, you get a lot of customer
action. If you’re late, you’ve missed it. There’s no recovery from that.” William Roach, executive vice
president for worldwide sales at Quantum Corp. of Milpitas, California, quoted in Electronics Business
Asia, January 1995, p. 35.
32 Based on information from BMW, Annual Report, 1995, Daimler Benz AG,“press information”, 21 May
1997; and Micro Compact Car AG, Smart, “Press information” (Reningen, Germany, 1997). It should be
noted that the duration mentioned above does not include search time. However, it should also be
noted that TNCs often have plans on the basis of which they can move relatively quickly to establish
new production facilities in a foreign location when the time is ripe. Such a move can be triggered,
among others, by changes affecting the profitability of markets, for example, a currency appreciation or
a price increase.
182
CHAPTER V
POLICY IMPLICATIONS
IMPLICATIONS
Introduction
As the analysis in the preceding chapter suggests, there is a direct, necessary and
enlarging relationship between the liberalization of foreign-direct-investment (FDI) policies
and the importance of competition policy: on the one hand, FDI liberalization is a means of
promoting competition among firms; on the other hand, in order to benefit fully from FDI
liberalization, countries need to ensure that, as statutory obstacles to contestability are reduced,
these are not replaced by anticompetitive practices of firms, be they foreign or domestic. This
objective was unanimously endorsed by countries members of the United Nations in 1980,
when they adopted the Set of Multilaterally Agreed Equitable Principles and Rules for the
Control of Restrictive Business Practices. The UNCTAD Set emphasizes the need to ensure that
anticompetitive practices “do not impede or negate the realization of benefits that should arise
from the liberalization of tariff and non-tariff barriers affecting international trade” (UNCTAD,
1996d, p. 134). In fact, the adoption and efficient enforcement of competition legislation,
including a merger-review system, can strengthen the way in which FDI liberalization can
enhance market efficiency and consumer welfare and, ultimately, promote the development of
developing countries.
Building on the preceding chapter, the present chapter draws policy implications
concerning the interface between FDI and competition. It begins (in section A) by looking at
the implications of FDI liberalization for competition in national markets. Recognizing the
benefits of FDI liberalization, governments have gone beyond liberalization by actively seeking
to attract FDI in a number of ways. However, some of the methods governments utilize to
attract FDI come with certain competition costs. This is particularly the case when governments
use market-power inducements to promote investment. The first section of this chapter therefore
also examines measures that governments can take to minimize the negative effects on
competition associated with such inducements. The chapter then turns to an examination of
the relationship between FDI and competition law, focusing in particular on issues relating to
FDI entry and post-entry activities of TNCs (section B). Next, the discussion considers broader
policy implications relating to the interface between FDI liberalization and competition policy
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
at the national and international levels (section C). Recognizing that contestability may not
always lead to desired market outcomes, the chapter ’s concluding section (D) deals with the
question as to whether there are limitations regarding the pursuit of competition, including
through FDI-contestability, especially in the light of competing objectives pursued by
governments.
A. Investment liberalization
As discussed in chapter IV, the liberalization of FDI policies can lead to an increase in
competition in national markets. Most countries, in particular developing countries, are indeed
liberalizing the entry of inward FDI and have gradually extended this process to traditionally
closed industries, in particular such service industries as telecommunications, public transport
and other public utilities. Previous ownership and control requirements imposed on FDI have
also been considerably reduced, while general authorization requirements have tended to
disappear, except in certain strategic activities or industries. Operational conditions -- such as
performance requirements or those relating to hiring foreign managerial personnel -- are
becoming less significant. Furthermore, it is now common practice to allow foreign investors to
transfer their profits abroad freely as well as to repatriate the capital invested, subject to limited
exceptions for balance-of-payments considerations.1 Of course, the reduction of such barriers
has an immediate effect in terms of reducing market-entry costs and increasing, at least in
principle, the contestability of markets.
Most restrictions and controls on outward FDI have also disappeared in developed
countries and are being gradually reduced in a number of developing countries (UNCTAD,
1995a), thus opening the way for local firms and foreign affiliates in traditional host countries
to access international markets through outward FDI.
The gradual abandonment of many FDI restrictions has been complemented by the
adoption of standards of non-discrimination, national treatment and most-favoured-nation
treatment for FDI. Host countries are also granting foreign investors legal protection and
guarantees against non-commercial risks. By 1997, most countries had become signatories to
international instruments dealing with the treatment and protection of FDI at the bilateral,
regional or multilateral levels (UNCTAD, 1996d), thereby reducing risks and enhancing the
stability of FDI rules, thus further reducing the costs of FDI entry. Indeed, going beyond
liberalization, virtually all countries have put in place promotion programmes designed to
attract FDI.
Just like trade liberalization, the FDI liberalization process can be compared to the peeling
of an onion (Feketekuty, 1994). As the process advances, non-traditional barriers to entry appear.
Some of these barriers are due to government measures, such as the granting of exclusive rights
(including state monopolies), privatization, technical standards, public procurement practices
and licensing requirements. Others -- and these are receiving increasing attention -- concern
anticompetitive private business practices (Gifford and Matsushita, 1996).
Some of these practices are prohibited per se for their anticompetitive effects, including
various types of horizontal cartel agreements. The situation becomes more difficult when moving
to practices that may have anticompetitive effects but are not considered illegal under the laws
of the countries in which they occur. While such practices do not necessarily discriminate
between domestic and foreign firms, they may constitute barriers to competition. Traditional
vertical or reciprocal dealing arrangements, for instance, may fall into this category,2 as do
184
Chapter V
corporate governance practices that prevent other firms from taking over corporate control, be
it because only a limited number of shares are traded, or corporate by-laws inhibit foreign
firms from acquiring significant equity stakes in domestic firms (Janow, 1996).3 Such corporate
governance practices are of particular relevance for foreign firms seeking entry, as mergers and
acquisitions (M&As) are a principal mode of entry into markets (see chapter I).4
Therefore, while many governments generally seem to be becoming less tolerant of most
types of anticompetitive behaviour, some such practices are tolerated, and sometimes
encouraged by governments, especially if their effect is primarily felt abroad. Often, moreover,
the scope for anti-competitive practices depends upon country differences in legal standards
and enforcement procedures and capabilities. In terms of policy implications, transparency as
regards permissible private business practices and their underlying rationale should be
encouraged so that their effects -- and especially their economic development implications --
can be assessed. Indeed, to the extent that a competition culture takes hold, anticompetitive
business practices should become increasingly difficult to justify.
Once the basic assessment is made, host countries need to be as well informed about the
impact of their decisions on competition, as is the case with investors wishing to invest in
exchange for dominant positions and/or protection usually are. Ideally, the level of information
should be sufficient to allow the authorities to judge whether an investor would still make the
investment even if not granted as much monopolistic power. In addition, it would be useful to
know whether checks on market-power abuses can be established. Governments need also to
engage in market analysis to determine whether other investors would consider entering the
market; in many cases, countries give exclusive rights only to discover that other companies
would be ready to invest with less or even with no protection from competition. National
competition authorities can be of assistance in this respect, and should be consulted before
such inducements are given. If the needed advice is not available from experts in the host
country, or if what is available is not considered sufficient, advice may be obtained, on an ad-
hoc basis, from international organizations.
185
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
One of the most intractable problems associated with market-power inducements lies
in evaluating how much market power needs to be given away, for how long and for what
range of activities in order to attract a particular investment. Firms contemplating an investment
may “shop around” for the best deal among several countries with similar characteristics. Still,
a number of options exist that can be utilized to minimize negative effects on competition:
The Philippines’ Manila Metropolitan Water and Sewage System (MWSS) was originally operated
by a Government agency. In the early 1990s, less than 70 per cent of houses in Manila had access to piped
water. Half of all water flowing in the system was either lost or stolen, water prices were high, the MWSS
was losing money and to upgrade and extend the system would have entailed an expected investment of
about $7.5 billion over 25 years. The Government did not have such resources and decided to privatize the
water system through a bidding process to a consortia which could include foreign partners.
In broad terms, the Government proposed that it would turn over the operation of the MWSS
(but not the ownership of its assets) to two private consortia, one for the Eastern and one for the Western
part of Manila, for a period of 25 years; each of the consortia would have to commit to meeting specified
performance criteria over time (box table) but did not have to make any specific investment commitments
to meet this performance.
Services
Water b 67 87 98 98 98 98
Sewage b 8 7 15 26 38 54
Non-revenue water c 56 37.1 31.8 29.4 27.2 25.0
Estimated capital
expenditure requirements
(million pesos) 1996-2001 2002-2006 2007-2011 2012-2016 2017-2021 Total
a These are performance requirements that the winning firms had commited themselves to meet.
b Percentage of households that have (or will have) these services.
c Water that enters the system but is not accounted for. A loss rate of about 25 per cent is normally considered an
acceptable loss rate.
/...
186
Chapter V
The composition of the bidding consortia was also specified. In particular, each consortium was
required to have a foreign partner with a minimum of 20 per cent and a maximum of 40 per cent equity
ownership. Each member of the consortia was also required to meet specified minimum criteria in terms of
experience/expertise, size (revenues, capital, equity) and operating history. In particular, the foreign partner
was required to have experience (on several dimensions) of constructing and operating large-scale water
and sewerage systems, while the Filipino partner was not.
Four consortia that met these criteria bid on the project. Each consortium was required to bid on
both the East and the West areas, but no one bidder could win the operating rights to both concessions. This
method was used to try to gain some measure of competition between the two concessionaires over time
and to have access to two sets of cost data on which rate increases would be granted. To reduce collusion
among the bidders, there was a stipulation that the losing bidders would not be allowed to participate in
the project as subcontractors for the winners.
The bidding was in terms of percentages of the current prevailing water rates. With a bid of 26
per cent, the consortium led by Ayala (including Bechtel (United States) and United Utilities (United
Kingdom)) was by far the lowest bidder and won the East area. Benpres (including Lyonnaise des Eaux
(France)) won the West, with a bid of 56 per cent. Even through the Ayala consortium had bid 28 per cent
for the West area, it could not win both concessions under the bidding rules. The bids of the other two
consortia were in the range of 55-60 per cent.
Source: UNCTAD.
• Circumscribing exclusivity in terms of time and scope. Once some form of exclusive
position is envisaged for an investor, the exclusive rights to serve a market should
only be granted for a clearly defined period of time (which should be as short as
possible), subject (where possible) to periodic review, re-bidding and/or phase-
out. For example, a 99-year period of exclusivity appears to be rather long (box
IV.7).
187
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
In 1991, the Philippines faced a major crisis in its electricity-generating industry: base-load capacity
was substantially below demand, resulting in eight-hour scheduled blackouts for most of the country. Power
rates in the Philippines were among the highest in the world. The National Power Corporation (Napocor)
was the state-owned monopoly for the generation and long-distance transmission of power. Privately-
owned distribution companies, such as Meralco in Manila, then distributed the power on a regional basis.
• It unbundled the electrical delivery system into its two components, generation and distribution.
This procedure allowed the separation of the natural monopoly of long distance distribution
from the power-generation function. Even in power generation, there are substantial economies
of scale relative to market size. Hence, in order to have low-cost production of electricity, the
power-generation industry would have to be very concentrated.
• It allowed individual proposals for smaller generating plants and competitive bidding for the
larger plants. The essential feature of the proposals and the competitive bids was the cost of
electricity delivered into the transmission system. Unlike the case of the MWSS, in which the
investment amount and the costs of operating the system could not be modelled accurately, for
power generation, these costs can be determined with considerable precision. Hence the
Government could model the investment amount as a function of capacity, operating costs and
revenues to project return on investment for these projects and as a function of the length of the
“operate”phase of the BOT project. Although the BOT regulation allows up to 50 years of operation,
most of the contracts that have been negotiated have been in the 25 year range.
Initially, given the time pressures for increased base-load capacity, delivered prices from the BOT
were in the 1.80-1.90 pesos per-kilowatt-hour range for relatively small gas turbine projects that could be
implemented quickly. More recently, a 1,200 megawatt project has been negotiated with Korea Electric
Power (for $1.5 billion), with costs of .78 pesos per kilowatt hour. The relatively high costs for the initial
projects were due to two factors. First, these were relatively small and the cost of gas turbine generated
power is high. Second, the situation in the Philippines at that time was such that the required rate of return
(based on long-term bond interest rates plus a risk factor) was high. Third, given the urgency of the situation,
higher returns were allowed to these investors. Over time, however, all these factors have been reversed:
the power situation has improved; the proposals were for larger, coal-fired projects; and the bond rating of
the Philippines and the risk of these projects has fallen.
Source: UNCTAD.
188
Chapter V
• Break-up of a national monopolist into regional firms. In some cases it may be possible
to break up an enterprise horizontally into local or regional monopolies and to sell
them separately to independent investors. Such a break-up facilitates the task of
supervision and regulation. In fact, the performance of each monopolistic company
can then be compared with that of neighbouring firms (“yard-stick competition”).
Also, local or regional monopolists will generally have less financial and economic
power than a national monopolist. This type of solution has been adopted, for
example, in the Philippines (box V.1).
• The role of direct regulation of prices. For products and services whose provision is
supplied monopolistically to final consumers, direct regulation may be needed,
although not necessarily by the competition authority. Such regulation has to take
into account consumer interests, as well as investors’ expectations of adequate rates
of return on their investment. It may also be useful to establish certain performance
criteria (box V.1), including by using comparisons with analogous industries in other
countries as performance benchmarks.
189
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Investment liberalization and the adoption of competition laws have received impetus
from the growth of regional free trade and integration agreements. The European Union, for
example, includes the institution of a system for ensuring that competition is not distorted in
the internal market as one of the means of attaining the basic goals of the Union. Competition
is covered in the Treaty of Rome; in addition to the traditional goal of competition policy, it
aims at reinforcing the unity of the internal market by eliminating obstacles to trade resulting
from the behaviour of firms or governments. When NAFTA was created, Mexico introduced
important reforms in its investment legislation and adopted a competition law comparable to
that of its NAFTA partners. Since then, other countries in the Western Hemisphere have
concluded free-trade agreements reflecting approaches similar to NAFTA, while discussions
are proceeding on the establishment of a Free Trade Agreement for the Americas, covering,
among other things, FDI and competition matters. This process may receive further impetus in
the future. For example, at the multilateral level, the Agreement on Trade-Related Investment
Measures (TRIMs), concluded as part of the Agreement creating the World Trade Organization,
provides (in its Article 9) for the possibility, as part of its five-year review, of complementing
the Agreement with provisions on investment policy and competition policy.
Most competition laws deal with enterprise behaviour by prohibiting such restrictive
business practices as competition-restricting horizontal agreements, acquisitions and abuses of
dominant positions,10 as well as substantially restrictive vertical distribution agreements (box
V.3).11 In addition, an increasing number of competition laws deals with alterations to the
structure of markets, through the control of M&As, as well as joint ventures (hereinafter referred
to as “merger control”) aimed at avoiding the creation of dominant firms, monopolies, or even
oligopolies. In some laws, the divestment of parts of monopolies is also authorized, to change
the structure of markets.
Most competition laws contain exceptions (basically sectoral) and exemptions (in most
cases adopted in respect to categories of practices) to the application of their provisions. These
can cover, among others, labour, regulated industries (e.g., telecommunications, defence,
agriculture), small and medium-size enterprises, and certain types of cooperative arrangements,
including R&D joint ventures. The rationales behind exemptions vary. In some cases (market
failures, for example), competition and market forces are not viewed as the best tools leading
to the maximization of economic efficiency; rather, direct regulation of prices or entry is used.
A number of countries, however, are reviewing the soundness and validity of those across-the
board exemptions. The emphasis is increasingly on applying competition law to all business
practices not explicitly imposed on firms by statutory provisions. It is then the task of the
competition authority or courts to consider business practices, and focus on those
that have the highest probability of anticompetitive effects and the least justification based on
efficiency.
190
Chapter V
Box. V
V.. 3. Selected restrictive business practices addressed by competition law
There are four main types of business practices that can have anticompetitive effects: practices
undertaken by a single firm (when a firm enjoys a dominant position); anticompetitive mergers and
acquisitions; horizontal restraints (i.e., arrangements between competitors to restrain competition) and
vertical restraints (anticompetitive arrangements between firms along the production-distribution chain).
Horizontal and vertical restraints include the following arrangements, which can be undertaken individually
or in combination:
Horizontal restraintsa
Price fixing Competing suppliers enter into cooperative agreements regarding prices and
sales conditions.
Restraint of output Competing suppliers enter into agreements regarding output and product
quality.
Market allocation Competing suppliers allocate customers amongst themselves, who therefore
cannot benefit from competition by other suppliers.
Exclusionary practices Competing suppliers employ practices that inhibit or preclude the ability of
other actual or potential suppliers to compete in the market for a product.
Collusive tendering Competing suppliers exchange commercially sensitive information on bids
(bid-rigging) and agree to take turns as to who will make the most competitive offer.
Conscious parallelism Competing suppliers generally set the same prices, but without an explicit
agreement.
Other restraints on Generally characterized by suppliers entering into cooperative agreements
competition not to undertake certain actions of competitive value (e.g., advertising).
Vertical restraints
Exclusive dealing A producer supplies distributors and guarantees not to supply other
distributors in a given region.
Reciprocal exclusivity A producer supplies on the condition that the distributor does not carry
anybody else’s products.
Refusal to deal A supplier refuses to sell to parties wishing to buy.
Resale price maintenance A producer supplies distributors only on the condition that the distributor
sells at a minimum price set by the supplier.
Territorial restraint A supplier sells to distributors only on the condition that the distributor does
not market the product outside a specified territory.
Discriminatory pricing A supplier charges different parties different prices under similar circumstances.
Predatory pricing Suppliers sell at a very low price (or supply intermediate inputs to competitors
at excessive prices) in order to drive competitors out of business.
Premium of fers or
offers A dominant supplier offers discounts or other inducements only to certain
loyalty rebates parties on the condition they do not sell someone else’s products.
Tied selling Producers force purchasers to buy goods they do not want as condition to sell
them those they do want, or force resalers or wholesalers to hold more goods
than they wish or need.
Full-line forcing A supplier requires distributors, for access to any product, to carry all of the
supplier’s products.
Transfer pricing May involve over-invoicing or under-invoicing of intermediate inputs between
foreign affiliates. Under -invoicing can be used to facilitate predatory pricing.
Sources: UNCTAD, 1996g; Boner and Krueger, 1991, pp. 50 and 56.
a These may take the form of domestic cartels, import cartels, export cartels and international cartels.
191
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Usually, such cartel practices as price fixing, collusive tendering and market allocation are
prohibited without need for market analysis, while distribution, joint ventures and merger
agreements are assessed in a market context and increasingly under a rule-of-reason standard
taking into account the efficiencies likely to be achieved and passed on to consumers.
Competition laws apply to all firms operating in the national territory and supplying a
particular market, whether through domestic sales, imports, foreign affiliates or non-equity
forms of FDI. They do not, in principle, discriminate between national and foreign firms or
between foreign firms from different national or regional origins when it comes to competition
analysis. Competition law therefore monitors the competitive behaviour of TNCs having effects
in host countries, with a view towards ensuring that these firms (like other firms) do not abuse
dominant positions of market power; it also protects TNCs from anticompetitive practices by
national firms. On a wider geographical scale, competition law intends to prevent inefficiencies
arising from agreements designed to lessen trade or investment.
Some of these agreements can take the form of international market-allocation investment
cartels between potential rival firms in different countries. They can include promises not to
invest in certain markets or not to compete when investing. For example, in the United States
v. Diebold, Inc. case (United States, District Court for the Northern District of Ohio, 1976), the
United States antitrust prosecutors charged that Diebold, a leading United States manufacturer
of safes and bank equipment, and Chubb, the leading British firm in the same field, had agreed
to stay out of each other ’s national markets. The case resulted in the payment of criminal fines.
By their very nature, such market- allocation investment cartels restrict competition occuring
through FDI, typically to the detriment of host countries, and therefore require action on the
part of competition authorities (box V.4).
But such cases appear to be comparatively infrequent. Usually, the main interface
between competition law and FDI occurs when a foreign affiliate is established by means of a
significant merger, acquisition or joint venture. 13 This is especially the case when a large
competitor acquires another. (It should be noted, however, that most of the some 40,000 TNCs
in existence are small or medium-sized firms; a number of them, however, may be large in
relation to the markets in which they compete.) Such transactions may be examined by
competition authorities under merger-control review, especially when they occur between
competing firms, such as when the acquiring foreign investor was competing through exports
with the domestic firm it plans to acquire. They may also be subjected to anti-monopoly
192
Chapter V
provisions if they are viewed as a means to achieve or preserve a dominant market position.
Sometimes, furthermore, joint ventures may involve a market-allocation investment cartel to
restrict FDI. Countries are therefore increasingly adopting merger-control regulations. Among
countries with such regulations, four broad types can be identified, based principally upon the
territorial scope for review (annex table A.23):
The National Lead case is an instructive example of a situation in which the major worldwide
competitors in titanium pigment technology formed a series of joint ventures in new markets such as Japan,
and allocated those markets among themselves as exclusive territories. As part of the overall scheme,
National Lead signed a contract with its principal North American competitor of the day, Canadian Industries,
Ltd., under which the two companies established a Canadian joint venture, which became the beneficiary
of all present and future titanium patents of both companies.
One of the most notable cases involving market-allocation investment cartels was Timken Roller
Bearing Co., where United States Timken had agreed with its major international rival in the ball bearing
business, a British firm also called Timken, to set up a scheme pursuant to which they entered new markets
as partners (such as by creating French Timken), fixed prices in each others territories, allocated territories,
cooperated to protect each other’s markets, and participated in cartels to restrict exports.
Source: United States, Southern District Court of New York, 1945; United States, Supreme Court,
1951a (which contains the decision on the National Lead case), 1951b.
• Regulations that apply only to locally registered companies. For example, up to 1997,
the competition authority of Hungary only reviewed M&As between locally
registered companies.
• Regulations that cover acquisitions by foreign firms of domestic firms. Most countries
with merger regulations examine M&As between foreign and domestic firms, just
as they would review purely domestic M&As. This reflects the increasingly
important share of M&As that involve foreign participation. Hungary, for example,
changed its merger regulations in 1997 to cover M&As involving foreign and
domestic firms. The importance of such cases can be illustrated for Canada: foreign
firms accounted for about a third of M&As during 1971-1975, with domestic firms
accounting for the balance -- a ratio that was more than reversed by 1991-1993 (figure
V.2).
• Regulations that cover acquisitions of foreign firms by domestic firms. This aspect of merger
regulation relates to outward FDI and can be motivated by potential domestic
effects.14 For example, 6 per cent of notified mergers in Germany in 1993 were of
this nature, and 19 per cent in the United Kingdom (OECD, 1997).
• Regulations that cover M&As between foreign firms . In this case, the examination can
be motivated either by the presence of one of the merging firms in the domestic
market or, through the effects doctrine, by the potential for the merger to have anti-
competitive effects on local consumers. In Germany, 6 per cent of notified M&As in
1993 did not involve German firms (OECD, 1997). The recent European Union
challenge to the Boeing-McDonnell merger is an example of this situation.
193
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
The following Figure V.2. Foreign firms in publicly reported mergers in Canada,
analysis of how 1971-1993
competition law interacts
with FDI distinguishes
between competition rules
applying to FDI at the time
of entry and competition
rules relating to foreign
affiliates after entry. Given
the multiple interactions
between FDI, market
structure, firm behaviour
and market performance,
such a classification has
many limitations. It is
therefore intended only for
purposes of clarity and
simplicity of presentation.
i. General trends
Data from enforcing countries indicate that merger control is usually not greatly
restrictive of investments. For example, in 1987, United States officials conducted antitrust
reviews of about 2,000 M&As in which one party had a turnover exceeding $100 million and in
which more than $15 million in assets were being acquired. About 10 per cent of these
transactions were subjected to a full investigation, and about 1 per cent of them were challenged,
resulting in partial divestitures or abandonment. The percentage of international transactions
(FDI) investigated (10 per cent) and challenged (1 per cent) was about the same as for domestic
transactions (Davidow and Stevens, 1990). Similarly, the European Union has only prevented
about one transaction in a 100, and has required alteration of about 5 transactions out of each
100 during the early 1990s (Fine, 1994).
Because M&As are dependent on current stock values and are difficult to unscramble
once achieved, merger control requires a carefully calibrated system providing for prior
notification, rapid analysis, temporary injunctions and prompt decisions.15 Most countries use
turnover or other thresholds to exempt transactions unlikely to have anticompetitive effects in
order to minimize unnecessary interference and limit the number of cases screened by the
competition authorities. In this respect, countries interested in introducing merger control need
to select an appropriate threshold. Too low a threshold would overburden the competition
authorities by forcing them to review a large number of cases; too high a threshold would
allow a number of M&As with competition problems.
For these reasons, many countries with a competition-law tradition, such as the United
States and Germany, have long complemented their competition rules dealing with firm
behaviour with special provisions and procedures concerning M&As. In recent decades, this
practice has been followed by other countries which, as they adopted or strengthened their
competition laws, included merger-control regulations, sometimes under a separate statute.
The list of countries which now have merger-control provisions is growing, although it is much
194
Chapter V
shorter than the list of countries with competition laws (annex table A.23). These trends
underline the increasing importance of merger-control as a means of promoting competitive
behaviour and efficiency in an open FDI and trade environment.
At the regional level, too, merger control is gaining increasing attention. The European
Union introduced a Community-wide merger-review system in 1989 (Council of the European
Communities, 1989). To qualify for Community merger review, the aggregate turnover of the
companies involved in a transaction must exceed ECU 5 billion; and the turnover of at least
two of the companies involved must exceed ECU 250 million in the European Union. Regional
competition-law review of large concentrations has created the advantage of “one-stop shops”:
although a majority of member states of the European Union have merger-control laws of their
own, where the transaction has a “Community dimension”, it will only be reviewed at the
Community level. If a transaction’s effects will be felt almost entirely within one member
country, that country will have jurisdiction. Such a process is meant to result in there being
only one authority evaluating a transaction. Similar systems could eventually be developed
by other regional treaty organizations as well, although it is not an easy task.
The latter point has in the past given rise to some controversial rulings. For example, the
proposed merger of Davy Limited, then the largest engineering contractor in the United
Kingdom, with the United States-based energy group, Enserts Corporation (United Kingdom,
Monopolies and Mergers Commission, 1981), was rejected by the Monopolies and Mergers
Commission of the United Kingdom for three reasons (Hawk, 1995): that the Davy group would
lose its character as a British bidder on foreign markets; that the merger would unproductively
lengthen the chain of management command; and that the merger would expose the company
to United States law, in particular the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act 1977.16
The United Kingdom is not the only country to have provisions in its competition law
that allow for the consideration of national interest issues. 17 In Germany, for example, parties
to a prohibited merger can appeal the prohibition directly to the Federal Minister of the Economy
under Section 24.3 of the Act Against Restraints of Competition who may grant permission for
the merger to proceed:
"in those cases where the restraints on competition are outweighed by the overall
economic advantages of the merger, or where the merger is justified by an overriding
public interest; in this connection, the competitiveness of the participating
enterprises in markets outside of the territory of application of this Act shall be
taken into consideration... " (Rowley and Baker, 1991, p. 188).
195
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
This power was used by the Minister in permitting the merger of Daimler Benz and MBB in
1989 (Germany, Federal Cartel Office, 1989; Germany, Ministry of Economics, 1989). In this
case, the
Federal Cartel Office prohibited the merger; however, the Government of Germany overrode
the Cartel Office’s decision and permitted the merger to go forward.
In practice, a distinction can be made between vertical and horizontal M&As. Most
interventions by competition authorities occur with horizontal agreements between competitors.
A new challenge in this regard are strategic alliances, i.e., cooperative ventures that do not
involve equity arrangements. In rare cases, a major vertical acquisition (i.e., of a customer or
supplier) may lessen competition horizontally by foreclosing outlets or sources of supply, and
by raising the cost and difficulty of new entry. For instance, if a firm that has captured 40 per
cent of a market by means of exports then purchases a local chain of outlets, usually accounting
for 60 per cent of local sales, such acquisitions might enable the acquiring firm to raise its local
market share towards 60 per cent by forcing its products through the outlets it acquired.
Therefore, FDI involving the acquisition of a supplier or customer will usually be analysed in
terms of the market shares involved, the likely foreclosure of rivals, and the substitute supplies
or assets available to rivals.
There are a number of typical scenarios of horizontal cross-border M&As. The evaluation
of each case depends on whether the firms involved are competing with each other or not, and
whether the guiding principles of the competition authorities concerned emphasize potential
exercise of market power or Figure V.3. Reduction of competition in country A
dominant positions: by exporter P purchasing domestic rival T
• Inward FDI could
create competition
issues when it takes the
form of acquisition of a
firm in a market in
which that firm was
competing with the
acquiring firm prior to
the M&A. This would
occur if the acquiring
firm had exported to
the market before
acquiring a firm in the
market (figure V.3), or
if a foreign firm,
owning one firm in the
market, acquired Source: UNCTAD.
another firm in the
196
Chapter V
• Competition problems
may also occur where
one foreign firm uses
FDI to set up a major
plant in a market,
another firm does the
same thing, and then
the two foreign firms
agree to merge (or one
takes over the other),
thereby eliminating
local competition
between their two
affiliates (figure V.5).
In the case of the
merger of the Swiss
firms Ciba and Geigy, Source: UNCTAD.
the United States
Antitrust Division initiated legal proceedings because the United States affiliates
of the merging firms were substantial competitors of each other. The case was settled
by means of a consent decree obligating the newly merged firm to sell off one of the
two United States affiliates (United States, Northern District Court of Ohio, 1970).
A similar case occurred in Mexico (box V.5).
197
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
venture with Monsanto was Box V.5. Merged parent firms, merged foreign
V.5.
regarded as preventing affiliates
affiliates
Bayer ’s independent
competition in the United Just prior to liberalizing its investment rules
States market. under the NAFTA agreement, Mexico enacted its new
competition law, including a regime for merger review.
• Competition-enforcement A major ruling under the new system related to the
officials have sometimes proposed acquisition of Scott Paper by Kimberly Clark.
tried to encourage Both firms were headquartered in the United States,
greenfield investment by but each had foreign affiliates in Mexico, which had
means of merger-control captured a significant share of the Mexican paper-
prosecutions. But, as the products market. In particular, a combination of the
affiliates would have given the merged firm 67 per cent
case of the United States of the paper-napkin and towel market, and 63 per cent
Federal Trade Commission of the feminine hygiene products (pad and tampons)
v. British Oxygen market. The Mexican Federal Competition
Corporation shows, this is Commission ordered Kimberly Clark to divest two
not always easy (box V.6). major brands of napkins and towels, and three major
brands of feminine hygiene products, thus reducing
• Some cases turn on whether the resulting market shares to 50 per cent or less.
the acquiring firm will have Source : Mexico, Federal Competition
an incentive to suppress Commission, 1996.
rather than develop the
competitive potential of the firm to be acquired (box V.7).
• The merger of two foreign parent firms can sometimes create more significant
competition issues in countries other than the host or home countries of the merging
firms, i.e., in third countries. The merger of the leading suppliers of tea in the
United Kingdom and their affiliates in Pakistan, e.g., appears to have had important
implications for Kenya as a producer of tea (box V.8).
198
Chapter V
In 1988, Irish Distillers had a monopoly of the manufacture of Irish whiskey (owning all the
major brands) and was regarded as poorly performing and thus a candidate for acquisition. At the same
time, the Scottish whisky (Scotch) industry was highly concentrated, its major brands being largely owned
by three major companies, one of which was Grand Metropolitan. Grand Metropolitan launched a takeover
bid for Irish Distillers. The bid illustrates a number of complicated problems. First, although different
products, Scotch and Irish whiskey compete for the same markets, and Irish whiskey is usually regarded as
the closest substitute for Scotch. Nonetheless, Grand Metropolitan promised in its bid to invest substantial
sums in promoting Irish whiskey and developing the industry. However, historically the major Scotch
whisky producers had bought numerous competing Scottish distillers and closed them down, eliminating
brands. Ultimately, the Irish authorities blocked the merger, a
decision made easier because a third company, Pernod Ricard, was waiting in the wings to purchase Irish
Distillers.a
Prior to Grand Metropolitan’s solo takeover bid for Irish Distillers, there was a hostile takeover
bid by a consortium of all three of the large Scotch whisky distillers, Allied Lyons, Guinness (United Distillers)
and Grand Metropolitan. After Irish Distillers complained to the European authorities, this takeover bid
was the first acquisition blocked by the Commission by threat of imposing interim measures.
likely to compete in the acquirer ’s country (figure V.6). This is reflected, for example, in the
German merger guidelines (box V.9).
199
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Competition authorities
have intervened on various
occasions when outward FDI
choices made by their domestic
companies are likely to stifle a
possible source of competition
(box V.10). Countries that do are
likely to face situations in which
the same transaction is also
reviewed by other countries -- at
least by the host country in which
the transaction takes place and,
possibly, also other jurisdictions
affected by the transaction. Of Source: UNCTAD.
course, all affected countries
would want to be sure that their interests are safeguarded. There is, therefore, a tendency for a
(especially large) transaction to be reviewed by multiple jurisdictions, which involves, among
other things, subjecting the parties to a transaction to increasing uncertainty (which, in turn,
might deter desirable mergers from taking place). Moreover, individual national merger reviews
might in some instances lead to results unacceptable to the other countries having an interest
in the transaction. In such situations, the results in the first reviewing country might be met
with objections from the other countries. A number of countries have tried to resolve some of
these problems by increasing cooperation among their national competition authorities (see
below).
The guidelines on “domestic effects” issued by the Federal Cartel Office of Germany specifically
refer to outward mergers as follows:
“B. Mergers completed abroad have domestic effects if the merger affects the structural conditions for
domestic competition and if a domestic enterprise (including subsidiaries and other affiliated companies)
is a party to the merger.
1. As regards mergers effected abroad between two directly participating enterprises only (all merger
situations except for the formation of joint ventures, e.g., acquisitions of the assets or the shares of a
foreign enterprise by a domestic enterprise):
a) there are domestic effects if both enterprises were already operating in the Federal Republic before
the merger either directly or through subsidiaries, branches or importers;
b) there may be domestic effects, if only one of the enterprises was operating in the Federal Republic
before the merger but if, for instance,
/...
200
Chapter V
aa) after the merger a foreign party to the merger is likely to deliver goods to the Federal Republic
due to production links with the domestic party (preceding or subsequent production stages)
or links relating to the range of products. Where such future deliveries to the Federal Republic
are likely usually depends on whether goods of the same or similar kind are already covered
by trade between the countries involved and whether there are no technical and administrative
trade barriers to such deliveries;
bb) the know-how of a domestic enterprise is perceptibly enhanced or industrial property rights
accrue to it as a result of the merger.
2. As regards the formation of joint ventures abroad, the domestic effect primarily depends on the product
and geographical markets on which the joint venture operates. The question of when a joint ventures’s
activities have domestic effects is determined on the principles set out under B.1; in this connection
the production links and /or links affecting the range of products have to be judged by the relationship
between the joint venture and the domestic party.
Furthermore, the formation of a joint venture abroad may also have domestic effects, if
a) a foreign enterprise participating in the joint venture was already operating in the joint venture’s
field of activity with the Federal Republic before the merger or if it can be reasonably expected to
enter the market without the merger (cf. B.1.aa);
b) the domestic party to the joint venture thereby obtains additional production capacity which
perceptibly alters its capacity available for domestic supply (substitution or domestic production
destined for exportation by production abroad). In general, it is a prerequisite for a change in
capacity being perceptible that the domestic party already enjoyed a strong market position before
the merger.”
The United States challenged in 1968 the acquisition by its largest supplier of safety razors and
blades, Gillette, of the third largest European manufacturer of electric razors, Braun, on the basis that Gillete
would prevent Braun from competing vigorously in the United States market. The case was settled with a
consent decree which required Gillette to divest the right to sell Braun razors in the United States to a
company to be established.
The German competition authority prohibited, in 1993, the acquisition of the Allison Transmission
Division of General Motors by the German company Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen. This latter company
was the main supplier of gearboxes worldwide, whereas Allison was the second largest supplier in Germany
and Europe. There were only two other competitors worldwide, both with much smaller market shares. In
its decision, the Federal Cartel Office also took into account that the merged entity would have a dominant
position worldwide.
In 1996, the German company Mahle took over the Brazilian firm Metal-Leve. Both firms produced
automobile components. Mahle had a rather strong market position for special automobile components in
Germany; but as Metal-Leve had only a very small market share in Germany (less than 2 per cent), the
merger was allowed.
Sources: UNCTAD, based on OECD, 1994; United States, District Court of Massachussetts, 1968,
1975a, 1975b; Germany, Federal Cartel Office, 1993, 1996.
201
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Certain cross-border M&As might have dimensions that are specifically international,
i.e., that are not perceived purely from a host or home country perspective. For example, a
certain merger might have the effect of facilitating global oligopolistic coordination among a
limited set of producers, reducing the contestability of markets worldwide. This could be the
case if global production networks were concentrated in the hands of a small number of TNCs.
Such cases typically arise in situations in which a transaction affects product markets in which
firms compete at the regional or global level.
There have been a few cases that illustrate competition authorities’ desire to scrutinize
investments that are likely to lead to, or augment, a worldwide dominant position. Such cases
may involve inward FDI in one investigating jurisdiction and outward FDI in another. Each
jurisdiction would typically focus its review on the competitive effects of a transaction on its
national market. But, beyond that, one or more jurisdictions involved may object to the increase
in worldwide concentration (box V.11).
In this respect, a distinction should be made between M&As that affect worldwide
product markets discussed so far (and illustrated in the Aérospatiale-Alenia/ De Havilland
case) and M&As involving firms that supply multiple but segmented regional or national
markets worldwide, such as, for example, the merger between Gillette and Wilkinson Sword
which was investigated in fourteen jurisdictions (European Commission, 1992).20 In the first
type of situation, the competitive effects within national jurisdictions are indistinguishable from
worldwide effects because the market is global. In the second type of situation, the competitive
effects differ from market to market. In either case, the task of sorting out the costs and benefits
lies at present largely with national competition authorities.
Box V.1
V.11. W
.11. orldwide concentration
Worldwide
The merger case of the Aérospatiale-Alenia/De Havilland involved the proposed sale by Boeing of
the United States of a Canadian company, De Havilland to a Franco-Italian consortium, Aérospatiale-Alenia
(better known as ATR). De Havilland and ATR are the two most successful manufacturers in the world of
mid-size regional turboprop airliners, in particular the De Havilland DASH series of aircraft and the ATR
42 and 72. In certain size categories, there were, at the time of the proposed merger, no significant competitors
worldwide for the DASH and ATR 42 and 72 aircrafts. The transaction was reviewed by both the United
States and European Union merger authorities. The European Commission, acting first, blocked the merger.
Apart from its international implications, Aérospatiale-Alenia/De Havilland is considered significant as
the first merger transaction enjoined by the European Commission.
The Canadian Competition Bureau decided not to challenge the merger because of the efficiency
gains in Canada, and limited anticompetitive effects on the small Canadian market for commuter aircraft,
and because of the potential that De Havilland was a failing firm.
A recent outward FDI case was the acquisition, by Gencor Limited of South Africa and Lonrho
Platinum of the United Kingdom, of joint control of the whole of the company Impala Platinum Holdings
Limited (“Implats”). The acquisition was blocked by the European Commission after conducting an
investigation in which it concluded that the result of the operation would be the creation of a dominant
duopoly position in the platinum and rhodium market worldwide between Amplats/LPD and Implats/
LPD, as a result of which effective competition would be significantly impeded in the common market
within the meaning of Article 2 (3) of the Merger Regulation.
202
Chapter V
While the liberalization of FDI and trade regimes can be a means of promoting
competition, the possibility of anticompetitive practices by firms requires the continuous
attention of competition authorities. In fact, even in a national framework in which “trade”
and investment are fully liberalized, the possibility of such practices provides one of the
rationales for the existence of competition laws. In other words, the removal of international
barriers to trade and investment alone would not ensure competitive behaviour in all instances.
Therefore, while a FDI entry transaction may be competitively unobjectionable, or even beneficial
in itself, it may raise competition issues in the longer term. These could be because of the
existence of ancillary restraints or because FDI entry might be followed by practices that require
the attention of competition authorities (secondary effects).21 Cross-border corporate alliances
-- especially technological alliances -- raise special issues.
Asset or stock sale agreements usually provide that the seller is under the obligation not to
carry out activities or make investments in the same market in which the buyer operates.
After analyzing several cases, the Commission has ruled that these covenants are not
necessarily inconsistent with the provisions of the Federal Law of Economic Competition.
In general terms, the conclusion is that these covenants shall be valid, from a competition
point of view, provided that they are limited as to the number of parties involved, the
geographic extension, the products or services to which the covenants refer to, and the
period in which the obligation is in effect. These last elements are analysed on a case-by-
case basis, taking into consideration the structure of each market. The Commission carefully
analyses covenants not to compete for periods of more than five years, or whose purpose is
not the transfer of distribution channels or similar assets, as these types of covenants may
imply restrictions harmful to competition. The Commission reviews the justification or
efficiency of the covenants on a case-by-case basis (Mexico, Federal Competition
Commission, 1994, p. 28).
In the Brunswick/Yamaha case, a Japanese firm entered into a joint venture in the United States
with a domestic firm to develop and sell an improved outboard motor for pleasure boats. It was agreed,
however, that Yamaha would not compete with Brunswick in the United States in any product, and that
Brunswick would not use the new technology to compete with Yamaha in regard to land vehicles (e.g.,
motorcycles) propelled by such engines. The United States Federal Trade Commission invalidated the
restraints and its ruling was upheld by the reviewing court.
Source: United States, Federal Trade Court, 1981.
203
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Therefore, one of the long-term issues that competition authorities must consider in
dealing with FDI is preserving the competitive environment in their markets, including access
to such essential facilities as energy grids and telecommunications networks. The first investor
in a privatized or deregulated market may be foreign, especially if large capital sources or
special expertise are needed. Such an investor -- for straightforward commercial reasons --
takes control of the best assets for a particular line of business. These assets may be, for example,
204
Chapter V
In this respect it is useful to recall that R&D alliances encompass arrangements in which
two or more firms provide a certain degree of technical collaboration or partial integration in
R&D operations. The conclusion of a R&D alliance implies a compromise between a desire to
collaborate and the underlying intention of partners to maintain as much independence as
possible in order to take advantage of the potential results and new skills to be acquired through
the partnership. This is particularly true where partners are required to disclose certain
background information that may be necessary for the development of a given product. In the
case of horizontal arrangements involving competitors engaged in the same segment of the
205
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
market, the parties may fear that their partners will considerably strengthen their competitive
position at their own expense. A geographical partition of markets may therefore be considered
as a solution to overcome these concerns, but such an agreement would of course restrict
competition and may thus require competition-law intervention. In vertical arrangements --
where complementarities allow the benefits to be distributed according to the respective
activities and products -- this kind of situation is less likely to arise. It should be added that
alliances can also be a way for large or dominant firms to avoid competition through innovation,
by co-opting potentially innovative rivals and by controlling and slowing down the innovation
competition.
The European Commission considered that the agreement infringed Article 85(1) of the Treaty of
Rome, mainly for two reasons: it restricted individual research since parties were bound to license the
results of their own research activities related to the R&D agreement to the common entity; and the fact that
parties had to communicate their results to the joint venture and that neither of them could license the
results to third parties without the authorization of the partner had the effect of reverting each of the parties
from securing a technological advantage over the other and thereby improving its position on the market.
However, the Commission granted an individual exception on the basis that the joint research carried out
by partners might make a contribution to technological progress; it contained no restrictions on either
partners; and joint research was limited in time and scope.
Source: European Commission, 1972.
206
Chapter V
Box V.16. Main features of the exemption of R&D agreements in the European Union
V.16.
A 1984 regulation, as amended in 1992, dealing with cooperation in R&D and the exploitation of
the results of cooperative efforts, specifies the restrictions of competition that may be included in such R&D
agreements in order to allow cooperating partners to concentrate their research activities, with a view
towards improving their chances of success, and to facilitate the introduction of new products and services
to the market. The regulation recognizes that these restrictions are generally necessary to secure the desired
benefits for the partners and consumers.
Scope: The regulation covers agreements entered into between firms for the purpose of joint R&D
regarding products or processes and joint exploitation of the results of that R&D; joint exploitation of the
results of R&D of products or processes jointly carried out between the same firms according to prior
agreement; joint R&D of products or processes excluding joint exploitation of the results.a
Conditions for the grant of an exemption: In order to benefit from an exemption, R&D agreements
should meet the following conditions:
• the joint R&D activities to be carried out within the framework of a programme defining the objectives
and the field of the work;
• all partners should have access to the results of the work;
• where the agreement is limited to just joint R&D, each partner should be free to exploit the results of
the work and any pre-existing technical knowledge necessary therefore independently;
• joint exploitation should relate only to results that are protected by intellectual property rights or
constitute know-how which substantially contributes to technological or economic progress and that
the results should be decisive for the manufacture of the products or the application of the processes;
• firms charged with the manufacture of the products should be required to fulfil orders for supplies
from all partners.
Duration of the exemption and market share limitation: There are a number of limitations with regard
to the duration of R&D agreements and combined market shares of the partners:
• for non-competing firms (manufacturers of products capable of being improved or replaced by the
contract products), the exemption applies for the duration of the R&D programme and, if the jointly
exploitation is involved, for five years from the time the product is first put on the market within the
European Union;
• for competing firms (manufacturers of products capable of being improved or replaced by the contract
products), the exemption applies also for five years, but only if at the time of the agreement the partners’
combined production of the products capable of being improved or replaced by the contract products
does not exceed 20 per cent of the market for such products in the European Union or a substantial
part thereof;
• after five years, the exemption will continue to apply as long as the production of the contract products
together with the partners’ combined production of other products that are considered by users to be
equivalent in view of their characteristics, price and intended use does not exceed 20 per cent of the
total market for such products in the European union or a substantial part thereof;
• in case an agreement covers the distribution of the products subject of the joint activities, the exemption
applies only if the partners’ production of the products referred to above does not exceed 10 per cent
of the market for all such products in the European Union or a substantial part thereof.
Exempted restrictive practices: The list of main restrictions of competition that are allowed to be
included in an R&D agreement is as follows:
/...
207
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Intellectual property rights: The exemption also applies to a number of restrictive clauses involving
intellectual property rights such as:
• obligation to communicate patented or non-patented technical knowledge necessary for the exploitation
of its results;
• obligation not to use any know-how received from another partner for purposes other than the
programme and the exploitation of its results;
• obligation to preserve the confidentiality of any know-how received or jointly developed under the
programme; this obligation may be imposed even after the expiry of the agreement.
However, the exemptions do not apply to clauses that prohibit, after completion of the R&D or
after the expiry of the agreement, challenging the validity of intellectual property rights which the partners
hold in the European Union. Similarly, the exemptions do not cover clauses by which partners are required
not to grant licences to third parties to manufacture the contract products or to apply the contract processes
even though the exploitation by themselves of the results is not provided for in the agreement or could not
be carried out.
agreements (Ullrich, 1995). At the international level, licensing agreements, in particular, have
attracted attention in the framework of the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual
Property Rights (TRIPS) (Roffe, forthcoming); section 8 of this Agreement contains a set of
rules and standards regarding the control of anti-competitive practices in international licenses
(box V.17).
* * *
Most competition laws have two basic provisions, one dealing with restrictive agreements
(i.e., cartels and vertical arrangements) and one dealing with single firm conduct (i.e.,
monopolization or abuse of a dominant position). Increasingly, competition laws are
complemented by special regulations on M&As and joint ventures. These transactions often
require before-the-fact analysis and remedy, due to, among other things, the high cost of
208
Chapter V
uncertainty of ex-post facto scrutiny. Generally, the main interface between competition law
and FDI occurs when TNC entry is accomplished by means of a significant M&A, or joint venture.
Anti-competitive control of such transactions requires a carefully calibrated system providing
for prior notification, rapid analysis, temporary injunctions and prompt decisions. In this
respect, experience indicates that there are a number of typical scenarios of cross-border M&As
and joint ventures that can create competition issues. An important characteristic of current
merger-review analysis is that it focuses mainly on the effect of a transaction on the national
market in question, not on international markets. After FDI entry, competition issues may
arise in the host country that could involve TNCs. Therefore, competition authorities have a
continuing role to play in ensuring that market situations do not develop that jeopardize
competition in the economy and hinder entry by other competitors.
In connection with FDI, various licensing arrangements on the use or the exploitation of
intellectual property are often concluded between firms. These arrangements may contain restrictive clauses
or concerted practices that could affect competition in the relevant markets. Therefore, the use of intellectual
property rights in transactions among firms could, in certain circumstances, give rise to the possibility of
anticompetitive behaviour: the exclusive rights conferred by an intellectual property law may be exercised
to enhance or to abuse monopoly power by extending the protection of intellectual property rights beyond
its purpose.
How competition authorities deal with these issues depends in large part on their approach to
vertical restraints. Thus, there are large differences in the fundamental approaches to intellectual property
rights-related restrictive practices between the United States and the European Union, both with a long
experience in this area. For example, the United States Antitrust Guidelines for the Licensing of Intellectual
Property, issued by the Department of Justice and the Federal Trade Commission in 1995 (United States,
Department of Justice and Federal Trade Commission, 1995), follow the principle of dealing with intellectual
property as with any property. The competition authorities are concerned mainly with horizontal restraints,
as they are in other areas. In contrast, the European Union focuses on the control of horizontal as well as
vertical restraints (territorial, quantity or customer restrictions) imposed upon licensees or agreed upon
between them or with the licensor, respectively. The European Union’s main purpose is to control vertical
agreements that may result in a partitioning of the market. The European Union is more concerned than
United States authorities with maintaining consumer choice regarding suppliers of the same brand (intra-
brand competition).
In this context, a trend towards a certain degree of harmonization started with the TRIPS Agreement
concluded as part of the Uruguay Round of Multilateral Trade Negotiations (UNCTAD, 1996d) which also
addresses anticompetitive practices in licensing arrangements. The Agreement addresses competition issues
and refers to national legislation as far as it is concerned with policy determination and the implementation
of specific measures. It is the first international legally binding agreement in the area of intellectual property
that provides guiding principles dealing with the control of anticompetitive practices in contractual
arrangements. It allows members to take, if needed, “appropriate measures, provided that they are consistent
with the provisions of this Agreement, ... to prevent the abuse of intellectual property rights by right-holders
or the resort to practices which unreasonably restrain trade or adversely affect the international transfer of
technology” (article 40) within its main objectives, namely, the reduction of distortions and impediments to
international trade and the avoidance of barriers to legitimate trade.
/...
209
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
(Box V
V.17,
.17, cont’d.)
The Agreement makes it clear (article 40) that “nothing in this Agreement shall prevent Members
from specifying in their legislation licensing practices or conditions that may in particular cases constitute
an abuse of intellectual property rights having an adverse effect on competition in the relevant market”. It
also allows (in article 40.2) member States to “adopt, consistently with the other provisions of this Agreement,
appropriate measures to prevent or control such practices .... in the light of the relevant laws and regulations
of that Member”. It also gives examples of such practices, including exclusive grant-back conditions,
conditions preventing challenges to validity, and coercive package licensing. The Agreement is limited to
those licensing practices that exemplify the practices envisaged in this article. In other words, restrictive
practices or practices affecting technology transfer that occur outside a licensing context, such as delimitation
agreements, assignments, intellectual property clauses in R&D contracts or in cooperation agreements,
joint ventures, subcontracting arrangements, etc., as well as all unilateral conduct by enterprises enjoying
some sort of market power, are not subject to article 40 and, therefore, not subject to the international
enforcement cooperation provided in the Agreement.
Member countries seem to be bound by an obligation to provide some minimum control over
restrictive practices which, according to traditional principles, unreasonably restrain competition or adversely
affect trade. The Agreement implies the gradual development and mutual understanding of at least the
basic principles of what are generally unacceptable restrictive practices in the field of intellectual property.
The preceding section dealt with the interface between FDI and competition law and
policy issues arising from it. This section examines, from a broader perspective, what
governments could do to maximize pro-competitive effects of FDI and minimize anticompetitive
situations.
If anything, this underlines that the three dimensions of the FDI liberalization process
(UNCTAD, 1994a, chapter VII) are, indeed, inextricably linked: the reduction of barriers to FDI
and the establishment of positive standards of treatment for TNCs need to go hand in hand
with the adoption of measures aimed at ensuring the proper functioning of markets, including,
in particular, measures to regulate and control anticompetitive practices by firms.
This also underlines something else, and something more fundamental, namely, that
the culture of FDI liberalization that has grown worldwide and has become pervasive, needs to
be complemented by an equally worldwide and pervasive culture of competition, which, of
210
Chapter V
course, needs to recognize competing objectives as well (see section D below). Clear competition
policies and their enforcement can contribute significantly to the growth of such a competition
culture. In this respect, the trend in many parts of the world towards adopting or strengthening
competition laws noted earlier in this chapter (figure V.1) is important in that it suggests that a
competition culture is emerging. However, many countries are new to this practice; moreover,
the transition to more open, competition-oriented systems cannot be achieved overnight. This
transition will, especially for many governments of developing countries and economies in
transition, involve difficult political choices and the balancing of interests among many
stakeholders in the process, apart from a range of practical problems. Thus, the promotion of a
competition culture requires additional efforts, not only by national competition authorities
themselves, but also by other administrative bodies and political and civic society groups.26
When one moves from the plane of competition culture to the plane of policies, this
means also that, to maintain contestability and competition, increasingly, competition policy
should rank alongside FDI and trade policies when it comes to relevant policy instruments.
Indeed, this is part of the “necessary and enlarging” relationship between FDI liberalization
and competition law. An important effect of FDI liberalization has been to reduce greatly the
role of traditional tools, such as screening at the time of entry, closing activities to FDI and
foreign ownership restrictions. The central presumption underlying these controls was that
FDI entry should be allowed only if specifically approved by host governments. The opening
of countries worldwide to FDI, and their increasing competition to attract it, has reversed that
presumption and its underlying logic. In a world of liberalized investment regimes the priority
becomes to ensure that inward FDI stimulates efficiency gains for the host economy and,
ultimately, welfare. At the same time, countries liberalizing their investment regimes may be
concerned that they may be moving, for example, from a system of screening all take-overs of
national firms to screening none. They may also see risks of TNCs acquiring dominant positions.
Therefore, there is a need to have tools to assess the competitive effects of FDI at the time of
entry and after entry, and that function is assumed by a competition authority. Competition
policy can thus play a major role in the process of liberalization, notably by ensuring that markets
are kept as open as possible to new entrants, and firms do not frustrate this by engaging in
anticompetitive practices. In this manner, a vigorous enforcement of competition law can
provide reassurance that FDI liberalization will not leave a government powerless against
anticompetitive transactions or subsequent problems. In brief, as controls on FDI are reduced,
the role of competition policy for assessing the effects of FDI on a host country’s economy
becomes increasingly important.
When formulating their competition policies, countries need, of course, to keep in mind
that competition policy is not a substitute for FDI and trade policies, but rather that all three
are mutually supportive in the pursuit of efforts to ensure that markets function properly.27
This requires appropriate coordination between these policies, at the national and international
levels, e.g., in a sectoral context. (The 1997 WTO agreement on basic telecommunications services
shows one way in which trade and FDI liberalization, deregulation and safeguards against
anticompetitive practices can be combined -- see box V.18.) Still, to the extent that contestability
and competition considerations gain in importance in shaping policies, and the more liberal
trade and FDI policies become -- but at the same time do not always lead to contestable markets
-- competition policy becomes primus inter pares among policy instruments used to maintain
contestability and competition.
211
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
However, it must be recognized that there are few countries that have strong, well-
functioning and well-funded competition authorities, and that even in the case of those countries
that do, it took a considerable time until they had assumed an important role. It may well take
other countries many years to develop appropriate policies and establish the means to implement
them fairly and effectively. This means that, where contestability and competition are the
objective, many countries will need to continue to rely, for the foreseeable future, primarily on
FDI and trade to meet these objectives, in the context of closer integration into global markets.
The WTO negotiations on basic telecommunications illustrate how the General Agreement on
Trade in Services (GATS) can be employed to encourage a transformation away from monopoly market
structures and towards competition, the progressive elimination of restrictions on trade and FDI and the
adoption of safeguards to ensure that the benefits of commitments are not undermined by anticompetitive
practices.
On 15 February 1997, the WTO concluded nearly three years of negotiations on GATS schedules
of commitments on liberalization for basic telecommunications.a Sixty-nine governments made
commitments (contained in 55 schedules), which are annexed to the Fourth Protocol to the GATS. The
rationale for extending the negotiations beyond the Uruguay Round was to allow negotiators to take into
account the many reforms under way in national telecommunications regimes and rapid advances in
technology.
The results show how dramatically views are changing about the market structure that best serves
consumers and economic development imperatives. Public voice-telephone service and the national
telecommunications infrastructures used to provide this service were long viewed as “natural” monopolies.
In this service, however, 59 governments made commitments to allow competitive supply (defined here as
two or more suppliers, including foreign suppliers), either upon entry into force of the Protocol or on a
phased-in basis, in one or more market segments (i.e., local, long distance or international services). Twenty-
five of the 59 governments making commitments on public voice telephone, commited to phase-in
competition, meaning that liberalization would take place on the date specified in the schedule, rather than
upon the formal entry into force of the Protocol in January 1998. All but one developed country agreed to
create almost totally open market regimes in these areas. A substantial number of developing countries did
the same. The main difference was that developing countries tended more often to commit to phase-in
competition in infrastructure-based public voice telephone and were less likely than developed countries
to commit to allow the service to be provided through resale.
Other basic services have often been more easily amenable (or perhaps less politically sensitive)
to the introduction of competition. On these, 63 governments made commitments on competition in data-
transmission services; 60 granted access to cellular/mobile telephone markets; 55 opened markets for leased
circuit services (the supply of transmission capacity); and 59 committed on other types of mobile services
(such as personal communication services, mobile data or paging). Regarding newer satellite-related
communication services, 51 governments agreed to liberalize some or all types of mobile satellite services
or transport capacity, and 50 to liberalize fixed satellite services or transport capacity.
Since GATS provisions aim at progressive liberalization, they give governments the possibility to
maintain certain restrictions on their commitments, as long as these are listed in their schedules. One such
limitation, particularly relevant to FDI, involves limitations on foreign equity participation.
Forty-nine governments (out of 69 taking part in the negotiations) allow majority foreign ownership
of telecommunications service suppliers that may establish in their markets. Forty-three of these governments
have no FDI restrictions and six maintain foreign equity limitations, which nevertheless allow foreign control
(e.g., 50 per cent or higher). Limitations on foreign participation, although more
/...
212
Chapter V
common in the economies of developing countries, are not unique to them. Six of the 23 developed countries
list foreign equity limits; only three of these restrict foreign participation to a minority share, although two
permit foreign control only through indirect ownership arrangements. Three of the six economies in transition
that participated in the negotiations limit foreign ownership; one of these permits a majority foreign share.
Fifteen of the 40 developing country participants, or less than 2 in 5, limit foreign ownership to minority
share holding (49 per cent or less). Two other developing countries limiting foreign equity allow majority
control.
Often, the foreign equity limits listed in the Schedules do not apply to all basic telecommunications
services committed. Only one developed country and eight developing countries have inserted in their
Schedules foreign equity limitations applying to all basic telecommunications services. However, two
more developing countries indicated that, for the moment, the maximum level of foreign equity in all basic
service suppliers is unbound, meaning that they have reserved the right to introduce limitations at a level
that may be determined in the future.
One of the results of the negotiations was the elaboration of a common set of telecommunications
regulatory principles, called the “Reference Paper” which participants agreed to use as a guideline in taking
additional commitments. The Reference Paper deals with such matters as competition safeguards,
interconnection guarantees, licensing and the independence of regulators. It was agreed that, when
scheduling commitments based on the Reference Paper, participants were free to adopt it in whole, modify
portions of it to fit their own regulatory structures, or to commit only on some of its elements. Nevertheless,
63 of the 69 participating governments included commitments on regulatory disciplines. Of these, 57
committed to the Reference Paper in whole or with only minor modifications. Even among the six participants
that made no regulatory commitments, four undertook to introduce such commitments in the future.
The main rationale for the principles of the Reference Paper was to safeguard a competitive
balance in an environment in which new market entrants would face competition with a former monopoly,
one that would initially dominate existing network facilities and a large portion of the market. In some
respects, it builds upon obligations already existing in Articles VIII and IX of the GATS (the first dealing
with monopoly and exclusive service suppliers and the second with restrictive business practices) and in
the Annex on Telecommunications (dealing with access to telecommunications for services suppliers in
sectors where GATS-specific commitments have been undertaken). Also, to the extent that the GATS or the
Reference Paper deal with competition-related issues, they do so more in the interest of safeguarding the
integrity of GATS obligations and commitments than with the aim of establishing generalized competition
rules.b
In order to meet the concern that the GATS obligations and the Telecommunications Annex might
not provide an adequate level of discipline to prevent anticompetitive practices of monopoly and dominant
operators, the Reference Paper includes a general provision on the prevention of anticompetitive practices
by major suppliers (defined as telecommunications operators having control over essential facilities or
market dominance). It also provides some concrete examples of such practices, including anti-competitive
cross-subsidization; misusing information obtained from competitors; and withholding technical and other
commercially relevant information that other suppliers need to provide their services.
213
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
service suppliers or for its subsidiaries or other affiliates; at cost-oriented rates; in a timely fashion; sufficiently
unbundled so that a supplier need not pay for unnecessary network components or facilities; and at any
technically feasible network-termination point. Other Reference Paper provisions on interconnection call
for greater transparency and mechanisms for the resolution of disputes on interconnection with major
suppliers.
Regarding universal service, the Reference Paper’s principles recognize that governments have
the right to define the universal service obligations they wish to maintain and that these obligations are not
to be regarded as anti-competitive per se. However, they must be administered in a transparent, non-
discriminatory and competitively neutral manner and not be more burdensome than necessary to meet the
chosen universal service objectives.
The basic telecommunications commitments now included in the GATS Schedules demonstrate
not only that market access for FDI and trade has been improved substantially, but also that developing
countries have come to view making such commitments as complementary to their economic development
strategies. Governments seeking FDI in industries such as telecommunications, which they often consider
essential to development, have used the commitments to send a clear signal to potential investors of their
priorities and of their resolve to maintain a stable and hospitable investment climate in which all participants,
including new entrants, will have a fair chance to compete.
Such an enforcement agency requires well -trained professional staff. The agency should
develop a strong analytical capability in order to be able to determine the economic consequences
of alleged or potential anticompetitive practices. This, in turn, requires an appropriate budget
in order to, among other things, ensure adequate staffing and to be able to meet the costs of
training. This is all the more so given the speed with which competition cases -- especially
M&As -- need to be dealt with in order not to block unnecessarily the flow of legitimate cross-
border transactions.28
214
Chapter V
techniques can be used for this purpose. They include, most importantly, moral suasion (i.e.,
discussing a potential problem with the management of a firm whose practice might be
anticompetitive, with a view towards reaching a mutually agreed-upon solution of the problem)
and consent decrees (i.e., formal or informal agreements between an enforcement agency and a
firm to the effect that, if the firm will undertake certain steps or desist from certain practices,
the agency will not seek further redress through prosecution). Such “soft” approaches to
competition-law enforcement can be quite effective, especially if they are buttressed by the
possibility that, if a mutually satisfactory solution between the enforcement agency and the
relevant firm cannot be reached, there remains the possibility of prosecution. If “soft” approaches
to the enforcement of a specific case fail to work, the enforcement agency must be prepared to
prosecute the case, using strong remedies for egregious and clear violations, but milder remedies,
such as prohibiting future violations, in difficult, precedent-setting cases. Both the review of
cases by the competition authority and prosecution of cases should be subject to some time
limits, especially with respect to M&As. In many countries, moreover, firms have the right to
initiate action; the threat of complaints by affected private actors could have an important
dissuasive effect regarding potential anticompetitive practices.
Enforcement of competition law should therefore be vigilant but not dogmatic. Indeed,
because some issues of competition policy are in “grey” areas and subject to the merits of the
case involved, many areas of the law might need to be enforced on a “rule-of-reason” basis. If
subject to a “rule-of-reason” standard, a particular business practice would neither be per se
legal nor illegal but, rather, legality would be a function of its effect. Applying a rule-of-reason
standard, however, increases the risk of arbitrariness in competition decisions.
• Closely related to this is that the efficiency gains that can be associated with corporate
integrated international production systems need to be balanced against any
anticompetitive effects of the relevant transactions for the markets supplied by these
systems. In other words, FDI transactions involving M&As or joint ventures
215
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
As discussed above, FDI can be as important as trade in making markets more competitive. In
evaluating the likely consequences of M&As or other market conduct, competition authorities would be
expected to consider FDI and trade at different stages of their analysis. The United States approach to these
issues is described below. The somewhat different analytical frameworks used by other competition
authorities are also capable of giving full consideration to the competitive significance of FDI.
The impact of trade on competitive conditions is often an important factor in defining the relevant
geographic market within which to assess the likely effects of a merger. The importance of trade to this
market-definition process is obvious when one recalls that the purpose of the process is to delineate the area
containing the firms or (plants) from which customers of the merging firms could obtain supplies if the
merging firms attempted to restrict output and raise price. The United States and some other countries
define relevant geographic markets using economic principles regardless of the size of the market; but in
some other countries, the competition law is interpreted to prevent consideration of a relevant geographic
market that is larger than the area circumscribed by a country’s national boundaries, although imports may
enter at one stage of the analysis.
Foreign direct investment entering a market (through the establishment of new production
facilities) is not part of the market-definition process, but -- like imports from outside the geographic market
-- it is relevant to whether a merger is likely to be anticompetitive. Under the United States system, firms
not producing or selling the relevant product in the geographic market will be treated as if they were in the
market if they would be likely to have a sufficient “supply response”. This supply response can result from
use of existing assets to produce or sell in the relevant market, or it can result from new investment: “the
construction or acquisition of assets that enable production or sale in the relevant market” (United States,
Department of Justice and Federal Trade Commission, 1992, at 1.32). No matter what the source of the
potential supply response (trade or investment, domestic or foreign), the supply response will be considered
at this stage -- as if it had already occurred -- only if it is likely to occur within one year and without the
expenditure of significant sunk costs at entry and exit. In many industries, supply responses through FDI
(or other investment) will not meet this requirement, because even if the supply response could in theory
occur in time, the investment may be “sunk” (recoverable only through sales in the relevant market) and
“significant” (not recoverable within one year). Of course, if a likely future supply is not so quick and not
likely to be (treated as) already deemed part of the market, its competitive significance is fully considered at
a later stage in the competition analysis -- the assessment of the ease and likelihood of entry.
Source: UNCTAD.
216
Chapter V
During 1996, the United States Federal Trade Commission held extensive public hearings, leading
to a report entitled “Competition Policy in the New High-Tech, Global Marketplace.” The Commission
concluded that global competition is expanding at a rapid rate and that innovation is a crucial element of
such competition. In particular, the Commission found that:
“In general, U.S. businesses are now confronting increasingly stiff competition as a result of the
“globalization” of trade. Domestic firms face a greater number of foreign competitors in their home
markets and are under pressure to expand their operations abroad. In this global marketplace, U.S.
businesses stress both the importance of achieving efficiencies -- that is, cost savings -- and the importance
of entering new markets, whether to attract new foreign customers or to remain competitive for their
U.S. customers now doing business around the world. Mergers and other collaborative ventures are
sometimes the vehicles they use to achieve these goals. Given this hearings' testimony and current
research on these trends, it is timely to reassess certain aspects of competition policy toward mergers
and collaborative ventures to ensure that procompetitive, efficiency-enhancing transactions are permitted”
(United States, Federal Trade Commission, 1996, S. 5-6).
After noting that effective, consistent, sensible competition law enforcement is a necessary and desirable
framework for continuing the development of global markets, the Commission in its policy conclusions
regarding competition enforcement in this new globalized era (S. 8-9) emphasized, among other things,
that:
• There should be further development of an efficiencies justification for mergers or joint ventures.
• Relevant geographic markets should be defined to include foreign supply response as appropriate,
giving due regard both to actual barriers to trade and to the increasing trend towards the globalization
of trade and services.
• Major mergers should be examined in terms not only of whether they eliminate competition as to
existing products but also to whether they will significantly lessen innovation competition for the
creation of substitute products.
In April 1997, the United States amended the country’s Merger Guidelines to take into account
the conclusion pertaining to efficiency considerations.
2. International cooperation
217
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
• Information
Information. Even in a simple example of FDI by means of an acquisition,
competition authorities in the acquired firm’s country will probably need documents
from the acquired firm’s headquarters in order to analyse the purpose and effect of
a deal. Usually, the foreign firm seeking clearance for the transaction supplies the
non-local information voluntarily. But it is important that sending such information
abroad be legal under the law of the country where the data are located. If foreign
information is needed beyond that controlled by the firm applying for the
competition-law clearance, it may become necessary for the host country to ask the
home country to obtain it, even by use of compulsory means. This can be
accomplished by treaty, such as the agreement between the Government of the
United States of America and the Government of Canada on Mutual Legal Assistance
in Criminal Matters that provides for such cooperation in criminal cases (Hachigian,
1995, p. 129), or the Agreement between the Government of the United States of
America and the Commission of the European Communities Regarding the
Application of Their Competition Laws.31
Cooperation even with regard to public information gathering may be very helpful
to competition authorities. The difficulties confronting a competition enforcer,
especially in developing countries, in seeking to obtain even the most elementary
public information and data in another country should not be underestimated. In
some instances, information that might take one competition official weeks to obtain
and collate is easily obtainable by a competition official in another country.
(b) Obstacles
i. Impediments to information access
218
Chapter V
authorities in host countries may find it very difficult to obtain jurisdiction to compel the release
of certain information. As noted before, Australia and the United States have enacted laws that
allow for information sharing under certain circumstances and conditions (Varney, 1995, p. 4),
but Canada recently abandoned efforts to secure such a law, and there has been very limited
activity elsewhere.
Second, the activities being investigated in one jurisdiction may have been encouraged
by a government in another jurisdiction, either through advice from a competent government
agency, or by explicit legal provisions. For example, many developed countries (including
France, Germany, Japan and the United States) have legal provisions allowing for the creation
of export cartels targeting foreign markets (OECD, 1996d). Such cartels are allowed if they
have no adverse effects on the domestic economy because countries regard them as enhancing
the export performance of their firms or because they may lack constitutional authority to
regulate them. Many of the arrangements covered by these exemptions may, in fact, be joint
ventures that would be legal in any event; but for some, the legalized activities are simply
cartels. One notable case involving export-trading cartels was the European Wood Pulp in
which the European Commission issued a Decision under Article 85(1) whereby 40 producers
of market wood pulp located in Canada, Finland, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden and the
United States and three of their trade associations were found to have restricted price competition
(by means of concerted practices and exchanges of information) in the European Union and
had hindered trade between its member states between 1973 and 1981 (European Commission,
1984b). This case was also noted because, even though none of the producers in the wood-pulp
export cartel were located within the territory of the European Union, the Commission applied
something akin to the effects doctrine insofar as the cartel’s restrictive effect was affecting
competition in the European Union (Nicolaides, 1994, p. 20; Utton, 1995, p. 310).34 Besides
these regulatory overlaps, there are also regulatory gaps, as in the case of international cartels
which may simply fall outside the scope of most competition authorities.
Finally, many governments simply may not see it in their country’s interest to facilitate
a foreign state’s investigation of one or more of their companies. This may particularly be the
case where a company is wholly or partially state-owned. However, even when a company is
not state-owned, a government may be disinclined to cause problems for a major national
company, especially where the activities complained of have no domestic consequences.
Difficulties can also arise from diverging national approaches with respect to what the
appropriate substantive standards for competition policy are in some areas. To a large extent,
this is the result of competing policy and social objectives of countries, especially where
development objectives are of primary importance. For example, certain approaches to
competition law could specifically aim at addressing particular development objectives, e.g.,
to foster enterprise development. Likewise, developed countries may take different approaches
to competition to pursue their particular objectives (e.g., to promote technological innovation
219
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
by exempting R&D alliances from competition), although most developed countries now take
the view that economic efficiency and consumer welfare, rather than any particular social or
economic objective, is the paramount objective of competition law. Much turns therefore on
the question of what is considered “anticompetitive”. For example, do exclusive contracts
between a supplier of intermediate goods and a manufacturer of final goods embodying these
intermediate goods foreclose sales of competing suppliers in a way that could be considered
“anticompetitive”? In the eyes of some countries, for example, long-run relationships between
large firms and their suppliers can constitute an objectionable anticompetitive practice, because
they inhibit entry into the relevant industry by alternate suppliers, including foreign firms
seeking to invest in a particular country. On the other hand, the competition laws of most
countries would not consider vertical agreements anticompetitive unless they created or
maintained market power and the resulting anticompetitive effects were not offset by
procompetitive efficiencies, e.g., allowing supplier and manufacturer to undertake
complementary research that would not be economic in the absence of such a long term mutual
commitment. There is no single and unequivocal approach to these issues. Indeed, under United
States antitrust law, such contracts would be subject to a “rule-of-reason” standard (i.e., they
would not be seen as per se illegal, but under certain circumstances they might be ruled illegal).
On the other hand, such “vertical restraints” as exclusive dealing and tied selling have
traditionally been dealt with more stringently under European Union law than under United
States law (Boner and Krueger, 1991).35 Indeed, for more than thirty years, vertical restraints
have been of particular importance to the European Union’s competition policy and law, but,
under current economic thinking, market structure is determinant for establishing the
anticompetitive effects of vertical restraints.
On matters of enforcement, competition laws likewise often differ. For example, there
are a few hard core violations of competition law (e.g., certain horizontal cartels) that may be
treated as criminal offenses in the United States, but only as civil-law infringements in the
European Union (Boner and Krueger, 1991).36 There are also related differences among agencies
as far as powers of “discovery” are concerned (i.e., powers of competition-policy enforcement
officials to obtain evidence from individuals or companies against their will). As noted before,
in extreme situations, differences in jurisdictional standards have led countries to pass “blocking
statutes”.
220
Chapter V
Table V.1. Selective list of bilateral and regional arrangements dealing with competition-policy issues
Common Common
Name of the arrangement Yeara Type Cooperation rulesb authority
221
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Some cooperation agreements have proved to be quite successful. In the context of the
Canada-United States Mutual Legal Assistance Agreement, for example, a joint investigation
led to the prosecution of New Oji Paper Ltd. and the levying of $2.6 million in fines against Oji
Paper and two other companies between 1994 and 1996 in Canada (Canada, Federal Court
(Trial Division), 1996). Similarly, the experience of cooperation between the European Union
and the United States under their 1991 agreement has been positive. In total, from September
1991 to the end of 1996, 194 cases were notified by the European Commission, and 200 by the
United States authorities.
At the same time, given the increasingly regional and global operations of firms, the
question arises as to whether bilateral approaches alone can address adequately all pertinent
concerns.
• Regional level
level. Cooperation efforts at the regional level often take place in the
context of regional economic integration schemes, which allow approaches and trade-offs that
may be more difficult to pursue in other settings. The most integrated here is the European
Union. Under the Treaty of Rome, the European Commission is authorised to administer
competition policy, including regulation and control of M&As throughout the Union, in matters
relating to commerce among the member states. Specifically, the European Commission is
entrusted with the application of Articles 85 (dealing with cartels), 86 (dealing with abuse by a
firm of a dominant market position), and several other articles of the Treaty of Rome dealing
with state aids to industries and regions. These powers were extended in 1989 to mergers with
a Community dimension. The authority of the Commission is subject to size thresholds: it
reviews only M&As involving very large firms. Naturally, a necessary condition for pursuing
this approach is that national competition laws be in conformity with the regional law. In this
respect, the tendency in the European Union has been for member countries to bring national
laws and policies closer to European Union law and policy, although those laws still vary
considerably. The norm is that Community rule takes precedence over national rulings. Finally,
the decisions of the Commission are subject to appeal to the Court of First Instance of the
European Court of Justice.
In addition, arrangements are also made within the European Union for agencies to
share information more readily. For example, Article 10 of the European Union Council
Regulation 17/62 (Council of the European Communities, 1962), the Union’s basic competition
procedure, establishes the rules for cooperation between the European Commission and the
national competition authorities of the member states in respect of cases pending with the
European Commission, while Article 20 binds both the Commission and the national authorities
to keep the information secret.
The Andean group is another example of a regional organization that deals with
anticompetitve business practices. Decision 285 of the Commission of the Cartagena Agreement
222
Chapter V
allows member countries, or their companies having a legitimate interest, to request the Andean
Group Board to apply measures to prevent or correct damage to production or exports caused
by business practices that restrict free competition within the subregion. The Decision specifies
the types of business practices that are understood to restrict free competition, and spells out
the procedures to be followed to address such practices or their effects (Commission of the
Cartagena Agreement, 1991).
In the OECD, efforts to cooperate on restrictive business practices began in 1967. The
most recent instrument (adopted in 1995) strengthens previous provisions and, in particular,
calls on member countries to make best efforts in the following aspects (UNCTAD, 1996d):
The same Council recommendation sets out detailed guiding principles for the
implementation of notifications, exchanges of information, cooperation in investigations and
proceedings, consultations and conciliation of anticompetitive practices affecting international
trade. Finally, it recommends that these principles be taken into account in bilateral cooperation
arrangements.
Efforts are also being made in the context of other regional agreements such as the North
American Free Trade Area (NAFTA) (UNCTAD, 1996d). In chapter 15, NAFTA members have
agreed to maintain national measures to prohibit anticompetitive firm behaviour, but mutually
agreed competition rules are not included. The same chapter commits members to establishing
a working group to make recommendations on appropriate further work on the relationship
between competition policy and trade in the NAFTA area, and to consult from time to time
about the effectiveness of their competition policies, and cooperate on issues such as notification
and exchange of information. Also, MERCOSUR envisages cooperation on competition policy,
including with a view towards establishing mechanisms of consultation, information exchange
and the joint investigation of anticompetitive practices (European Commission, 1996b, p. 3). 38
The Energy Charter Treaty (UNCTAD, 1996d) calls for the adoption of competition laws and
policies and for cooperation on exchange of information and consultation among the signatory
223
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
countries. In the context of the Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC), a dialogue has
started with a view towards developing cooperative approaches in the area of competition-
policy. Most of these efforts are nascent, and only time will tell whether and what concrete
developments ensue.
The UNCTAD Set, in its section dealing with measures at the international level, provides
for consultation procedures whereby a country may request a consultation with other countries
in regard to issues concerning the control of such practices. These consultations are intended to
prevent or avoid conflicts arising from such situations. Given the Set’s non-binding nature, its
institutional machinery could not act as a tribunal or pass judgement on the activities or conduct
of individual governments or of individual enterprises in connection with specific consultations.
An important characteristic of the Set -- in addition to its broad membership -- is that it
specifically provides for preferential treatment for developing countries. This is intended to
ensure that concerns of developing countries are fully taken into account.
While GATT/WTO agreements focus on governmental measures and actions, and they
do not regulate anticompetitive practices by firms, a number of provisions are particularly
relevant for competition policy in that they deal with practices of enterprises that may distort
or impede international trade and with what governments are allowed or required to do to
regulate or remedy such practices.39
So far, the most direct link between the provisions of GATT agreements and firm
anticompetitive practices is provided by Article IV (anti-dumping and countervailing duties).
Antidumping practices sanctioned under this article are inconsistent with the goals of
competition policy. Other GATT provisions have relevance for competition as they affect market
access (e.g., provisions on national treatment (Article III), elimination of quantitative restrictions
(Article IX), state-trading enterprises (Article XVII), and nullification and impairment (Article
XXIII)).40 Furthermore, several of the most recent WTO agreements (WTO, 1995) address private
practices: the Agreement on Technical Barriers to Trade (which relates not only to government
rules but also to the standard-setting activities of non-governmental bodies); the Agreement on
Government Procurement (which deals with practices of public enterprises); and several
provisions in the General Agreement on Trade in Services (e.g., the provisions on monopolies
and exclusive service suppliers which require that these suppliers not abuse their monopoly
position outside the scope of their monopoly), supplemented further by relevant provisions of
the agreement on basic telecommunications services completed in 1997 (box V.18). The TRIMS
Agreement (UNCTAD, 1996d, Article 9) deals with investment performance requirements that
restrain trade and provides that consideration be given to whether “the Agreement should be
complemented with provisions on investment policy and competition policy”. The TRIPS
Agreement (UNCTAD, 1996d) requires members to cooperate on “control of anti-competitive
practices in contractual licences”. The Agreement provides
224
Chapter V
In 1980, after almost ten years of negotiations, agreement was reached in UNCTAD on a voluntary
code of conduct on competition: the Set of Multilaterally Agreed Equitable Principles and Rules for the
Control of Restrictive Business Practices.
The Set’s first objective is to ensure that restrictive business practices (RBPs) do not impede or
negate the realization of benefits that should arise from the liberalization of tariff and non-tariff barriers
affecting world trade, particularly those affecting the trade and development of developing countries. It
also seeks to attain greater efficiency in international trade and development through, inter alia, promoting
competition, control of concentration of economic power and encouragement of innovation. Moreover, it
aims at protecting and promoting social welfare in general and, in particular, the interests of consumers.
Under section C of the Set, which spells out the multilaterally agreed principles for the control of
RBPs, the specific needs of developing countries, and in particular the least developed, are taken into
account, as it was agreed that “in order to ensure the equitable application of the Set of Principles and Rules,
States, particularly developed countries, should take into account in their control of restrictive business
practices the development, financial and trade needs of developing countries, in particular of the least
developed countries, for the purposes especially of developing countries in:
“(a) Promoting the establishment or development of domestic industries and the economic development
of other sectors in the economy, and
“(b) Encouraging their economic development through regional or global arrangements among developing
countries”(para.7).
Section D of the Set (para.1) states that “enterprises should conform to the restrictive business
practices laws, and the provisions concerning restrictive business practices in the laws of the countries in
which they operate, and, in the event of proceedings under these laws, should be subject to the competence
of the courts and relevant administrative bodies therein”. Paragraphs 3 and 4 of section D deal with the
main types of RBPs that enterprises should refrain from. Concerning intra-firm transactions between different
entities of a TNC, while paragraph 3 excludes enterprises “when dealing with each other in the context of
an economic entity wherein they are under common control, including through ownership, or otherwise
not able to act independently of each other”, paragraph 4 covers all enterprises which “through an abuse or
acquisition and abuse of a dominant position of market power... limit access to markets or otherwise unduly
restrain competition”. This same paragraph goes on to list practices in this respect, which include predatory
behaviour towards competitors and “discriminatory (i.e. unjustifiably differentiated) pricing or terms or
conditions in the supply or purchase of goods or services, including by means of the use of pricing policies
in transactions between affiliated enterprises which overcharge or undercharge for goods or services
purchased or supplied as compared with prices for similar or comparable transactions outside the affiliated
enterprises”.
Section E, addressed to States, calls for the adoption and effective enforcement of appropriate
competition legislation and implementing judicial and administrative procedures. Section E further calls
for exchange of information and cooperation in proceedings, subject to confidentiality safeguards. Finally,
Section F provides for consultation procedures and technical cooperation for developing countries.
Source: UNCTAD, 1996d, pp.133-144. Also reproduced in this publication is the Resolution
Adopted by the Conference Strengthening the Implementation of the Set.
225
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
for consultations between members where there is reason to believe that licensing practices or
conditions pertaining to intellectual property rights constitute an abuse of these rights and
have an adverse effect on competition in the relevant market (Article 40). The cooperation is
limited to the supply of publicly available non-confidential information of relevance to the
matter in question.
As this brief review of existing cooperation arrangements shows, the need for
international cooperation has been recognized, and some progress in this respect has been made
at all levels. Still, more could be done.
3. Looking ahead
The most important areas in which further progress needs to be made concerns
cooperation on information exchange and the enforcement of competition laws. Indeed, the
UNCTAD Set calls for the institution of improved procedures for obtaining information from
enterprises (including TNCs) and the establishment of appropriate mechanisms at the regional
and subregional levels, to promote exchange of information on restrictive business practices
and to assist each other in this area. The Review Conference of the Set provides a forum in
which efforts in this respect can be pursued.
Countries that have not yet done so may need to conclude bilateral competition
cooperation agreements with their major investment and trading partners. The laws of many
countries prevent some kinds of information-sharing; but, even so, it could be useful for such
agreements to provide for the exchange of information subject to existing laws. Regional
agreements, too, could provide for exchange of information and encourage cooperation. While
progress in this respect does not necessarily lead to a harmonization of competition laws, it
tends to contribute to an increasing convergence of approaches to competition policy.
For positive comity to work best, it would also be desirable that there be some element
of mutual recognition of outcome. Thus, in the example above, the authorities of the country
which initiated a complaint could consider abiding by the outcome of the investigation of the
authorities of the other country and accepting the remedy arrived at by these authorities. (Of
course, during the process of investigation and determination of outcome, there might be
consultation between the authorities involved.) For this to be at all effective, it is clear that
there must be a strong element of trust among the authorities of the relevant countries. At the
same time, adopting positive comity and recognizing outcomes among countries with different
levels of development may require a previous process of approximation on competition-policy
stands, objectives and approaches, something that would take some time to achieve.
Even if this approach should prove to be successful, the question arises whether the
international community requires more than expanded bilateral and regional cooperation to
sustain the rapid regionalization and globalization of markets and production structures,
especially under conditions in which the liberalization of FDI and trade policies make it all the
more important that statutory obstacles are not replaced by anticompetitive practices of firms.
226
Chapter V
It is a question that, by its very nature, has broad implications, given the desirability of
attributing a more prominent role to competition policy in a liberalizing and globalizing world
economy. And it is a question that will most likely receive increasing attention in the future.
Two situations generally motivate governments to take a more active role in markets:
one is when markets tend naturally towards high levels of concentration; the other is when
market outcomes
conflict with other policy objectives. In both cases, rather than protecting the competitive process
through competition law, governments usually choose to regulate markets in one form or another.
A characteristic of virtually all economic activity is that, for entry to occur in a market,
certain costs must be incurred on an “up-front” basis. These can include the costs of establishing
production or distribution capabilities. They can also include, in some industries, the costs
associated with establishing a reputation, including advertising and promotional expenses. To
the extent that these costs are necessary and unrecoverable (should the supplier decide to exit
the activity) the costs must be considered as “sunk” and,42 as such, they affect the relative ease
of entry in an activity. If the magnitude of these sunk costs is so high (relative to the size of the
market) that no more than one producer can supply the relevant market and reasonably expect
to amortize the costs, the activity is termed a “natural monopoly” (Boner and Krueger, 1991, p.
10). 43
227
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
advantage to incumbent suppliers, but the advantage is not so great as to preclude new entry
altogether. The most likely scenario for new entry in industries with high sunk costs is that the
potential new entrant has some advantage not possessed by the incumbent firms, such as a
proprietary technology enabling lower production costs or superior variants of a product or
service. As discussed in chapter IV, TNCs are sometimes in such a position, and may also be
able to enter previously concentrated markets. However, it remains that “natural” factors can
make some national markets, to a greater or lesser degree, difficult to contest. These include:
• Risk costs . Where sunk costs are particularly high and a particular economic activity
is characterized by high levels of risk, a certain level of concentration in the market
might be necessary for an economic activity to be viable from a business perspective.
This has often been the argument put forward to competition authorities by
companies seeking to cooperate more closely (or to merge), usually in areas relating
to R&D, with a view towards sharing risk costs. The development of jet engines
and commercial aircraft present examples of “bet-the-company” risks that owners
seek to avoid by means of temporary or permanent alliances, many of which are
screened by competition authorities.
One of the antidotes to markets that tend to be naturally concentrated due to the above
factors involves increased entry into the relevant market for the products of these kinds of
industries through market opening measures, especially investment and trade liberalization.45
This is particularly important for countries whose internal markets are small. When a small
economy (and in some instances even a large economy) is closed to international competition,
the potential for natural concentration is much more significant.46 However, in some cases,
market enlargement through liberalization is politically difficult to achieve.47
A partial answer to the question of whether there are limitations to competition is,
therefore, that there are indeed some limitations imposed by the very nature of certain economic
activities. But even with respect to these activities, it may often be possible to increase
competition by, for example, separating the “natural monopoly” activities from activities that
are potentially competitive. Once all such possibilities have been considered, the policy question
becomes how governments can minimize the negative economic effects that can be associated
with limited competition.
Therefore, where markets are natural monopolies, regulation is needed to prevent abuses
of dominant positions of market power by the seller, e.g., the setting of prices well above
marginal costs and restricting output so as to generate higher rents. While regulation becomes
important in these cases, governments need to ensure that regulation serves the purposes that
it is meant to serve. One danger that they need to guard against is the possibility of “capture”,
i.e., regulators may come to serve the interests of the firms they are regulating instead of the
interests of consumers. Another concern relates to the appropriate scope of regulation. Natural
monopolies can exercise considerable market power, both upstream and downstream in their
value chains. This can result in the extension of market power of a given natural monopoly
into related markets which are not themselves natural monopolies (e.g., the operator of an
228
Chapter V
electricity transmission network could enter the electricity-production business and foreclose
competition in this activity by not permitting competing producers access to the transmission
network, which, in this case, is an essential facility). For example, some parts of
telecommunications networks exhibit natural monopoly characteristics (Armstrong and Doyle,
1995, p. 2), but the selling of peripheral equipment (telephone handsets, modems, etc.) does
not, nor does the selling of “value-added” services over the telecommunications network. In
many such cases, competition policy can play a role, especially with respect to containing or
even reducing the scope of natural monopolies, ensuring adequate access to essential facilities
and generally aiming at reducing their potentially harmful effects.
2. Competing objectives
But there are also broader limitations, resulting from competing objectives, among which
the development objective takes pride of place. Indeed, governments are often (if not always)
faced with having to choose between competing objectives, and a number of these can conflict
with the market outcomes that would be generated by reasonably competitive markets. These
conflicts are more frequent in developing countries.
For example, where foreign exchange is temporarily in limited supply, certain import
restrictions might be needed -- thus limiting contestability -- to ensure that critical imports are
not disrupted, e.g.,
that foreign exchange reserves are used for machine parts instead of luxury goods. Or, where a
country is characterized by dispersed rural communities, the market will often not provide
these with certain basic services (such as roads, telecommunications services and railways); in
these cases, governments might need to ensure that certain services reach segments of the
national market which otherwise could not support such services. They could do so, for instance,
by providing the services through state-owned enterprises or, where private operators are
involved, by providing these with market power so that services in less-economically viable
markets can be cross-subsidized from profits earned in larger segments of the market.48 A
policy alternative to consider in such a case would be more direct government involvement in
the form of subsidized provision of the services in question. The decision in this case -- whether
to allow concentration combined with cross subsidization or to provide subsidies -- would
involve a careful consideration of the quite different trade-offs associated with these two options
(possibly less efficiency in the market, on the one hand, versus a direct budgetary expense on
the other).
It should be noted that these dilemmas -- and the need for more active government
intervention in markets they might entail -- do not occur in developing countries alone.
Governments of developed countries, in similar situations, also see the need to correct market
outcomes through various regulatory or competitiveness-enhancing measures (table V.2). For
example, recognizing the structural disadvantages faced by small and medium-sized enterprises
relative to their larger counterparts, many countries exempt the former from competition rules
below certain thresholds and/or provide them with special assistance.
229
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
If anything, this issue is even more relevant in developing countries, due to their
particular characteristics. For example, if the competitive disadvantages of small and medium-
sized enterprises are judged a reason for giving special treatment to such firms in developed
countries, this may be even more so the case for many firms in developing countries, considering
that most of them are small and medium-sized enterprises and that all of them face the structural
disadvantages of their economies, especially in the context of liberalization and heightened
international competition. This may require that firms in developing countries are given public
support, e.g., to ensure that they have adequate access to finance and have opportunities for
learning-by-doing, so that they are competing on a level playing field and have an opportunity
to move up the learning curve of international competition.
Table V.2. Selected exclusions from competition laws, selected OECD countriesa
Canada B B P SG P P No No P P P
France B No P P No P No No n.a. n.a. n.a.
Germany B No P P P P R No P P P
Hungary B No P R R P P P P P P
Japan B P P P P P P P P P P
Mexico B No No R R P No No P No No
Portugal B No P R n.a. B No No No No No
United Kingdom B No P R P P P P P No P
United States B P P R P P No No P No P
European Union B No P P P P No No P P No
230
Chapter V
In general, these forms of selective government intervention in the market are meant to
address the particular characteristics of developing countries. They involve creating the proper
policy mix aimed at defining the rules of competition, on the one hand, and undertaking
measures to assist and encourage the building up of domestic capabilities, on the other hand. 49
Indeed, the key issue is to help domestic firms to participate effectively in international
competition and to move up the value-added chain. Of course, finding the appropriate forms
of government involvement depends, among other things, on the level of development, which
varies from country to country and industry to industry; they can also change over time and in
light of other competing objectives; they need to be targeted as narrowly as possible since any
trade-offs in terms of economic efficiency should be minimized; and they are often difficult to
implement exactly in the manner in which they are thought to bring about the desired benefits.
Hence, while market intervention is needed to promote development, it is very difficult, indeed,
to define general criteria for determining the type and scope of such intervention, in particular
where alternative policy options exist. In any event, the main emphasis should remain on
establishing, where possible, competitive and fair markets which provide a level playing field
for domestic as well as foreign firms; only where this is not viable, governments need to take a
more active approach vis-à-vis markets.
Apart from development objectives, there are a number of other objectives that may not
be well served by market forces and that therefore may motivate governments to play a more
active role in markets. These include:
• Protecting labour rights . A fully market-driven national labour market would have
no minimum wages, would not allow unionization or other forms of cooperative
labour agreements, would not necessarily prohibit indentured servitude (a form of
slavery based upon contracts) and would probably not impose regulations relating
to the quality and safety of the work environment upon firms. Most societies have
therefore recognized the need to regulate national labour markets because market
forces would give rise to outcomes that neither governments nor societies find
desirable.
231
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
• Protecting property rights. Where property rights are either not protected, or are
simply not clear, competition for the property in question can give rise to inefficient
outcomes. Governments therefore intervene in markets in various ways to protect
property rights. A prime example concerns intellectual property rights. 50 Such
rights, as embodied in patents, trademarks and copyrights, are protected because it
is felt that granting such protection is needed to provide the incentives required to
encourage further innovation and a high rate of commercialization of inventions.
In sum, there are a number of instances in which other objectives may require careful
and selective government intervention in the operation of markets. In some cases, the
undesirable outcomes are due to market failures, e.g., the failure of the market to reward
innovation in the absence of government intervention to protect the latter, or the failure of the
market to provide adequate education or health care. Market failures, which can be encountered
in all markets, are prone to exist more acutely in developing countries, and especially in the
least developed countries. Indeed, many of the characteristics of underdevelopment relate in
some form or another to market failures. In other cases, the undesirable outcomes are due to
the failure of the market to serve particular objectives, e.g. national security. In these instances,
232
Chapter V
governments intervene in markets through various forms of regulation to ensure that competing
social objectives are met.
At the same time, policies put in place for that purpose need to be formulated carefully
to achieve the desired objectives,51 and it should be recognized that such policies often come at
the expense of reducing economic efficiency. Furthermore, a clear distinction needs to be drawn
between undesirable market outcomes that relate to competition and those that relate to the
interaction of markets and government policies. Indeed, within the context of the inextricable
relationship between government policies and the functioning of markets, it becomes difficult
to identify “pure” market failures. Rather, in many instances, market failures reflect a particular
interaction between policies and market forces that give rise to undesirable outcomes (such as,
for example, when a market that does not have natural monopoly characteristics is treated by
policy makers as if it does, in which case a second best solution is adopted when the first best
solution was available).
***
The main message of this concluding section is that there are, indeed, limitations to
competition especially where market forces do not bring the desired results. This is especially
the case in developing countries.
In these circumstances, there is a need to achieve the right balance in the choice of means
used to pursue competing objectives. One problem for policy makers faced with competing
policy choices is to distinguish between government intervention in markets that serves
legitimate policy goals, and intervention which rather serves to maintain market power for
particular vested interests, without contributing significantly to broader social objectives. This
is a particularly important issue where government intervention in the market involves
discriminatory measures between domestic and foreign firms. While many of the considerations
outlined in this section have been used to justify circumscribing competition to some degree,
doing so should always be tempered by the recognition that efficiency trade-offs are often
involved. Moreover, when governments choose to circumscribe competition, the means by
which they do so should be the least damaging from an efficiency perspective and should be
transparent and subject to review in light of changes in markets and the original rationale for
such policies.
Notes
1 For more details of the process of liberalization, see UNCTAD, 1994a, 1995a, 1996a.
2 An example of such practices may be keiretsus. The term “keiretsu” in Japanese is often preceded by
a modifier such as kin’yu keiretsu (financial groups), kigyo keiretsu (corporate groups), kigyo groups
(affiliated firm groups), or ryutsu keiretsu (distribution groups), specifying the type of relationship
among the affiliated firms. However, as Matsushita (1997) observed, the term is rather vague and does
not necessarily involve contractual relationships between the affiliated firms. Instead, these may be de
facto relationships based on repeated transactions.
3 Competition authorities could nevertheless consider intervening in circumstances where shareholdings
by a firm in a competitor firm are or may be used to prevent a joint venture with an investment by a
new entrant.
4 In some cases, these practices appear to be anticompetitively motivated. However, they might also be
explained by fiscal, social or cultural reasons. Thus, in some countries, society sees companies as having
a particular responsibility for their employees, and “take-overs are socially and ethically frowned upon
as akin to buying and selling people” (Lehmann, 1997, p. 98).
233
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
5 Until recently, many governments used various types of investment incentives in exchange for
performance requirements, such as export performance, technology transfer, training of local personnel
and local content requirements. The TRIMs agreement clarified that a number of these performance
requirements are prohibited and should be phased out. These include both certain mandatory
performance requirements as well as requirements linked to the granting of incentives.
6 Granting market power is most often an issue when a firm is new to the country (since such a firm
usually has something new to offer to the economy where it may establish itself, and because it typically
has greater leverage in terms of negotiating with different governments before committing itself to
invest), or has natural monopoly characteristics.
7 Canada, Denmark, Norway, the Russian Federation and Venezuela are among the countries whose
competition laws include as a main objective to promote economic efficiency (UNCTAD, 1995c).
8 For a recent study that shows that properly designed and phased-in competition policy can stimulate
innovation in developing countries, see Mytelka, forthcoming.
9 For a discussion of the objectives of competition policy, see Khemani, 1993.
10 Competition laws, in general, do not consider the possession of a dominant (or monopolistic) position
per se unlawful but, rather, the abusive exploitation of that position.
11 “Horizontal agreements” are concerted practices among enterprises competing (actually or potentially)
in the same relevant market. “Vertical agreements” are agreements among firms active at different
stages of the production/distribution chain (producers, distributors, wholesalers, etc.).
12 In other words, the degree of concentration is only the starting point of a competition analysis. As the
Merger Enforcement Guidelines of Canada (p. ii) put it: “No inferences regarding the likely effect of a
merger should be drawn from evidence that relates solely to market share or concentration. In all cases,
an assessment of the market share and concentration is only the starting point of the analysis.” (Canada,
Director of Investigation and Research, 1991).
13 For the purpose of merger control, the term “joint venture” refers to arrangements between firms that
involve acquisition of a “controlling interest” by one of the firms involved. Acquisitions involving no
changes of control, such as a company acquiring more shares of a firm it already controls, are normally
not reviewed by competition authorities. Foreign investment without control or voting power (“portfolio
investment”) does not in most instances create competition problems, or is expressly exempted. For
example, Section 7 of the United States Clayton Act exempts acquisitions “solely for investment”.
Similarly, Article 3(5)(a) of the European Merger Regulation (4046/89) provides that holdings of credit
and financial institutions who regularly deal in securities on their own or others’ accounts do not fall
within the merger regulation, provided the institutions do not exercise voting rights in the securities.
Germany has a similar (though not identical) provision to that of the European Union (Gesetz gegen
Wettbewerbschränkungen, Section 23(3)).
14 The “effects doctrine” -- which asserts jurisdiction over conduct abroad that affects domestic consumers
-- is the best known approach towards dealing with domestic effects; it is not universally accepted. It
was first developed in the United States. The European Union has applied something approaching the
effects doctrine in a number of cases (see, e.g., the discussion of the “Wood Pulp” case below). What
remains controversial is the claim that jurisdiction can be based on conduct abroad that does not affect
a country’s consumers but does affect its exporters.
15 For some practical suggestion in this respect, see Crampton and Carley, 1997.
16 Similar types of considerations appear to have affected the attempted acquisition of Sotheby’s auctioneers
in 1983. The bid was referred to the Monopolies and Mergers Commission because of the impact such
a take-over might have on “the importance of London as the centre of the international art market and
the importance of Sotheby’s in relation to that market.” (Rowley and Baker, 1991, p. 217).
17 On national interest considerations, see also Goldman, Kissack and Witterick, 1997 and Crampton and
Corley, 1997.
18 The “failing firm” defence provisions in competition laws allow competition authorities to authorize or
exempt certain activities that would otherwise be considered anticompetitive and, hence, illegal when
such activities are deemed necessary to avoid the failure of a firm or industry and when such a failure
raises significant social concerns. The failing firm defence usually consists of exemptions for various
types of cartels (e.g., depression cartels, specialization cartels, rationalization cartels, structural crisis
234
Chapter V
cartels) as well as provisions that allow for a more lenient treatment of proposed mergers. Most
competition laws contain some form of failing firm defence. Those that do not, nonetheless have shown
prosecutorial discretion in taking into account factors similar to those that are explicitly spelled out in
the competition laws of other countries (Waller, 1995).
19 For example, in the United States the ultimate concern would be the impact of an outward FDI transaction
on United States consumers or on trade, including anticompetitive suppression of exporters from the
United States. See the United States Foreign Antitrust Enforcement Act of 1982, enacted as Title IV of
the Export Trading Act of 1982.
20 For a detailed analysis of the Gillette/Wilkinson Sword merger see OECD, 1994.
21 The UNCTAD Set has exempted, to a large extent, intra-firm transactions from the applicability of the
principles and rules for the control of restrictive business practices. Section D(3) concerning horizontal
arrangements states that “Enterprises, except when dealing with each other in the context of economic
entity wherein they are under common control......” should refrain from practices defined as anti-
competitive. At the same time, the Set covers all transactions between affiliates and third parties in host
countries and, according to its Section D (4), firms should refrain from certain acts or behaviour which
are considered abusive (to be examined in terms of the purpose and effects in actual situation of acts or
behaviour) “in particular with reference to whether they limit access to markets or otherwise unduly
restrain competition ... and to whether they are: (a) appropriate in the light of the organizational,
managerial and legal relationship among enterprises concerned, such as in the context of relations
within an economic entity and not having restrictions effects outside the related enterprises” (note to
section D.4). For example, partial or complete refusals to deal on the basis of customary commercial
terms (taking into account legitimate business practices, such as consideration of quality or safety) may
amount to abuse of dominant positions. Restrictions of this type that may be included in licensing and
trade arrangements can be particularly important, because they affect the developmental impact of
foreign affiliates by impeding the development of downstream linkages in host county economies.
22 The issue of access to essential facilities is frequently discussed among competition authorities and
commentators, and is becoming increasingly relevant given the current trend towards deregulation.
The essential facilities doctrine -- which basically provides that a person who controls a facility essential
to entering a market must allow others access -- has yet to be established in a number of countries. The
European Commission has recognized this doctrine in the British Midland/Air Lingus case, when it
took the position that companies in dominant positions have a duty to provide access to facilities when
the effects on competition of a refusal to do so are significant and there is no objective commercial
reason for refusal (Goldman, Kissack and Witterick, 1997).
23 On the question of transfer pricing, see Plasschaert, 1995.
24 In the United States, the trend originated in the late 1970s and was reflected in the GTE-Sylvania
decision by the Supreme Court which held that vertical territorial restraints in manufacturers-dealer
contracts were subject to a rule-of-reason test (United States, Bureau of National Affairs, 1990). In other
cases, the Court decided not to apply the per se violations, but considered on a case-by-case basis according
to the rule of reason, e.g., in Berkey Photo Inc. v. Eastman Kodak Company (United States, Second
Circuit Court, 1979).
25 In order to encourage joint R&D, the United States enacted the National Co-operative Research Act in
1984, making joint undertakings less risky and more desirable for firms by clarifying that the rule of
reason applies to such ventures and eliminating treble-damage liability for joint ventures that provide
adequate notification to the Government.
26 A number of non-governmental organizations such as, for example, the International Chamber of
Commerce (ICC) and Consumers International, play an active role in promoting the adoption of effective
competition laws and have also stressed the need for international policy discussions in this area.
27 The need to address trade, investment and competition policy “to ensure a smoothly functioning global
market place” was recognized, among others, by the International Chamber of Commerce in its
submissions to the Heads of State and Government of the Group of Seven Countries attending the 1995
Halifax Summit, and the 1996 Lyon Summit (ICC, 1995, 1996a).
28 For a discussion of the difficulties and limitations often encountered in adopting and implementing
competition laws, see UNCTAD, 1996c, annex 1 and 2.
29 The practice of the European Union is illustrative in this respect. Firms can formally notify their
235
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
agreements to the European Commission for assessment of their compatibility with the competition
rules of the Treaty of Rome. Formal notification is a condition precedent for obtaining an exemption
under Article 85(3) from the general prohibition and automatic nullity in Article 85(1) and (2). Notification
grants also immunity from fines for the notifying parties from the moment of notification. Since 1962,
the European Commission has received some 30,000 notifications.
30 The enhanced importance given to efficiency considerations in United States case law is reflected in the
April 1997 amendments of the United States Merger Guidelines which place special emphasis on
efficiency justifications, if proved, for mergers (including cross border mergers) between competitors
leading to concentration well short of monopolization (United States, Federal Trade Commission, 1997).
Canada’s Competition Law, too, contains an efficiency exception (Canada, 1985, Section 96).
31 Also Australia and the United States have enacted legislation permitting such cooperation in civil cases
pursuant to bilateral agreements, and they have recently negotiated an agreement under those laws.
32 Such obligations reflect concerns of the business community regarding the disclosure of confidential
and competitively sensitive business information. See, for example, ICC, 1996b.
33 A “blocking statute” bans firms from disclosing information or authorizes a government official to
direct firms not to disclose information.
34 It is also of interest to note that the United States did not interpose an objection to the European Union
investigation of United States firms’s involvement in the Wood Pulp case, which meant -- if not
cooperation -- at least non-opposition.
35 However, in the interest of legal security and to avoid overloading the work of the European Commission,
the agreements made in accordance with Regulation No. 1384/83, concerning exemptions on exclusive
dealing arrangements, do not require notification.
36 In Canada, hard core cartels are also a criminal offence, while monopolization is not; rather, monopolies
are addressed under the civil reviewable merger and abuse of dominance provisions of the Competition
Act.
37 Another type of bilateral treaty dealing with competition issues are the bilateral treaties of friendship,
commerce and navigation (FCN). These treaties were concluded in earlier decades in considerable
numbers by the United States and, to a lesser extent, by Japan and a few Western European countries
with other developed and developing countries, and a number of them are still in force. While intended
primarily to regulate trade and investment between the two countries in the context of broader economic
relations, these treaties included various provisions dealing with business practices that restrain
competition, limit access to markets or foster monopolistic control. On the other hand, bilateral
investment treaties for the promotion and protection of foreign investments do not include provisions
dealing with anticompetitive business practices.
38 In addition, the protocol also envisages possible cooperation with other governments in the region on
issues relating to competition (Article VIII(b)).
39 The Havana Charter, which was the close precedent of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade
(GATT), did include substantive provisions on the treatment of restrictive business practices that might
restrain competition in international trade (Chapter V), together with provisions on the treatment of
government measures dealing with trade and investment. Only provisions dealing with trade, however,
were taken it into the GATT (UNCTAD, 1996d). Instead, a Decision was adopted in 1960 on
Arrangements for Consultations on Restrictive Business Practices (GATT, 1961) whereby it was
recommended that, at the request of any contracting party, consultations should be held on harmful
restrictive practices in international trade on a bilateral basis. Thus far, however, very few consultations
have taken place pursuant to this Decision (WTO, 1997).
40 Although the “nullification and impairment” clause existed prior to WTO in GATT Art. XXIII (1)b, it
was seldom used because the standards for its application were ambiguous. The new Dispute Settlement
Understanding (Section 26.1) states that Article XXIII (1) b concerns measures that do not violate GATT
rules. Nevertheless, member countries can appeal to a WTO panel for “mutually satisfactory adjustment”
in case it is found that the measures “nullify or impair benefits” under the relevant agreement. The
panel, however, cannot mandate removal of the disputed measures. A recent submission under this
Article was the Kodak v. Fuji case concerning exclusive dealings for which United States and Japan
236
Chapter V
237
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
then use the proceeds gained from selling its own rights to shut down a facility. It has been noted that
such a market can promote clean air, because if the right to pollute were to become extremely costly,
heavy polluters would have an incentive to sell their rights (and shut down their facilities) because the
value of the right on the market might exceed the ongoing value of the facility. While the existence of
such markets would limit somewhat market contestability (because a new entrant would have to buy
pollution rights, adding to the costs of entry), it would do so minimally.
238
References
References
Acharya, Rohini (forthcoming). “Bio-pharmaceuticals in Chinese Taipei and India”, in Lynn K. Mytelka, ed.,
Competition, Innovation and Competitiveness in Developing Countries (Paris: OECD), chapter 3.
Addy, George (1995). “Competition policy in the new global economy”, Federal Trade Commission
Hearings on Global and Innovation-based Competition (13 December) (Washington, D.C.: Federal
Trade Commission), mimeo..
__________, Andrea Gubitz and Peter Nunnenkamp (1991). Foreign Direct Investment in Developing
Countries. The Case of Germany, Kieler Studien 238 (Tübingen: Mohr).
American Chamber of Commerce in Hong Kong (1996). Results of the 1996 Business Confidence Survey
(Hong Kong: SRH Survey Research Hong Kong).
Anderson, K. (1995). “Australia’s changing trade pattern” , in R. Pomfret, ed., Australia’s Trade Policies
(Melbourne: Oxford University Press), pp. 29-52.
Apibunyopas, Preeyanuch (1993). “TNCs and impacts on industrialization in Thailand” and comment by
Mitsuo Fujimoto, Regional Development Dialogue, 14, 4, pp. 94-120.
Armstrong, Mark and Chris Doyle (1995). The Economics of Access Pricing (Paris: OECD).
Ariff, Mohamed and Yew Siew Yong (1996). “Transnational corporations and industrial restructuring in
developing countries: the case of Malaysia” (Kuala Lumpur: University of Malaysia), mimeo..
Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) (1995a). Survey of Impediments to Trade and Investment in the
APEC Region (Singapore: APEC secretariat).
__________ (1995b). Milestones in Liberalisation: A Map of Market Opening Measures by APEC Economies
(Singapore: APEC secretariat).
Athukorala, Premachandra and Jayant Menon (1995). “Developing with foreign investment: Malaysia”, The
Australian Economic Review, 1st quarter, pp. 9-22.
Atlan, F., F. Lakhoua, L. Miotti, C. Quenan and N. Ricoeur-Nicolai (1996). “Marchés d’actions émergents:
y-a-t-il un syndrome Mexican?”, Revue techniques financières et développement, 42 (March/April),
pp. 53-61.
Australia, Bureau of Industry Economics (1993). Multinationals and Governments: Issues and Implications
for Australia (Canberra: Australian Government Publishing Service).
__________ (1995). Australian Direct Investment Abroad: A Statistical Overview (Canberra: Australian
Government Publishing Service).
__________, East Asian Analytical Unit (1994). Changing Tack: Australian Investment in South East Asia
(Canberra: Australian Government Publishing Service).
239
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Bain, J.S. (1956). Barriers to New Competition (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press).
Baldwin, J.R. and R.E. Caves (1991). “Foreign multinational enterprises and merger activity in Canada”, in
L. Waverman, ed., Corporate Globalization through Mergers and Acquisitions (Calgary: University
of Calgary Press), pp. 89-122.
Baumol, W. J., J. Panzar and R. Willig (1982). Contestable Markets and the Theory of Industrial Structure
(New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich).
Bell, Trevor and Nicolette Cattaneo (1996). “Foreign trade and employment in South African manufacturing
industry”, International Labour Office (ILO) Occasional Report No. 4 (Geneva: ILO).
Bellak, Christian and John Cantwell (1996). “Foreign direct investment: how much is it worth? Comment
on S. J. Gray and A. M. Rugman”, Transnational Corporations, 5, 1, pp. 85-97.
Bernheim, B.D. and M.D. Whinston (1990). “Multi-market contact and collusive behaviour”, Rand Journal
of Economics, 21 (Spring), pp. 1-26.
Bitran, E. and Pablo Serra (1994). “Regulatory issues in the privatization of public utilities: the Chilean
experience”, The Quarterly Review of Economics and Finance, 34, Special Issue (Summer), pp. 179-
197.
Blank, Michael (1996). Wirtschaftliche Verflechtungen deutscher mittelständischer Unternehmen mit der
Republik Südfrika - Betrachtungen vor dem Hintergrund einer Theorie der internationalen Produktion
(Frankfurt /Main:Verlag Peter Lang).
Blomström, M. (1983). “Foreign investment, technical efficiency and structural change: evidence from the
Mexican manufacturing industry”, unpublished Ph.D dissertation, Gothenburg University.
__________ (1986) .”Multinational and market structure in Mexico”, World Development, 14, pp. 523-530.
__________ (1989). Foreign Investment and Spillovers: A Study of Technology Transfer to Mexico (London:
Routledge).
Bloom, M. (1992). Technological Change in the Korean Electronics Industry (Paris: OECD).
Boner, Roger Alan and Reinald Krueger (1991). The Basics of Antitrust Policy: A Review of Ten Nations and
the European Communities, World Bank Technical Papers Series No. 160, (Washington, D.C.: World
Bank).
Bora, Bijit (1996a). “Foreign direct investment”, in B. Bora and C. Findlay, eds., Regional Integration and
the Asia Pacific (Melbourne: Oxford University Press), pp. 78-98.
__________ (1996b). “Trade and investment developments in the APEC region: 1980-1993”, in P. Lloyd
and L. Williams, eds., Trade and Migration in the APEC Region (Melbourne: Oxford University Press),
pp. 14-32.
240
References
British Chamber of Commerce in Hong Kong (1996). 1996 Business Confidence Survey (Hong Kong: British
Chamber of Commerce).
__________ (1997). SA Insider South African Investment Report 1997, (Johannesburg: Business Map).
Canada (1985). “Competition Act”, Revised Statutes of Canada, Chapter C-34 (1985) as amended (Ottawa:
Communication Group, Government of Canada).
__________, Director of Investigation and Research (1991). News Release, Nr. 10522/91-33 (Ottawa:
Department of Consumer Affairs).
__________, Federal Court (Trial Division) (1996). “Her Majesty the Queen and New Oji Paper Co., Ltd.”,
Order of Prohibition, No. T - 1693-96 (16 July), mimeo..
Cantwell, J. A. (1989a). “The changing form of multinational enterprise expansion in the twentieth century”,
in Teichova, A., M. Levy-Leboyer and H. Nussbaum, eds., Historical Studies in International
Corporate Business (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press), pp.15-28.
__________ (1989b). Technological Innovations and Multinational Corporations (Oxford: Basil Blackwell).
Cargill, Jenny (1996). “Investment focus: the flows inwards and outwards”, SA Insider Quarterly Review
(July), pp. 10-17.
Caves, Richard E. (1971). “Industrial corporations: the industrial economics of foreign investment”,
Economica, 38 (February), pp. 1-27.
__________ (1974). “Multinational firms, competition, and productivity in host country markets”, Economica,
41 (May), pp. 176-193.
__________ (1980). “Industrial organization, corporate strategy and structure”, Journal of Economic
Literature, XVIII, pp. 64-92.
__________ (1996). Multinational Enterprise and Economic Analysis, 2nd edition, Cambridge Surveys of
Economic Literature (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press).
__________, and S.K. Mehra (1986). “Entry of foreign multinationals into US manufacturing industries”, in
M.E. Porter, ed., Competition in Global Industries (Boston: Harvard Business School Press), pp. 449-
481.
Central Bank of Brazil (1997). Press Release: Foreign Sector (15 May).
Christensen, Clayton M. (1993). “The rigid disk drive industry: a history of commercial and technological
turbulence”, Business History Review, 67 (winter).
__________ (1994). “The drivers of vertical disintegration”, The Harvard Business School, 8 October,
manuscript.
Chudnovsky, Daniel (1979). “The challenge by domestic enterprises to the transnational corporations’
domination: a case study of the Argentine pharmaceutical industry”, World Development, 7, pp. 45-
58.
241
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
__________, Andrés Lopez and Fernando Porta (1997). “Market or policy driven? The foreign direct
investment boom in Argentina”, Oxford Development Studies, 25, 2, pp. 173-187.
__________, S. W. Davies and N. Duffield, eds. (forthcoming). The Effectiveness of Monopoly Policy in the
UK (Aldershot: Edward Elgar).
Commission of the Cartagena Agreement (1991). “Commission Decision 285. Norms to prevent or correct
distortions in competition caused by practices that restrict free competition”, International Legal
Materials, 32 (1993) (Washington, D.C.: American Society of International Law), pp. 162-169.
Connor, John M. (1977). The Market Power of Multinationals: A Quantitative Analysis of U.S.Corporations
in Brazil and Mexico (New York: Praeger).
___________ and W. F. Mueller (1977). “Market power and the profitability of multinational corporations
in Brazil and Mexico”. Report to the Senate Subcommittee on Multinational Corporations, (Washington,
D.C.: United States Government Printing Office).
Council of the European Communities (1962). “Council Regulation (EEC) No. 17/62 of 6 February 1962",
Official Journal of the European Communities, L 31, 21 February (Luxembourg: Office for Official
Publications of the European Communities), pp. 204-262.
__________ (1989). “Council Regulation No. 4064/89 of 21 December 1989 on the Control of
Concentrations between Undertakings”, Official Journal of the European Communities, L 257, 21
September 1990; corrected version appears in Official Journal of the European Communities, L 395
of 30 December 1990 (Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications of the European Communities),
p. 1.
Crampton, Paul S. and Richard F. D. Corley (1997). “Merger review under the Competition Act: reflections
on the first decade”, Antitrust Law Journal, 65, pp. 535-571.
Curhan, Joan P., William H. Davidson and Rajan Suri (1977). Tracing the Multinationals: A Sourcebook on
U.S.-based Enterprises (Cambridge, Mass.: Barlinger Publishing Company).
Curry, B. and K.D. George (1983). “Industrial concentration: a survey”, Journal of Industrial Economics, 31,
pp. 203-255.
Davidow, Joel and Paul Schott Stevens (1990). “Antitrust merger control and national security review of
foreign acquisitions in the United States”, Journal of World Trade Law, 24, pp. 29-56.
Davies, S.W. and B. Lyons (1989). Economics of Industrial Organization (Harlow: Longman).
Davies, S.W. and B. Lyons et al., (1996). Industrial Organization in the European Union: Structure, Strategy
and the Corporate Mechanism (Oxford: Oxford University Press).
Delapierre, M. and Lynn K. Mytelka (forthcoming). “Blurring boundaries: new inter-firm relationships and
the emergence of networked, knowledge-based oligopolies”, in M. Colombo ed., The Changing
Boundaries of the Firm: Explaining Evolving Inter-firm Relations (London: Routledge).
242
References
Demsetz, H. (1973). “Industry structure, market rivalry and public policy”, Journal of Law and Economics,
16, 1 (April), pp. 1-9.
Dermota, Ken (1996). “Fatiga privatizadora”, in AméricaEconomía Edición Anual 1996-1997 (Florida:
Nanbei Ltd.), pp. 52-54.
Donsimoni, M.P. and V. Leoz-Arguelles (1980).”Profitability and international linkages in the Spanish
economy”, Working Paper, Université Catholique de Louvain.
Dubin, M. (1975). “Foreign acquisitions and the spread of the multinational firm”. DBA thesis, Graduate
School of Business Administration, Harvard Business School.
Duggan, Peter J. (1995). “The universe of 1000 ADRs”, in Richard J. Coyle, ed., The MacGraw-Hill
Handbook of American Depositary Receipts (New York: McGraw-Hill), pp. 349-387.
Dunning, John H. (1958). American Investment in British Manufacturing Industry (London: Allen & Unwin).
__________ (1993). Multinational Enterprises and the Global Economy (London: Addison Wesley).
__________ (1995). “Reappraising the eclectic paradigm in an age of alliance capitalism”, Journal of
International Business Studies, 26, 3, pp. 416- 492.
__________, and R.D. Pearce (1985). The World’s Largest Industrial Enterprises, 1962-1983 (Farnborough:
Gower Press).
Economist Intelligence Unit (EIU) (1996a). Myanmar: Country Report, fourth quarter (London: EIU).
__________ (1996f). Hong Kong: Country Report, fourth quarter (London: EIU).
__________ (1996g). Country Report: South Korea, North Korea, annual (London: EIU).
Ernst, Dieter (1983). The Global Race in Microelectronics (Frankfurt and New York: Campus Publishers).
__________ (1992). “Networks, market structure and technology diffusion - A conceptual framework and
some empirical evidence”. Report prepared for the OECD secretariat (Paris: OECD).
243
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
__________ (1996). “From partial to systemic globalization. International production networks in the
electronics industry”. Report prepared for the Sloan Foundation Project on the Globalization in the
Data Storage Industry, Graduate School of International Relations and Pacific Studies, University of
California at San Diego, Working Paper No. 97 (Berkeley: University of California).
__________ and David O’Connor (1992). Competing in the Electronics Industry. The Experience of Newly
Industrialising Economies (Paris: OECD).
European Commission (1968). “Notice concerning agreements, decisions and concerted practices in the
field of cooperation between enterprises”, Official Journal of the European Communities, C 75, 29
July (Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications of the European Communities), p. 3.
__________ (1972). “Decision of 23 December 1971 (Case No.72/41- Henkel/Colgate)”, Official Journal
of the European Communities, L 14/14, 18 January (Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications of
the European Communities), p. 14.
__________ (1984a). “Regulation No. 418/85 of 19 December 1984 on the application of Article 85 (3) of
the Treaty of Categories of Research and Development Agreements”, Official Journal of the European
Communities, L 53, 22 February 1985 (Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications of the European
Communities), p. 5.
__________ (1984b). “Decision of 19 December 1984 (Case No. 85/222 - Wood Pulp)”, Official Journal
of the European Communities, L85/1, 26 December 1985 (1985-3 CMLR 474) (Luxembourg: Office
for Official Publications of the European Communities), p. 1.
__________ (1992). “Decision of 10 November 1992 (Case Nos. IV/33.440 and IV/33.486 - Warner
Lambert/Gillette and BIC/ Gillette)”, Official Journal of the European Communities, L116/21, 10
November 1992, (Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications of the European Communities), p. 21.
__________ (1993). “Regulation No. 418/85 of 19 December 1984 on the application of Article 85 (3) of
the Treaty of Categories of Research and Development Agreements as amended by the Commission
Regulation (EEC), 151/93, 23 December 1992”, Official Journal of the European Communities, L 21,
29 January (Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications of the European Communities), p. 8.
__________ (1996a). “Decision of 24 April 1996 (Case No. IV/M619 - Gencor/Lonhro), “ Official Journal
of the European Communities, L 011, 14 January 1997 (Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications
of the European Communities), p. 30.
Eurostat (1997). European Union Direct Investment Yearbook (Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications
of the European Communities).
244
References
Evans, P. B. (1979). Dependent Development: The Alliance of Multinational, State and Local Capital in Brazil
(Princeton, NJ.: Princeton University Press).
Fahim-Nader, Mahnaz and William J. Zeile (1996). “Foreign direct investment in the United States”, Survey
of Current Business, 76 (July), pp. 102-130.
Feketekuty, Geza (1994). “New trade related issues: competition liberalisation”, in Gili Jen, ed., New
Direction in Regional Trade Liberalisation and Investment Cooperation: A Tripartite Approach
(Taipeh: Taiwan PEC).
Feketekuty, Geza and Robert A. Rogowsky (1996). “The scope, implication and economic rationale of
competition-oriented approach to future multilateral trade negotiation”, in Sven Arndt and Chris
Millner, eds., Global Trade Policy 1996 (The World Economy, Special Issue) (Oxford: Blackwell), pp.
167-281.
Fingleton, John, Eleanor Fox, Damien Neven and Paul Seabright (1997). Competition Policy and the
Transformation of Central Europe (London: Centre for Economic Policy Research).
Fine, Frank (1994). The Law and Policy of the EEC, second edition (London; Martinus Nijhoff).
France, Banque de France (1996). Bulletin de la Banque de France - Supplement Statistiques 1996 (Paris:
Banque de France).
France, Ministère de l’Economie et du Budget (various issues). Statistiques et Etudes Financières (Paris:
Ministère de l’Economie et du Budget).
Fransman, Martin (1990). Trends and Patterns in Strategic Technology Partnering since Early Seventies (New
York: Cambridge University Press).
Frischtak, Claudio R. and Richard S. Newfarmer (1994). “Introduction”, in Claudio R. Frischtak and Richard
S. Newfarmer, eds., Transnational Corporations: Market Structure and Industrial Performance.
United Nations Library on Transnational Corporations, vol. 15 (London and New York: Routledge
for and on behalf of the United Nations), pp. 1-33.
Fry, Maxwell J. (1996). “How foreign direct investment in Pacific Asia improves the current account”, Asian
Economics, 7, 3, pp. 459-486.
General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) (1961). “Restrictive business practices; arrangements for
consultations, Decision of 18 November 1960", Basic Instruments and Selected Documents, 9th
supplement (Geneva: GATT), pp. 28-29.
__________ (1994). Trade Policy Review: The Republic of Kenya, 1994 (Geneva: GATT).
Germany, Federal Cartel Office (1975). “Notice of the Federal Cartel Office on Domestic Effects within the
Meaning of Section 98 (2) of the Act Against Restraints of Competition in the Case of Mergers”, Annual
Report (Berlin: Federal Cartel Office), p. 45.
245
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
__________ (1989). “Prohibition of the merger between Daimler Benz AG and Messerschmitt-Bölkow-
Blohm GmbH (MBB)”, Journal of Economy and Competition, 7, 8, pp. 633-660.
__________ (1993). “Decision on the acquisition of the Allison Transmission Division of General Motors by
Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen”, Biannual Report, 1974-1975 (Berlin: Federal Cartel Office), p. 85.
__________, Ministry of Economy (1989). “Authorisation of the merger between Daimler Benz AG and MBB
by the Minister of Economics”, Journal of Economy and Competition, 11 (6 September), pp. 947-962.
Geroski, P. A. (1991). “Domestic and foreign entry in the United Kingdom, 1983-1984", in P. A. Geroski
and J. D. Schwalbach, eds., Entry and Market Contestability (Oxford: Blackwell), pp. 63-88.
Gifford, Daniel J. and Mitsuo Matsuchita (1996). “Antitrust or competition laws viewed in a trading context:
harmony or dissonance?”, in Bhagwati, Jagdish and Robert E. Hudec, eds., Fair Trade and
Harmonization: Prerequisites for Free Trade?, vol. 2 (Legal Analysis) Cambridge, London: MIT Press),
pp. 269-331.
Globerman, Steven (1979). “Foreign direct investment and spillover efficiency benefits in Canadian
manufacturing industries”, Canadian Journal of Economics, 12, 1 (February), pp. 42-56.
Globerman, Steven et al. (1994). “The economic performance of foreign affiliates in Canada”, Canadian
Journal of Economics, 12, 1 (February), pp.152-156.
Goldman, Calvin S., Joel Kissack and Cristal L. Witterrick (1997). “Competitive policy and the transition from
closed to open economy: lessons from Canadian experience”. Paper presented at the Conference on
Competition Policy in a Global Economy, Global Forum for Competition and Trade Policy, New
Delhi, India, 17-19 March (Toronto: Davis, Ward & Beck), mimeo..
Gorecki, P. K. (1976). “The determinants of entry by domestic and foreign enterprises in Canadian
manufacturing industries. Some comments and empirical results”, Review of Economics Statistics, 58
(November), pp. 485-488.
Gourevitch, P. R., R. Bohn and D. McKendrick (1997). “Who is Us? The nationality of production in the hard
disk drive industry”. Report 97-01 prepared for The Data Storage Industry Globalization Project,
Graduate School of International Relations and Pacific Studies, University of California, San Diego.
Gray, Sidney J. and Alan M. Rugman (1994). “Does the United States have a deficit with Japan in foreign
direct investment?”, Transnational Corporations, 3, 2 (August), pp. 127-137.
Hachigian, Nina (1995). “Essential mutual assistance in international antitrust enforcement”, International
Lawyer, 29, 1, pp. 117-151.
Haddad, M. and A. Harrison (1994).”Are there dynamic externalities from direct foreign investment?
Evidence from Morocco”, in Claudio R. Frischtak and Richard S. Newfarmer, eds., Transnational
Corporations, Market Structure and Industrial Performance. United Nations Library on Transnational
Corporations, vol. 15 (London and New York: Routledge for and on behalf of the United Nations),
pp. 273-292.
246
References
Hagedoorn, John H. (1996). “Trends and patterns in strategic technology partnering since the early
seventies”, Review of Industrial Organization, 11, pp. 601-616.
Hanson, Gordon H. (1994). “Antitrust in post-privatization Latin America: an analysis of the Mexican airline
industry”, Quarterly Review of Economics and Finance, 34, Special Issue, pp. 199-216.
Harral, C, J. Colbourne and G. Horozov (1996). “Privatization of the telecommunications sector in the
transition economies: issues and options”, in Michel Kostecki and A. Fehervary, eds., Services in the
Transition Economies: Business Options for Trade and Investments (Oxford: Pergamon), pp. 147-
171.
Hart, P. and R. Clarke (1980). Concentration in British Industry 1935-75 (Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press).
Hawk, Barry (1995). United States, Common Market and International Antitrust: A Comparative Guide
(Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall Law and Business).
Hellmann, R. (1970). The Challenge to US Dominance of the International Corporation (New York:
Dunellen).
Hong Kong Companies Registry (1996). 1996 Survey of Regional Representation by Overseas Companies
in Hong Kong (Hong Kong: Hong Kong Companies Registry).
Hong Kong Government Industries Department (1996). Survey of External Investment in Hong Kong’s
Manufacturing Industries (Hong Kong: Government Press).
Hooley, Graham, Tony Cox, David Shipley, John Fahy, Jozsef Beracs and Krisztina Kolos (1996). “Foreign
direct investment in Hungary: resource acquisition and domestic competitive advantage”, Journal of
International Business Studies, 27, 4 (Fourth quarter), pp. 683-709.
Howell, M., Angela Cozzini and Mark Clayton (1995). Cross Border Equity Flows (London: Baring
Securities).
Industrial Development Corporation (IDC), South Africa (1996). Manufacturing - trading conditions
(Johannesburg: IDC).
International Chamber of Commerce (ICC) (1995). “Statement for submission to the Heads of State and
Government of the Group of Seven countries attending the Halifax Summit”, 15-17 June, mimeo.;
and “Supporting document to the ICC statement for the Halifax G7 Summit”, 15-17 June, mimeo..
__________ (1996a). “Growth, employment and trade. ICC statement on behalf of world business to the
Heads of State and Government attending the Group of Seven Summit”, Lyon, 27-29 June, p. 8.
__________ (1996b). Commission on Law and Practices Relating to Competition. “Statement on international
cooperation between antitrust authorities”, Document No. 225/450, Rev. 3, 28 March, mimeo..
International Federation of Stock Exchanges (1994, 1995). Annual Report and Statistics 1994, 1995 (Paris:
International Federation of Stock Exchanges).
247
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
International Finance Corporation (IFC) (1988). Emerging Stock Markets Factbook 1988 (Washington, D.C.:
IFC).
__________ (1995). Emerging Stock Markets Factbook 1995 (Washington, D.C.: IFC).
__________ (1996). Emerging Stock Markets Factbook 1996 (Washington, D.C.: IFC).
International Monetary Fund (IMF) (1993). Balance of Payments Manual (Washington, D.C.: IMF).
__________ (1996b). Balance of Payments - Statistics Yearbook 1996 (Washington D.C.: IMF).
International Responsibility Research Center (IRRC) (1996). “U.S. firms lead multinational business
expansion in South Africa”, 13 June 1996 (Washington D.C.: IRRC).
_________ (1997). Multinational Business in South Africa 1997 (Washington, D.C.: IRRC).
International Trade Centre (ITC) (1997). Trade Opportunities in Southern Africa (Geneva: ITC).
IRELA and IADB (1996). Foreign Direct Investment in Latin America in the 1990s (Madrid: IRELA).
Janow, M. E. (1996). “International perspectives on abuse of dominance”, paper prepared for the OECD
Trade Committee Meeting of 12 January, mimeo..
Jansen, Karel (1995). “The macroeconomic effects of direct foreign investment: the case of Thailand”, World
Development, 23, 2, pp. 193-210.
Japan External Trade Organization (JETRO) (1997). JETRO Hakusho: Toshi-hen 1997 (Tokyo: JETRO).
Japan, Bank of Japan (1996). Balance of Payments Monthly (Tokyo: Bank of Japan), No. 366 (April).
__________ (1997). Balance of Payments Monthly (Tokyo: Bank of Japan), No. 398 (April).
Japan, Ministry of International Trade and Industry (MITI) (1989). Dai 3-kai Kaigai Jigyo Katsudo Kihon
Chosa: Kaigai Toshi Tokei Soran (Tokyo: Keibun Shuppan).
__________ (1994). Dai 5-kai Kaigai Jigyo Katsudo Kihon Chosa: Kaigai Toshi Tokei Soran (Tokyo: Ministry
of Finance Printing Bureau).
Jenkins, R. O. (1984). Transnationals and Industrial Transformation in Latin America (London: Macmillan).
__________ (1990) “Comparing foreign subsidiaries and local firms in LDCs: theoretical issues and empirical
evidence”, Journal of Development Studies, 26 (January), pp. 205-228.
248
References
Jones, G. (1986). British Mutltinationals: Origins, Management and Performance (Aldershot: Gower).
Jost, Thomas (1997). Direktinvestitionen und Standort Deutschland, Discussion Paper 2197 of the
Economic Department of Deutche Bundesbank (Frankfurt: Deutsche Bundesbank).
Jourdan, P. and K. Gordhan (1996). “Spatial development initiatives (development corridors): their potential
contribution to investment and employment creation”, October 1996, mimeo..
Jun, Kwang W. and Harinder Singh (1996). “The determinants of foreign direct investment: new empirical
evidence”, Transnational Corporations, 5, 2 (August), pp. 67-105.
Khemani, R.S. (1993). “Objectives of Competition Policy”. Paper prepared for the OECD Competition and
Consumer Policy Division, 29 September, mimeo..
Kindleberger, C. P. (1969). American Business Abroad (New Haven, CN: Yale University Press).
Knickerbocker, F.T. (1973). Oligopolistic Reaction and the Multinational Enterprise (Cambridge, MA.:
Harvard University Press).
__________ (1976). “Market structure and market power consequences of foreign direct investment by
multinational companies”, Occasional Paper No. 8 (Washington, D.C.: Washington Centre for
Multinational Studies).
Kokko, A. (1992). Foreign Direct Investment, Host Country Characteristics and Spillovers (Stockholm:
Economic Research Institute, Stockholm School of Economics).
__________ (1994). “Technology, market characteristics and spillovers”, Journal of Development Economics,
43, pp. 279-293.
__________, R. Tansiniz and M. Zejan (1994). “Local technological capability and spillovers from FDI in the
Uruguayan manufacturing sector”, Stockholm School of Economics, Working Paper Series in
Economics and Finance, No. 2, mimeo..
Koo, B.Y. (1985). “Korea”, in John H. Dunning, ed., Multinational Enterprises, Economic Structure and
International Competitiveness (Chichester and New York: John Wiley and Sons), pp.281-307.
Kraemer, Joseph S. (1996). “Local consumption: the war of many against one (1996-2001)” (Washington,
D.C.: A.T. Kearney), mimeo..
Kumar, N. (1990). Multinational Enterprises in India: Industrial Distribution, Characteristics and Performance
(London: Routledge).
Lall, Sanjaya (1979). “Multinationals and market structure in an open developing country: the case of
Malaysia”, Weltwirtschaftliches Archiv, 114, 2, pp. 325-350.
Lall, Sanjaya and Paul Streeten (1977). Foreign Investment, Transnationals and Developing Countries
(London: Macmillan Press).
249
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
_________ (1978). “The pattern of intra-firm exports by US multinationals”, Oxford Bulletin of Economics
and Statistics, 40 (August), pp. 209-222.
Lall, Sanjaya et al. (1996). “Opening up, and shutting down? Import liberalisation and industrial technology
in sub-Saharan Africa”. A study prepared for the United Nations Institute for New Technologies
(INTECH), unpublished draft (November), mimeo..
Landefeld, Steven J. and Ann M. Lawson (1991). “Valuation of the U.S. net international investment
position”, Survey of Current Business, 71 (May), pp. 40-49.
Langdon, S. W. (1981). Multinational Corporations in the Political Economy of Kenya (London: Macmillan).
Lansbury, Melanie and Nigel Pain (1997). Foreign Direct Investment in Central Europe since 1990: An
Econometric Study (forthcoming).
Lawton, Thomas C. (1997). Technology and the New Diplomacy (Hants: Ashgate Publishing).
__________ (1985). “Singapore”, in J. H. Dunning, ed., Multinational Enterprises, Economic Structure and
International Competitiveness (Chichester and New York: John Wiley and Sons), pp. 379-405.
__________ (1996). “BOT in the electrical generating industry of the Philippines and the MWSS ‘privatization’”,
University of Western Ontario, mimeo..
Lehmann, Jean-Pierre (1997). “Corporate governance in East Asia and Western Europe: competition,
confrontation and cooperation”, in Charles P. Oman, Douglas H. Brooks and Colm Foy, eds.,
Investing in Asia (Paris: OECD), pp. 85-128.
Lipsey, Robert E. and Zbigniew Zimny (1993). “The impact of transnational service corporations on
developing countries: competition, market structure and unique services”, in Karl P. Sauvant and
Padma Mallampally, eds., Transnational Corporations in Services. United Nations Library on
Transnational Corporations, vol. 12 (London and New York: Routledge for and on behalf of the
United Nations), pp. 316-332.
Maia, Jorge (1997). “South Africa: a window of opportunity”. Paper prepared on behalf of the Industrial
Development Corporation (IDC) of South Africa and presented at the Conference on Business
Opportunities between South Africa and Denmark, Copenhagen, 10 March (Johannesburg: IDC),
mimeo..
Matsushita, Mitsuo (forthcoming).”The antimonopoly law of Japan”, in Graham, E.M. and David J.
Richardson,, eds., Global Competition Policy (Washington, D.C.: Institute for International Economics).
250
References
Mataloni, Raymond J. and Mahnaz Fahim-Nader (1996). “Operations of U.S. multinational companies:
preliminary results from the 1994 benchmark survey”, Survey of Current Business, 76 (December),
pp. 11-37.
Mexico, Federal Competition Commission (1994). Annual Report 1993-1994 (Mexico City: Federal
Competition Commission).
_________ (1996). Mexico, Federal Competition Commission (1996). Annual Report 1995-1996 (Mexico
City: FCC).
Mikkelson, W. (1981). “Convertible calls and security returns”, Journal of Financial Economics, 9
(September), pp. 237-264.
Milesi-Ferretti, Gian Maria and Assaf Razin (1996). “Persistent current account deficits: a warning signal?”,
International Journal of Finance and Economics, 1,3 (July), pp. 161-181.
Moniteur du Commerce International (MOCI) (1996). Les enterprises françaises et l’Afrique - Rapport Jean-
Pierre Proteau 1996, 8 ème édition (Paris: MOCI).
Muchlinski, P. T. (1996). “A case of Czech beer: competition and competitiveness in the transitional
economies”, Modern Law Review, 59, 5 (September), pp. 659-668.
Mytelka, Lynn Krieger (1991). “States, strategic alliances and international oligopolies: The European ESPRIT
programme”, in Lynn K. Mytelka, ed., Strategic Partnerships and the World Economy (London: Pinter
Publishers), pp. 182-210.
__________ (1993). “Strategic alliances”, in Christopher J. Maule and Fen O. Hampson, eds., Canada
Among Nations 1993-94: Global Jeopardy (Ottawa: Carleton University Press), pp. 106-130.
__________ (1994). The Growth of Strategic Alliances: A Stock Taking (Ottawa: Carleton University Press;
and Paris: LAREA/CEREM, Université Paris X).
__________ (1997a). “Strategic Alliances and the Third World”, unpublished paper.
__________ (1997b). “New trends in biotechnology networking”, paper prepared for a special issue of the
International Journal of Technology Management (Biotechnology Review), forthcoming.
__________ and Michel Delapierre (1996). “Strategic partnerships, knowledge-based networked oligopolies
and the state”. Paper prepared for the Workshop on Private Power and International Regimes,
University of Victoria, 26-27 August.
Newfarmer, R. S., ed., (1985). Profits, Progress and Poverty (Notre Dame, Indiana: University of Notre Dame
Press).
__________ and L. C. Marsh (1981). “Foreign ownership, market structure and industrial performance:
Brazil’s electrical industry, Journal of Development Economics, 8, pp. 47-75.
251
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
________________________ (1992). “Industrial structure, market power and profitability”. Industry series
paper No. 63 (Washington, D.C: The World Bank), reprinted in Claudio R. Frischtak and Richard S.
Newfarmer, eds., Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Industrial Performance. United
Nations Library on Transnational Corporations, vol. 15 (London and New York: Routledge for and
on behalf of the United Nations), pp. 213-233.
__________ and W. F. Mueller (1975). “Multinational corporations in Brazil and Mexico: structural sources
of economic and non-economic power”, United States Senate Subcommittee on Multinational
Corporations.
Newman, Jeffrey N. (1995). “Through a glass darkly: the case against Pilkington plc. under the new U.S.
Department of Justice international enforcement policy”, Northwestern Journal of International Law
and Business, 16, 2, pp. 284-317.
Nicolaides, Phedon (1994). “Towards multilateral rules on competition: the problem in mutual recognition
of national rules”, World Competition, 17, 3, pp. 5-47.
Nordås, Hildegunn (1996). “South African manufacturing industries - catching up or falling behind?”,
Journal of Development Studies, vol. 32, 5 (June), pp. 715-733.
Okamoto, Y. (1994). “Impact of trade and FDI liberalization on the Malaysian economy”, The Developing
Economies Journal, 32 (December), pp. 460-478.
Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) (1989). Competition Policy in OECD
Countries, 1987-1988 (Paris: OECD).
__________ (1993). “Globalisation in the pharmaceutical industry- technological change and competition
in a Triad perspective”, STI Review, Special Issue on Globalisation (Paris: OECD), pp. 123-162.
__________ (1994). Merger Cases in the Real World: A Case Study of Merger Control Procedures (Paris:
OECD).
__________ (1996b). International Direct Investment Statistics Yearbook 1996 (Paris: OECD).
__________ (1996c). Small Firms as Foreign Investors: Case Studies from Transition Economies (Paris:
OECD).
__________ (1996d). Antitrust and Market Access: The Scope and Coverage of Competition Laws and
Implications for Trade (Paris: OECD).
Parry, T. G. and J. F. Watson (1978). “Structure and performance in Australian manufacturing, with special
reference to foreign-owned enterprises”, in W. Kasper and T.G. Parry, eds., Growth, Trade and
252
References
Structural Change in an Open Australian Economy (Kensington, Australia: Centre for Applied
Economic Research, University of New South Wales), pp. 173-199.
Pedersen, Poul Ove and Dorothy McCormick (1997). “African business systems in a globalising world”.
Paper presented to a workshop on Business Systems in the South at the Copenhagen Business School,
22-24 January 1997, Copenhagen, mimeo..
Petri, Peter A. (1993). “Comment” on paper by Louis T. Wells, Jr., in Kenneth A. Froot, ed., Foreign Direct
Investment, NBER Project Report on the Proceedings of a conference on ‘FDI Today’, sponsored by
the NBER and held in Cambridge, Mass., 15-16 May 1992 (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press),
pp. 173-196.
Phang, Hooi Eng (forthcoming). Effects of Foreign Direct Investment on the Balance of Payments in Malaysia
(Kuala Lumpur: Peladuk).
Plasschaert, Sylvain (1995). “Recent books on transfer pricing: a review article”, Transnational Corporations,
4, 1 (April), pp. 97-112.
Poapongsakorn, N. and P. Tonguthai (forthcoming). “Technological capability building and the sustainability
of export success in Thailand’s textile and electronics industries”, in Dieter Ernst, Tom Ganiatsos and
Lynn K. Mytelka, eds., Technological Dynamism and Export Success in Asia (London: Routledge).
Ramstetter, Eric D. (1993). “Macroeconomic trends, foreign firms and economic policy in Thailand”, in
Mitsuru Toida and Daisuke Hiratsuka, eds., Projections for Asian Industrializing Region (II) (Tokyo:
Institute of Developing Economies), pp. 41-113.
__________ (1994). “Comparisons of Japanese multinationals and other firms in Thailand’s non-oil
manufacturing industries”, Asian Economic Bulletin, 11, 1 (July), pp. 36-58.
__________ (1995). “Characteristics of multinational firms in Malaysia. A time series perspective” in Mitsuru
Toida and Dasuke Hiratsuka, eds., Ajia Kogyoken no Keizai Bunseki to Yosoku (IV) (Projections for
Asian Industrializing Region (IV)) (Tokyo: Institute of Developing Economies), pp. 95-171.
__________ (1997). “Export propensities and foreign ownership shares in South-east Asian manufacturing”
(Osaka: Kansai University), mimeo..
Rowley, J. William and Donald I. Baker (1991). International Mergers: The Antitrust Process (London: Sweet
and Maxwell).
Safarian, A. Edward (1969). Foreign Ownership of Canadian Industry (Toronto: University of Toronto Press).
253
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Scollay, R. (1996). “The Australia - New Zealand Closer Economic Relations Agreement”, in B. Bora and
C. Findlay, eds., Regional Integration and the Asia Pacific (Melbourne: Oxford University Press), pp.
184-196.
Shapiro, D.M. (1983). “Entry, exit and the theory of multinational corporations”, in C.P. Kindleberger and
D.B. Audretsch, eds., The Multinational Corporation in the 1980s (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press).
Sivalingam, M. and Siew-Peng Yong (1993). “TNCs and industrialization in Malaysia: organizational
behaviour and local and regional impacts”, Regional Development Dialogue, 14, 4 (Winter), pp. 40-
64.
Singh, Rana (1991). “Trends in technology flows to developing countries”. Paper prepared for UNIDO,
mimeo..
Sohn, Y. J. (1996). “Survival game: defeat or be defeated. Foreign giants coming into the local distribution
market”, Business Korea (February), pp. 23-26.
Spencer, William (1997). “Winning through cooperation”, Technology Review, 100, 1, pp. 20-27.
Standing, Guy et al. (1996). Restructuring the Labour Market: The South African Challenge (Geneva:
International Labour Office).
Starek, Roscoe B. III (1996). “International cooperation in antitrust enforcement”, prepared remarks before
the Illinois State Bar Association International Trade Programme, Chicago, Illinois, 10 May, mimeo..
Steuer, M.D. et al. (1973). The Impact of Foreign Direct Investment on the United Kingdom (London: Her
Majesty’s Stationery Office).
Summers, Robert and Alan Heston (1991). “The Penn World Table (Mark 5): an expanded set of international
comparisons, 1950-1988", The Quarterly Journal of Economics, 106, 2 (May), pp. 327-368.
Sun, Haishun (1996). “Direct foreign investment and linkage effects: the experience of China”, Asian
Economies, 25, 1, pp. 5-28.
Sunstein, Cass (1997). Free Markets and Social Justice (New York: Oxford University Press).
Sutton, J. (1991). Sunk Costs and Market Structure (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press).
Swiss Business Council of Hong Kong (1996). Business Confidence Survey, October (Hong Kong: Political
and Economic Risk Consultancy).
Takigawa, Toshiaki (1997). “Reflections on US/Japan photographic film dispute: examination of market
access barriers in WTO”. Paper presented to the Conference on Trade and Competition Policies
(Pacific Economic Cooperation Council), 13-14 March, Montreal, Canada, mimeo..
Thailand, Bank of Thailand (1996). “Analysing Thailand’s short-term debt”, Bank of Thailand Economic
Focus, 1, 3 (July-September).
254
References
The Delegate of German Industry and Commerce Hong Kong, South China, Viet Nam and German
Association of Hong Kong (1996). Survey of German Business in Hong Kong and China (Hong Kong:
Association of Hong Kong and German Business Association).
Toyo Keizai (1996). Kaigai Shinshutsu Kigyo Soran 1996 (Tokyo: Toyo Keizai Shimposha).
Tran Van Tho, ed. (1993).”Japanese Management Style and Technology Transfer in Thailand”, Research
Report No. 3 (Tokyo: Japan Center for Economic Research), October.
Tuthill, L. (forthcoming). “The GATS and new rules for regulators”, Telecommunications Policy, 21, 9
(November).
Ullrich, Hans (1995). “TRIPS: adequate protection, inadequate trade, adequate competition policy”, Pacific
Rim Law and Policy Journal, 4, 1, pp. 154-210.
United Kingdom (1973). Fair Trading Act, 1973 (London: Her Majesty’s Stationery Office (HMSO)).
__________, Central Statistical Office (1988). Report of the Census of Production 1986 (London: HMSO).
__________, Office for National Statistics (1996). Financial Statistics (London: HMSO).
__________ Monopolies and Mergers Commission (MMC) (1981). “Enserts Corp. (US) and Davy Corp. Ltd.”,
Report on the Proposed Merger, CMND No. 8360 (London: HMSO).
__________ Office of Fair Trading (1995). Mergers: A Guide to Procedures under the Fair Trading Act, 1973
(London: HMSO).
United Nations (1996). World Economic and Social Survey 1996 (New York: United Nations), United
Nations publication, Sales No. E.96.II.C.1.
United Nations Centre on Transnational Corporations (UNCTC) (1981). Transnational Corporations: Direct
Effects on the Balance of Payments, United Nations document No. E/C.10/84, 6 April.
__________ (1989). Foreign Direct Investment and Transnational Corporations in Services (New York:
United Nations). United Nations publication, Sales No. E.89.II.A.1.
__________ (1992a). The Determinants of Foreign Direct Investment: A Survey of the Evidence (New York:
United Nations), United Nations publication, Sales No. E.92.II.A.2.
__________ (1992b). World Investment Report 1992, Transnational Corporations as Engines of Growth
(New York:United Nations), United Nations publication, Sales No. E.92.II.A.13.
United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) (1993a). Explaining and Forecasting
Regional Flows of Foreign Direct Investment (New York: United Nations), United Nations publication,
Sales No. E.94.II.A.5..
__________ (1993b). Small and Medium-sized Transnational Corporations: Role, Impact and Policy
Implications (New York: United Nations), United Nations publication, Sales No. E.93.II.A.15.
255
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
__________ (1993c). World Investment Report 1993: Transnational Corporations and Integrated International
Production (New York: United Nations), United Nations publication, Sales No. E. 93.II.A.14.
__________ (1994a). World Investment Report 1994: Transnational Corporations, Employment and the
Workplace (New York and Geneva: United Nations), United Nations publication, Sales No.
E.94.II.A.14.
__________ (1994b). “Interrelationship between investment and technology transfer - laws and regulations
dealing with transfer and development of technology: an overview”. UNCTAD document TD/B/
WG.5/10, mimeo..
__________ (1995a). World Investment Report 1995: Transnational Corporations and Competitiveness
(New York and Geneva: United Nations), United Nations publication, Sales No. E.95.II.A.9.
__________ (1995b). Foreign Direct Investment in Africa (New York and Geneva: United Nations), United
Nations publication, Sales No. E.95.II.A.6.
__________ (1995c). “Draft commentaries on possible elements for articles of a model law or laws”. Note
prepared by the UNCTAD secretariat, UNCTAD document No. TD/B/RBP/81/Rev. 4, 21 August,
mimeo..
__________ (1995d). “Restrictive business practices that have an effect in more than one country, in
particular developing and other countries, with overall conclusions regarding the issues raised by
these cases”. UNCTAD document No.TD/RBP/CONF.4/6, mimeo..
_________ (1996a). World Investment Report 1996: Investment, Trade and International Policy Arrangements
(New York and Geneva: United Nations), United Nations publication, Sales No. E.96.II.A.14.
_________ (1996b). The TRIPS Agreement and Developing Countries (Geneva: United Nations), United
Nations publication, Sales No. E. 96.II.D.10.
_________ (1996c). Trade and Development Report, 1966 (Geneva: United Nations), United Nations
publication, Sales No. E. 96. II.D.6.
_________ (1996e). Incentives and Foreign Direct Investment (Geneva and New York: United Nations),
United Nations publication, Sales No. E. 96.II. A. 6.
_________ (1996f). “Competition policy and legislation: Information Note 21". Note by the UNCTAD
secretariat to the Intergovernmental Group of Experts on Competition Law and Policy, UNCTAD
document TD/B/RBP/INF.37, mimeo..
_________ (1996g). “Competition policy and restrictive business practices: Issue No. 20". Note prepared by
the UNCTAD secretariat to the Intergovernmental Group of Experts on Restrictive Business Practices.
UNCTAD document No. TD/B/RBP/INF. 36, mimeo..
256
References
_________ (1997a). World Investment Directory 1996, Volume V, Africa (Geneva: United Nations),United
Nations publication, Sales No. E.97.II.A.1.
_________ (1997b). Sharing Asia’s Dynamism: Asian Direct Investment in the European Union (Geneva:
United Nations), United Nations publication, Sales No. E.97.II.D.1.
_________ (1997c). World Investment Directory 1996, Volume VI, West Asia (Geneva: United Nations),
United Nations publication, Sales No. E.97.II.A.2.
__________, Invest in France Mission and Arthur Andersen, in collaboration with DATAR (1997).
International Investment: Towards theYear2001(Geneva:UnitedNations), United Nations publication,
Sales No. GV.E.97.0.5.
United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) (1996). Human Development Report 1996 (New York:
Oxford University Press).
United Nations Economic Commission for Africa (ECA) (1997). “Report on the economic and social situation
in Africa”. Document No. E/ECA/CM.23/3, mimeo..
United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UN-ECE) (1996a). “Korean foreign direct investment in
Central and Eastern Europe”, East-West Investment News, 3 (Autumn), pp. 14-23.
United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) (1995). Statistical Yearbook
(Paris: UNESCO).
United Nations Industrial Development Organization (UNIDO) (1996). Industrial Statistical Yearbook
(Vienna: UNIDO).
United States, Supreme Court (1951a). “United States v. National Lead Company et al.”, Supreme Court
Reports, vol. 67 (Saint Paul, Minnesota: West Publishing Company), p. 1634.
________________________ (1951b). “United States v. Timken Roller Bearing Co.”, Supreme Court Reports,
vol. 71 (Saint Paul, Minnesota: West Publishing Company), pp. 1 and 199.
__________
__________, District Court for the District of Massachusetts (1968). “United States v. Gillete Co., Civ. No.
68-141-W” (complaint filed, case unreported).
________________________ (1975a). “United States v. Gillette Co.”, Trade Cases vol. 1976-1, (Chicago:
Commerce Clearing House), ƒ 60691 (consent decree).
________________________ (1975b). “United States v. Gillette”, Federal Supplement, vol. 406F, (Saint Paul,
Minnesota: West Publishing Company), p. 713.
__________, Northern District Court of Ohio (1970). “United States v. Ciba Company”, Trade Cases, vol.
1970 (Chicago: Commerce Clearing House Inc.), pp. 72 and 988.
257
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
________________________ (1976). “United States v. Diebold Inc.” Case no. 76-9A Trade Cases, vol. 1977-
2, (Saint Paul, Minnesota: West Publishing Company), ƒƒ 61,735 and 61,736.
_________, Southern District Court of New York (1945). “United States v. National Lead Company et al.”,
Federal Supplement, vol. 63 (Saint Paul, Minnesota: West Publishing Company), p. 513.
__________, District Court of Pennsylvania (1967). “United States v. Monsanto Co.”, Trade Cases, vol. 167
(Chicago: Commerce Clearing House), p. 2001.
_________, Federal Trade Court, 2nd Circuit (1979). “Berkey Photo, Inc. v. Eastman Kodak Company”,
Federal Reports, 2nd Series, vol. 603 (Saint Paul, Minnesota: West Publishing Company), para. 263,
p. 301.
__________, Federal Trade Court, 8th Circuit (1981). “Yamaha Motor Co. v. Federal Trade Commission”,
Federal Reports, 2nd Series, vol. 657 (Saint Paul, Minnesota: West Publishing Company), p. 971.
____________________ (1982). “Foreign Antitrust Enforcement Act of 1982, enacted as Title IV of the Export
Trading Act of 1982", United States Code Annotated, Sec. 4, 001 et seq. (Saint Paul, Minnesota: West
Publishing Company).
__________, Bureau of National Affairs (1990). Antitrust and Trade Regulation Report, vol. 59, No. 1495
(December) (Washington, D.C: United States Government Printing Office), pp. 5-15.
____________________ (1996). Anticipating the 21st Century: Competition Policy in the New High-tech
Global Market Place. Antitrust and Trade Regulation Report, Special Supplement, 70, 1765
(Washington, D.C.: United States Government Printing Office).
__________, Department of Commerce (1992). U.S. Direct Investment Abroad: 1989 Benchmark Survey,
Final Results (Washington, D.C.: United States Government Printing Office).
____________________ (1996a). “U.S. international sales and purchases of private services”, Survey of
Current Business, 76 (November) (Washington, D.C.: United States Government Printing Office), pp.
70-97.
____________________ (1996b). “Foreign direct investment in the United States. Operations of U.S. affiliates
of foreign companies. Preliminary 1994 estimates”, July 1996 (Washington, D.C.: United States
Government Printing Office).
__________________ (1996c). “Foreign direct investment in the United States: detail for historical-cost
position and related capital and income flows, 1995", Survey of Current Business, 76 (September)
(Washington, D.C.: United States Government Printing Office), pp. 69-97.
258
References
__________________ (1997). U.S. Direct Investment Abroad: 1994 Benchmark Survey, Preliminary Results
(Washington, D.C.: United States Government Printing Office).
__________________ (Various issues). Survey of Current Business (Washington, D.C.: United States
Government Printing Office).
_________, Department of Foreign Affairs and International Trade (1997) . “1997 Amendments of the United
States merger guidelines”, Press Release, 4 April.
_________, Department of Justice and Federal Trade Commission (1992). “ Horizontal merger guidelines,
1992”, f 4.0. Reprinted in Trade Regulations Reports (Chicago: Commercial Clearing House Inc.), f
13, 104.
__________________ (1995). “Antitrust guidelines for the licensing of intellectual property”, International
Legal Material, 34, pp. 1115-1149.
_________, Department of Labor (1996). International Comparison of Hourly Compensation Costs for
Production Workers 1975-1995. Supplementary Tables for BLS Report 909 (Washington, D.C.:
United States Government Printing Office).
_________, Federal Trade Commission (1996). Competition Policy in the New High-Tech, Global Market
Place (Washington, D.C.: United States Government Printing Office).
Utton, M. A. (1982).”Domestic concentration and interntional trade”, Oxford Economic Papers, 34, pp.
479-497.
_________ (1995). Market Dominance and Antitrust Policy (Aldershot: Edward Elgar).
Vaitsos, Constantine V. (1973). “Policies on foreign direct investment and economic development in Latin
America” (Brighton: Institute of Development Studies, University of Sussex).
Vanlommel, E., B. de Brabander and D. Liebaers (1977). “Industrial concentration in Belgium: empirical
comparison of alternative seller concentration measures”,, Journal of Industrial Economics, 26, 1
(September), pp. 1-20.
Van den Bulcke, Daniel (1995). “The strategic mangement of multinationals in a triad-based world
economy”, in Rugman, A.M., J. van den Broeck and A. Verbeke, eds., (1995). Beyond the Diamond.
Research in Global Strategic Management, vol. 5 (Greenwich, Conn. and London: JAI Press).
Varney, Christine A. (1995). “Cooperation between enforcement agencies: building upon the past”.
Remarks before the APEC Committee on Trade and Investment Conference on Competition Policy
and Law, Auckland, New Zealand, 25 July, mimeo..
Vayenas, Constantin (1997). “South Africa”, New Horizon Economies, 1st Quarter 1997 (London: United
Bank of Switzerland), pp. 97-98.
Waller, Spencer Weber (1995). “Special defences in international antitrust litigation”, American Bar
Association, Section of Antitrust Law, Series Monograph, No. 20 (Chicago: American Bar Association).
259
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Wells, Louis J., Jr. (1993). “Mobile exporters: new foreign investors in East Asia”, in Kenneth E. Froot, ed.,
Foreign Direct Investment (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press), pp. 173-196.
Willmore, Larry N. (1976). “Direct foreign investment in Central American manufacturing”, World
Development, 4, 6 (June), pp. 499-517.
__________ (1986). “The comparative performance of foreign and domestic firms in Brazil”, World
Development, 14, 4 (April), pp. 489-502.
__________ (1989). “Determinants of industrial structure: a Brazilian case study”, World Development, vol.
17, pp. 1601-1617.
World Bank (1993). World Debt Tables 1993-94, Volume 1 (Washington, D.C.: World Bank).
__________ (1995). World Debt Tables 1995 (Washington, D.C.: World Bank).
__________ (1996). World Development Report 1996 - From Plan to Market (Washington, D.C.: Oxford
University Press).
__________ (1997a). Financial Flows and the Developing Countries (Washington, D.C.: World Bank),
February.
__________ (various issues). Financial Flows and the Developing Countries, Quarterly, (Washington, D.C.:
World Bank).
World Trade Organization (WTO) (1995). The Results of the Uruguay Round of Multilateral Trade
Negotiations: The Legal Texts (Geneva: WTO).
__________ (1997) “Competition-related provisions in existing WTO Agreements”. Informal note by the
WTO secretariat to the Working Group on the Interaction between Trade and Competition Policy,
17 June, mimeo..
Zhan, James (1995). “Transnationalization and outward investment: the case of Chinese firms”, Transnational
Corporations, 4,3 (December), pp. 67-100.
260
ANNEXES
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
A.1 FDI inflows, GDP growth rates, interest rates and the investment-savings gap, 1991-1996 ..... 263
A.2 Cross-border mergers and acquisitions deals over $1 billion, 1996 ..................... 264
A.3 FDI inflows and outflows during FDI-boom and FDI-recession periods, and 1994-1996 ....... 266
A.4 Value of the gross product of foreign affiliates and their share in GDP,
by region, 1982, 1990 and 1994 ............................................ 267
A.5 Value of exports of foreign affiliates, their share in total sales,
and exports to affiliated firms, by region, 1982 and 1994 ............................ 268
A.6 Growth rates of FDI inflows in nominal and real prices, 1971-1996 ..................... 269
A.7 The financial composition of total assets and total liabilities of
United States affiliates abroad, 1994 .......................................... 270
A.8 The financing of FDI in the United States, by major home country and region, 1994-1995 ..... 271
A.9 United States direct investment in Japan: income and reinvested earnings, 1990-1995 ........ 272
A.10 Mergers and acquisitions of firms in SADC countries by South African TNCs, 1991-1996 ...... 273
A.11 Total portfolio equity flows to emerging markets, 1986-1995 ......................... 274
A.12 Capital flows in Malaysia, 1991-1995 ......................................... 276
A.13 Capital flows in South Africa, 1986-1995 ...................................... 277
A.14 Capital flows in Thailand, 1989-1995 ......................................... 278
A.15 Capital flows in Turkey, 1986-1996 .......................................... 279
A.16 Capital flows in Venezuela, 1989-1996 ........................................ 280
A.17 Stock market and macroeconomic indicators in Malaysia, South Africa,
Thailand, Turkey and Venezuela, 1986-1995 .................................... 281
A.18 Investment regulations for FPEI entering and exiting emerging stock markets, 1988 and 1995 ... 283
A.19 International emerging market equity funds: total net assets of global,
regional and country funds, 1986-1996 ........................................ 284
A.20 United States net FPEI in emerging markets, 1980-1996 ............................. 286
A.21 Emerging market issues of international equity-related bonds, 1986-1995 ................. 288
A.22 Countries and territories with competition laws, 1996 .............................. 290
A.23 Main features of merger, acquisition and joint venture control regulations
in 16 developed countries and the European Union, 1994 ........................... 291
262
Annex
Annex table A.1. FDI inflows, GDP growth rates, interest rates and
the investment-savings gap, 1991-1996
1991-1992 1995-1996
Items (FDI recession) ( FDI boom)
Interest rateb
(Per cent) 8.2 6.6
Source: UNCTAD, based on UNCTAD FDI/TNC database; IMF, 1996; and United Nations, 1996.
a Average of growth rates of each year.
b Long-term interest rate of developed countries.
c Shortage of savings as percentage of GDP.
263
Annex table A.2. Cross-border mergers and acquisitions deals over $1 billion, 1996
264
Deal value
(Billion dollars) Acquiring company Home country Acquired company Host country Acquired firm industry
5.6 Carena Developments Ltd-led
consortium Canada Olympia and York Companies USA United States Real estate
4.2 Fresenius AG Germany National Medical Care Inc. United States Medical, dental, hospital
equipment and supplies
3.5 Aegon NV Netherlands Providian Corp. United States Insurance
3.4 The Thomson Corp. Canada West Publishing Co. United States Printing and publishing
3.4 Hoechst AG Germany Roussel-Uclaf S.A. France Pharmaceutical preparations
3.3 Muenchener Rueckver-
sicherungsgesellschaft Germany American Re Corp. United States Insurance
3.2 Sophus Berendsen A/S
(through the Rentokil group PLC) Denmark BET PLC United Kingdom Business services
3.1 Credit Local de France S.A. France Credit Communal de Belgique S.A. Belgium Banking and Finance
2.9 Koninklijke Ahold NV Netherlands Stop and Shop Cos. United States Retail distribution
2.8 Farnell Electronics PLC United Kingdom Premier Industrial Corp. United States Wholesale distribution
2.7 Scheweizerische Rueckver-
sicherungs Gesellsc Switzerland Mercantile and General Reinsurance United Kingdom Life insurance
2.6 Avon Energy (GPU General Public Production and distribution
Utilities, Cinergy) United States Midlands Electricity PLC United Kingdom of energy
2.5 LVMH Moet-Hennessy L Vuitton France DFS Group Ltd. United States Retail stores
2.5 News Corp Ltd. Australia New World Commun Grp. (Mafco) United States Television broadcasting
stations
2.3 Southern Electric Intl. United States Consolidated Electric Power Hong Kong Electric services
2.2 Adia S.A. Switzerland ECCO France Help supply services
2.2 DR Investments(Domion) United Kingdom East Midlands Electricity PLC United Kingdom Electric services
2.1 ..a United Kingdom AT&T Capital Corp United States Short-term business credit
institutions
2.1 Energy Corp. United States London Electricity PLC United Kingdom Power plant(s)
2.0 Canal Plus S.A. France Nethold South Africa Television programmes
2.0 ABN AMRO Holding NV Netherlands Standard Federal Bancorp United States Banking and finance
1.9 Lucas Industries PLC United Kingdom Varity Corp. United States Farm machinery and
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
equipment
1.9 Coca Cola Enterprises Inc. United States Coca-Cola & Schweppes Beverages United Kingdom Food, drink and tobacco
/...
(Annex table A.2, cont'd)
Deal value
(Billion dollars) Acquiring company Home country Acquired company Host country Acquired firm industry
1.9 GRS Holdings Ltd. United Kingdom AT&T Capital United States Banking and finance
1.8 ..a United Kingdom Yallourn Energy Australia Electric services
1.8 Hazelwood Power Partnership United Kingdom Hazelwood Power Station Australia Gas and other services
combined
1.7 The Great UniverS.A.l Stores PLC United Kingdom Experian Corp. United States Business services
1.7 ..a United States Light SE Brazil Electric services
1.6 KPN Koninklijke PTT Nederland NV Netherlands TNT Ltd. Australia Courier services
1.6 Societe Generale de Belgique Belgium Tractebel S.A. Belgium Engineering services
1.5 Battle Mountain Gold Company Inc. United States Hemlo Gold Mines Inc. Canada Gold ores
1.5 Softbank Corporation Japan Kingston Technology Corp. United States Computer peripheral
equipment
1.5 Robert Bosch GmbH Germany Allied Signal Inc. United States Motor vehicle parts and
accessories
1.4 ..a France Fletcher Challenge Paper Ltd. New Zealand Pulp mills
1.4 Mobil Corporation United States Ampolex LTD Australia Extraction of mineral oil
and natural gas
1.4 Kvaerner A/S Norway Trafalgar House PLC United Kingdom Construction
1.4 Malex Industries Bhd Malaysia Brierley Investments Ltd. New Zealand Banking and finance
1.3 Sonat Offshore Drilling United States Transocean Drilling A/S Norway Oil and gas field services
1.3 Calenergy Inc. United States Northern Electric PLC United Kingdom Power plant(s)
1.3 Henkel KGaA Germany Loctite Corp. United States Chemical industry
1.2 Saga Petroleum A/S (Aker A/S) Norway Santa Fe Exploration (UK) Ltd. United Kingdom Extraction of mineral oil
and natural gas
1.2 Potash Corp. of Saskatchewan Inc. Canada Arcadian Corp. United States Chemical industry
1.1 Viag AG (through SKW
Trostberg AG) Germany Master Buildings Technologies AG Switzerland Chemical industry
1.0 General Motors Corporation United States Rocket Systems Corp. Japan Manufacture of launching
equipment
1.0 Banco de Santander S.A. Spain Banco Osorno and LA Union Chile Banking and finance
Source: UNCTAD, based on information provided by IFR Securities Data Company (London and New York).
a The name of the acquiring company is not available.
265
Annex
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
Annex table A.3. FDI inflows and outflows during FDI-boom and FDI-recession periods, and 1994-1996
( Billions of dollars and percentage)
FDI-boom period
(annual average)
1979-1981 36.8 55.8 16.3 1.3 0.02 0.01 53.2 57.1
1986-1990 131.8 163.5 26.5 11.7 0.5 0.02 158.9 175.1
1995-1996 207.0 293.0 112.5 49.2 13.3 0.5 332.9 342.8
FDI-recession period
(annual average)
1975-1977 14.6 27.3 6.5 0.4 0.003 0.01 21.1 27.8
1991-1992 117.2 184.7 45.6 15.0 3.4 0.06 166.3 199.8
1994 142.3 209.7 90.4 40.7 5.8 0.7 238.7 251.1
1995 205.8 291.2 96.3 47.0 14.3 0.4 316.5 338.7
1996 208.2 294.7 128.7 51.5 12.2 0.6 349.2 346.8
Source: UNCTAD, based on UNCTAD FDI/TNC database and annex tables B.1 and 2.
a Growth rate of the period average over an immediate preceding year.
b The absolute values of FDI inflows in 1985 and average 1986-1990 are $15 million and $600 million, respectively.
c The absolute values of FDI outflows in 1985 and average 1986-1990 are $1 million and $20 million, respectively.
266
Annex
Annex table A.4. Value of the gross product of foreign affiliatesa and their share in GDP,
by region, 1982, 1990 and 1994
(Billions of dollars and percentage)
267
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
Annex table A.5. Value of exports of foreign affiliates,a their share in total sales,
and exports to affiliated firms,b by region, 1982 and 1994
(Billions of dollars and percentage)
268
Annex
Annex table A.6. Growth rates of FDI inflows in nominal and real prices,a 1971-1996
(Percentage)
269
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
270
Annex
Memorandum:
Percentage of capital inflows Percentage of equitya in
Reinvested Intra-company FDI position in the
Country/region Equity capital earnings loans country, 1995
All countries 67 17 16 72
Canada 62 52 -14 89
Europe 55 17 28 67
Japan 119 -0.3 -19 79
Other 115 1.7 -16 82
Memorandum:
Percentage of capital outflows Percentage of equitya in
Reinvested Intra-company FDI position
Equity capital earnings loans abroad, 1995
All countries 31 58 10 90
Canada 21 73 6 91
Europe 46 50 5 86
Latin America and the Caribbean 19 68 12 103
Asia and the Pacific 24 58 18 88
271
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
Annex table A.9. United States direct investment in Japan: income and reinvested earnings, 1990-1995
Memorandum:
All host countries,
1990-1995c 61 928 11.3 28 419 51.7 45.9
272
Annex
Annex table A.10. Mergers and acquisitions of firms in SADC countries by South African TNCs,
1991-1996
Percentage Value of
Name of Name of Industry of Host country of shares transaction
Year acquiring company acquired company acquired company of investment acquired (Million dollars)
1994 MacMed Health Care Latric Surgical Supplies Medical supplies Zimbabwe 45 0.5
Source: UNCTAD, based on data provided by Ernst & Young South Africa.
a Includes the acquisitions of ANZ Grindlay Bank’s affiliates in Ghana, Kenya, Nigeria, Uganda and Zaire.
273
Annex table A.11. Total portfolio equity flows to emerging markets, 1986-1995
274
(Millions of dollars)
Standard Relative
Average deviation variance
Region 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 (1986-95) (1986-95) (1986-95)
FPEI (net)a 606 682 1061 3372 3200 7200 11000 45000 32700 32100 13692 16486.9 1.45
Near-equity debt securitiesb 100 30 130 80 190 1771 601 3532 6841 2437 1561 2220.9 2.02
Convertible bonds 100 30 130 30 120 1401 536 3325 6739 2228 1454 2174.9 2.24
Bonds with equity warrantsc - - - 50 70 370 65 207 102 209 153 116.2 0.57
Total portfolio equity and
quasi-equity 706 712 1091 3452 3390 8971 11601 48532 39541 34537 15253 18335.4 1.44
Memorandum item:
FDI (net)d 16445 24163 28833 29977 33732 41323 50374 73133 87023 99669 48467 28542.1 0.35
By region:
Asia
FPEI (net)a 223 405 786 2791 1800 700 2500 16600 16300 17000 5911 7449.9 1.59
Near-equity debt securitiesb 60 30 30 80 190 1458 601 3192 4471 1957 1207 1562.7 1.68
Convertible bonds 60 30 30 30 120 1188 536 3142 4369 1748 1125 1530.1 1.85
Bonds with equity warrantsc - - - 50 70 270 65 50 102 209 117 87.5 0.56
Total portfolio equity and
quasi-equity 283 435 816 2871 1990 2158 3101 19792 20771 18957 7117 8840.3 1.54
Memorandum item:
FDI (net)d 6864 11786 15322 16137 20101 21038 27579 46599 53720 65140 28429 19740.3 0.48
Memorandum item:
FDI (net)d 3073 3763 3612 5363 4621 4728 4788 6602 7467 7125 5114 1513.0 0.09
/...
(Annex table A.11, cont'd)
Standard Relative
Average deviation variance
Region 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 (1986-95) (1986-95) (1986-95)
FPEI (net)a c - 78 176 434 1099 6227 8228 27200 13200 7200 7094 8810.2 1.54
Near-equity debt securitiesb c - - - - - 150 - 340 1895 130 503 787.6 2.45
Convertible bondsc - - - - - 50 - 183 1895 130 452 810 3.22
Bonds with equity warrantsc - - - - - 100 - 157 - - 51 .. ..
Total portfolio equity and
quasi-equityc - 78 176 434 1099 6377 8228 27540 15095 7330 7373 9087.0 1.52
Memorandum item:
FDI (net)d 6515 8588 9837 8416 8898 15362 17695 19455 25302 26558 14663 7349.8 0.25
FPEI (net)a c - - - 70 235 - 100 1000 2300 2800 929 1165.8 1.57
Near-equity debt securitiesb c 40 - 100 - - 163 - - - - 30 56.8 3.51
Convertible bonds 40 - 100 - - 163 - - - - 30 56.8 3.51
Bonds with equity warrants - - - - - - - - - - - .. ..
Total portfolio equity and
quasi-equity 40 - 100 70 235 163 100 1000 2300 2800 681 1033.0 2.30
Memorandum item:
FDI (net)d -6 26 63 61 113 195 312 477 534 845 262 278.3 1.13
Sources: UNCTAD, based on World Bank, resource flows and transfers database and OECD, 1996d.
Note: FPEI = foreign portfolio equity investment.
a Data from the World Bank database on resource flows and transfers. According to the Bank’s definition, portfolio equity flows include country funds, depositary
receipts and direct purchase of shares by foreign investors.
b Totals may differ from those reported in the OECD source publication due to adjustments which have been made to include emerging market OECD countries and
exclude non-OECD developed markets.
c Averages are calculated over the period commencing from the first year for which a positive balance is recorded.
d Data on FDI are from the UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database.
275
Annex
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
Standard Relative
Average deviation variance
Capital flows 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1991-95 1991-95 1991-95
Total net capital flows 5 624 8 739 10 815 1 294 7 437 6 782 3 225 0.23
Long-term 3 757 4 050 5 395 4 532 6 472 4 841 986 0.04
Short-term 1 867 4 689 5 421 -3 239 965 1 941 3 080 2.52
Direct investment, net 3 609 4 669 3 681 2 525 1 557 3 208 1 069 0.11
In reporting country 3 999 5 183 5 006 4 342 4 132 4 532 475 0.01
Abroada 389 514 1 325 1 817 2 575 1 324 817 0.38
Portfolio investment a -700 3 200 9 339 4 135 1 282 3 451 3 381 0.96
Equity securities -682 2 787 8 953 4 290 1 234 3 317 3 266 0.97
Debt securities -19 413 386 -155 48 135 226 2.81
Government -19 413 386 -155 48 135 226 2.81
Corporate - - - - - - .. ..
Money-market
instruments - - - - - - .. ..
Source: UNCTAD, based on data provided by Bank Negara Malaysia; UNCTAD FDI/TNC database.
a Data on portfolio investment are not official balance-of-payments data, but are based upon the Central Bank’s Cash
Balance of Payments Reporting System.
276
Annex table A. 13. Capital flows in South Africa, 1986-1995
(Millions of dollars)
Standard Relative
Mean deviation variance
Capital flows 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 (1986-95) (1986-95) (1986-95)
Total net capital flows -3796 -2245 -1382 -522 -1615 -334 632 635 2265 4536 -183 2248 151.31
Long-term -1394 -835 -518 -231 -39 -628 -530 762 988 4175 175 1494 73.14
Short-term -2402 -1410 -863 -291 -1576 294 1163 -127 1277 361 -357 1141 10.18
Direct investment, net -116 -163 93 -375 -118 -14 -804 -302 11 -235 -202 242 1.43
In reporting country -53 -75 161 -207 -91 212 -42 -19 338 327 55 180 10.69
Abroad 63 88 68 168 27 226 762 283 327 562 257 227 0.78
Portfolio investment -678 -724 -200 -202 -518 -254 -112 1082 2130 2180 270 1055 15.26
Equity securities -602 -676 -7 5 -637 -845 -797 860 110 1347 -124 706 32.31
Debt securities -39 -50 -191 -96 50 591 685 222 1535 1308 401 581 2.10
Government -19 -178 -54 -133 -48 176 107 136 1001 1256 224 468 4.35
Corporate -20 128 -137 37 98 415 578 86 534 52 177 231 1.70
Money-market instruments -37 2 -2 -112 69 - - - 485 -475 -7 219 1012.94
Source: UNCTAD, based on data provided by South African Reserve Bank; UNCTAD FDI/TNC database.
277
Annex
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
Standard Relative
Average deviation variance
Capital flows 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 (1989-95) (1989-95) (1989-95)
Total net capital flows 4456 9678 11300 9478 10510 12137 21952 11358.6 4892.5 0.19
Long-term .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Short-term .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Direct investment, net 1725 2304 1847 1967 1497 829 1117 1612.3 369.7 0.08
In reporting country 1775 2444 2014 2114 1730 1322 2003 1914.6 325.7 0.03
Abroad 50 140 167 147 233 493 886 302.3 271.1 0.80
Portfolio investment 1486 -38 -81 924 5455 2486 4083 2045.0 1942.2 0.90
Equity securities 1424 440 37 455 2679 -389 2123 967.0 1050.2 1.18
Debt securities 63 -478 -118 469 2776 2875 1960 1078.1 1317.1 1.49
Government 73 -449 - 373 443 1246 991 382.4 541.6 2.01
Corporate -9 -33 -118 96 2333 1629 969 695.3 900.5 1.68
Money-market
instruments - - - - - - - - .. ..
Source: UNCTAD, based on data provided by Bank of Thailand; UNCTAD FDI/TNC database.
278
Annex table A.15. Capital flows in Turkey, 1986-1996
(Millions of dollars)
Standard Relative
Average deviation variance
Capital flows 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996a (1986-95) (1986-95) (1986-95)
Total net capital flows 2124 1891 -958 780 4037 -2397 3648 8963 -4194 4722 2456 1861.6 3612.9 3.77
Long-term 1312 1841 1323 1364 1037 623 2252 5909 933 2417 665 1901.1 1440.3 0.57
Short-term 812 50 -2281 -584 3000 -3020 1396 3054 -5127 2305 1791 .. 2592.0 ..
Direct investment, net 125 106 354 663 700 783 779 622 559 772 804 b 546.3 247.5 0.21
In reporting country 125 115 354 663 684 810 844 636 608 885 116 b 572.4 266.6 0.22
Abroad .. 9 .. .. -16 27 65 14 49 113 312 b 26.1 37.2 2.03
Portfolio investment 146 282 1178 1386 547 623 2411 3917 1158 1724 798 1337.2 1081.0 0.65
Equity securities - -25 -6 -42 -45 56 300 431 994 1607 110 327.0 527.7 2.60
Debt securities 146 307 1184 1428 592 567 2111 3486 164 117 688 1010.2 1033.1 1.05
Government - 178 797 1043 572 593 2427 4233 513 720 526 1107.6 1214.7 1.20
Corporate 146 129 387 385 20 -26 -316 -747 -349 -603 162 -97.4 372.2 14.60
Money-market
instruments - - - - - - - - - - -- .. ..
Source: UNCTAD, based on data provided by Central Bank of the Republic of Turkey; UNCTAD FDI/TNC database.
a January through March 1996.
b Based on UNCTAD's estimates for 1996.
279
Annex
280
Annex table A.16. Capital flows in Venezuela, 1989-1996
(Millions of dollars)
Standard Relative
Average deviation variance
Capital flows 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995a 1996a (1989-96) (1989-96) (1989-96)
Total net capital flows -5513 -3294 2962 3104 1878 -3153 -2807 -478 -912.6 3053.0 11.19
Long-term -1318 -811 2490 2902 1842 -1354 -745 -235 346.4 1654.3 22.81
Short-term -4195 -2483 472 202 36 -1799 -2062 -243 -1259.0 1536.8 1.49
Direct investment, net 34 76 1728 473 -514 136 597 678 b 410.0 615.3 2.35
In reporting country 213 451 1916 629 372 813 900 1300 b 824.3 522.0 0.40
Abroad 179 375 188 156 886 677 303 622 b 423.3 255.3 0.36
Portfolio investment -526 18008 409 1076 652 330 -94 759 2576.8 5851.2 5.16
Source: UNCTAD, based on data provided by Central Bank of Venezuela; UNCTAD FDI/TNC database.
a Preliminary data.
b Based on UNCTAD's estimates for 1996.
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
Annex table A.17. Stock market and macroeconomic indicators in Malaysia, South Africa,
Thailand, Turkey and Venezuela, 1986-1995
Country 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995
Malaysia
Market capital - GDP ratio (%) 54.3 58.6 67.2 105.2 113.5 124.4 162.0 347.8 282.1 ..
Foreign investment (million dollars) .. .. .. .. .. -682.1 2789.9 8938.7 4289.6 1150.0
Change in foreign investment (%) .. .. .. .. .. .. 509.0 220.0 -52.0 -73.0
Change in stock market index (%) 8.1 3.5 36.8 58.2 -15.0 9.9 15.8 98.0 -23.8 2.5
Price/earnings ratio 30.9 33.5 33.2 27.4 23.6 21.3 21.8 43.5 29.0 25.1
GDP growth rate (%) 1.2 5.4 8.9 9.2 9.7 8.7 7.8 8.3 8.7 ..
Inflation rate (%) 0.7 0.3 2.6 2.8 2.6 4.4 4.8 3.4 3.7 5.3
Banking deposit rate % per annum 7.2 3.0 .. 4.6 5.9 7.2 .. .. .. 5.9
Change in exchange rate (%)a .. 2.4 -3.9 -3.4 0.2 -1.7 7.4 -1.1 -1.9 4.6
South Africa
Market capital - GDP ratio (%) 163.7 156.8 143.0 142.8 128.9 150.0 86.8 146.7 185.5 210.0
Foreign investment (million dollars) -602.0 -676.0 -7.0 5.0 -637.0 -845.0 -797.0 860.0 110.0 1347.0
Change in foreign investment (%) .. -12.3 100.0 171.4 -12840.0 -32.6 5.7 207.9 -87.2 1124.5
Change in stock market index (%) 49.2 -7.7 9.0 50.0 -8.6 26.5 -5.3 50.1 19.9 6.1
Price/earnings ratio .. .. .. .. .. .. 13.2 17.3 21.3 18.8
GDP growth rate (%) 0.1 2.0 4.2 2.5 -1.0 -1.0 -2.6 1.3 2.4 ..
Inflation rate (%) 18.6 16.1 12.8 14.7 14.4 15.3 13.9 9.7 9.0 8.6
Banking deposit rate % per annum 11.0 8.7 13.5 18.1 18.9 17.3 13.8 11.5 11.1 13.5
Change in exchange rate (%)a .. 10.9 -11.6 -15.4 1.4 -6.7 -3.3 -14.6 -8.7 -2.1
Thailand
Market capital - GDP ratio (%) 6.7 10.8 14.3 35.5 27.9 36.3 52.2 104.2 91.8 ..
Foreign investment (million dollars) .. .. .. 1426.4 449.5 36.4 453.2 2681.8 -408.1 2118.8
Change in foreign investment (%) .. .. .. .. -68.5 -92.0 1145.0 491.7 -115.2 619.2
Change in stock market index (%) 53.5 37.5 35.7 127.3 -30.3 16.1 25.6 88.4 -19.2 -5.8
Price/earnings ratio 11.6 10.4 11.2 16.3 8.7 12.0 13.9 27.5 21.2 21.7
GDP growth rate (%) 5.6 9.6 13.3 12.2 11.7 8.4 7.9 8.3 8.6 ..
Inflation rate (%) 1.8 2.5 3.9 5.4 5.9 5.7 4.1 3.6 5.1 7.3
Banking deposit rate % per annum 9.8 9.5 9.5 9.5 12.3 13.7 8.9 8.6 8.5 11.6
Change in exchange rate (%)a .. 2.2 1.7 -1.6 0.5 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.7 0.9
/...
281
Annex
282
(Annex table A.17, cont'd)
Country 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995
Turkey
Market capital - GDP ratio (%) 1.2 3.7 1.2 6.3 12.6 10.4 6.2 20.8 16.5 ..
Foreign investment (million dollars) .. -25.0 -6.0 -42.0 -45.0 56.0 300.0 431.0 994.0 1607.0
Change in foreign investment (%) .. .. 7.6 -600.0 -7.1 224.4 435.7 43.7 130.6 61.7
Change in stock market index (%) .. 293.9 -44.4 493.1 46.8 34.2 -8.3 416.0 31.8 468.0
Price/earnings ratio .. .. 2.0 16.5 13.2 13.7 6.9 36.3 31.0 8.4
GDP growth rate (%) 7.0 9.5 2.1 0.3 9.3 0.9 6.0 8.0 -5.5 ..
Inflation rate (%) 34.6 38.8 73.7 63.3 60.3 66.0 70.1 55.2 106.3 93.6
Banking deposit rate % per annum 40.6 35.0 49.1 53.5 47.6 62.9 68.7 64.6 87.8 76.1
Change in exchange rate (%)a .. -27.1 -65.9 -49.2 -22.9 -59.9 -64.7 -59.8 -169.5 -54.8
Venezuela
Market capital - GDP ratio (%) 2.5 4.9 3.0 3.4 17.2 21.0 12.6 13.3 7.0 ..
Foreign investment (million dollars) .. .. .. .. .. .. 165.0 48.0 585.0 270.0
Change in foreign investment (%) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. -70.9 1118.7 -53.8
Change in stock market index (%) 155.7 87.9 -1.6 -28.8 549.3 63.9 -32.2 -95.0 34.9 49.7
Price/earnings ratio 7.6 14.6 10.1 4.1 26.0 28.3 15.6 17.4 18.1 12.0
GDP growth rate (%) 6.3 4.5 6.2 -7.8 6.9 9.7 6.1 0.3 -2.8 ..
Inflation rate (%) 11.5 28.1 29.5 84.2 40.8 34.2 31.4 38.1 60.8 59.9
Banking deposit rate % per annum 8.9 8.9 8.9 29.2 27.8 31.1 35.4 53.7 39.0 24.7
Change in exchange rate (%)a .. -79.4 0.0 -139.2 -35.2 -21.1 -20.3 -32.8 -63.5 -19.1
Memorandum item:
US treasury bill rate (%) 5.97 5.83 6.67 8.11 7.51 5.41 3.46 3.02 4.27 5.51
Source: IFC, 1996; and IMF, International Financial Statistics (various issues).
a Negative sign indicates depreciation of the exchange rate.
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
Annex
Annex table A.18. Investment regulations for FPEI entering and exiting emerging
stock markets, 1988 and 1995a
1988 1995
Entry Exit Entry Exit
Are listed stocks Are listed stock
freely available to Repatriation of freely available to Repatriation of
foreign investors? Income Capital foreign investors? Income Capital
Free entry Free entry
Jordan Free Free Argentina Free Free
Malaysia Free Free Bangladesh Free Free
Portugal Free Free Botswana Free Free
Brazil Free Free
Relatively free entry Costa Rica Free Free
Argentina Restricted Only after 3 years Cote d’Ivoire Free Free
Chile Free After 5 years Croatia Free Free
Costa Rica Some restrictions Some restrictions Czech Republic Free Free
Greece Some restrictions Some restrictions Ecuador Free Free
Indonesia Some restrictions Some restrictions Egypt Free Free
Jamaica Some restrictions Some restrictions Ghana Free Free
Kenya Some restrictions Some restrictions Greece Free Free
Sri Lanka Some restrictions Some restrictions Hungary Free Free
Thailand Free Free Jordan Free Free
Trinidad and Tobago Relatively free Relatively free Malaysia Free Free
Venezuela Some restrictions Some restrictions Mexico Free Free
Namibia Free Free
Restricted by nationality Oman Free Free
Pakistan Only after 1 year Only after 1 year Pakistan Free Free
Panama Free Free
Special classes of shares Peru Free Free
Mexico Free Free Poland Free Free
Philippines Free Free Portugal Free Free
Zimbabwe Restricted Restricted South Africa Free Free
Turkey Free Free
Special funds only Zambia Free Free
Brazil Free Some restrictions
India Some restrictions Some restrictions Relatively free entry
Korea, Republic of Free Free Chile Free After 1 year
Taiwan Province Indonesia Some restrictions Some restrictions
of China Free Free Jamaica Free Free
Turkey Free Free Kenya Free Free
Korea Free Free
Closed Lithuania Free Free
Bangladesh Some restrictions Some restrictions Sri Lanka Some restrictions Some restrictions
Nigeria Some restrictions Some restrictions Thailand Free Free
Peru Restricted Restricted Trinidad and Tobago Free Free
Colombia Some restrictions Free Venezuela Some restrictions Some restrictions
Zimbabwe Free Free
Special classes of shares
China Free Free
Philippines Free Free
Authorized investors only
Colombia Free Free
India Free Free
Mauritius Free Free
Taiwan Province
of China Some restrictions Some restrictions
Closed
Nigeria Some restrictions Some restrictions
283
Annex table A.19. International emerging market equity funds: total net assets of global, regional and country funds, 1986-1996
284
(Millions of dollars and number of funds)
No. of
Region/economy 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 a fundsb
Asian regional funds 400 1234 1750 3100 4000 5350 8000 21500 32661 34800 40125 375
Country funds:
Bangladesh - - - - - - - - 20 21 31 1
China - 51 47 50 60 110 1300 3220 4000 5914 6680 108
India 200 208 270 300 830 970 1090 2055 4195 3000 3450 60
Indonesia - - 35 260 525 400 440 860 729 680 597 27
Korea, Republic of 700 885 990 1215 1205 1310 1710 3420 5406 5700 5150 94
Malaysia - 56 75 240 505 600 620 995 1345 918 875 20
Myanmar - - - - - - - - 25 28 60 2
Pakistan - - - - - 65 65 310 276 113 98 6
Philippines 15 39 45 280 240 290 350 670 655 551 654 13
Sri Lanka - - - - - - - 30 58 41 32 3
Taiwan Province of China 136 151 380 600 475 890 925 1860 3028 2750 3953 29
Thailand 165 170 845 1390 1400 1580 1920 2860 2862 3000 2855 31
Viet Nam - - - - - 10 30 50 273 368 386 6
Total funds 1616 2794 4437 7435 9240 11575 16450 37830 55533 57884 64946 775
Latin American regional funds - - - 175 380 1510 2000 5200 10919 8500 9750 155
Country funds:
Argentina - - - - - 115 105 170 214 212 230 6
Brazil - 63 220 320 165 380 485 625 1854 1350 1497 53
Chile - - - 160 380 740 850 1115 1683 1620 1200 7
Columbia - - - - - - 17 63 33 28 40 2
Mexico 200 225 300 330 530 780 1040 1865 1783 1060 1348 12
Peru - - - - - - 20 30 52 41 48 3
Venezuela - - - - - - - - - 1 1 1
Total funds 200 288 520 985 1455 3525 4517 9068 16538 12812 14114 239
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
/...
(Annex table A.19, cont'd)
No. of
Region/economy 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 a fundsb
European regional funds - - - 15 103 127 150 168 792 977 1950 40
Country funds:
Baltic Republics - - - - - - - - 15 34 43 2
Czech Republic - - - - - - 29 30 132 165 244 7
Greece - - 70 70 130 120 100 95 78 70 73 1
Hungary - - - 75 191 200 205 205 230 201 240 2
Poland - - - - - - - - - 18 80 2
Portugal - 25 50 225 230 225 225 275 324 323 306 5
Russian Federation - - - - - - - - 222 488 1250 26
Turkey - - - 115 115 90 80 145 119 113 130 3
Total funds - 25 120 500 769 762 789 918 1912 2389 4316 88
Country funds:
Egypt - - - - - - - - - - 150 3
Mauritius - - - - - - - 18 34 28 24 1
Morocco - - - - - - - 2 58 43 46 3
Oman - - - - - - - - 26 26 30 1
South Africa 80 100 115 125 500 550 665 595 935 1085 1062 12
Total funds 80 100 115 125 500 550 665 645 1376 1622 1780 35
Total regional and country funds 1896 3207 5192 9045 11964 16412 22421 48461 75359 74707 85156 1137
Global funds 70 592 900 1350 2300 3750 7750 24750 34716 36000 49500 298
285
Annex
Note: the definition of emerging markets utilized by Micropal in preparing this data differs somewhat from that used elsewhere in this Report.
Annex table A.20. United States net FPEI in emerging markets, 1980-1996
286
(Millions of dollars)
Region/economy 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996a
All emerging markets 19 148 21 -150 264 84 120 40 207 215 1572 3073 5430 13688 6622 6292 5867
Europe 3 -6 -5 -16 7 -1 3 35 -34 139 90 427 270 556 743 532 685
/...
(Annex table A.20, cont'd)
Region/economy 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996a
Asia -12 -22 17 9 54 31 129 27 31 -140 181 221 1194 3140 4311 3235 2390
Africa -3 61 2 -122 139 4 -31 -27 8 -62 8 -81 -6 249 255 360 680
287
Annex
Annex table A.21. Emerging market issues of international equity-related bonds, 1986-1995
288
(Millions of dollars)
Region/economy 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995
Convertible bonds
All emerging markets 100 30 130 30 120 1400.8 535.8 3324.7 6738.7 2257.5
By region:
Asia 60 30 30 30 120 1188.1 535.8 3142.1 4368.7 1747.5
China - - - - - - - 125.3 - 45
India - - - - - - - 445 533.4 -
Indonesia - - - - - 369.1 206 90 540 88.9
Malaysia - - - - - 190.2 - - 1160 200
Pakistan - - - - - - - 92.3 45 -
Philippines - - - - - - 280 368.8 272.9
Korea, Republic of 60 30 30 30 120 597.4 258.7 492.1 640.6 836.1
Thailand - - - - - 31.4 71.1 1617.4 1080.9 304.6
By region:
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
/...
(Annex table A.21, cont'd)
Region/economy 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995
All emerging markets 100 30 130 80 190 1770.8 600.8 3531.7 6840.9 2436.5
By region:
Asia 60 30 30 80 190 1458.1 600.8 3192.1 4470.9 1956.5
China - - - - - - - 125.3 - 45
India - - - - - - - 445 533.4 -
Indonesia - - - - - 369.1 206 90 540 88.9
Malaysia - - - - - 190.2 - - 1160 200
Pakistan - - - - - - - 92.3 45 -
Philippines - - - - - - - 280 368.8 272.9
Korea, Republic of 60 30 30 80 190 867.4 323.7 542.1 678.1 1045.1
Thailand - - - - - 31.4 71.1 1617.4 1145.6 304.6
289
Annex
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
Annex table A.22. Countries and territories with competition laws, 1996a
Canada (1888) Côte d’Ivoire (1978) Lebanon (1967) Argentina (1923) Hungary (1984)
United States (1890) Mauritius (1980) India (1969) Chile (1959) Poland (1990)
Australia (1906) Kenya (1988) Pakistan (1970) Colombia (1959) Bulgaria (1991)
New Zealand (1908) Gabon (1989) Thailand (1979) Brazil (1962) Czech Republic (1991)
Sweden (1925) Tunisia (1991) Republic of Korea (1980) Venezuela (1973) Latvia (1991)
Japan (1947) Mali (1992) Sri Lanka (1987) Peru (1991) Romania (1991)
United Kingdom (1948) Ghana (1993) Cyprus (1989) Mexico (1992) Russian
Ireland (1953) Zambia (1994) Kazakstan (1991) Jamaica (1993) Federation (1991)
Norway (1953) Algeria (1995) Taiwan Province Costa Rica (1994) Slovakia (1991)
Denmark (1955) Cameroonb of China (1991) Panama (1996) Belarus (1992)
South Africa (1955) Egyptb Fiji (1992) Boliviab Lithuania (1992)
Netherlands (1956) Malawib Uzbekistan (1992) Dominican Republicb Ukraine (1992)
Finland (1957) Moroccob China (1993) Ecuadorb Estonia (1993)
Germany (1957) Senegalb Tajikistan (1993) El Salvadorb Albania (1995)
Israel (1957) Zimbabweb Kyrgyzstan (1994) Guatemalab Moldovab
Belgium (1960) Turkey (1994) Hondurasb
Switzerland (1962) Georgia (1996) Nicaraguab
Spain (1963) Azerbaijanb Paraguayb
Luxembourg (1970) Indonesiab Trinidad and Tobagob
Austria (1972) Jordanb
Yugoslavia (1974)c Malaysiab
France (1977) Mongoliab
Greece (1977) Nepalb
Iceland (1978) Philippinesb
Portugal (1983) Viet Namb
Italy (1990) Turkmenistanb
Slovenia (1993)c
Malta (1994)c
Croatia (1995)c
290
Annex table A.23. Main features of merger, acquisition and joint venture control
regulations in 16 developed countries and the European Union, 1994
Time limit
System of for initial Criteria for Risks of
Economy notification Notification thresholds decision decision Confidentiality Time limit for final decision failure to notify
Belgium Compulsory Combined annual turnover of 1 Month Acquisition of Assured. 75 days after a decision Fines from
more than 1 billion BF and more or strengthening to begin a second phase 20,000 to
than 20 per cent of the relevant a dominant investigation. 1million BF.
market. position and
public interest
criteria.
Canada Compulsory Combined assets/sales in, from Substantial Assured. 7 days (short form), Fine,
or into Canada of C$ 400 lessening of 21 days (long form), Imprisonment,
Million; target assets value or competition in 10 days for a tender offer. divestiture.
sales in/from Canada of a market.
C$35 million.
France Voluntary Combined Market Share of 25 2 months Economic and Assured. 6 months. Post-closing
per cent or combined sales in social balance. divestiture.
France of F 7 billion and each
of two or more parties has sales
in France of F 2 billion.
291
/...
Annex
(Annex table A.23, cont'd)
292
Time limit
System of for initial Criteria for Risks of
Economy notification Notification thresholds decision decision Confidentiality Time limit for final decision failure to notify
Germany Compulsory Pre-merger: worldwide sales of 1 month Competition. Generally Pre-merger , 4 months Fine, invalidity
DM 2 billion for any party; or pre-merger Minister of assured. Pre-merger , 4 months of transaction.
worldwide sales by at least Economics can
2 parties of DM 1 billion. exempt on
Post-merger: combined general economic
worldwide sales greater than policy grounds
DM 500 million. if Federal Cartel
Office prohibits
the transaction
in question.
Greece Compulsory Pre-notification for horizontal Competition. Assured. 2 months (may be extended). Fines: up to 15
mergers in sectors to be per cent of
designated for enterprises with aggregate
a combined market share of turnover, for
30 per cent or aggregate failure to pre-
turnover of ECU 65 million. notify. 3 per
Post-merger: more than 10 per cent for post-
cent market share or ECU 10 aggregate
million turnover. merger.
Ireland Compulsory Each of two or more parties 1 month Competition and Assured. 3 months. Fine, invalidity
has assets worth IR£ 10 million common good. of transaction.
or sales of IR£20 million.
Italy Compulsory Aggregate sales in Italy of 30 days Competition. Assured. 45 days after reference Fine, post-
L500 billion or target company (can be extended). closing divesti
sales exceed L50 billion. ture.
Japan Compulsory True mergers or acquisition of 30 days Competition. Assured. 90 days. Fine, post-
the whole or part of a closing divesti
substantial part of an ongoing ture.
business in Japan.
New Voluntary Nil. 10 working Market Assured. 60 working days. Pecuniary
Zealand days dominance & penalties,
public benefit, divestiture,
including damages if
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structure and Competition Policy
/...
(Annex table A.23, cont'd)
Time limit
System of for initial Criteria for Risks of
Economy notification Notification thresholds decision decision Confidentiality Time limit for final decision failure to notify
Portugal Compulsory Mergers where enterprises have 50 days Competition. Assured. 50 days to which can be added Fine, initiation
combined turnover of at least 30 days and 15 days. of proceedings,
Esc. 30 000 million or they lack of legal
control at least 30 per cent of effect until
the relevant market. authorized.
Spain Voluntary Combined Market Share in 1 month Competition. Assured. 6 months. Post closing
Spain of 25 per cent or divestiture.
combined sales in Spain of
20 billion.
Sweden Compulsory Aggregate turnover in excess 1 month Competition Assured. Further 3 months to bring Fines.
of SKr 4 billion. and detriment before Stockholm City Court.
to public
interest.
United Voluntary Assets acquired greater than 20 working Public Interest. Generally but Case by case, maximum Post closing
Kingdom STG£30 or combined 25 days (may qualified by 6 months. divestiture.
per cent market share in be extended some exceptions.
United Kingdom. to 45)
United Compulsory One party has worldwide 30 days Competition. Assured. 20 days after compliance with Periodic penalty
States sales or total assets of second request. payments,
US$100 million and other has divestiture, or
$10 million of sales or assets, other equitable
and acquirer will hold securities remedies.
and assets worth greater than
$15 million, or represent
greater than 15 per cent of
outstanding voting assets
or securities.
European Compulsory Combined worldwide sales 1 month Competition. Assured. 4 months. Fines, periodic
Union of ECU 5 billion and the penalty
aggregate turnover of the payments,
companies involved in a divestiture.
transaction must exceed ECU
250 million in the European
Union, unless the two
companies achieving the turn-
over of ECU 250 million do so
in one and the same member
state of the European Union.
293
Annex
Annex table
Page
B.1 FDI inflows, by host region and economy, 1985-1996 ........................................................................ 303
B.2 FDI outflows, by home region and economy, 1985-1996 ................................................................... 308
B.3 FDI inward stock, by host region and economy, 1980, 1985, 1990, 1995 and 1996 .......................... 313
B.4 FDI outward stock, by home region and economy, 1980, 1985, 1990, 1995 and 1996 ..................... 319
B.5 Inward and outward FDI flows as a percentage of gross fixed capital formation,
by host region and economy, 1985-1995 .............................................................................................. 325
B.6 Inward and outward FDI stock as a percentage of gross domestic product,
by host region and economy, 1980, 1985, 1990 and 1995 ................................................................... 339
B.7 Cross-border merger and acquisition sales, 1989-1996 ...................................................................... 353
B.8 Cross-border merger and acquisition purchases, 1989-1996 ............................................................. 358
B.9 Cross-border merger and acquisitions by industry, 1989-1996 ......................................................... 362
B.10 Bilateral investment treaties concluded as of 1 January 1997,
by partner country/region ................................................................................................................... 366
294
Annex
A. General definitions
1. Transnational corporation
Transnational
Transnational corporations are incorporated or unincorporated enterprises comprising parent
enterprises and their foreign affiliates. A parent enterprise is defined as an enterprise that controls assets of
other entities in countries other than its home country, usually by owning a certain equity capital stake. An
equity capital stake of 10 per cent or more of the ordinary shares or voting power for an incorporated enterprise,
or its equivalent for an unincorporated enterprise, is normally considered as a threshold for the control of
assets.1 A foreign affiliate is an incorporated or unincorporated enterprise in which an investor, who is resident
in another country, owns a stake that permits a lasting interest in the management of that enterprise (an equity
stake of 10 per cent for an incorporated enterprise or its equivalent for an unincorporated enterprise). In the
World Investment Report, subsidiary enterprises, associate enterprises and branches are all referred to as foreign
affiliates or affiliates.
• Subsidiary: an incorporated enterprise in the host country in which another entity directly owns
more than a half of the shareholders' voting power and has the right to appoint or remove a
majority of the members of the administrative, management or supervisory body.
• Associate: an incorporated enterprise in the host country in which an investor owns a total of at
least 10 per cent, but not more than a half, of the shareholders’ voting power.
• Branch: a wholly or jointly owned unincorporated enterprise in the host country which is one of
the following: (i) a permanent establishment or office of the foreign investor; (ii) an unincorporated
partnership or joint venture between the foreign direct investor and one or more third parties;
(iii) land, structures (except structures owned by government entities), and /or immovable
equipment and objects directly owned by a foreign resident; (iv) mobile equipment (such as
ships, aircraft, gas or oil-drilling rigs) operating within a country other than that of the foreign
investor for at least one year.
2. Foreign dir
Foreign ect investment
direct
Foreign direct investment (FDI) is defined as an investment involving a long-term relationship and
reflecting a lasting interest and control of a resident entity in one economy (foreign direct investor or parent
enterprise) in an enterprise resident in an economy other than that of the foreign direct investor (FDI enterprise
or affiliate enterprise or foreign affiliate).2 Foreign direct investment implies that the investor exerts a significant
degree of influence on the management of the enterprise resident in the other economy. Such investment
involves both the initial transaction between the two entities and all subsequent transactions between them
and among foreign affiliates, both incorporated and unincorporated. Foreign direct investment may be
undertaken by individuals as well as business entities.
Foreign-direct-investment inflows and outflows comprise capital provided (either directly or through
other related enterprises) by a foreign direct investor to a FDI enterprise, or capital received from a FDI enterprise
by a foreign direct investor. There are three components in FDI: equity capital, reinvested earnings and intra-
company loans.
• Equity capital is the foreign direct investor’s purchase of shares of an enterprise in a country other
than its own.
• Reinvested earnings comprise the direct investor’s share (in proportion to direct equity participation)
of earnings not distributed as dividends by affiliates or earnings not remitted to the direct investor.
Such retained profits by affiliates are reinvested.
295
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
• Intra-company loans or intra-company debt transactions refer to short- or long-term borrowing and
lending of funds between direct investors (parent enterprises) and affiliate enterprises.
Foreign-direct-investment stock is the value of the share of their capital and reserves (including retained
profits) attributable to the parent enterprise, plus the net indebtedness of affiliates to the parent enterprise.3
Foreign-direct-investment flow and stock data used in the World Investment Report are not always defined as
above, because these definitions are often not applicable to disaggregated FDI data. For example, in analysing
geographical and industrial trends and patterns of FDI, data based on approvals of FDI may also be used
because they allow a disaggregation at the country or industry level. Such cases are denoted accordingly.
Foreign direct investors may also obtain an effective voice in the management of another business
entity through means other than acquiring an equity stake. These are non-equity forms of FDI, and they
include, inter alia, subcontracting, management contracts, turnkey arrangements, franchising, licensing and
product sharing. Data on transnational corporate activity through these forms are usually not separately
identified in balance-of-payments statistics. These statistics, however, usually present data on royalties and
licensing fees, defined as “receipts and payments of residents and non-residents for: (i) the authorized use of
intangible non-produced, non-financial assets and proprietary rights such as trade-marks, copyrights, patents,
processes, techniques, designs, manufacturing rights, franchises, etc., and (ii) the use, through licensing
agreements, of produced originals or prototypes, such as manuscripts, films, etc.”4
Data on FDI flows in annex tables B.1 and B.2, as well as in some tables in the text, are on a net basis
(capital transactions’ credits less debits between direct investors and their foreign affiliates). Net decreases in
assets or net increases in liabilities are recorded as credits (recorded with a positive sign in the balance of
payments), while net increases in assets or net decreases in liabilities are recorded as debits (recorded with a
negative sign in the balance of payments). In the annex tables, as well as in the tables in the text, the negative
signs are deleted for practical use. Hence, FDI flows with a negative sign in the World Investment Report
indicate that at least one of the three components of FDI (equity capital, reinvested earnings or intra-company
loans) is negative and not offset by positive amounts of the remaining components. These are instances of
reverse investment or disinvestment.
Not all countries record every component of FDI flows. Tables 1 and 2 summarize the availability of
each component of FDI during 1980-1995, the period covered in the World Investment Report for, respectively,
FDI inward flows and FDI outward flows. Comparison of data among countries should therefore be made
bearing these limitations in mind.
1. Inflows
The most reliable and comprehensive data on FDI flows that are readily available from international
sources and follow the above definition are reported by the International Monetary Fund (IMF). For the
purpose of assembling balance-of-payments statistics for its member countries, IMF collects and publishes
data annually on FDI inflows and outflows in the Balance of Payments Statistics Yearbook. The same data are also
available in IMF’s International Financial Statistics for certain countries. Therefore, data from IMF used in the
World Investment Report were obtained directly from IMF’s computer tapes containing balance-of-payments
statistics and international financial statistics. In those cases in which economies do not report to IMF (e.g.,
Taiwan Province of China), or their reporting does not cover the entire 1980-1996 period that is used in the
World Investment Report, data from UNCTAD FDI/TNC database, which contains published or unpublished
national official FDI data obtained from central banks, statistical offices or national authorities, were used.
These data were also supplemented with data of the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development,
Geographical Distribution of Financial Flows to Developing Countries (retrieved by OECD from a computer tape).
296
Annex
Data reported by OECD are based on FDI outflows to developing countries from the member countries of the
Development Assistance Committee of OECD.5 Inflows of FDI to developing countries reported by OECD
are therefore underestimated. Those countries and territories for which OECD data, or estimates based on
OECD data, were used for the 1980-1994 period, or part of that period, are listed below.
As of 1 June 1997, data on FDI inflows for 1996 were available for Argentina, Austria, Azerbaijan,
Bahamas, Bahrain, Belarus, Bolivia, Brazil, Bulgaria, Georgia, India, Italy, Japan, Republic of Korea, TFYR
Macedonia, Mexico, Republic of Moldova, New Zealand, Norway, Paraguay, Philippines, Poland, Portugal,
Romania, Russian Federation, Singapore, Slovenia, Thailand, Turkmenistan, Ukraine, United States, Uraguay,
Uzbekistan and Viet Nam (from UNCTAD FDI/TNC database) and Australia, Belgium and Luxembourg,
Canada, Denmark, Ecuador, Estonia, Finland, France, Hungary, Israel, Lithuania, Netherlands, Spain and
Sweden (from IMF’s balance-of-payments and international-financial-statistics tapes).
For many other countries FDI inflows for 1996 are estimated. Data for Germany and Taiwan Province
of China, which are provided by the national authorities, are estimated by annualizing, respectively, data for
the the first 11 months and the first two quarters. For Peru and the United Kingdom FDI inflows for 1996 are
estimated by annualizing the data for the first three quarters; for Albania, Cambodia, Chile, Guatemala, Lao
People’s Democratic Republic and Latvia, the first two quarters; and for Indonesia and Turkey, the first quarter
(data from IMF’s balance-of-payments and international-financial-statistics tapes).
For those countries for which FDI data were not available throughout the period (up to 1996), data
have been estimated by UNCTAD. Those economies for which estimation was made are listed below:
297
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
1996
1996: Aruba, Bangladesh, Barbados, Belize, Botswana, Brunei Darussalam, Cape Verde, Colombia,
Costa Rica, Côte d’Ivoire, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Djibouti, Dominican Republic, Egypt, El Salvador,
Fiji, Gambia, Guinea, Greece, Guyana, Honduras, Iceland, Ireland, Islamic Republic of Iran, Jamaica, Kenya,
Madagascar, Malaysia, Malta, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mongolia, Morocco, Myanmar, Namibia, Netherlands
Antilles, Nicaragua, Oman, Pakistan, Papua New Guinea, Saint Vincent and the Grenadines, Saudi Arabia,
Seychelles, Slovakia, South Africa, Sri Lanka, Syrian Arab Republic, Swaziland, Switzerland, Trinidad and
Tobago, Tunisia, Uganda, United Republic of Tanzania, Vanuatu, Venezuela and Yemen.
1995-1996
1995-1996: Antigua and Barbuda, Armenia, Bermuda, Burkina Faso, Cayman Islands, Central African
Republic, Chad, Congo, Cuba, Dominica, Equatorial Guinea, Ethiopia, Gabon, Ghana, Gibraltar, Guinea-Bissau,
Grenada, Jordan, Kazakhstan, Kiribati, Democratic People’s Republic of Korea, Kyrgyztan, Lesotho, Malawi,
Mali, Macau, New Caledonia, Niger, Nigeria, Panama, Rwanda, Saint Kitts and Nevis, Saint Lucia, Senegal,
Sierra Leone, Surinam, Tajikistan, Virgin Islands, Zaire and Zimbabwe.
1994-1996
1994-1996: Angola, Benin, Burundi, Cameroon, Liberia, Maldives, Sudan, Togo, Tonga,United Arab
Emirates and Western Samoa.
/...
298
Annex
(Table 1, cont'd)
West Asia:
Bahrain, Cyprus, Islamic Bahrain, Islamic Republic of Iran, Islamic Republic of Iran, Oman, Syrian
Republic of Iran x, Jordan m, Jordan, Saudi Arabia, Syrian Arab Arab Republic, Turkey, Yemen f
Saudi Arabia, Syrian Arab Republic, Turkey y,Yemen
Republic c
Central Asia:
Armenia x Armenia Armenia
South, East and South-East Asia:
Cambodia r, Indonesia b, Lao Bangladesh, Cambodia n, China, Bangladesh c, Cambodia, China,
People’s Democratic Republic, Indonesia, Republic of Korea o, Republic of Korea, Lao People’s
Malaysia, Maldives, Mongolia r, Lao People’s Democratic Republic, Democratic Republic u, Maldives,
Myanmar o Malaysia, Maldives c, Mongolia, Mongolia, Myanmar, Pakistan n,
Myanmar, Pakistan n, Singapore, Singapore, Sri Lanka
Sri Lanka c, Thailand
The Pacific:
Kiribati b, Papua New Guinea f, Kiribati l, Solomon Islands, Tonga Kiribati, Solomon Islands m, Tongac
Tonga m, Vanuatu
Central and Eastern Europe:
Albania r, Bulgaria g, Czech Albania, Bulgaria, Czech Republic, Albania, Bulgaria, Czech Republic,
Republic n, Hungary f, Latvia r, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania y, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania y, Republic
Lithuania n, Republic of Republic of Moldova, Poland g, of Moldova y, Poland x, Romania,
Moldova y, Romania f, Romania, Russian Federation, Russian Federation, Slovakia y,
Russian Federation, Slovakia x, Slovakia, Ukraine Ukraine
Ukraine
Source: UNCTAD, based on International Monetary Fund, balance-of-payments tape, retrieved in June
1997.
a Countries not available at least one year are all reported in the table.
b Started reporting since 1983. n Started reporting since 1993
c Started reporting since 1986. o Started reporting since 1989.
d Started reporting since 1984. p Stopped reporting since 1985.
e Stopped reporting since 1981. q Stopped reporting since 1987.
f Started reporting since 1991. r Started reporting since 1992.
g Started reporting since 1990. s Stopped reporting since 1984.
h Started reporting since 1982. t Stopped reporting since 1983.
i Stopped reporting since 1982. u Started reporting since 1988.
j Stopped reporting since 1990. v Stopped reporting since 1986.
k Stopped reporting since 1989. w Stopped reporting since 1991.
l Started reporting since 1985. x Started reporting since 1994.
m Started reporting since 1987. y Started reporting since 1995.
1993-1996
1993-1996: Afghanistan, Iraq, Mozambique, Qatar and Solomon Islands.
1992-1996
1992-1996: Algeria, Comoros, Nepal, Somalia and Zambia.
1991-1996
1991-1996: Libyan Arab Jamahiriya.
1990-1996
1990-1996: Haiti, Kuwait and Lebanon.
For Viet Nam, data from 1988 to 1994 are estimated by applying an average implementation ratio of 20
per cent (the ratio of realized FDI to approved FDI), to the approved data. The data for India are converted to
those on a calandar year basis from those reported on the basis of fiscal year.
299
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
2. Outflows
As of 1 June 1997, FDI outflows for 1996 were available for Austria, Bolivia, Hungary, Italy (on a
preliminary basis), Republic of Korea, Norway, Portugal, Philippines, Singapore, Swaziland, Taiwan Province
of China, Thailand and the United States (from UNCTAD, FDI/TNC database) and for Australia, Belgium
and Luxembourg, Canada, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Israel, Netherlands, Spain and Sweden (from
the IMF’s balance-of-payments tape).
Outflows for 1996 for Germany, which are provided by the national authority, are estimated by
annualizing data for the first 11 months. Quarterly FDI outflows are also available from the IMF’s balance-of-
payment tapes. For Bulgaria, Lithuania and Slovenia FDI outflows in 1996 are estimated by annualizing the
first three quarters, for Argentina, Chile, Russian Federation, Slovakia and South Africa on the basis of the first
two quarters and for Czech Republic, Iceland, Indonesia, Turkey and Ukraine on the basis of the first quarter.
In the case of countries for which FDI outflows were unavailable from national authorities, inflows to
large recipient economies were used as a proxy. Thus, for India - up to 1995, Indonesia - up to 1992, and the
Philippines - up to 1992, inflows to the European Union and the United States were used as a proxy. In the case
of Hong Kong - up to 1995, inflows to China, the European Union and the United States are used as a proxy.
For Argentina (1984-1991), Bahamas (1981-1995), Bahrain (1981-1995), Bermuda (1981-1995), Cameroon (1994-
1995), Central African Republic (1995), Chad (1995), Dominican Republic (1992-1995), Gabon, (1995), Greece
(1991-1995), Iraq (1994-1995), Ireland (1984-1989), Lebanon (1982-1995), Liberia (up to 1995), Mexico (up to
1995), Netherlands Antilles (up to 1995), Nigeria (1982-1995), Oman (1988-1995), Panama (1981-1995), Peru
(1992-1995), Saudi Arabia (up to 1995), Trinidad and Tobago (1993-1995), United Arab Emirates (up to 1995)
and Uruguay (1989-1993), inflows into the United States were used as a proxy of their outflows.
The United States data on FDI outflows and outward stocks were adjusted for the financial sector of
the Netherlands Antilles. This is because considerable intra-company loans between United States parent
enterprises and their financial affiliates in the Netherlands Antilles are in many respects more akin to portfolio
investment than to FDI.
The 1996 FDI outward flow for the United Kingdom is estimated by using the growth rate of mergers
and aquisitions for 1996.
Outflows for Albania, Bahamas, Bahrain, Barbados, Belize, Bermuda, Botswana, Bosnia and
Herzegovina, Brazil, Burundi, Cameroon, Central African Republic, Chad, China, Colombia, Costa Rica, Cyprus,
Egypt, Fiji, Gabon, Greece, Hong Kong, India, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan, Kuwait, Latvia, Lebanon, Liberia, Malaysia,
Malta, Mauritius, Mexico, Republic of Moldova, Morocco, Namibia, Netherlands Antilles, Nigeria, Oman,
Pakistan, Panama, Poland, Romania, Saudi Arabia, Senegal, Seychelles, Sri Lanka, Switzerland, Tunisia, United
Arab Emirates and Venezuela in 1996 are based on UNCTAD’s own estimates.
3. Stocks
Various tables in the World Investment Report present data on FDI stocks at book value or historical
cost, reflecting prices at the time when the investment was made. For a large number of countries (as indicated
in annex tables B.3 and B.4), FDI stocks are estimated by cumulating FDI flows over a period of time. For a
number of countries (indicated in annex tables B.3 and B.4), estimates of FDI stocks are obtained by adding
flows to a FDI stock that has been obtained for a particular year. Almost all of FDI stocks for 1996 are obtained
by adding FDI flows for 1996 to the stock figures of 1995. For further detail, refer to notes to annex tables B.3
and B.4.
*****
All data, unless otherwise indicated, are expressed in United States dollars. Data reported in national
currencies or Special Drawing Rights are converted to United States dollars by using the period’s average
exchange rate for flow data and the end-of-the-period exchange rate for stock data.
300
Annex
Source: UNCTAD, based on International Monetary Fund, balance-of-payments tape, retrieved in June
1997.
a Countries not available at least one year are all reported in the table.
b Started reporting since 1983. m Stopped reporting since 1983.
c Started reporting since 1986. n Stopped reporting since 1988.
d Started reporting since 1984. o Started reporting since 1982.
e Stopped reporting since 1982. p Started reporting since 1992.
f Started reporting since 1990. q Reported 1989 only.
g Started reporting since 1985. r Reported 1982 only.
h Stopped reporting since 1981. s Started reporting since 1989.
i Stopped reporting since 1986. t Stopped reporting since 1987.
j u
Started reporting since 1993. Started reporting since 1994.
k v
Started reporting since 1989. Reported 1993 only.
l w
Started reporting since 1991. Started reporting since 1995.
301
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
All FDI data and estimates in the World Investment Report are continuously revised. Because of the on-
going revision, FDI data reported in the World Investment Report may differ from those reported in earlier
Reports or other publications of UNCTAD. In particular, recent FDI data are being revised in many countries
according to the fifth edition of the IMF’s balance-of-payments manual. Data taken from the IMF are based on
the balance-of-payments and international financial statistics tapes, retrieved in June 1997.
These two annex tables show the ratio of inward and outward FDI flows to gross fixed capital formation
(annex table B.5) and inward and outward FDI stock to GDP (annex table B.6), respectively. All of these data
are in current prices. The data on both gross fixed capital formation and GDP were obtained from the IMF’s
international-financial-statistics tape, retrieved on 1 June 1996. For some economies such as Taiwan Province
of China, the data are supplemented from national sources. Data on FDI are from annex tables B.1-B.4.
Data on cross-border mergers and acquisitions (M&As) are obtained from the KPMG. This consulting
firm collects information through a variety of secondary sources including newspapers and other periodicals,
and a quarterly meeting of the 42-member KPMG Corporate Finance Network. All data in the text refer to
only cross-border M&A transactions which result in the equity holding of more than 50 per cent (unless otherwise
indicated). Data on minority investments are not included in the discussion on the assumption that portfolio
investments account for the bulk of minority-held investments. However, in annex tables B.7, B.8 and B.9, all
M&As (including minority-held investments) are also presented for information. Cross-border M&As are
recorded in both directions of transactions; i.e., when a cross-border M&A takes place, it registers as both a sale
in the country of the target firm, and as a purchase in the home country of the acquiring firm. Data showing
cross-border M&A activities on an industrial basis refer to only sales figures (annex table B.9). Thus, if a food
company acquires a chemical company, this transaction is recorded in the chemical industry.
Data on bilateral investment treaties presented in this table are taken from UNCTAD, database on
BITs. Information contained in this database is provided by governments. This information includes: the
treaty partner, data of signature and date of entry into force. Most of the information has been confirmed by
the two countries involved in the treaty. However, where one country has not provided information on its
BITs, the information provided by the other treaty partner reporting on the BIT was accepted. Where both
countries report and discrepency exists as to the information provided, the matter was clarified with the
countries involved and through independent sources. Failing to resolve the discrepancy, such information
was omitted. In this table, when a country in Central and Eastern Europe (e.g. Albania) has concluded a BIT
with a country in developing Europe, this case is counted under the intraregional BITs under the developing
country column.
Notes
1 In some countries such as Germany and the United Kingdom, a stake of 20 per cent or more is a threshold.
2 This general definition of FDI is based on OECD, Detailed Benchmark Definition of Foreign Direct Investment,
second edition (Paris, OECD, 1992) and International Monetary Fund, Balance of Payments Manual, fifth
edition (Washington, D.C., IMF, 1993).
3 There are, however, some exceptions. For example, in the case of Germany, loans granted by affiliate
enterprises to their parent enterprises are not deducted from the stock.
4 International Monetary Fund, op. cit., p. 40.
5 Includes Austria, Belgium, Canada, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Italy, Japan, the Netherlands,
Norway, Spain, Sweden, United Kingdom and United States.
302
Annex
Annex table B.1. FDI inflows, by host region and economy, 1985-1996
(Millions of dollars)
Other Western Europe 2940 2850 2068 2950 4725 4705 5963
Gibraltar 27 37 89 40 -1 1 1
Iceland -1 33 14 8 -1 4 4
Norway 597 -398 716 2003 623 2100 3424
Switzerland 2317 3178 1249 899 4104 2600 2534
Other developed countries 7261 7626 10429 6252 8073 18653 11536
Australia 5377 4044 5091 3012 3881 14251 6043
Israel 155 350 539 580 442 1525 2015
Japan 375 1730 2756 210 888 41 220
New Zealand 1474 1290 2086 2469 2524 2509 2928
South Africa -119 212 -42 -19 338 327 330
/...
303
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Latin America and the Caribbean 8145 15356 16204 18072 26974 25424 38563
/...
304
Annex
Other Latin America and the Caribbean 4381 8574 8814 9661 15100 10991 12326
/...
305
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Kuwait - 1 35 13 16 15 20
Lebanon 4 2 4 6 7 35 30
Oman 114 132 101 147 62 35 80
Qatar -2 43 40 29 37 35 35
Saudi Arabia 586 160 -79 1369 350 -1877 100
Syrian Arab Republic 62 62 67 176 143 65 120
Turkey 340 810 844 636 608 885 1116
United Arab Emirates 8 26 130 183 113 110 130
Yemen -17 583 714 897 11 -218 100
Armenia .. .. .. .. 8 12 34
Azerbaijan .. .. .. .. 22 275 601
Georgia .. .. .. .. 8 6 40
Kazakstan .. .. 100 150 185 280 310
Kyrgyzstan .. .. .. .. 10 30 16
Tajikistan .. .. .. .. 10 13 13
Turkmenistan .. .. .. .. 100 100 80
Uzbekistan .. .. 40 45 50 120 55
South, East and South-East Asia 12357 21228 27668 47278 55718 65175 81241
Afghanistan .. - - - - - -
Bangladesh 2 1 4 14 11 2 9
Brunei Darussalam - 1 4 14 6 7 9
Cambodia .. .. 33 54 69 151 350
China 2654 4366 11156 27515 33787 35849 42300
Hong Kong 1597 538 2051 1667 2000 2100 2500
India 169 155 233 574 1314 1929 2587
Indonesia 551 1482 1777 2004 2109 4348 7960
Korea, Democratic People’s Republic of 95 - 42 6 7 3 4
Korea, Republic of 705 1180 727 588 809 1776 2308
Lao People’s Democratic Republic 2 7 8 30 59 88 104
Macau - 3 2 3 - 2 2
Malaysia 1054 3998 5183 5006 4342 4132 5300
Maldives 4 7 7 7 6 5 7
Mongolia .. .. 2 8 7 10 5
Myanmar 28 238 171 149 91 115 100
Nepal 2 2 1 4 6 5 5
Pakistan 167 257 335 347 419 639 690
Philippines 413 544 228 1238 1591 1478 1408
Singapore 2952 4887 2204 4686 5480 6912 9440
Sri Lanka 37 48 123 195 166 63 170
Taiwan Province of China 879 1271 879 917 1375 1559 1402
Thailand 1017 2014 2114 1730 1322 2003 2426
Viet Nam 30 229 385 523 742 2000 2156
The Pacific 181 264 407 89 116 590 375
Fiji 28 15 51 29 65 67 47
Kiribati - - - -1 - - 1
New Caledonia 7 3 17 20 10 17 13
Papua New Guinea 130 203 294 -2 -5 453 230
Solomon Islands 6 15 14 13 11 18 21
Tonga - - 1 2 2 1 23
/...
306
Annex
Vanuatu 9 25 26 26 30 31 36
Western Samoa 1 3 4 2 3 2 4
Central and Eastern Europe 449 2448 4444 6287 5882 14317 12261
Albania .. -1 20 58 53 70 72
Belarus .. .. 7 10 15 7 18
Bulgaria 1 56 42 55 105 90 150
Czech Republic .. .. .. 654 878 2568 1200
Czechoslovakia (former) 77 600 1103 .. .. .. ..
Estonia .. .. 82 162 215 202 138
Hungary 345 1462 1479 2350 1144 4519 1982
Latvia .. .. 29 45 214 180 292
Lithuania .. .. 10 30 31 73 152
Moldova, Republic of .. .. 17 14 12 64 46
Poland 26 291 678 1715 1875 3659 5196
Romania .. 40 77 94 341 419 624
Rusian Federation .. .. 700 700 637 2017 1800
Slovakia .. .. .. 199 203 183 150
Ukraine .. .. 200 200 159 267 440
Memorandum:
Least developed countriesb
Total 555 1830 1459 1743 994 1024 1603
Africa 511 936 470 540 696 823 865
Latin America and the Caribbean 7 14 8 8 2 2 3
Asia 21 837 937 1155 252 148 674
West Asia -17 583 714 897 11 -218 100
South, East and South-East Asia 37 255 224 258 242 366 574
The Pacific 17 44 45 40 44 51 62
Oil-exporting countriesc
Total 7321 14797 14987 17318 24039 19080 27172
Africa 2121 1883 2505 2876 4055 3260 3352
North Africa 1206 570 1160 1188 1813 975 1233
Other Africa 915 1313 1345 1688 2242 2285 2119
Latin America and the Caribbean 2944 7059 5471 5732 12977 9025 10129
South America 269 2128 900 964 1489 1763 2274
Other Latin America and the
Caribbean 2674 4931 4571 4768 11488 7262 7855
Asia 2256 5855 7011 8711 7006 6795 13691
West Asia 651 374 47 1687 549 -1692 422
South, East and South-East Asia 1605 5481 6964 7024 6457 8487 13269
All developing countries minus China 22082 37330 38469 45530 56675 60481 86441
307
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Annex table B.2. FDI outflows, by home region and economy, 1985-1996
(Millions of dollars)
Other Western Europe 6304 8328 6088 9643 12470 14704 15809
Gibraltar .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Iceland 3 5 6 3 3 6 4
Norway 1264 1782 411 877 1628 2847 5320
Switzerland 5037 6541 5671 8763 10839 11851 10484
Other developed countries 31975 35981 20449 17917 25966 28759 26106
Algeria 5 50 .. .. .. .. ..
Egypt 13 62 4 .. 43 93 90
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya 53 .. .. .. .. .. ..
Morocco .. 23 32 23 24 12 20
Sudan .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Tunisia - 3 5 .. 6 5 6
/...
308
Annex
Latin America and the Caribbean 1354 -453 2561 2264 4171 3919 3850
309
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Ecuador .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Guyana .. .. -2 2 .. .. ..
Paraguay .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Peru .. .. -1 21 .. 7 ..
Suriname .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Uruguay 4 3 -28 32 .. .. ..
Venezuela 188 188 156 886 677 303 622
Developing Europe - - -4 4 -4 22 11
Bahrain 7 -8 .. -20 6 -5 -6
Cyprus 1 15 15 12 6 7 8
Iran, Islamic Republic of .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Iraq .. .. .. .. -8 -3 -10
Jordan -2 14 -3 -53 -23 -32 -36
Kuwait 467 -186 1211 848 1031 717 865
/...
310
Annex
Lebanon 6 6 7 6 7 7 7
Oman - -2 -1 -4 7 1 1
Qatar .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Saudi Arabia 248 -198 5 -49 82 13 15
Syrian Arab Republic .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Turkey -1 27 65 14 49 113 312
United Arab Emirates 5 1 17 8 -48 -8 -16
Yemen - .. .. .. .. .. ..
Central Asia .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Armenia .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Azerbaijan .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Georgia .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Kazakstan .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Kyrgyzstan .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Tajikistan .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Turkmenistan .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Uzbekistan .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
South, East and South-East Asia 7378 8151 17380 30280 34804 41627 45675
Afghanistan .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Bangladesh .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Brunei Darussalam .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Cambodia .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
China 697 913 4000 4400 2000 2000 2200
Hong Kong 2062 2825 8254 17713 21437 25000 27000
India 6 -11 24 41 49 38 43
Indonesia 11 13 52 356 609 603 512
Korea, Democratic People’s
Republic of .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Korea, Republic of 771 1500 1208 1361 2524 3529 4188
Lao People’s Democratic Republic .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Macau .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Malaysia 281 389 514 1325 1817 2575 1906
Maldives .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Mongolia .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Myanmar .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Nepal .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Pakistan 11 -4 -12 -2 1 6 2
Philippines 3 -26 5 374 302 399 182
Singapore 610 526 1317 2021 3104 3906 4800
Sri Lanka 1 5 2 7 8 7 8
Taiwan Province of China 2861 1854 1869 2451 2460 2678 3096
Thailand 64 167 147 233 493 886 1740
Viet Nam .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
The Pacific 10 -4 2 6 4 9 6
Fiji 13 -4 2 6 4 9 6
Kiribati .. .. .. .. - .. ..
New Caledonia .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Papua New Guinea -2 .. .. .. .. .. ..
Solomon Islands .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Tonga .. - - - .. .. ..
Vanuatu .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Western Samoa .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
/...
311
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Memorandum:
Least developed countriesc
Total 59 351 30 21 51 23 30
Africa 60 365 30 21 51 23 30
Latin America and the Caribbean -1 -14 .. .. .. .. ..
Asia - - - - - - -
West Asia - .. .. .. .. .. ..
South, East and South-East Asia - .. .. .. .. .. ..
The Pacific - .. .. .. - .. ..
Oil-exporting countriesd
Total 2367 907 2930 3991 5685 5318 5024
Africa 1001 541 244 620 460 520 580
North Africa 71 115 9 .. 49 98 96
Other Africa 930 426 235 620 411 422 484
Latin America and the Caribbean 347 357 888 907 1729 905 1177
South America 189 190 158 888 679 305 624
Other Latin America and
the Caribbean 158 167 730 19 1050 600 553
Asia 1019 9 1798 2464 3496 3893 3267
West Asia 727 -393 1232 783 1070 715 850
South, East and South-East Asia 292 402 566 1681 2426 3178 2418
All developing countries minus China 9857 7411 17695 29667 38711 45034 49269
312
Annex
Annex table B.3. FDI inward stock, by host region and economy, 1980, 1985, 1990, 1995 and 1996
(Millions of dollars)
/...
313
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Latin America and the Caribbean 47800 76836 126050 278073 316120
/...
314
Annex
/...
315
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Armeniaz .. .. .. 20 54
Azerbaijanz .. .. .. 297 898
Georgiaz .. .. .. 14 54
Kazakhstany .. .. .. 715 1025
Kyrgyzstanz .. .. .. 40 56
Tajikistanz .. .. .. 23 36
Turkmenistanz .. .. .. 200 280
Uzbekistany .. .. .. 255 310
South, East and South-East Asia 32302 64386 140099 394154 475100
Afghanistani 11 12 12 12 12
Bangladesh 63 112 147 ab 180 ab 189 ab
Brunei Darussalami 19 33 30 62 71
Cambodiay .. .. .. 307 656
China 57 3444 14135 b 126808 b 169108 b
Hong Kong 1729 3520 13413 b 21769 b 24269 b
India 1177 1075 1667 ab 5871 ab 8458 ab
Indonesia 10274 24971 38883 50603 c 58563 c
Korea, Democratic People’s Republic ofm .. .. 572 630 634
Korea, Republic of 1140 1806 5727 10478 12491
Lao People’s Democratic Republici 2 2 14 206 310
Macauw 2 10 11 20 22
Malaysia 6078 8510 14117 ab 36778 ab 42078 ab
Maldiveso 5 3 25 56 63
Mongoliay .. .. .. 26 31
Myanmarw 5 5 173 937 1037
Nepalt 1 2 12 29 34
Pakistan 688 1079 1887 36957 d 37647 d
Philippines 1225 1302 2098 b 6830 b 8238 b
Singapore 6203 13016 28565 57324 d 66764 d
Sri Lanka 231 517 681 ab 1276 ab 1446 ab
Taiwan Province of China 2405 2930 9735 ab 15736 ab 17138 ab
Thailand 981 1999 7980 b 17163 b 19589 b
Viet Nami 7 38 216 4096 6252
316
Annex
Memorandum:
Oil-exporting countries ah
Total 48580 114721 164659 252718 279752
Africa 7974 16332 26460 40359 43601
North Africa 4357 8803 14547 19573 20696
Other Africa 3617 7529 11913 20786 22905
Latin America and the Caribbean 11824 23642 40559 79343 89454
South America 2743 3121 5943 11707 13963
Other Latin America and
the Caribbean 9081 20521 34616 67636 75491
Asia 28782 74748 97641 133016 146697
West Asia 12411 41235 44611 45574 45986
South, East and South-East Asia 16370 33513 53030 87443 100712
All developing countries minus China 106184 203839 338616 662935 748445
317
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
318
Annex
Annex table B.4. FDI outward stock, by home region and economy, 1980, 1985, 1990, 1995 and 1996
(Millions of dollars)
Gibraltar .. .. .. .. ..
Icelande .. 1 19 42 46
Norway 1944 i 4623 i 10888 22519 27840 h
Switzerland 21491 21350 65731 142814 153299 h
319
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Angolap .. .. 1 1 1
Beninq - 2 2 2 2
Botswanar 3 3 10 88 108
Burkina Fasos 3 3 3 3 3
Burundit .. .. - 1 1
Cameroonu 23 53 150 279 304
Cape Verdet .. .. 1 2 2
Central African Republicg 3 4 21 49 55
Chadv 1 1 36 84 92
Comorosp .. .. 1 1 1
Congo .. .. .. .. ..
Côte d’Ivoire .. .. .. .. ..
Djibouti .. .. .. .. ..
Equatorial Guineat .. .. - - -
Ethiopiaw .. .. .. - -
Gabons 77 102 163 216 221
Gambia .. .. .. .. ..
Ghana .. .. .. .. ..
Guinea .. .. .. .. ..
Guinea-Bissau .. .. .. .. ..
Kenyag 18 60 99 99 99
Lesothox .. .. - - -
Liberiay 48 361 453 817 833
Madagascar .. .. .. .. ..
Malawi .. .. .. .. ..
Malig 22 22 22 22 22
Mauritaniaz .. .. 3 3 3
Mauritiusk .. .. 1 93 106
Mozambique .. .. .. .. ..
Namibiap .. .. 1 26 33
Nigers 2 8 54 102 102
Nigeriaq 5 5193 9508 11438 11893
Rwanda .. .. .. .. ..
Senegals - 37 43 116 129
Seychellesr 14 44 61 68 69
Sierra Leone .. .. .. .. ..
Somalia .. .. .. .. ..
Swazilandaa 9 19 64 224 326
Togoaa 2 2 2 2 2
Uganda .. .. .. .. ..
United Republic of Tanzania .. .. .. .. ..
Zaire .. .. .. .. ..
Zambia .. .. .. .. ..
Zimbabwew .. .. .. 5 5
Latin America and the Caribbean 2945 7243 12689 25004 28854
320
Annex
Developing Europe .. .. .. 18 28
321
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Bahrainah - 4 46 20 ad 14 ad
Cypruse .. - 9 63 71
Iran, Islamic Republic of .. .. .. .. ..
Iraqai .. .. .. -11 -21
Jordanm 23 26 16 -82 -118
Kuwaitg 944 1306 4039 7660 8525
Lebanonab 1 40 -16 -35 -28
Omanab 1 40 7 - 1
Qatar .. .. .. .. ..
Saudi Arabiaab 228 420 1811 1686 1701
Syrian Arab Republic .. .. .. .. ..
Turkeyaj .. .. -7 261 573
United Arab Emiratesab 5 19 99 51 35
Yemenak .. 4 5 5 5
Central Asia .. .. .. .. ..
Armenia .. .. .. .. ..
Azerbaijan .. .. .. .. ..
Georgia .. .. .. .. ..
Kazakhstan .. .. .. .. ..
Kyrgyzstan .. .. .. .. ..
Tajikistan .. .. .. .. ..
Turkmenistan .. .. .. .. ..
Uzbekistan .. .. .. .. ..
South, East and South-East Asia 6614 10590 43739 181650 226667
Afghanistan .. .. .. .. ..
Bangladesh .. .. .. .. ..
Brunei Darussalam .. .. .. .. ..
Cambodia .. .. .. .. ..
China - 131 2489 b 15802 b 18002 b
Hong Kongal 148 2345 13242 85156 112156
Indiaab 4 19 30 124 167
Indonesiaab -1 49 25 701 1213
Korea, Democratic People’s Republic .. .. .. .. ..
Korea, Republic of 142 526 2301 10227 13757
Lao People’s Democratic Republic .. .. .. .. ..
Macau .. .. .. .. ..
Malaysia 414 749 2283 k 8903 k 10809 k
Maldives .. .. .. .. ..
Mongolia .. .. .. .. ..
Myanmar .. .. .. .. ..
Nepal .. .. .. .. ..
Pakistan 40 126 244 272 d 274 d
Philippines 171 171 155 k 1209 k 1391 k
Singaporei 5586 6254 9675 32695 37495 h
Sri Lankae .. 1 8 37 44
Taiwan Province of China 97 204 12888 k 24200 k 27296 k
Thailand 13 14 398 b 2324 b 4064 b
Viet Nam .. .. .. .. ..
/...
322
Annex
Albaniaag .. .. .. 48 58
Belarus .. .. .. .. ..
Bulgariaaf .. .. .. 8 -19
Czech Republicw .. .. .. 243 323
Czechoslovakia (former)t .. .. 21 .. ..
Estonia .. .. .. 50 109
Hungary .. .. .. 489 494
Latviaag .. .. .. 137 138
Lithuaniaaf .. .. .. 1 2
Moldova, Republic ofaf .. .. .. 1 2
Polandr 79 100 170 265 295
Romaniap .. .. 18 35 40
Russian Federationai .. .. .. 577 983
Slovakiaw .. .. .. 85 79
Ukraineai .. .. .. 18 42
Memorandum:
Oil-exporting countries an
Total 2268 9487 20205 37523 42475
Africa 405 5804 10703 13088 13667
North Africa 300 456 882 1153 1249
Other Africa 105 5348 9821 11935 12419
Latin America and the Caribbean 272 1097 1191 5425 6531
South America 24 166 1227 2991 3615
Other Latin America and
the Caribbean 136 548 596 2713 3265
Asia 1591 2587 8310 19010 22277
West Asia 1178 1789 6002 9406 10256
South, East and South-East Asia 413 798 2308 9604 12022
/...
323
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
324
Annex
Annex table B.5. Inward and outward FDI flows as a percentage of gross fixed capital formation,
by region and economy, 1985-1995
(Percentage)
World
inward 5.4 3.1 3.3 4.4 4.5 5.2
outward 6.0 3.9 3.8 4.8 4.7 5.6
Developed countries
inward 5.5 3.2 3.2 3.7 3.5 4.4
outward 8.0 5.3 4.8 5.4 5.1 6.3
Western Europe
inward 8.9 5.3 5.3 5.8 5.1 6.7
outward 12.5 7.4 7.2 7.4 8.2 9.5
European Union
inward 9.1 5.4 5.5 5.9 5.0 6.8
outward 12.3 7.3 7.2 7.1 7.9 9.2
Austria
inward 3.0 0.9 2.0 2.2 2.7 1.1
outward 5.3 3.1 4.0 3.3 2.4 1.8
Belgium and Luxembourg
inward 37.0 23.2 25.2 26.7 20.0 24.2
outward 26.4 15.6 25.5 12.2 3.2 26.8
Denmark
inward 13.3 7.3 4.6 8.5 23.1 15.0
outward 12.9 8.7 10.1 6.8 19.2 10.7
Finland
inward 3.0 -0.9 2.0 6.9 10.5 5.5
outward 7.7 0.4 3.9 11.2 30.7 8.9
France
inward 10.3 5.9 8.2 9.0 6.9 8.6
outward 14.1 9.4 11.8 8.9 9.5 6.8
Germany
inward 1.6 1.0 0.6 0.4 0.2 1.7
outward 10.4 6.0 4.3 3.7 3.7 6.7
Greece
inward 9.0 5.7 5.4 5.1 5.0 4.6
outward - - - - - -
Ireland
inward 23.1 14.1 18.0 15.9 11.9 24.0
outward 6.8 2.6 2.7 3.1 5.6 8.5
Italy
inward 2.6 1.0 1.7 1.9 0.9 2.1
outward 4.6 3.0 2.8 4.0 2.4 3.0
Netherlands
inward 20.2 10.8 12.2 14.6 11.5 13.9
outward 32.5 22.9 22.3 20.4 26.7 17.0
Portugal
inward 17.7 13.7 8.5 8.1 6.4 3.2
outward 4.1 2.6 3.1 0.8 1.4 3.4
Spain
inward 14.8 9.9 10.5 8.6 9.8 5.3
outward 4.7 3.5 1.7 2.8 4.0 3.1
/...
325
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Sweden
inward 16.0 13.7 - 14.0 23.3 42.8
outward 20.2 15.7 1.0 5.6 24.6 32.2
United Kingdom
inward 13.7 9.4 9.8 11.0 6.8 13.2
outward 18.3 9.5 11.6 18.0 18.6 25.4
Gibraltar
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Iceland
inward 1.0 2.6 1.2 0.8 -0.1 0.4
outward 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.3 0.3 0.6
Norway
inward 4.5 -1.6 2.8 8.4 2.4 6.7
outward 6.7 7.3 1.6 3.7 6.3 9.1
Switzerland
inward 6.6 5.4 2.2 1.7 7.0 3.7
outward 19.5 11.1 9.9 16.8 18.4 16.9
North America
inward 5.5 3.0 2.6 4.9 5.0 6.3
outward 6.8 4.6 4.8 8.2 5.2 8.7
Canada
inward 6.6 2.4 4.2 5.0 7.2 11.0
outward 5.7 4.9 3.4 5.8 7.4 5.9
United States
inward 5.3 3.1 2.4 4.9 4.8 5.9
outward 6.9 4.5 4.9 8.5 4.9 9.0
Australia
inward 11.2 6.6 8.7 5.3 5.7 20.0
outward 4.6 5.0 1.5 3.1 7.6 5.7
Israel
inward 8.4 2.4 3.5 3.9 2.6 7.4
outward 8.0 3.0 4.3 5.0 4.3 3.3
Japan
inward 0.2 0.2 0.2 - 0.1 -
outward 3.5 3.0 1.5 1.1 1.4 1.5
New Zealand
inward 27.7 19.4 31.6 31.2 24.7 20.5
outward 15.1 10.4 12.0 16.4 15.4 7.5
South Africa
inward 0.7 1.1 -0.2 -0.1 1.7 0.1
outward 2.2 1.1 3.8 1.6 1.7 0.2
/...
326
Annex
Developing countries
inward 8.0 4.4 5.1 6.6 8.0 8.2
outward 3.5 0.9 2.2 3.1 3.6 4.0
Africa
inward 4.7 4.2 4.7 5.6 8.3 6.9
outward 1.0 1.5 0.7 1.1 0.9 0.9
North Africa
inward 2.7 2.2 3.8 4.1 5.7 3.0
outward 0.2 0.3 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3
Algeria
inward 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
outward 0.1 0.4 .. .. .. ..
Egypt
inward 3.1 2.8 5.3 6.4 14.8 7.2
outward 0.2 0.7 - .. 0.5 1.1
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
inward 1.7 2.1 1.8 1.3 1.2 1.2
outward 0.2 .. .. .. .. ..
Morocco
inward 8.5 5.1 6.6 8.0 8.8 4.1
outward 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.2
Sudan
inward -0.5 -0.1 - - - -
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Tunisia
inward 14.7 4.0 12.5 13.7 10.2 6.1
outward 0.1 0.1 0.1 .. 0.1 0.1
Other Africa
inward 9.2 7.3 6.4 8.2 12.5 13.2
outward 3.0 3.2 1.6 3.0 2.2 2.1
Angola
inward 44.8 107.5 45.5 48.0 54.2 47.6
outward - .. .. 0.3 -0.3 ..
Benin
inward 1.4 5.1 0.3 0.1 0.1 0.3
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Botswana
inward -4.6 -0.6 -0.1 -20.2 -1.0 4.9
outward 2.7 0.7 0.8 0.7 0.7 2.9
Burkina Faso
inward 0.5 0.1 - 2.1 0.6 0.4
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Burundi
inward 0.6 0.5 0.3 0.3 0.5 1.9
outward 0.1 .. .. 0.1 0.1 0.6
Cameroon
inward - -0.7 2.5 0.5 3.9 4.8
outward 0.8 1.1 2.9 2.0 2.4 2.5
/...
327
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Cape Verde
inward 2.6 1.0 -0.6 2.4 1.9 7.8
outward 0.2 .. .. .. 0.8 ..
Central African Republic
inward -2.1 -2.8 -6.8 -9.4 3.4 4.0
outward 3.8 2.0 3.7 5.0 6.8 5.6
Chad
inward 12.6 3.0 1.8 13.5 24.0 11.5
outward 8.1 7.6 12.4 9.7 0.5 10.6
Comoros
inward 5.3 5.5 6.6 4.8 6.7 5.4
outward 0.4 .. .. .. .. ..
Congo
inward 6.4 1.8 0.9 40.2 0.8 2.2
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Côte d’Ivoire
inward -0.6 2.1 -29.1 10.7 3.3 1.5
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Djibouti
inward 1.2 - 1.8 1.1 1.1 2.5
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Equatorial Guinea
inward 30.9 140.1 3.7 3.1 0.3 6.5
outward 0.1 0.4 .. .. .. ..
Ethiopia
inward 0.3 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.4 1.1
outward .. .. .. 0.1 -0.1 ..
Gabon
inward 0.4 -5.1 10.5 -9.6 -8.7 8.1
outward 1.2 1.4 2.1 0.2 0.1 0.8
Gambia
inward 18.9 20.0 8.8 19.4 16.5 12.5
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Ghana
inward 17.8 2.3 2.5 9.4 22.6 22.2
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Guinea
inward 3.3 7.8 4.0 0.5 - 0.2
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Guinea-Bissau
inward 2.2 3.3 10.0 -2.6 0.0 0.3
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Kenya
inward 1.3 1.2 0.5 0.2 0.3 1.7
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Lesotho
inward 6.0 1.7 0.5 2.6 3.3 4.0
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Liberia
inward 43.2 8.2 -11.1 31.1 14.1 21.4
outward 56.6 341.1 -30.7 -4.1 47.4 4.1
Madagascar
inward 4.5 6.4 6.2 4.0 1.8 2.9
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
/...
328
Annex
Malawi
inward 6.2 4.9 0.8 4.9 6.3 6.1
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Mali
inward 1.4 0.7 -1.4 -4.2 10.4 2.9
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Mauritania
inward 3.7 0.9 2.8 6.7 0.9 2.9
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Mauritius
inward 4.5 2.4 1.7 1.6 1.9 1.9
outward 3.3 1.4 4.9 3.6 0.1 0.4
Mozambique
inward 3.8 2.6 3.2 3.5 2.8 3.6
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Namibia
inward 22.9 30.5 18.1 6.7 8.2 6.7
outward 1.5 1.6 -0.3 1.8 0.6 0.9
Niger
inward 3.8 5.3 18.1 -10.7 -3.7 0.1
outward 2.7 0.9 13.0 1.8 -0.6 ..
Nigeria
inward 34.9 19.8 26.3 36.5 50.5 50.0
outward 15.0 10.8 5.2 16.1 10.0 10.5
Rwanda
inward 1.0 2.0 0.9 2.4 -0.4 0.1
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Senegal
inward 5.8 -1.0 2.6 -0.1 11.8 7.8
outward 1.9 -2.6 6.3 0.0 3.1 3.2
Seychelles
inward 38.2 24.5 9.9 14.8 30.2 38.4
outward 2.1 1.4 1.3 0.9 1.3 1.4
S ierra Leone
inward 5.7 13.9 -10.4 -15.6 -8.8 4.2
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Somalia
inward 0.3 -0.1 0.1 0.1 - 0.2
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Swaziland
inward 51.9 44.3 38.7 28.4 48.9 29.5
outward 21.9 14.0 14.8 13.8 34.8 8.9
Togo
inward 1.7 2.7 -0.5 0.9 1.4 0.2
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Uganda
inward 8.4 0.2 0.6 10.1 12.6 21.1
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
United Republic of Tanzania
inward 3.3 0.3 1.1 2.0 5.1 14.4
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Zaire
inward - 2.2 -0.2 2.9 -0.4 -
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
/...
329
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Zambia
inward 27.2 8.9 12.9 10.4 14.0 19.0
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Zimbabwe
inward 1.8 0.2 1.1 2.0 2.4 3.1
outward 0.1 .. .. 0.3 .. ..
South America
inward 7.4 5.2 6.2 5.1 7.0 8.2
outward 1.5 1.0 0.6 1.3 1.7 1.6
Argentina
inward 13.0 15.1 25.5 31.0 4.8 11.7
outward 0.3 -0.3 -0.1 .. 1.0 1.4
Bolivia
inward 25.0 6.5 11.2 14.9 17.6 47.7
outward 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.2
Brazil
inward 3.1 1.4 3.0 1.3 3.0 4.7
outward 1.1 1.3 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.3
Chile
inward 21.5 7.3 7.2 6.9 14.0 10.8
outward 9.0 1.7 3.9 3.7 7.3 4.4
Colombia
inward 17.0 7.6 10.6 10.0 11.9 14.8
outward 1.9 0.4 0.7 2.5 1.1 1.7
Ecuador
inward 14.6 6.9 7.2 16.5 17.0 14.1
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Guyana
inward 56.9 10.6 73.0 28.6 41.7 31.9
outward .. .. -1.0 0.8 .. ..
Paraguay
inward 11.3 5.6 9.7 7.3 10.2 8.9
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Peru
inward 15.5 -0.1 2.9 8.7 37.3 24.7
outward 0.1 .. - 0.3 .. 0.1
Surinam
inward -7.8 2.2 -4.7 -3.4 -3.6 2.0
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Uruguay
inward 11.1 2.7 3.9 5.3 7.0 5.7
outward 0.1 0.3 -1.9 1.7 .. ..
Venezuela
inward 8.3 19.7 4.9 3.2 7.2 7.6
outward 4.2 1.9 1.2 7.6 6.0 2.5
/...
330
Annex
/...
331
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Jamaica
inward 16.3 13.6 13.7 5.8 8.9 13.5
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Mexico
inward 16.9 8.5 6.4 6.0 14.3 17.1
outward 1.4 0.3 1.1 - 1.4 1.5
Netherlands Antilles
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Nicaragua
inward 6.8 0.3 4.2 9.5 8.6 15.2
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Panama
inward 24.4 4.7 11.3 9.3 30.2 -1.3
outward 23.1 65.9 20.4 -28.9 -7.7 -8.0
Saint Kitts and Nevis
inward 40.2 30.3 17.6 17.9 21.1 27.2
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Saint Lucia
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
inward 57.7 14.1 33.4 52.8 85.0 53.6
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Trinidad and Tobago
inward 31.2 20.2 24.0 64.1 71.3 43.6
outward 0.2 .. .. 0.5 0.7 0.4
Virgin Islands
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Developing Europe
inward 1.4 0.8 30.6 9.0 10.4 15.1
outward - .. -0.5 0.1 -0.1 0.9
/...
332
Annex
Asia
inward 7.6 3.4 4.2 6.5 7.2 7.5
outward 4.5 1.2 2.6 3.9 4.5 4.9
West Asia
inward 1.2 1.7 1.5 2.2 1.0 -0.6
outward 0.4 -0.3 1.1 0.5 0.8 0.6
Bahrain
inward -1.4 -0.6 -0.6 -0.4 -2.1 -1.9
outward -0.8 -0.7 .. -1.4 0.4 -0.4
Cyprus
inward 10.0 5.8 6.1 5.6 5.0 6.8
outward 1.0 1.0 0.8 0.8 0.4 0.4
Iran, Islamic Republic of
inward -0.1 0.1 -0.7 -0.1 - -
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Iraq
inward - .. .. .. .. ..
outward - .. .. .. .. ..
Jordan
inward 1.2 -1.2 2.6 -1.8 0.1 2.0
outward -1.9 1.4 -0.2 -2.8 -1.2 -1.5
Kuwait
inward 0.4 - 1.0 0.3 0.4 0.5
outward 19.1 -4.6 35.1 20.6 26.1 21.8
Lebanon
inward 3.7 0.2 0.4 0.3 0.4 1.9
outward 2.5 0.7 0.6 0.3 0.4 0.4
Oman
inward 5.9 7.7 5.1 7.0 3.2 1.8
outward .. -0.1 -0.1 -0.2 0.4 0.1
Qatar
inward 3.1 4.1 3.6 2.6 3.4 3.2
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Saudi Arabia
inward 1.7 0.7 -0.3 5.2 1.6 -7.6
outward -0.7 -0.9 - -0.2 0.4 0.1
Syrian Arab Republic
inward 2.2 1.2 0.9 1.8 1.1 0.6
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Turkey
inward 3.5 2.3 2.3 1.4 1.6 2.2
outward 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.0 0.1 0.3
United Arab Emirates
inward 1.2 0.4 1.6 2.0 1.2 1.3
outward -0.1 - 0.2 0.1 -0.5 -0.1
Yemen
inward 40.7 34.9 32.8 35.9 0.4 -8.7
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Central Asia
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
/...
333
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Armenia
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Azerbaijan
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Georgia
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Kazakstan
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Kyrgyzstan
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Tajikistan
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Turkmenistan
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Uzbekistan
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Afghanistan
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Bangladesh
inward 0.3 0.1 0.1 0.4 0.3 -
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Brunei Darussalam
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Cambodia
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
China
inward 14.5 3.3 7.8 20.0 24.5 25.7
outward 1.8 0.7 2.8 3.2 1.5 1.4
Hong Kong
inward 12.2 2.3 7.7 7.1 8.2 8.4
outward 94.3 12.1 31.0 75.5 87.6 100.6
India
inward 1.2 0.3 0.4 1.0 2.4 3.6
outward - - - 0.1 0.1 0.1
Indonesia
inward 7.6 3.6 3.9 3.8 3.7 6.5
outward 1.0 - 0.1 0.7 1.1 0.9
/...
334
Annex
The Pacific
inward 32.6 20.5 32.4 7.3 9.2 47.3
outward 0.4 -0.3 0.1 0.5 0.3 0.7
/...
335
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Fiji
inward 28.1 8.3 27.1 12.8 33.0 33.2
outward 1.8 -2.4 0.8 2.7 1.9 4.6
Kiribati
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
New Caledonia
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Papua New Guinea
inward 27.9 19.1 28.8 -0.2 -0.5 45.5
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Solomon Islands
inward 34.1 .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Tonga
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Vanuatu
inward 68.6 54.1 53.1 51.9 60.8 62.6
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Western Samoa
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Albania
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Belarus
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Bulgaria
inward 0.4 2.8 2.0 2.5 4.8 4.1
outward - .. .. .. .. 0.4
Czech Republic
inward .. .. .. 7.9 8.1 17.6
outward .. .. .. 1.1 1.1 0.3
Czechoslovakia (former)
inward 5.4 21.8 .. .. .. ..
outward 0.2 0.5 .. .. .. ..
Estonia
inward .. .. .. 40.6 35.6 22.3
outward .. .. .. 1.6 0.4 0.3
Hungary
inward 33.3 21.2 20.2 32.7 13.9 59.7
outward 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.6
Latvia
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
/...
336
Annex
Lithuania
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Moldova, Republic of
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Poland
inward 9.6 2.0 4.8 12.6 12.5 18.1
outward 0.1 - 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2
Romania
inward 1.1 1.0 2.0 2.0 5.7 8.7
outward - 0.1 0.1 0.1 - -
Russian Federation
inward 0.1 .. 0.1 1.8 0.9 0.9
outward - .. .. .. 0.6 0.1
Slovakia
inward .. .. .. 5.1 5.0 3.6
outward .. .. .. 1.6 0.3 0.2
Ukraine
inward .. .. .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
Memorandum:
Total
inward 2.3 2.4 2.0 2.1 1.3 1.3
outward 0.1 0.5 - - 0.1 -
Africa
inward 5.6 8.4 4.1 4.8 6.3 7.3
outward 0.8 3.3 0.3 0.2 0.5 0.2
Asia
inward 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.6 0.4 0.2
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
West Asia
inward 40.7 34.9 32.8 35.9 0.4 -8.7
outward .. .. .. .. .. ..
The Pacific
inward 67.0 92.5 89.5 80.4 90.3 103.5
outward - .. .. .. - ..
/...
337
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Oil-exporting countriesb
Total
inward 6.6 6.4 5.8 5.7 8.2 7.1
outward 1.4 0.4 1.1 1.3 1.9 2.0
Africa
inward 4.6 4.6 6.1 7.1 9.9 8.0
outward 1.1 1.3 0.6 1.5 1.1 1.3
North Africa
inward 2.3 1.7 3.4 3.5 5.4 2.9
outward 0.1 0.3 - .. 0.1 0.3
Other Africa
inward 17.4 17.4 19.5 24.3 31.4 33.0
outward 6.5 5.7 3.4 8.9 5.7 6.1
South America
inward 10.1 16.6 5.6 6.3 9.7 11.0
outward 3.3 1.5 1.0 5.8 4.4 1.9
Asia
inward 4.5 4.8 5.3 5.0 4.4 4.0
outward 1.3 - 1.4 1.4 2.2 2.3
West Asia
inward 0.4 0.6 0.1 1.7 0.7 -2.1
outward 0.5 -0.6 1.8 0.8 1.4 0.9
338
Annex
Annex table B.6. Inward and outward FDI stock as a percentage of gross domestic product,
by region and economy, 1980, 1985, 1990 and 1995
(Percentage)
World
inward 4.6 6.4 8.3 10.1
outward 4.9 5.9 8.1 9.9
Developed countries
inward 4.8 6.0 8.3 9.1
outward 6.5 7.5 9.8 11.5
Western Europe
inward 5.7 8.4 10.9 13.4
outward 6.7 10.7 12.3 15.7
European Union
inward 5.5 8.2 10.8 13.2
outward 6.3 10.4 11.8 14.6
Austria
inward 5.8 9.4 6.8 8.0
outward 1.0 2.9 2.9 5.5
Belgium and Luxembourg
inward 6.0 10.6 18.1 31.1
outward 4.9 5.6 14.3 23.0
Denmark
inward 6.3 6.2 7.1 13.1
outward 3.1 3.1 5.7 11.5
Finland
inward 1.1 2.5 3.8 6.8
outward 1.4 3.4 8.3 12.1
France
inward 3.4 6.4 7.2 9.6
outward 3.6 7.1 9.2 11.8
Germany
inward 4.5 6.0 7.4 6.9
outward 5.3 9.7 10.1 10.8
Greece
inward 11.3 24.9 16.9 16.9
outward .. - - -
Ireland
inward 19.5 24.5 12.5 20.2
outward .. 1.1 4.8 6.5
Italy
inward 2.0 4.5 5.3 5.7
outward 1.6 3.8 5.1 8.7
Netherlands
inward 11.3 19.6 25.9 28.4
outward 24.9 37.3 38.5 41.7
Portugal
inward 4.4 6.5 7.6 7.4
outward 0.5 0.9 0.7 3.3
Spain
inward 2.4 5.4 13.3 17.6
outward 0.6 1.3 3.3 6.0
/...
339
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Sweden
inward 2.9 5.0 5.4 15.9
outward 4.5 12.3 21.5 31.2
United Kingdom
inward 11.7 14.0 22.3 28.5
outward 14.9 21.9 23.6 27.4
Gibraltar
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Iceland
inward 3.8 7.8 3.2 3.6
outward .. - 0.3 0.6
Norway
inward 11.6 13.8 10.8 13.4
outward 3.4 7.9 9.4 15.4
Switzerland
inward 8.4 10.8 14.9 18.8
outward 21.1 23.0 29.1 47.0
North America
inward 4.6 5.7 8.3 8.7
outward 8.2 6.7 8.4 10.4
Canada
inward 20.4 18.5 19.7 21.7
outward 8.5 11.7 13.7 18.3
United States
inward 3.1 4.6 7.2 7.7
outward 8.1 6.2 7.9 9.8
Australia
inward 8.7 15.6 25.9 30.8
outward 1.5 4.1 10.2 11.9
Israel
inward 3.3 4.7 3.8 6.2
outward 0.1 2.1 1.7 4.8
Japan
inward 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.3
outward 1.8 3.3 7.0 6.0
New Zealand
inward 10.5 9.0 18.7 43.9
outward 5.8 8.1 7.7 12.0
South Africa
inward 20.4 19.1 7.9 7.8
outward 7.4 11.8 7.3 7.5
/...
340
Annex
Developing countries
inward 4.3 8.1 8.7 15.4
outward 0.5 1.0 1.8 4.5
Africa
inward 3.2 6.4 9.2 13.3
outward 0.1 1.9 3.0 3.6
North Africa
inward 3.3 5.9 7.1 10.2
outward 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.6
Algeria
inward 3.1 2.2 2.1 3.3
outward 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.6
Egypt
inward 9.6 12.0 23.0 23.3
outward 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.6
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
inward .. .. .. ..
outward 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.2
Morocco
inward 1.0 3.4 3.6 9.2
outward .. .. .. 0.4
Sudan
inward .. 0.4 - -
outward .. .. .. ..
Tunisia
inward 9.0 22.0 17.8 22.8
outward .. - 0.1 0.2
Other Africa
inward 3.1 6.8 11.9 16.8
outward 0.1 3.3 6.3 7.2
Angola
inward 1.7 11.1 12.4 33.6
outward .. .. - -
Benin
inward 2.7 3.1 2.0 2.5
outward .. 0.2 0.1 0.1
Botswana
inward 27.4 45.3 26.6 16.5
outward 0.3 0.2 0.3 2.3
Burkina Faso
inward 1.4 2.4 1.4 2.1
outward 0.2 0.3 0.1 0.1
Burundi
inward 0.7 2.0 2.5 2.7
outward .. .. - 0.1
Cameroon
inward 4.4 13.8 8.5 18.7
outward 0.3 0.6 1.2 4.5
Cape Verde
inward .. .. 0.8 5.6
outward .. .. 0.3 0.6
/...
341
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
/...
342
Annex
Mali
inward 0.9 2.8 1.2 2.9
outward 1.5 1.8 0.9 1.0
Mauritania
inward -1.6 4.8 4.9 8.9
outward .. .. 0.2 0.3
Mauritius
inward 1.8 3.5 6.3 6.3
outward .. .. 0.1 2.4
Mozambique
inward 0.6 0.7 2.9 12.2
outward .. .. .. ..
Namibia
inward .. 1.3 2.3 13.3
outward .. .. 0.1 0.8
Niger
inward 7.4 14.1 11.7 13.5
outward 0.1 0.6 2.2 4.4
Nigeria
inward 2.6 5.5 24.9 22.7
outward .. 6.4 29.3 17.5
Rwanda
inward 4.6 7.8 9.1 18.2
outward .. .. .. ..
Senegal
inward 5.1 7.6 4.9 8.6
outward - 1.5 0.8 2.4
Seychelles
inward 24.9 51.7 50.6 65.1
outward 9.4 25.9 16.6 14.5
Sierra Leone
inward 7.0 5.0 -0.5 -1.2
outward .. .. .. ..
Somalia
inward 1.1 0.2 -0.8 -0.5
outward .. .. .. ..
Swaziland
inward 27.5 55.0 47.9 80.4
outward 1.7 5.7 7.2 22.9
Togo
inward 15.6 27.9 16.1 22.3
outward 0.2 0.3 0.1 0.2
Uganda
inward - 0.2 0.1 5.6
outward .. .. .. ..
United Republic of Tanzania
inward 0.9 1.4 2.3 9.1
outward .. .. .. ..
Zaire
inward 7.1 11.8 2.5 3.6
outward .. .. .. ..
Zambia
inward 0.6 5.4 18.3 22.8
outward .. .. .. ..
/...
343
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Zimbabwe
inward - - -0.9 1.1
outward .. .. .. 0.1
South America
inward 5.8 8.9 8.7 14.3
outward 0.2 0.5 0.6 1.2
Argentina
inward 6.9 7.4 6.2 8.7
outward 0.1 0.3 0.3 0.2
Bolivia
inward 13.7 14.7 14.6 22.3
outward - - 0.1 0.2
Brazil
inward 6.9 11.3 8.1 17.8
outward 0.3 0.6 0.5 1.2
Chile
inward 3.2 14.1 33.1 23.1
outward 0.2 0.6 0.6 4.1
Colombia
inward 3.2 6.4 8.7 12.1
outward 0.4 0.9 1.0 1.4
Ecuador
inward 6.1 6.2 12.8 17.7
outward .. .. .. ..
Guyana
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. 0.4
Paraguay
inward 4.9 6.5 7.6 12.2
outward 0.7 0.7 0.6 0.3
Peru
inward 4.3 6.7 3.7 9.3
outward - 0.2 0.2 0.2
Suriname
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Uruguay
inward 6.9 16.2 11.7 8.1
outward - - 0.1 0.1
Venezuela
inward 2.7 2.6 8.0 9.3
outward - 0.3 2.5 4.0
/...
344
Annex
Aruba
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Bahamas
inward 25.5 12.7 10.7 29.0
outward 24.4 6.6 48.8 54.1
Barbados
inward 11.8 10.3 9.9 13.0
outward 0.6 1.0 1.3 1.8
Belize
inward 6.4 5.0 17.8 25.3
outward .. .. .. 1.7
Bermuda
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Cayman Islands
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Costa Rica
inward 13.9 24.4 25.3 30.2
outward 0.1 0.7 0.8 0.7
Cuba
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Dominica
inward .. 5.7 40.0 78.5
outward .. .. .. ..
Dominican Republic
inward 3.6 5.2 8.1 11.8
outward .. .. .. 0.1
El Salvador
inward 4.3 3.2 4.0 3.1
outward .. .. .. ..
Grenada
inward 1.7 11.0 35.1 62.8
outward .. .. .. ..
Guatemala
inward 8.9 9.4 22.5 14.8
outward .. .. .. ..
Haiti
inward 5.7 5.6 5.3 5.7
outward .. .. .. ..
Honduras
inward 3.6 4.7 12.6 15.0
outward .. .. .. ..
Jamaica
inward 18.7 22.7 16.2 31.3
outward 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1
Mexico
inward 4.2 10.2 13.2 25.6
outward 0.1 0.3 0.2 1.1
Netherlands Antilles
inward 57.6 4.6 13.2 21.1
outward 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.7
/...
345
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Nicaragua
inward 5.1 4.1 4.7 14.1
outward .. .. .. ..
Panama
inward 10.8 10.8 11.6 20.1
outward 22.6 44.5 77.7 60.5
Saint Kitts and Nevis
inward 2.1 40.5 100.3 117.4
outward .. .. .. ..
Saint Lucia
inward 95.4 105.5 94.4 101.0
outward .. .. .. ..
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
inward 2.0 7.5 24.8 79.2
outward .. .. .. ..
Trinidad and Tobago
inward 15.7 23.3 41.3 75.1
outward .. 0.2 0.4 0.7
Virgin Islands
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Developing Europe
inward 0.3 1.1 31.2 10.3
outward .. .. .. 0.1
Asia
inward 3.5 7.3 7.3 14.2
outward 0.6 0.8 1.9 6.0
West Asia
inward 2.9 9.1 5.0 9.6
outward 0.3 0.4 0.6 1.7
Bahrain
inward .. 8.4 15.9 11.5
outward .. 0.1 1.1 0.4
/...
346
Annex
Cyprus
inward 21.4 32.6 20.6 18.9
outward .. - 0.2 0.7
Iran, Islamic Republic of
inward 1.2 0.5 - ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Iraq
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. -
Jordan
inward 4.0 9.6 15.3 9.9
outward 0.6 0.5 0.4 -1.2
Kuwait
inward 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.4
outward 3.3 6.1 21.9 28.7
Lebanon
inward 0.5 2.2 2.1 1.9
outward - 2.6 -0.6 -0.6
Oman
inward 8.0 12.0 16.3 19.4
outward - 0.4 0.1 ..
Qatar
inward 1.1 1.2 0.7 3.3
outward .. .. .. ..
Saudi Arabia
inward 6.6 44.1 39.4 34.3
outward 0.1 0.5 1.7 1.4
Syrian Arab Republic
inward .. 0.2 1.6 2.0
outward .. .. .. ..
Turkey
inward 0.2 0.7 0.9 3.9
outward .. .. - 0.2
United Arab Emirates
inward 1.4 1.8 2.2 3.6
outward 0.0 0.1 0.3 0.1
Yemen
inward 2.4 3.7 0.8 16.2
outward .. 0.1 0.1 -
Central Asia
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Armenia
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Azerbaijan
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Georgia
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Kazakstan
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
/...
347
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Kyrgyzstan
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Tajikistan
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Turkmenistan
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Uzbekistan
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Afghanistan
inward 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
outward .. .. .. ..
Bangladesh
inward 0.4 0.7 0.7 0.6
outward .. .. .. ..
Brunei Darussalam
inward 0.4 0.9 1.1 2.2
outward .. .. .. ..
Cambodia
inward .. .. .. 15.4
outward .. .. .. ..
China
inward - 1.2 3.6 18.2
outward .. - 0.6 2.3
Hong Kong
inward 6.3 10.5 18.7 22.7
outward 0.5 7.0 18.5 88.8
India
inward 0.7 0.5 0.5 1.9
outward - - - -
Indonesia
inward 14.2 28.6 36.6 25.2
outward - 0.1 - 0.3
Korea, Democratic People’s Republic of
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Korea, Republic of
inward 1.8 1.9 2.3 2.3
outward 0.2 0.6 0.9 2.2
Lao People’s Democratic Republic
inward .. 0.1 1.6 11.9
outward .. .. .. ..
Macau
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Malaysia
inward 24.8 27.2 33.0 52.1
outward 1.7 2.4 5.3 12.6
/...
348
Annex
Maldives
inward 11.4 3.8 24.8 15.5
outward .. .. .. ..
Mongolia
inward .. .. .. 2.3
outward .. .. .. ..
Myanmar
inward 0.1 0.1 0.7 0.9
outward .. .. .. ..
Nepal
inward 0.1 0.1 0.3 0.7
outward .. .. .. ..
Pakistan
inward 2.4 3.3 4.8 62.7
outward 0.1 0.4 0.6 0.5
Philippines
inward 3.8 4.2 4.7 9.2
outward 0.5 0.6 0.4 1.6
Singapore
inward 52.9 73.6 76.3 67.4
outward 47.7 35.3 25.8 38.4
Sri Lanka
inward 5.7 8.6 8.5 9.9
outward .. - 0.1 0.3
Taiwan Province of China
inward 5.8 4.7 6.2 7.3
outward 0.2 0.3 8.2 11.2
Thailand
inward 3.0 5.1 9.3 10.3
outward - - 0.5 1.4
Viet Nam
inward .. 0.2 3.7 31.9
outward .. .. .. ..
The Pacific
inward 26.4 31.2 40.4 46.4
outward 0.5 1.2 1.8 1.4
Fiji
inward 29.8 34.4 28.2 32.9
outward 0.8 2.0 6.2 5.4
Kiribati
inward .. .. 3.5 5.6
outward .. .. .. 0.1
New Caledonia
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Papua New Guinea
inward 27.1 31.1 46.8 48.2
outward 0.4 1.0 0.2 0.1
Solomon Islands
inward 19.2 19.9 32.8 55.7
outward .. .. .. ..
Tonga
inward .. 0.2 0.6 4.4
outward .. .. .. -
/...
349
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Vanuatu
inward 29.0 60.0 71.8 137.3
outward .. .. .. ..
Western Samoa
inward 0.4 0.8 5.4 14.3
outward .. .. .. ..
Albania
inward .. .. .. 15.3
outward .. .. .. 3.7
Belarus
inward .. .. .. 0.4
outward .. .. .. ..
Bulgaria
inward .. .. - 0.8
outward .. .. .. -
Czech Republic
inward .. .. .. 8.7
outward .. .. .. 0.5
Czechoslovakia (former)
inward .. .. 1.0 ..
outward .. .. - ..
Estonia
inward .. .. .. 17.6
outward .. .. .. 1.4
Hungary
inward - - 6.3 31.5
outward .. .. .. 1.2
Latvia
inward .. .. .. 10.5
outward .. .. .. 3.1
Lithuania
inward .. .. .. 2.4
outward .. .. .. -
Moldova, Republic of
inward .. .. .. ..
outward .. .. .. ..
Poland
inward 0.1 0.2 0.5 7.2
outward 0.1 0.1 0.3 0.2
Romania
inward .. .. .. 3.2
outward .. .. - 0.1
Russian Federation
inward .. .. .. 1.1
outward .. .. .. 0.2
Slovakia
inward .. .. .. 3.4
outward .. .. .. 0.5
Ukraine
inward .. .. .. 7.1
outward .. .. .. 0.2
/...
350
Annex
Memorandum:
Total
inward 1.8 3.4 3.9 5.2
outward 0.1 0.4 0.4 0.4
Africa
inward 2.1 4.7 5.7 9.8
outward 0.1 0.7 0.6 1.2
Asia
inward 0.5 0.8 0.7 2.3
outward - - - -
West Asia
inward 2.4 3.7 0.8 16.2
outward - 0.1 - -
The Pacific
inward 15.4 27.0 34.4 66.6
outward .. .. .. -
Oil-exporting countriesb
Total
inward 4.4 10.2 9.9 18.0
outward 0.2 0.8 1.2 2.7
Africa
inward 3.6 6.8 11.6 16.1
outward 0.2 2.4 4.7 5.2
North Africa
inward 4.0 6.4 8.7 11.9
outward 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.7
Other Africa
inward 3.3 7.5 19.5 24.1
outward 0.1 5.3 16.0 13.9
South America
inward 3.7 3.9 9.3 11.7
outward - 0.2 1.9 3.0
/...
351
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Asia
inward 6.0 14.7 10.5 20.6
outward 0.3 0.5 0.9 2.9
West Asia
inward 3.3 10.7 5.8 12.3
outward 0.3 0.5 0.8 2.5
352
Annex table B.7. Cross-border merger and acquisition sales, 1989-1996
(Millions of dollars)
World 123 645 .. 115 637 159 959 49 062 85 279 73 769 121 894 66 812 162 344 109 356 196 367 140 813 237 184 162 686 274 611
Developed countries 121 445 .. 107 128 132 762 46 544 71 439 61 611 83 712 54 956 97 832 96 669 129 123 127 880 168 420 142 292 186 411
Western Europe 50 531 .. 48 395 65 688 25 266 39 753 44 379 59 248 28 531 52 420 41 290 60 932 53 787 76 295 60 221 81 822
European Union 49 681 .. 43 294 60 320 24 523 38 678 42 637 56 906 27 911 51 740 38 885 58 368 52 594 74 812 56 195 76 772
Austria 222 .. 15 204 317 355 34 549 223 242 249 728 595 1 287 909 949
Belgium and
Luxembourg 1 384 .. 722 1 095 1 189 1 882 270 1 246 375 3 823 898 2 154 1 616 5 313 1 800 2 068
Denmark 182 .. 439 719 94 130 245 258 599 732 1 860 1 860 260 260 257 417
Finland 24 .. 129 129 489 526 160 179 436 551 35 203 256 340 1 090 1 151
France 5 432 .. 4 494 6 268 2 618 4 965 6 678 8 772 3 756 5 042 8 859 12 491 10 208 12 751 5 673 11 414
Germany 4 667 .. 5 995 7 920 2 666 4 992 5 269 7 651 1 541 5 930 5 987 9 871 5 336 6 212 5 408 6 550
Greece 306 .. 100 120 40 40 739 739 - 34 - 96 153 555 47 49
Ireland 173 .. 460 537 144 264 230 230 1 431 1 588 73 275 522 1 154 260 587
Italy 1 861 .. 3 727 4 731 1 227 1 971 3 146 4 635 2 802 3 212 3 259 5 311 2 480 3 441 2 871 5 206
Netherlands 2 254 .. 1 416 2 029 1 331 2 462 5 129 5 994 4 253 10 813 1 242 2 346 2 381 2 542 2 970 3 647
Portugal 404 .. 279 3 581 99 232 519 833 196 414 243 856 408 551 683 748
Spain 1 986 .. 3 970 6 241 3 362 6 371 3 575 4 390 1 028 2 775 2 854 5 153 1 340 1 996 823 1 786
Sweden 954 .. 1 102 1 509 1 026 1 499 1 566 2 684 3 388 3 771 2 331 2 468 1 600 2 074 1 558 2 630
United Kingdom 27 266 .. 20 216 25 005 8 987 12 057 15 078 18 747 7 100 12 029 10 901 14 460 25 439 36 337 31 502 39 226
Unspecified 2 567 .. 232 232 933 933 - - 783 783 94 94 - - 344 344
Other Western Europe 850 - 5 101 5 368 744 1 075 1 742 2 341 620 680 2 404 2 564 1 193 1 483 4 026 5 050
Gibraltar 3 .. - - - 9 - - - - - - - - - -
Iceland - .. - 1 - - - - - - - - - - 3 3
Monaco - .. - 75 - - - - - - 10 11 - - - -
Norway 91 .. 984 1 049 65 358 1 622 1 931 144 182 422 422 349 458 480 493
Switzerland 756 .. 4 117 4 243 679 707 120 411 454 475 1 973 2 131 844 1 025 3 375 4 386
Unspecified - .. - - - - - - 22 22 - - - - 167 167
North America 67 847 - 53 215 60 042 19 604 26 092 14 023 19 183 23 103 40 277 52 165 62 866 60 625 74 019 70 465 81 358
Canada 11 412 .. 5 417 5 746 1 753 2 277 3 561 5 246 3 311 5 550 5 609 6 494 9 680 11 115 9 512 10 437
United States 56 435 .. 47 798 54 297 17 851 23 815 10 463 13 938 19 792 34 727 46 556 56 372 50 944 62 903 60 953 70 921
Other developed
countries 3 067 .. 5 517 7 033 1 673 5 595 3 209 5 281 3 322 5 135 3 216 5 325 13 468 18 106 11 605 23 231
Australia 1 567 .. 2 137 3 499 1 003 2 921 1 016 2 098 2 026 3 182 1 462 2 628 10 304 12 349 3 935 10 043
Israel 123 .. - 27 - - 40 257 9 101 60 85 381 1 321 1 376 1 711
Japan 134 .. 24 102 84 1 399 309 775 81 279 1 302 1 690 681 1 573 2 163 4 780
New Zealand 1 019 .. 3 357 3 388 577 1 265 1 844 2 141 1 183 1 459 322 696 1 404 1 821 1 527 3 519
South Africa 225 .. - 17 9 9 1 10 23 115 70 226 279 622 2 604 3 179
Unspecified - .. - - 1 1 - - - - - - 420 420 - -
/...
353
Annex
(Annex table B.7, cont'd)
354
1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996
Region/economy Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total
Developing countries 1 879 .. 7 785 18 177 1 425 10 659 8 460 32 174 9 648 48 670 9 297 60 983 9 166 52 746 18 443 83 396
Africa 20 .. 244 254 73 129 290 422 701 1 446 447 2 014 75 2 475 543 2 784
North Africa 20 .. - - - 56 221 298 185 239 398 1 926 18 1 937 154 1 926
Algeria - .. - - - - - 66 - 23 - 1 300 - 1 750 - 254
Egypt - .. - - - 56 125 133 180 211 9 124 18 162 84 1 288
Morocco - .. - - - - - 2 5 5 390 502 - 25 70 84
Sudan - .. - - - - 8 8 - - - - - - - 300
Tunisia 20 .. - - - - 88 88 - - - - - - - -
Other Africa - .. 244 254 73 74 69 125 516 1 207 49 88 58 537 389 858
World Investment Report 1997: T
Angola - .. - 10 - - - - - - - 9 - - - -
Bostwana - .. - - - - 8 8 - - 5 5 - - - -
Central African
Republic - .. - - - - - - 4 4 - - - - - -
Congo - .. - - - - - - - - - - - - 14 14
Côte d’Ivoire - .. - - - - 21 21 - - - - 1 1 2 2
Transnational
Gabon - .. - - - - - - - - - - - 139 - -
Ghana - .. - - - - - 4 - - - 30 - - - 47
Guinea - .. - - - - - - - - - - - 39 - -
Kenya - .. - - 73 73 8 8 - - - - - - - 25
Lesotho - .. - - - - - - - - 5 5 - - - -
Madagascar - .. - - - - - - - - - - - - 58 58
Mali - .. - - - - - - - 160 - - - - 53 53
Mozambique - .. - - - - - - - 1 20 20 14 14 2 2
Namibia - .. - - - - - - - - 5 5 - - - 4
Nigeria - .. - - - - - 4 - 285 - - - 95 - 252
Senegal - .. - - - - - 3 - - - - - - - 137
Sierra Leone - .. - - - - - - 34 34 8 8 - - - -
Swaziland - .. - - - - - - - - 5 5 - 136 - -
Uganda - .. - - - - 8 53 - - - - - - - -
United Republic
of Tanzania - .. - - - - - - - - 2 2 - 56 13 13
ransnational Corporations, Market Structur
/...
Structuree and Competition Policy
(Annex table B.7, cont'd)
Chile 13 .. 397 467 131 283 10 2 295 81 275 817 1 377 183 1 036 1 116 2 135
Colombia - .. 7 22 22 22 - - 1 1 23 85 50 152 1 672 1 672
Ecuador - .. - - - - - - - - 80 80 22 60 - -
Guyana - .. 17 - - - - 45 - - - - - - - -
Peru - .. - - - - 324 324 584 903 445 2 628 668 688 1 042 1 225
Uruguay - .. 18 18 - - - - 5 5 55 55 20 20 14 14
Venezuela - .. 6 45 192 2 197 - 247 16 3 953 325 344 120 234 635 4 161
Unspecified - .. - - 125 - 5 - 358 - - - 147 - 7 -
Other Latin America
and the Caribbean 135 .. 1 063 2 270 307 1 048 1 499 2 133 581 5 240 674 4 183 1 157 3 480 1 164 3 898
Bahamas - .. 14 14 - - 915 915 135 214 - 80 - - 70 70
Barbados - .. - - - - - - 4 4 - - - 8 64 64
Belize - .. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Bermuda - .. 546 554 10 10 55 180 - 139 47 52 241 1 028 - 447
Cayman Islands - .. - - - - - - - - - - 10 10 - 100
Costa Rica - .. - - - - - - - - 16 16 75 93 22 68
Cuba - .. - - - - - - - 20 - 1 100 10 15 40 43
Dominican Republic - .. - - - - - - - - - 6 - - 47 62
El Salvador - .. - - - - - - - - - - 40 40 - -
Grenada - .. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Guatemala - .. - - - - - - - - - - 2 2 26 26
Guyana - .. - 17 - 100 - - - - - - - - - -
Jamaica 42 .. - - - - - - 63 63 22 196 - - 6 12
Martinique - .. - 4 - - - - - - - - - - - -
Mexico 93 .. 503 1 681 297 813 529 797 183 3 947 295 2 326 503 1 435 791 2 847
Netherlands Antilles - .. - - - - - - - - 216 216 - - - -
Nicaragua - .. - - - - - - 1 1 6 6 - - 18 18
Panama - .. - - - - - - - - 71 71 259 260 - -
Saint Kitts and Nevis - .. - - - - - - - - - - - - 78 78
Trinidad and Tobago - .. - - - - - 238 175 475 - 112 - 125 - -
Virgin Islands - .. - - - - - - - - - - 17 17 2 57
Unspecified - .. - - - 125 - 5 20 378 1 1 - 447 - 7
Developing Europe - - 22 108 50 158 127 127 1 1 9 69 89 227 - -
Croatia - .. - - - - - - - - - 60 55 187 - -
Slovenia - .. - - - - 127 127 1 1 9 9 34 34 - -
Former Yugoslavia - .. 22 108 50 158 - - - - - - - 6 - -
Asia 1 711 .. 681 9 386 321 6 437 1 879 21 235 5 136 33 542 5 657 44 011 2 958 38 610 3 921 55 538
West Asia 318 .. 31 208 18 198 184 4 251 29 1 289 - 1 395 273 2 400 31 5 528
Cyprus - .. - - - - - - - - - - - - 31 1 431
Iran, Islamic Republic of - .. - - - - - 520 - 5 - - - - - 180
/...
355
Annex
(Annex table B.7, cont'd)
356
1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996
Region/economy Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total
Unspecified - .. - - - - 63 63 - - - - - - - -
Central Asia - .. - - - 40 - 45 510 1 547 300 685 450 859 512 7 051
Azerbaijan - .. - - - - - 30 - 713 - 300 - - - 5 330
Kazakhstan - .. - - - 40 - - 510 510 100 185 450 859 512 1 551
Turkmenistan - .. - - - - - - - 70 - - - - - 50
Uzbekistan - .. - - - - - 15 - 254 200 200 - - - 120
Transnational
Macau - .. - 6 - - - - - - - 38 - - - -
Malaysia 203 .. 72 842 57 1 004 14 1 197 139 541 215 393 16 821 40 4 497
Mongolia - .. - - - - - - - - - 1 - 5 - -
Myanmar - .. - 64 - 5 - - 10 15 10 104 - 632 - 134
Nepal - .. - - - - - - - - - - - 12 - -
Pakistan - .. - 22 - - - 8 5 5 1 730 2 146 - 15 151 2 501
Philippines 325 .. - 2 576 55 123 89 576 30 679 577 1 824 177 2 966 956 2 708
Singapore 49 .. 386 633 4 127 149 450 403 2 071 306 1 145 323 597 659 1 692
Sri Lanka - .. - - - - - 1 12 24 59 61 43 2 873 19 19
Taiwan Province
of China 13 .. 1 93 4 145 - 822 22 165 32 581 - 860 21 2 410
Structuree and Competition Policy
/...
(Annex table B.7, cont'd)
357
Annex
Annex table B.8. Cross-border merger and acquisition purchases, 1989-1996
358
(Millions of dollars)
World 123 645 .. 115 637 159 959 49 062 85 279 73 769 121 894 66 812 162 344 109 356 196 367 140 813 237 184 162 686 274 611
Developed countries 116 365 .. 111 195 152 201 47 351 79 900 58 824 99 168 59 292 134 895 100 223 163 010 132 344 212 084 152 224 239 139
Western Europe 67 568 .. 71 132 97 436 34 071 53 820 35 089 55 197 36 584 77 047 65 368 92 644 70 235 108 130 81 688 129 846
European Union 61 720 .. 65 232 90 967 31 577 50 537 30 960 50 017 35 531 74 770 51 879 75 333 64 161 98 725 72 339 114 316
Austria 21 .. 163 509 128 198 167 197 17 94 - 44 238 448 2 51
Belgium and
Luxembourg 2 011 .. 1 067 1 425 1 061 1 572 1 387 1 794 1 899 2 626 1 754 1 929 4 297 8 720 725 1 430
Denmark 477 .. 541 642 354 1 090 797 1 064 429 613 221 706 376 1 263 3 405 3 846
World Investment Report 1997: T
Finland 1 363 .. 1 131 1 460 349 700 19 287 348 572 476 496 1 133 1 419 305 402
France 18 767 .. 16 842 22 312 11 174 15 904 8 858 14 204 6 818 10 684 6 140 11 497 8 079 13 318 7 921 11 514
Germany 7 587 .. 7 038 15 975 4 680 7 501 4 106 6 508 3 264 6 731 8 523 13 191 15 536 22 616 12 111 27 380
Greece 100 .. - - - 5 7 7 661 679 67 68 - - 2 12
Ireland 1 024 .. 774 861 484 602 427 527 576 591 2 311 2 431 1 189 1 695 3 682 3 869
Italy 1 789 .. 3 673 5 601 2 119 4 799 6 034 7 642 571 5 902 1 184 2 378 2 983 3 805 1 236 3 046
Transnational
Netherlands 3 707 .. 2 287 4 166 3 754 6 672 1 397 6 038 4 696 12 004 2 484 4 584 5 970 9 620 16 113 19 987
Portugal 16 .. - 1 165 165 309 309 11 162 218 242 227 247 180 222
Spain 271 .. 2 178 2 608 354 690 676 1 159 247 1 392 455 2 346 1 298 1 944 3 283 6 273
Sweden 1 837 .. 9 434 9 842 840 2 310 691 1 091 1 703 3 385 1 033 2 067 3 020 6 619 959 1 455
United Kingdom 22 322 .. 20 103 25 566 5 901 8 087 6 085 9 183 14 258 29 146 27 013 33 355 19 816 26 958 22 415 34 822
Unspecified 428 .. - - 215 240 1 9 33 189 - - - 53 - 9
Other Western Europe 5 848 .. 5 901 6 470 2 494 3 283 4 130 5 180 1 053 2 277 13 489 17 311 6 074 9 404 9 349 15 531
Liechtenstein 161 .. - 15 53 53 - - - 1 - 14 2 82 317 317
Norway 571 .. 1 234 1 473 85 228 320 1 140 214 377 482 1 026 1 431 3 535 3 044 4 937
Switzerland 5 116 .. 4 667 4 981 2 356 3 002 3 810 4 040 839 1 900 13 007 16 271 4 641 5 788 5 988 10 277
North America 27 051 .. 19 971 26 234 8 446 15 690 16 065 26 361 19 763 44 655 28 921 52 042 52 223 80 386 60 967 87 496
Canada 4 323 .. 3 956 4 544 1 349 2 498 1 680 3 562 4 465 6 849 4 185 8 570 12 652 14 806 18 757 22 150
United States 22 729 .. 16 015 21 691 7 096 13 192 14 385 22 798 15 298 37 806 24 736 43 472 39 571 65 580 42 210 65 346
Other developed
ransnational Corporations, Market Structur
countries 21 745 .. 20 092 28 531 4 835 10 390 7 670 17 610 2 946 13 194 5 934 18 324 9 887 23 568 9 569 21 797
Australia 6 490 .. 1 842 2 084 819 1 039 1 595 2 733 1 171 2 966 1 400 3 856 4 870 5 569 4 290 5 437
Israel - .. 32 41 4 24 35 35 357 357 127 141 85 102 376 1 236
Japan 14 653 .. 17 342 25 133 3 675 8 959 4 188 12 525 437 7 194 1 143 10 467 4 113 16 963 4 096 12 573
New Zealand 593 .. 664 974 128 141 429 603 329 808 - 78 440 481 232 1 060
South Africa 9 .. 211 298 208 226 1 423 1 713 652 1 870 3 264 3 783 378 453 575 1 491
Unspecified - .. - - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
Developing countries 4 799 .. 4 442 7 548 1 605 5 199 14 546 22 319 7 378 26 858 9 183 32 365 8 463 24 464 10 264 32 827
Africa 40 .. 140 140 104 156 - 306 41 56 74 74 - 78 708 708
Structuree and Competition Policy
/...
(Annex table B.8, cont'd)
/...
359
Annex
(Annex table B.8, cont'd)
360
1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996
Region/economy Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total
Developing Europe - .. - - - - - - 5 5 - - - - - -
Malta - .. - - - - - - 5 5 - - - - - -
Asia 3 159 .. 4 299 7 024 1 372 4 315 10 003 16 921 5 110 23 417 6 614 23 753 6 350 21 591 5 356 26 915
West Asia 501 .. 2 122 2 230 563 1 832 509 853 942 2 814 1 897 3 781 825 2 114 1 096 4 729
Bahrain 450 .. 1 500 1 500 - - 403 403 746 746 585 585 - 1 347 347
Cyprus - .. - - 34 34 - 13 - 10 - 1 - - - -
Iran, Islamic Republic of - .. - - - - - - - - - 659 - - - 2 750
Kuwait 51 .. 300 350 500 549 - - - - - - 500 515 162 162
Lebanon - .. - - - - - - 20 20 - - - - - -
World Investment Report 1997: T
Oman - .. - - - - - - - - - - - - - 105
Saudi Arabia - .. 311 311 - 1 190 32 32 177 1 321 1 258 2 056 325 1 535 175 585
Turkey - .. 8 18 29 58 75 181 - 719 - - - 7 262 622
United Arab Emirates - .. 3 51 - - - 225 - - 54 479 - 56 151 158
Central Asia - .. - - - - - - - 715 - - - 6 - 285
Azerbaijan - .. - - - - - - - 700 - - - - - -
Transnational
Kazakhstan - .. - - - - - - - 6 - - - - - 285
Kyrgyzstan - .. - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
Uzbekistan - .. - - - - - - - 9 - - - 3 - -
South, East and
South- East Asia 2 658 .. 2 176 4 794 809 2 484 9 494 16 068 4 168 19 887 4 717 19 972 5 525 19 471 4 260 21 901
Bangladesh - .. - - - - - - - - - - - 12 - -
Brunei Darussalam - .. - - - 4 - - 202 202 - 1 60 82 58 182
Cambodia - .. - - - - - - - - - 8 - - - -
China 100 .. - 1 336 - 103 786 1 688 1 083 5 450 183 1 636 53 200 332 1 416
Hong Kong 1 137 .. 756 1 132 427 852 7 885 9 559 2 023 8 388 719 3 414 1 255 3 921 1 062 3 642
India - .. - - 270 270 - 422 - - 16 619 159 201 - -
Indonesia - .. - 187 58 58 32 106 173 247 390 519 141 615 504 614
Korea, Democratic
People’s Republic of - .. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ransnational Corporations, Market Structur
Korea, Republic of 423 .. 76 475 14 375 156 779 47 847 606 3 555 2 095 6 012 186 3 158
Macau - .. - - - - - - - - - 10 - - - -
Malaysia 182 .. 139 160 - 235 74 143 301 1 220 1 737 7 021 391 1 253 1 128 5 413
Myanmar - .. - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
Nepal - .. - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3
Pakistan - .. - - - - - 107 - - - - - - 1 1
Philippines - .. - - 12 18 44 51 - - - 433 - 11 - 2
Singapore 120 .. 144 243 29 417 203 554 230 2 117 820 1 811 977 2 765 290 4 006
Sri Lanka - .. - - - - - 1 001 - 882 - 760 - 821 - 2 116
Taiwan Province of China 428 .. 1 062 1 259 - 137 234 1 638 - 533 169 181 211 3 577 687 1 346
Thailand 269 .. - - - 15 80 20 110 - 77 5 182 2 12 2
Structuree and Competition Policy
/...
(Annex table B.8, cont'd)
361
Annex
Annex table B.9. Cross-border mergers and acquisitions, by industry, 1989-1996
362
(Millions of dollars)
All industries 123 645 .. 115 637 159 959 49 062 85 279 73 769 121 894 66 812 162 344 109 356 196 367 140 813 237 184 162 686 274 611
Primary sector 4 507 .. 5 826 9 555 1 628 2 994 803 3 246 1 568 24 308 3 762 9 588 3 477 22 215 6 577 23 408
Agriculture, forestry
and fishing 113 .. 1 493 1 504 47 302 67 266 213 294 1 906 1 920 410 796 396 471
Agriculture and
horticulture 86 .. 114 125 - 1 56 56 83 109 1 742 1 756 372 522 283 358
Forestry - .. 1 379 1 379 47 301 11 166 130 185 164 164 - 8 113 113
Fishing 27 .. - - - - - 44 - - - - 38 266 - -
World Investment Report 1997: T
Mining and Petroleum 4 394 .. 4 334 8 050 1 581 2 692 736 2 981 1 355 24 014 1 856 7 668 3 067 21 419 6 181 22 937
Extraction of mineral
oil and natural gas 4 242 .. 3 791 7 493 1 169 2 267 582 2 763 1 239 23 763 1 760 7 525 2 339 20 413 5 317 22 064
Extraction of minerals
not elsewhere specified 152 .. 543 557 412 425 154 218 116 251 96 143 728 1 006 864 873
Secondary sector 74 395 .. 57 651 84 843 29 813 47 011 43 766 64 026 36 739 63 758 66 667 109 164 68 465 105 664 59 515 96 128
Transnational
Coke, petroleum
products and nuclear fuel 5 135 .. 1 886 4 843 1 044 5 880 912 4 187 1 888 5 048 2 381 9 191 217 1 212 754 5 015
Mineral oil processing 4 605 .. 628 3 420 1 044 4 898 747 3 872 70 1 862 1 744 8 554 21 1 013 687 4 783
Coal extraction and
manufacture of solid fuel 530 .. 1 258 1 423 - 982 165 315 1 818 3 186 637 637 196 199 67 232
Chemicals and
chemical products 12 992 .. 13 002 15 524 5 942 7 873 5 288 7 893 11 619 21 240 18 282 23 631 17 655 26 388 16 795 21 182
Chemical industry 12 596 .. 13 002 15 476 5 934 7 561 5 284 7 789 11 616 21 038 18 159 23 464 17 563 26 157 16 795 20 422
Production of
man-made fibres 396 .. - 48 8 312 4 104 3 202 123 167 92 231 - 760
Structuree and Competition Policy
/...
(Annex table B.9, cont'd)
Processing of rubber
and plastics 3 003 .. 845 1 249 1 306 1 403 655 888 595 816 2 203 3 226 2 470 3 059 2 303 2 915
Manufacture of non-
metallic products 3 597 .. 4 967 5 557 967 1 453 5 613 6 393 912 2 251 2 224 9 235 2 925 5 706 2 582 3 555
Basic metals and
metal products 3 473 .. 2 199 4 641 2 635 3 275 2 783 7 195 3 910 6 928 5 681 10 711 10 101 14 328 4 568 8 773
Extraction and
preparation of
metalliferous ores 699 .. 1 001 2 599 124 418 509 3 016 2 816 3 586 3 217 3 889 744 2 194 2 751 4 068
Metal manufacturing 1 578 .. 1 045 1 788 1 125 1 437 1 805 3 308 758 2 887 2 007 6 081 3 698 6 132 670 3 518
Manufacture of metal
goods not elsewhere
specified 1 196 .. 153 254 1 386 1 420 469 871 336 455 457 741 5 659 6 002 1 147 1 187
Machinery and equipment 3 720 .. 2 843 3 515 1 114 1 422 1 578 2 514 2 623 2 934 4 028 4 602 2 998 5 520 2 955 5 848
Mechanical engineering 3 720 .. 2 843 3 515 1 114 1 422 1 566 2 502 2 623 2 934 4 028 4 602 2 998 5 508 2 955 5 848
Coke ovens - .. - - - - 12 12 - - - - - 12 - -
Office machinery and data
processing equipment 1 860 .. 2 446 2 802 851 1 001 156 635 538 805 623 826 1 425 2 328 940 1 613
Electrical and electronic
engineering 11 094 .. 7 076 8 619 4 970 7 302 7 153 9 872 3 979 6 110 5 782 9 407 4 929 11 595 6 137 10 186
Instrument engineering 630 .. 1 061 1 140 734 1 074 449 506 324 347 1 619 1 749 1 322 1 472 1 707 1 859
Motor vehicles and
other transport
equipment 4773 .. 2416 12993 1778 2790 3135 4879 785 2610 2994 6972 2349 7810 5732 13058
Manufacture of motor
vehicles and parts
thereof 4 084 .. 1 544 11 069 527 1 050 2 459 3 771 258 1 512 2 291 4 238 2 016 6 506 3 952 10 998
Manufacture of other
transport equipment 689 .. 872 1 924 1 251 1 740 676 1 108 527 1 098 703 2 734 333 1 304 1 780 2 060
Other manufacturing
industries 819 .. 356 360 49 64 810 840 221 232 882 911 90 139 109 215
Tertiary sector 44 743 .. 52 159 65 561 17 620 35 273 29 199 54 486 28 504 74 279 38 927 77 615 68 871 109 305 96 564 155 075
Electricity and water
distribution 739 .. 1 132 1 639 - 350 3 727 8 848 2 487 10 320 2 342 10 541 13 108 17 490 14 211 25 419
Production and distribution
of electricity, gas and
other forms of energy 384 .. 949 1 336 - 212 3 726 8 823 2 452 9 482 2 342 10 506 11 760 16 039 13 904 24 203
Water supply industry 355 .. 183 303 - 138 1 25 35 838 - 35 1 348 1 451 307 1 216
/...
363
Annex
(Annex table B.9, cont'd)
364
1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996
Sector/industry Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total Majority Total
Construction 757 .. 164 409 186 503 259 4 720 155 1 122 511 2 854 662 2 084 1 713 7 189
Wholesale distribution
(except dealing in scrap
and waste materials) 3 191 .. 3 015 3 594 1 395 1 675 1 791 1 895 1 587 2 260 4 433 5 335 4 469 4 996 6 324 6 563
Retail distribution 1 956 .. 4 116 4 706 1 334 1 729 2 389 2 666 2 809 3 052 3 422 4 036 1 195 1 948 6 972 8 638
Hotels and catering 5 608 .. 4 273 4 624 617 1 223 1 195 2 910 1 923 2 999 2 519 3 811 4 515 5 228 3 463 4 401
Transport and storage 1 060 .. 2 747 3 869 1 481 2 332 972 4 317 1 426 4 146 2 194 7 888 1 185 4 571 3 265 10 540
Railways - .. 35 35 - - - - - 716 25 45 - - - 700
Sea transport 774 .. 1 281 1 304 56 242 74 222 715 739 288 289 281 511 43 693
World Investment Report 1997: T
Air transport 48 .. 21 562 243 435 2 1 748 78 406 178 416 8 346 494 1 937
Other inland transport 11 .. 54 63 123 142 101 101 12 24 227 3 994 269 719 1 916 4 664
Supporting services
to transport - .. 123 364 174 298 113 1 113 41 1 563 180 1 323 334 961 199 1 150
Miscellaneous
transport services
Transnational
/...
(Annex table B.9, cont'd)
365
Annex
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Albania 24 10 1 - 1 1 5 6
Algeria 12 5 - - - 1 5 1
Antigua and 1 1 - - - - - -
Barbuda
Argentina 44 13 1 - 3 9 10 8
Armenia 16 4 1 - - - 7 4
Australia 15 - - - - - 10 5
Austria 26 - - - 1 1 12 12
Azerbaijan 7 2 - - - - 2 3
Bahrain 1 1 - - - - - -
Bangladesh 13 6 1 - - 5 - 1
Barbados 7 4 - - 1 2 - -
Belarus 19 8 1 - - 1 4 5
Belgium and 40 - - - - 1 28 11
Luxembourg
Belize 1 1 - - - - - -
Benin 3 3 - - - - - -
Bolivia 18 10 - - - 5 2 1
Bosnia and 3 - - - - 1 2 -
Herzegovina
Brazil 11 8 - - - 2 1 -
Bulgaria 37 14 1 - 1 3 7 11
Burkina Faso 3 2 - - - 1 - -
Burundi 3 3 - - - - - -
Cambodia 3 1 - - - 2 - -
Cameroon 7 5 1 - - - - 1
Canada 17 - - - 1 - 9 7
Cape Verde 5 5 - - - - - -
Central African 3 3 - - - - - -
Republic
Chad 4 4 - - - - - -
Chile 36 13 - - 1 13 5 4
China 80 16 - 1 3 21 18 21
Colombia 4 2 - - - 2 - -
Congo 6 5 1 - - - - -
Costa Rica 5 4 - - - 1 - -
Côte d’Ivoire 7 7 - - - - - -
Croatia 17 3 1 - - 2 5 6
Cuba 19 6 - - 1 6 3 3
Cyprus 7 2 - - - - - 5
Czechoslovakiaa 21 14 1 - 2 - 4 -
Czech Republic 30 2 - - 1 2 12 13
Denmark 38 - - - 1 - 23 14
Dominica 2 2 - - - - - -
Dominican 2 2 - - - - - -
Republic
Ecuador 17 5 1 1 6 2 2
Egypt 43 12 1 1 1 5 13 10
El Salvador 6 3 - - - 3 - -
/...
366
Annex
Equatorial 1 1 - - - - - -
Guinea
Eritrea 1 1 - - - - - -
Estonia 19 11 1 - 1 - 1 5
Ethiopia 3 2 - - - - 1 -
Finland 30 - - - - - 15 15
France 74 - - - 2 2 52 18
Gabon 7 5 - - - 1 - 1
Gambia 1 1 - - - - - -
Georgia 16 4 1 - 1 - 3 7
Germany 111 2 - - 2 4 84 19
Ghana 9 5 - - - - 2 2
Greece 22 1 - - - - 9 12
Grenada 2 1 1 - - - - -
Guatemala 1 - - - - 1 - -
Guinea 6 3 - - - 1 2 -
Guinea-Bissau 1 1 - - - - - -
Guyana 2 2 - - - - - -
Haiti 4 3 1 - - - - -
Honduras 6 4 1 - - 1 - -
Hong Kong 11 9 - - 2 - - -
Hungary 43 15 - - 3 - 15 10
Iceland 1 - - - - - 1 -
India 14 5 - - 1 2 - 6
Indonesia 35 13 - - 1 9 4 8
Iran 15 1 - - - 4 1 9
(Islamic
Republic of)
Iraq 2 - - - - 1 1 -
Israel 17 2 - - - 3 1 11
Italy 53 - - - - 2 39 12
Jamaica 9 6 1 - - 1 1 -
Japan 4 - - - - 3 1 -
Jordan 13 5 - - - 4 3 1
Kazakhstan 24 7 1 - 1 - 8 7
Kenya 2 2 - - - - - -
Kuwait 22 5 - - - 5 5 7
Kyrgyzstan 12 2 1 - - - 6 3
Lao People’s 14 5 - - 1 7 - 1
Democratic
Republic
Latvia 25 14 1 - 2 - 3 5
Lebanon 6 1 - - - 1 1 3
Lesotho 2 2 - - - - - -
Liberia 4 4 - - - - - -
Libyan Arab 4 - - - - 3 1 -
Jamahiriya
Lithuania 28 13 1 - 1 - 6 7
Madagascar 5 5 - - - - - -
Malawi 2 1 - - - - 1 -
Malaysia 40 13 - - - 11 8 8
/...
367
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Mali 4 2 - - - 2 - -
Malta 10 7 - - - - 2 1
Mauritania 5 3 - - - 1 - 1
Mauritius 4 3 - - - - 1 -
Mexico 3 2 - - - 1 - -
Mongolia 19 7 1 - - 5 - 6
Morocco 28 13 1 - - 4 5 5
Namibia 2 2 - - - - - -
Nepal 3 3 - - - - - -
Netherlands 58 - - - 1 3 40 14
New Zealand 2 - - - - 2 - -
Nicaragua 7 4 1 - - 1 1 -
Niger 3 2 - - - 1 - -
Nigeria 3 3 - - - - - -
Norway 15 - - - - - 7 8
Oman 9 6 - - - 1 2 -
Pakistan 20 7 7 1 5
Panama 8 4 1 - 1 2 - -
Papua New 4 2 - - 1 1 - -
Guinea
Paraguay 17 9 - - - 4 2 2
Peru 25 12 - - 1 6 4 2
Philippines 16 6 - - 2 5 1 2
Poland 58 16 1 - 3 4 19 15
Portugal 22 1 - - - 1 12 8
Qatar 5 2 - - - - 2 1
Republic of Korea 49 14 - - 1 13 10 11
Republic of
Moldova 16 5 1 - - - 4 6
Romania 82 20 1 - 3 3 40 15
Russian
Federation 21 5 1 - - 1 7 7
Rwanda 3 3 - - - - - -
Saint Lucia 2 2 - - - - - -
Saint Vincent and 1 1 - - - - - -
the Grenadines
Saudi Arabia 4 2 - - - 1 1 -
Senegal 11 6 1 - - 1 2 1
Sierra Leone 2 2 - - - - - -
Singapore 15 6 - - - 7 - 2
Slovakia 15 1 - - - 3 1 10
Slovenia 11 5 - - - 1 1 4
Somalia 1 1 - - - - - -
South Africa 10 7 - - 1 - 2 -
Spain 37 - - - - - 28 9
Sri Lanka 21 11 1 1 - 6 1 1
Sudan 6 4 - - - 1 - 1
Suriname l - - - - - - 1 -
Swaziland 2 2 - - - - - -
Sweden 35 - - - - 2 22 11
Switzerland 81 - - - 1 4 61 15
/...
368
Annex
Syrian Arab 4 3 - - - 1 - -
Republic
Taiwan Province 5 - - - - 2 2 1
of China
Tajikistan 11 - 1 - - - 8 2
Tanzania 4 4 - - - - - -
Thailand 20 5 - - - 9 1 5
The former 7 2 - - - 3 1 1
Yugoslav Republic
of Macedonia
Togo 3 2 - - - 1 - -
Trinidad and
Tobago 4 2 1 - 1 - - -
Tunisia 38 13 1 - - 10 10 4
Turkey 42 10 1 1 1 7 4 18
Turkmenistan 14 2 - - 1 6 1 4
Uganda 4 3 - - - 1 - -
Ukraine 38 12 1 - 1 - 13 11
United Arab 14 4 - - - 3 3 4
Emirates
United Kingdom 87 - - - 1 2 63 21
United States 39 - - - - - 21 18
Uruguay 13 8 - - 1 - 1 3
USSRb 15 11 - - 1 - 3 -
Uzbekistan 23 7 1 - - - 6 9
Venezuela 20 9 - - 1 8 - 2
Viet Nam 32 10 - - 1 8 2 11
Yemen 8 5 - - - 2 1 -
Yugoslavia 16 5 - - - 1 4 6
Zaire 7 5 1 - - - 1 -
Zambia 3 2 - - - - 1 -
Zimbabwe 7 5 - - - - 2 -
369
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
Venture capital investing typically involves the participation of a venture capital institution
in the investee company. This is motivated both by the need to protect the venture capital institution’s
investment against downside risks, particularly because investors cannot simply sell out their
investments (in unlisted shares) if performance is poor, and by the aim of adding value to the investee
company. The latter is accomplished by contributing the venture capital firm’s experience and
contacts to such areas as business strategy, management organization and processes, financial
planning and control, and investor relations. In this respect, venture capital investment is very similar
to FDI, with the difference, however, that venture capital investors have a predetermined objective,
as well as (often) a time horizon, for divestment from the venture.
The venture capital industry has increasingly distinguished between the financing needs of
companies at different stages of corporate development. These can be categorized as follows: early-
stage financing; later-stage financing; and special situations.
Venture capital, in its original concept, is intended to meet the needs of new ventures for
seed capital and start-up financing. Seed capital is funding for the research and development of
new products or production technologies before the setting up of commercial scale production. The
amount of funds for this phase is generally very limited, but the investment lead-time is long, the
risk (probability) of failure is very large, and later financing requirements, both for production and
marketing, may be considerable. Start-up financing is funding for the setting-up of a new business,
and involves investment in fixed assets and working capital, for which the entrepreneur does not
have sufficient resources.
Some characteristic types of development capital include expansion finance and replacement
financing. Expansion finance provides working capital or fixed assets needed by unlisted companies
to grow through entering new markets, developing new products or introducing improved
technological processes. Replacement financing is funding for entrepreneurs to purchase shares of
their associates in the venture who wish to realize all or part of their investment without a stock
market listing.
370
Annex
Venture capital has also been directed to financing certain special needs of mature companies,
often parts of large corporations, that can yield attractive returns. These include management buy-
outs and management buy-ins, which involve the financing of acquisition of ownership and control
from an existing business by a new management team, either from within or from outside the
company. Turnaround financing is also included in this category. This type of financing is provided
by some venture capital institutions to assist companies that have a poor record of performance but
which are basically sound and have clear opportunities for improvement.
The final and critical phase of the venture capital investment cycle is to manage the divestment
or exit from the investee firm. Since realising a substantial capital gain is essential to achieve high
investment returns, determining and achieving the timing and conditions of the sale of investments
are key elements of the venture capital process. There are three basic exit routes:
• Flotation of the investee company through an initial public offering of shares to the public,
either through a stock exchange or in the over-the-counter market.
• Secondary or “trade sale” of the venture capital investor’s shares to another investor or
company. This is probably the most commonly used route, although in larger, developed
countries the transaction is often initiated by the acquiring investor who has identified the
investee company as having a good strategic fit with its own operations.
• Repurchase of the venture capital institution’s shares by the entrepreneur or the investee
firm. The original contractual agreements between the investors may provide for this
possibility, and define the conditions for the buy back of shares.
The successes and failures of venture-capital funds to date point to some important lessons
for the wider use of this type of financing mechanism in the future. The key lessons are the following:
• Venture capital funds need to be able to identify a substantial number of firms offering
high returns on investment (at least 25 per cent). The market for equity financing depends
on several conditions, including positive macroeconomic conditions to stimulate investment
in the setting up or expansion of new ventures and the existence of entrepreneurs with
adequate management skills, business experience and understanding of the “equity
culture” necessary for a partnership between promoter and outside investors. The latter
means a willingness to provide financial information, to respect the contractual rights of
all shareholders, and to allow some degree of external control over the business.
• The regulatory framework in the recipient country should provide investors with an
attractive tax regime, allowing a substantial proportion of the appreciation in value of the
investee firms to be transferred to investors, and legal transparency and freedom from
exchange-control restrictions.
• The limited choice of “exit” options for divesting investments makes it difficult in many
developing countries to realize the substantial capital gains needed to achieve high returns.
Experience indicates that, where local stock markets are inactive (annual turnover of less
than $3 billion), stock prices are low (valued at less than 10 times their earnings per share),
or are hindered by regulatory constraints, capital gains tend to be lower than in countries
with an active and liquid capital market. While there has been a rapid development of
stock markets in developing countries in recent years, it takes time before young stock
exchanges have the depth and liquidity to absorb the flotation of new ventures. However,
the flow of venture capital funding into Central and Eastern Europe shows that international
investors have been prepared to invest in new ventures there in anticipation of the evolution
of local stock markets into viable exit mechanisms.
371
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
• The quality of management is critical for the success of venture capital institutions. Venture
capital managers play a key role in identifying and evaluating investment propositions,
structuring and negotiating deals and managing and divesting the portfolio of equity
holdings.
Venture capital funds are a form of private equity placements that do not necessarily require
the existence of a stock exchange as an exit mechanism. As such, venture capital funds can channel
risk capital to lower income countries provided that the ventures have a sufficiently high growth
potential.
In order to meet redemption requests, open-end funds can be forced to sell a portion of the
portfolio of securities in which they have invested quickly. This can create downward pressure on
securities prices in the market in which such sales take place and thereby contribute to equity price
volatility in that market for purely external reasons. Open-end funds will therefore tend to invest
more heavily in larger companies for which there would exist a relatively liquid market, and in
more mature equity markets which can provide adequate liquidity.
Closed-end funds are not required to meet redemption requests (investors in these funds
must find a buyer for the shares in the secondary market), and do not therefore need to be able to
liquidate their investments upon short notice. Consequently, closed-end country funds can be
expected to take a longer-term view, and they are able to invest in less liquid instruments and in less
developed equity markets. They are also less likely to contribute to market volatility which can
result from the large, sudden sales of securities which can occur with open-end funds. This explains
the higher turnover ratios of open-end as opposed to closed-end funds, and why closed-end funds
are, in general, more suited to investments in less developed (and therefore less liquid) equity markets.
However, closed-end funds will, of course, actively adjust their portfolio of investments in such a
way as to optimize the overall return on their portfolio in accordance with the fund’s stated investment
objectives (the fund may seek income growth, capital appreciation or balanced growth, and some
will pursue higher returns more aggressively than others). There is, therefore, no guarantee that
they will never contribute to security price volatility in the equity markets where they invest.
Emerging market country funds are most often closed-end funds, while regional and global emerging
market funds are often open-end funds.
372
Annex
United States Investment Act was enacted. With the recent burgeoning in the number and total net
assets of open-end funds in the United States, the trust form has become increasingly common.
Investment funds can be private or public. Public funds, which include most closed-end
funds, are listed on one or more stock exchange (most often the exchanges in New York, London,
Hong Kong or Ireland), while private funds are not listed and are not available to the general public.
It can be advantageous for the fund to be publicly listed because some institutional investors are
prohibited by home country prudential regulations from investing in unlisted companies. Closed-
end funds can also be either diversified or non-diversified under the United States regulatory
framework. Diversified funds face limits on the percentage of total assets which can be invested in
a single security, whereas undiversified funds face no such restriction. This does not, however,
preclude the undiversified fund from adopting such limits on a voluntary basis for prudential reasons.
An undiversified fund will, nevertheless, tend to be relatively more risky because of the potentially
higher degree of concentration in its investment portfolio.
From the investor’s point of view, one disadvantage of closed-end funds is that their prices
often do not reflect the value of the underlying portfolio of securities in which the fund invests. This
is partly because their investment portfolio may concentrate relatively heavily in less liquid
instruments in which trading activity is light. The price at which these securities are valued may
not, therefore, reflect accurately the true value that would be realized should the securities be
liquidated. A common finding is that country fund returns are somewhat correlated with returns on
the market in which they are listed, and are less than perfectly correlated with the returns of their
underlying assets.1 This diminishes diversification benefits.
From the perspective of the emerging markets, the fact that prices of shares of closed-end
funds can vary independently of the prices of their underlying assets is an advantage. This offers an
insulating property when the local market in which the fund is invested is illiquid. Country funds
can also provide indirect benefits to emerging markets by applying pressure for improvement of
disclosure and accounting standards, as well as greater transparency. They can also lend pressure
for the upgrading of services, such as clearance, settlement and depository systems. In addition,
they can spur the growth of local credit-rating agencies. Many institutional investors are limited to
investing in high-quality securities and press for growth of local credit-rating agencies as well. Apart
from this, more direct benefits can be reaped through the provision of training services by investment
funds that are often willing to participate in local training programmes.
It does not appear that a country’s stage of development plays a role in determining where
country funds are established. However, emerging markets at an early stage of their development
generally allow foreign investment through closed-end funds, which are more suitable for less liquid
markets. American depositary receipts (ADRs) and global depositary receipts (GDRs) (discussed
below), as well convertible bonds and bonds with equity warrants, are more sophisticated forms of
investment and appear to be accessible only to a small number of well known companies in the
more advanced emerging markets.
373
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
demands in different markets. One such variation is the GDR which are identical in structure to an
ADR, the only difference being that they can be traded in more than one currency and within as well
as outside the United States.
• Unsponsored ADRs are issued without any formal agreement between the issuing company
and the depositary, although the issuing company must consent to the creation of the
ADR facility. With unsponsored ADRs, certain costs, including those associated with
disbursement of dividends, are borne by the investor. For the issuing company, they provide
a relatively inexpensive method of accessing the United States capital markets (especially
because they are also exempt from most reporting requirements of the Securities and
Exchange Commission).
• Sponsored ADRs are created by a single depositary which is appointed by the issuing
company under rules provided in a deposit agreement. There are two broad types of
sponsored ADRs -- those that are restricted with respect to the type of buyer which is
allowed, and are therefore privately placed; and those that are unrestricted with respect to
buyer and are publicly placed and traded. Restricted ADRs (RADRs) are allowed to be
placed only among selected accredited investors and face restrictions on their resale. As
these are not issued to the general public, they are exempt from reporting requirements of
the Securities and Exchange Commission and are not even registered with it. Restricted
ADR issues are sometimes issued by companies that seek to gain some visibility and perhaps
experience in the United States capital markets before making an unrestricted issue.
• Unrestricted ADRs (URADRs) are issued to and traded by the general investing public in
United States capital markets. There are three classes of URADR, each increasingly
demanding in terms of reporting requirements to the Securities and Exchange Commission,
but also increasingly attractive in terms of degree of visibility provided. Level I URADRs
are exempt from the requirement that the issuing company conform their financial statistics
to United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP), as well as from full
reporting requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission. They are also therefore
relatively low cost. Level II URADRs are generally issued by companies that wish to be
listed on one of the United States national exchanges. The issuing company must meet
the Securities and Exchange Commission's full disclosure requirements, their financial
statements must conform to United States GAAP and the company must meet the listing
requirements of the relevant exchange. They are therefore more costly for the issuing
company, but the public listing allows much higher visibility and makes the facility more
attractive to potential investors. Level III URADRs are issued by companies which seek to
raise capital in the United States securities markets by making a public offering of their
securities. They must also make full Securities and Exchange Commission disclosure,
conform to United States GAAP and meet relevant exchange requirements, and provide
the highest degree of visibility of any ADR.
Companies that apply for either listing or public issue of securities on the national exchanges
of the United States must meet exchange requirements. These include specific minimum requirements
with respect to the size of total assets, earnings and/or shareholders equity. These requirements,
along with the reporting requirements, serve to make it difficult for small capitalization companies
of emerging markets to issue either Level II or Level III URADRs. A large number of ADRs are
therefore offered through private placement, especially under Rule 144A, where activity is reported
to be strong. Rule 144A, passed by the Securities and Exchange Commission in 1990, eased restrictions
on the resale by qualified institutional buyers of private ADR issues amongst themselves once these
374
Annex
issues were made under this rule. Typical ADR issues appear to be relatively large. Emerging
market ADR issuers tend to be large domestic companies with considerable financial resources and
high international visibility. Relatively small ADR issues appear to measure in the range of between
$15 million and $80 million, while many mid-sized issues fall within the range of $100 million to
$300 million. Several exceptionally large issues have exceeded $1 billion in size.
From the investor’s point of view, ADRs lower the cost of trading non-United States
companies’ securities. Trades are settled in the United States within five working days (or less,
given the increasingly heavy volume of trading in ADRs), whereas trades overseas can take a much
longer time and raise significantly settlement risk. The depositary provides both settlement and
clearance services. As the facilities are traded in the United States, there is a much lower information
search cost, and the problems of unfamiliarity with foreign markets and foreign laws, regulations
and trading practices are overcome. The difficulties associated with locating a broker and/or
custodian in the foreign market and the fees charged for these services are also avoided, and so are
the obstacles that foreign languages may present. A major advantage of ADRs for the investor is
that dividends are paid promptly and in United States dollars. Furthermore, the facilities are registered
in the United States so that some assurance is provided to the investor with respect to the protection
of ownership rights. These instruments also obviate the need to transport physically securities
between markets. Communication services are also provided by the depositary, including provision
of periodic reports on the issuing company (in English) in a format familiar to United States investors.
Important information pertinent to the issuing company is transmitted to the investor by the
depositary. Together, these advantages provide an incentive for investors in the United States capital
markets to invest in the equity of emerging markets via ADRs.
For the issuing company, the main costs of ADRs are the cost of meeting the partial or full
reporting requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the exchange fees (for
relevant classes of ADRs). However, ADRs can be useful means for issuing companies of gaining
access to United States capital markets. Thus, institutional investors that are precluded by their
charter from holding foreign securities are able to invest in such securities via ADRs. They can also
allow foreign investors to avoid constraints that may be placed on such investments in cases where
emerging markets still maintain limits on direct investment by foreigners. In general, ADRs increase
access to United States capital markets by lowering the costs of investing in the securities of non-
United States companies and by providing the benefits of a convenient, familiar and well regulated
trading environment. Issues of ADRs can increase the liquidity of an emerging market issuer’s
shares, and can potentially lower the future cost of raising equity capital by raising the company’s
visibility and international familiarity with the company’s name, and by increasing the size of the
potential investor base.
375
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition
Policy
companies involved in the minerals, oil, banking and utilities industries that can be expected to be
able to attract foreign financing. The growth in the number of issues from transition economies
between 1992 and 1996, however, is quite noticeable (especially from Russia and Hungary).2
One disadvantage of depositary-receipt issues for the foreign markets in which the issuing
company is incorporated is the disincentive to the development of a local capital market. Companies
in emerging markets may issue ADRs because the underlying share issues may represent a relatively
large volume of weekly or monthly trading activity and the domestic stock market may be considered
too small to absorb the issues. While individual companies may be able to attract additional financing,
at the macroeconomic level, an increasing trend towards emerging market issue of ADRs can retard
the development of domestic capital markets by denying domestic markets additional instruments
in which to invest.
An equity warrant is a security which gives the holder the right to buy (in return for cash) a
specified number of shares directly from the issuing company at a specified fixed price for a given
period of time, which is known as the exercise period. The warrant can usually, but not always, be
detached from the bond and sold as a separate security. This is not the case with convertible bonds,
and represents one important difference between the two. Warrants are also sometimes issued by
themselves as separate securities.
With bonds attaching equity warrants, the bond holder can utilize the exercise period to
determine whether to exercise the warrant or not. The bond holder will exercise the warrant if the
price of the shares exceeds the exercise price of the warrant, in which case they make a net gain. This
will happen when the company’s share price rises (that is, if the company prospers). Likewise, with
convertible bonds, the holder will exercise the right to convert the bond into stock if the value of the
shares for which the bond could be exchanged exceeds the value of the bond.
Finance theory has not yet developed any generally accepted explanations for why convertible
debt instruments are issued, although several suggestions have been offered. Convertible bonds do
not represent a relatively inexpensive form of debt. Any difference between rates of interest demanded
by investors in straight bonds and convertible bonds actually represents the value of the conversion
option. Also, viewing convertible debt as a form of future equity financing is not valid, because
conversion into equity is not guaranteed. There have been issues of convertible bonds with mandatory
conversion provisions, but this is not the norm.
The issuance of convertible debt securities has tended to be concentrated among relatively
small, high growth and heavily leveraged companies (Mikkelson, 1981) which are therefore relatively
risky. Investors might be positively disposed towards investing in convertible bonds because, if the
market value of the company rises quickly, it will be possible to share in this growth by exercising
376
Annex
the conversion right. However, if growth is not very high, the investor can retain the bond, which
will provide a stable, relatively safe income flow and provide a floor on the potential future value of
the security. Additionally, as the interest payments on convertible bonds and bonds with equity
warrants are lower than on straight bonds (because of the value of the right to convert and the value
of the warrant, respectively), the company will be able to apply a larger amount of financing towards
expansion of the company or towards general operating expenses. The special rights included in
these securities are therefore sometimes regarded as “sweeteners” for growth companies to attract
financing. There have also been explanations offered to explain the issue of convertible bonds
invoking the argument that, by incorporating an equity-type component, they help overcome the
divergent wishes of bond holders and equity holders with regard to the desirable risk profile of
projects undertaken by the company (so-called agency costs).
The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development records only fifteen emerging
markets as having floated equity-related bonds in the international markets (OECD, 1996e). This
may indicate that access to these markets by emerging-market countries has so far been limited to
those that are creditworthy or large with a relatively high visibility among foreign investors. Due to
scarcity of information, however, it is not possible at this time to provide details on the characteristics
of individual industries or companies in emerging markets that have participated in the market for
these instruments.
Notes
1 While the number and net asset value of closed-end funds investing in emerging markets has grown
rapidly in the past five years, many of these funds trade at large price discounts from their net asset
value. Portfolios of funds with large discounts subsequently generate excess risk-adjusted returns and
abnormal profits can be earned by “raiders” who can buy out the funds and liquidate at the “right”
value.
2 A listing of 1,000 ADR issues as of end-1992 is provided by Duggan, 1995. An updated list was obtained
from the Bank of New York.
377
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
Selected UNCT
UNCTADAD publications on
Transnational Corporations and Foreign Direct Investment
A. Individual studies
International Investment: T Towards ear 2001. 81 p. Sales No. GV.E.97.0.5. $35. (Joint publication with
Year
owards the Y
Invest in France Mission and Arthur Andersen, in collaboration with DATAR.)
Transnational Corporations and W orld Development. 656 pp. ISBN 0-415-08560-8 (hardback), 0-415-08561-6
World
(paperback). £65 (hardback), £20.99 (paperback).
Companies without Borders: Transnational Corporations in the 1990s. 224 pp. ISBN 0-415-12526-X. £47.50.
Transnational
The New Globalism and Developing Countries. 336 pp. ISBN 92-808-0944-X. $25.
World Investment Report 1996: Investment, Trade and International Policy Arrangements. 332 p. Sales No.
Trade
E.96.II.A.14. $45.
World Investment Report 1996: Investment, Trade and International Policy Arrangements. An Overview. 51 p.
Trade
Free-of-charge.
International Investment Instruments: A Compendium. Sales No. E.96.IIA.12 (the set). $125.
World Investment Report 1995: Transnational Corporations and Competitiveness. 491 p. Sales No. E.95.II.A.9.
Transnational
$45.
World Investment Report 1995: Transnational Corporations and Competitiveness. An Overview. 51 p. Free-of-
Transnational
charge.
Small and Medium-sized Transnational Corporations: Executive Summary and Report on the Osaka Confer
Transnational ence. p.
Conference
60. UNCTAD/DTCI/6. Free-of-charge.
Liberalizing International Transactions in Services: A Handbook. 182 p. Sales No. E.94.II.A.11. $45. (Joint publica-
Transactions
tion with the World Bank.)
Environmental Management in T
Environmental ransnational Corporations: Report on the Benchmark Corporate Envir
Transnational onment
Environment
Suvey. 278 p. Sales No. E.94.II.A.2. $29.95.
Management Consulting: A Survey of the Industry and Its Largest Firms. 100 p. Sales No. E.93.II.A.17. $25.
378
Selected UNCT
UNCTADAD publications on
Transnational Corporations and Foreign Direct Investment
Small and Medium-sized Transnational Corporations: Role, Impact and Policy Implications. 242 p. Sales No.
Transnational
E.93.II.A.15. $35.
-
World Investment Report 1993: Transnational Corporations and Integrated International Pr
Transnational oduction. 290 p. Sales
Production
No. E.93.II.A.14. $45.
Transnational Corporations from Developing Countries: Impact on Their Home Countries. 116 p. Sales No.
from
E.93.II.A.8. $15.
From the Common Market to EC 92: Regional Economic Integration in the European Community and
Transnational Corporations. 134 p. Sales No. E.93.II.A.2. $25.
B. Serial publications
Cur
Currrent Studies, Ser ies A
Series
No. 27. The Tradability of Banking Services: Impact and Implications. 195 p. Sales No. E.94.II.A.12. $50.
Tradability
No. 26. Explaining and Forecasting Regional Flows of Foreign Direct Investment. 58 p. Sales No. E.94.II.A.5. $25.
No. 25. International Tradability in Insurance Services. 54 p. Sales No. E.93.II.A.11. $20.
Tradability
No. 24. Intellectual Property Rights and Foreign Direct Investment. 108 p. Sales No. E.93.II.A.10. $20.
No. 23. The T ransnationalization of Service Industries: An Empirical Analysis of the Determinants of For
Transnationalization eign
Foreign
ect Investment by T
Direct
Dir ransnational Service Corporations. 62 p. Sales No. E.93.II.A.3. $15.00.
Transnational
379
World Investment Report 1997: Transnational Corporations, Market Structur
Transnational Structuree and Competition Policy
No. 22. Transnational Banks and the External Indebtedness of Developing Countries: Impact of Regulatory
Changes. 48 p. Sales No. E.92.II.A.10. $12.
No. 20. Foreign Direct Investment, Debt and Home Country Policies. 50 p. Sales No. E.90.II.A.16. $12.
No. 19. New Issues in the Uruguay Round of Multilateral Trade Negotiations. 52 p. Sales No. E.90.II.A.15.
Trade
$12.50.
The United Nations Library on Transnational Corporations. (Published by Routledge on behalf of the United
Transnational
Nations.)
Volume Eight: Transnational Corporations and International Trade and Payments. 320 p.
Trade
Volume Ten: Transnational Corporations and the Exploitation of Natural Resources. 397 p.
Resources
380
Selected UNCT
UNCTADAD publications on
Transnational Corporations and Foreign Direct Investment
United Nations publications may be obtained from bookstores and distributors throughout the
world. Please consult your bookstore or write to:
For further information on the work of UNCTAD Division on Investment, Technology and
Enterprise Development, please address inquiries to:
381
QUESTIONNAIRE
In order to improve the quality and relevance of the work of the UNCTAD Division on
Investment, Technology and Enterprise Development, it would be useful to receive the views of
readers on this and other similar publications. It would therefore be greatly appreciated if you
could complete the following questionnaire and return to:
Readership Survey
UNCTAD Division on Investment, Technology and Enterprise Development
United Nations Office in Geneva
Palais des Nations
Room E-8006
CH-1211 Geneva 10
Switzerland
6. Please indicate the three things you liked best about this publication:
7. Please indicate the three things you liked least about this publication:
8. If you have read more than the present publication of the UNCTAD Division on Investment,
Enterprise Development and Technology, what is your overall assessment of them?
Consistently good Usually good, but with some exceptions
Generally mediocre Poor
9. On the average, how useful are these publications to you in your work?
Very useful Of some use Irrelevant
10. Are you a regular recipient of Transnational Corporations (formerly The CTC Reporter), the
Division’s tri-annual refereed journal?
Yes No